Black plate (1,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 6
Foreword
Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU in
excellent condition and to properly maintain the emission control
system for minimizing emission pollutants. We urge you to read
this manual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and
its operation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual,
such as details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact
the SUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or
the nearest SUBARU dealer.
The information, specifications and il lustrations found in this
manual are those in effect at the time of printing. FUJI HEAVY
INDUSTRIES LTD. reserves the right to change specifications and
designs at any time without prior notice and without incurring any
obligation to make the same or similar changes on vehicles
previously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models and
covers all equipment, including factory installed options. Some
explanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in your
vehicle.
Please leave this manual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The
next owner will need the information found herein.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD., TOKYO, JAPAN
is a registered trademark of FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
*
C
Copyright 2016 FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD.
Black plate (2,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 6
Vehicle types
This manual describes the following vehicle types.
1) 4-door models
2) 5-door models except Crosstrek
3) Crosstrek models
Black plate (3,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Black plate (3,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Warranties
& Warranties for U.S.A.
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru
of America, Inc. and sold at retail by an
authorized SUBARU dealer in the United
States come with the following warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranties
. Federal Emission Control Systems
Warranties
. California Emissions Control Sys-
tems Warranties
All warranty information, including applic-
ability, details of coverage and exclusions,
is in the “Warranty and Ma intenance
Booklet”. Read these warranties carefully.
& Warranties for Canada
SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru
Canada, Inc. and sold at retail by an
authorized SUBARU dealer in Canada
come with the following warranties:
. SUBARU Limited Warranty
. Emission Control System Warranty
All warranty information, including applic-
ability, details of coverage and exclusions,
is in the “Warranty and Service Booklet”.
Read these warranties carefully.
& Warranties except for U.S.A.
and Canada
All warranty information, including details
of coverage and exclusions, is in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Read these warranties carefully.
& Models with HID headlights
CAUTION
High Intensity Discharge (HID) head-
lights contain mercury. For that
reason, it is necessary to remove
HID headlights before vehicle dis-
posal. Once removed, please reuse,
recycle or dispose of the HID head-
lights as hazardous waste.
& Models without HID head-
lights
NOTE
This vehicle does not contain mercury
devices or parts.
How to use this Owner’s
Manual
& Using your Owner’s Manual
Before you operate your vehicle, carefully
read this manual. To protect yourself and
extend the service life of your vehicle,
follow the instructions in this manual.
Failure to observe these instructions may
result in serious injury and damage to your
vehicle.
This manual is composed o f fourteen
chapters. Each chapter begins with a brief
table of contents, so you can usually tell at
a glance if that chapter contains the
information you want.
Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS
airbags
This chapter informs you how to use the
seat and seatbelt and contains precau-
tions for the SRS airbags.
Chapter 2: Keys and doors
This chapter informs you how to operate
the keys, locks and windows.
Chapter 3: Instruments and controls
This chapter informs you about the opera-
tion of instrument panel indicators and
how to use the instruments and other
switches.
– CONTINUED –
1
0
Black plate (4,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Chapter 4: Climate control
This chapter informs you how to operate
the climate control.
Chapter 5: Audio
This chapter informs you how to operate
your audio system.
Chapter 6: Interior equipment
This chapter informs you how to operate
interior equipment.
Chapter 7: Starting and operating
This chapter informs you how to start and
operate your SUBARU.
Chapter 8: Driving tips
This chapter informs you how to drive your
SUBARU in various conditions and ex-
plains some safety tips on driving.
Chapter 9: In case of emergency
This chapter informs you what to do if you
have a problem, such as a flat tire or
engine overheating.
Chapter 10: Appearance care
This chapter informs you how to keep your
SUBARU looking good.
Chapter 11: Maintenance and service
This chapter informs you when you need
to take your SUBARU to the dealer for
scheduled maintenance and informs you
how to keep your SUBARU run ning
properly.
Chapter 12: Specifications
This chapter informs you about dimen-
sions and capacities of your SUBARU.
Chapter 13: Consumer information and
Reporting safety defects
This chapter informs you about Uniform
tire quality grading standards and Report-
ing safety defects.
Chapter 14: Index
This is an alphabetical listing of all that’sin
this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
& Safety warnings
You will find a number of WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.
These safety warnings alert you to poten-
tial hazards that could result in injury to
you or others.
Please read these safety warnings as well
as all other portions of this manual care-
fully in order to gain a better understand-
ing of how to use your SUBARU vehicle
safely.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could
result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which injury o r damage to your
vehicle, or both, could result if the
caution is ignored.
NOTE
A NOTE gives information or sugges-
tions how to make better use of your
vehicle.
& Safety symbol
You will find a circle with a slash through it
in this manual. This symbol means “ Do
not”, “Do not do this”,or“Do not let this
happen”, depending upon the context.
2
Black plate (5,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Abbreviation list
You may find several abbreviations in this
manual. The meanings of the abbrevia-
tions are shown in the following list.
Abbreviation Meaning
A/C Air conditioner
ALR/ELR
Automatic locking retractor/
Emergency locking retractor
ABS Anti-lock brake system
AKI Anti knock index
ALR Automatic locking retractor
AWD All-wheel drive
BSD/RCTA
Blind Spot Detection/Rear
Cross Traffic Alert
CVT
Continuously variable trans-
mission
DRL Daytime running light
EBD
Electronic brake force distri-
bution
ELR Emergency locking retractor
GAW Gross axle weight
GAWR Gross axle weight rating
GPS Global positioning system
GVW Gross vehicle weight
GVWR Gross vehicle weight rating
HID High intensity discharge
Abbreviation Meaning
INT Intermittent
LATCH
Lower anchors and tethers for
children
LED Light emitting diode
MIL Malfunction indicator light
MMT
Methylcyclopentadienyl man-
ganese tricarbonyl
MT Manual transmission
OBD On-board diagnostics
RON Research octane number
SRF
Steering responsive fog lights
system
SRS
Supplemental restraint sys-
tem
TIN Tire identification number
TPMS
Tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem
Vehicle symbols
There are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
For warning and indicator lights, refer to
“Warning and indicator lights” F22.
Mark Name
WARNING
CAUTION
Read these instructions care-
fully
Wear eye protection
Battery fluid contains sulfuric
acid
Keep children away
Keep flames away
Prevent explosions
3
0
Black plate (6,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Safety precautions when
driving
& Seatbelt and SRS airbag
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle should
fasten their seatbelts BEFORE
the vehicle starts to move. Other-
wise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accide nt, the
driver and all passengers must
always wear seatbelts when in
the vehicle . The SRS (Supple-
mental Restraint System) airbag
does not do away with the need
to fasten seatbelts. In combina-
tion with the seatbelts, it offers
the best combined protection in
case of a serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
. The SRS airbags d eploy wit h
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always
sit upright and well back in the
seat as far f rom the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
belts” F1-11.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
“*SRS airbag (Suppl emental Restraint
System airbag)” F1-39.
& Child safety
WARNING
. Never hold a child on your lap or
in your arms while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a
collision, because the child will
be caught between the passen-
ger and objects inside the vehi-
cle.
. While riding in the vehicle, in-
fants and small children should
always be placed in the REAR
seat in an infant or child restraint
system which is appropriate for
the child’s age, height and
weight. If a child is too big for a
child restraint system, the child
should sit in the REAR seat and
be restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. Never allow a child
to stand up or kneel on the seat.
. Place children in the REAR seat
properly restrained at all times in
a child restraint device or in a
seatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable speed and
force and can injure or even kill
children, especially if they are
not restrained or improperly re-
strained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
4
Black plate (7,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
deployment is greater.
. NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
. Always turn the child safety locks
to the “LOCK” position when
children sit in the rear seat.
Serious injury could result if a
child accidentally opens the door
and falls out. Refer to “Ch il d
safety locks” F2-35.
. Always lock the passenger’s win-
dows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
Failure to follow this procedure
could result in injury to a child
operating the power window. Re-
fer to “Windows” F2-35.
. Never leave unattended children,
adults or animals in the vehicle.
They could accidentally injure
themselves or others through
inadvertent operation of the ve-
hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,
temperature in a closed vehicle
could quickly become high en-
ough to cause severe or possibly
fatal injuries to them.
. Help prevent children, adults or
animals from locking themselves
in the trunk. On hot or sunny
days, the temperature in the
trunk could quickly become high
enough to cause death or serious
heat-related injuries including
brain damage to anyone locked
inside, particularly for small chil-
dren.
. When leaving the vehicle, close
all windows and lock all doors.
Also make certain that the trunk
is closed.
For instructions and precautions, carefully
read the following sections.
. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-
belts” F1-11.
. For the child restraint system, refer to
“Child restraint systems” F1-25.
. For the SRS airbag system, refer to
“*SRS airbag (Suppl emental Restraint
System airbag)” F1-39.
& Engine exhaust gas (carbon
monoxide)
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxi de, a c olorless
and odorless gas which is dan-
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en-
gine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from enter-
ing the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoi d remaining in a parked
vehicle for a lengthy time while
the engine is running. If that is
unavoidable, then use the venti-
lation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
exhaust fumes are entering the
– CONTINUED –
5
0
Black plate (8,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the trunk lid or rear gate
closed while driving to prevent
exhaust gas from entering the
vehicle.
& Drinking and driving
WARNING
Drinking and then driving is very
dangerous. Alcohol in the blood-
stream delays your reaction time
and impairs your perception, judg-
ment and attentiveness. If you drive
after drinking – even if you drink just
a little – it will increase the risk of
being involved in a serious or fatal
accident, injuring or killing yourself,
your passengers and others. In
addition, if you are injured in the
accident, alcohol may increase the
severity of that injury.
Please don’t drink and drive.
Drunken dr iving is one of the most
frequent causes of accidents. Since alco-
hol affects all people differently, you may
have consumed too much alcohol to drive
safely even if the level of alcohol in your
blood is below the legal limit. The safest
thing you can do is never drink and drive.
However if you have no choice but to
drive, stop drinking and sober up comple-
tely before getting behind the wheel.
& Drugs and driving
WARNING
There are some drugs (over the
counter and prescription) that can
delay your reaction time and impair
your perception, judgment and at-
tentiveness. If you drive after taking
them, it may increase your, your
passengers’ and other persons’ risk
of being involved in a serious or
fatal accident.
If you are taking any drugs, check with
your doctor or pharmacist or read the
literature that accompanies the medication
to determine if the drug you are taking can
impair your driving ability. Do not drive
after taking any medications that can
make you drowsy or otherwise affect your
ability to safely operate a motor vehicle. If
you have a medical condition that requires
you to take drugs, please consult with
your doctor.
Never drive if you are under the influence
of any illicit mind-altering drugs. For your
own health and well-being, we urge you
not to take illegal drugs in the first place
and to seek treatment if you are addicted
to those drugs.
& Driving when tired or sleepy
WARNING
When you are tired or sleepy, your
reaction time will be delayed and
your perception, judgment and at-
tentiveness will be impaired. If you
drive when tired or sleepy, your,
your passengers’ and other per-
sons’ chances of being involved in
a serious accident may increase.
Please do not continue to drive but
instead find a safe place to rest if you
are tired or sleepy. On long trips, you
should make periodic rest stops to refresh
yourself before continuing on your journey.
When possible, you should share the
driving with others.
6
Black plate (9,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Modification of your vehicle
CAUTION
Your vehicle should not be modified
other than with genuine SUBARU
parts and accessories. Other types
of modifications could affect its
performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or
performance problems resulting
from modification may not be cov-
ered under warranties.
& Car phone/cell phone and
driving
CAUTION
Do not use a car phone/cell phone
while driving; it may distract your
attention from driving and can lead
to an accident. If you use a car
phone/cell phone, pull off the road
and p ark in a safe place before
using your phone. In some States/
Provinces, only hands-free phones
may legally be used while driving.
& Driving vehicles equipped
with navigation system
WARNING
Do not allow the monitor to distract
your attention from driving. Also, do
not operate the controls of the
navigation system while dri ving.
The loss of attention to drivi ng
could lead to an accident. If you
wish to operate the controls of the
navigation system, first take the
vehicle off the road and stop it in a
safe location.
& Driving with pets
Unrestrained pets can interfere with your
driving and distract your attention from
driving. In a collision or sudden stop,
unrestrained pets or cages can be thrown
around inside the vehicle and hurt you or
your passengers. Besides, the pets can
be hurt under these situations. It is also for
their own safety that pets should be
properly restrained in your vehicle. Re-
strain a pet with a special traveling
harness which can be secured to the rear
seat with a seatbelt or use a pet carrier
which can be secured to the rear seat by
routing a seatbelt through the carrier’s
handle. Never restrain pets or pet carriers
in the front passenger’s seat. For further
information, consult your veterinarian,
local animal protectio n society or pet
shop.
& Tire pressures
Check a nd, if necessary, adjust the
pressure of each tire (including the spare)
at least once a month and before any long
journey.
Check the tire pressure when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust the
tire pressures to the values shown on the
tire placard. For detailed information, refer
to “Tires and wheels” F11-21.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to deform severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resul ting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
7
0
Black plate (10,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
General information
& California proposition 65
warning
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its consti-
tuents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids in vehicles and
certain components of product wear
contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
& California Perchlorate Advi-
sory
Certain vehicle components such as air-
bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and
keyless entry transmitter batteries may
contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
& Noise from under the vehicle
NOTE
You may hear a noise from under the
vehicle approximately 5 to 10 hours
after the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position. However, this
does not indicate a malfunction. This
noise is caused by the operation of the
fuel evaporation leakage checking sys-
tem and the operation is normal. The
noise will stop after approximately 15
minutes.
& Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of
an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle,
data that will assist in understanding how
a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR
is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for
a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
. How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
. Whether or not the driver and passen-
ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
. How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and,
. How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle
only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;
no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash
location) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely ac-
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition
to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the informa-
tion if they have access to the vehicle or
the EDR.
8
Black plate (1,1)
Table of contents
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1
Keys and doors
2
Instruments and controls
Climate control
4
Audio
5
Interior equipment
6
Starting and operating
7
Driving tips
8
In case of emergency
9
Appearance care
10
Maintenance and service
11
Specifications
12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
13
Index
14
3
北米Model "A1250BE-B" Edited: 2016/ 1/ 5
Black plate (12,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Illustrated index
& Exterior
1) Engine hood (page 11-5)
2) Wiper (page 3-97)
3) Headlight (page 3-89)
4) Replacing bulbs (page 11-36)
5) Moonroof (page 2-42)
6) Roof rails (page 8-14)
7) Outside mirror (page 3-108)
8) Door locks (page 2-5)
9) Tire pressure (page 11-23)
10) Flat tires (page 9-6)
11) Snow tires (page 8-10)
12) Fog light (page 3-94)
13) Tie-down hooks (page 9-14)
14) Towing hook (page 9-14)
10
Black plate (14,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Interior
! Passenger compartment area
1) Lower anchorages for child restraint
system (page 1-33)
2) Seatbelt (page 1-11)
3) Front seat (page 1-2)
4) Rear seat (page 1-7)
5) Buttons for SUBARU STARLINK
NOTE
For U.S.-spec. models with SUBARU
STARLINK: Refer to the Owner’s Man-
ual supplement for SUBARU
STARLINK.
12
Black plate (15,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
1) Power windows (page 2-35)
2) Door locks (page 2-5)
3) Outside mirror switch (page 3-108)
4) Glove box (page 6-6)
5) Front power supply socket (page 6-8)
6) Shift lever (MT) (page 7-22)/Select lever
(CVT) (page 7-23)
7) Parking brake lever (page 7-40)
8) Cup holder (page 6-7)
9) Center console (page 6-6)
– CONTINUED –
13
0
Black plate (16,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Instrument panel
1) Illumination brightness control
(page 3-93)
2) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
(page 7-36)
3) Combination meter (page 3-9)
4) Information display (page 3-32)/Multi
function display (page 3-42)
5) Hazard warning flasher switch (models
with multi function display) (page 3-8)
6) Hazard warning flasher switch (models
without multi function display) (page 3-8)
7) Multi function display control switches
(page 3-42)
8) Audio (page 5-1)
9) Climate control (page 4-1)
10) Tilt/telescopic steering (page 3-110)
11) Fuse box (page 11-35)
12) Hood lock release knob (page 11-5)
13) BSD/RCTA OFF switch (page 7-50)
14) Steering responsive f og lights OFF
switch (page 3-95)
NOTE
For models with the EyeSight system:
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for the EyeSight system.
14
Black plate (17,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Steering wheel
! Except Crosstrek models
1) Audio control switches (page 5-63)/
Talk switch for voice command system
(page 5-82)/Hands-free phone switches
(page 5-73)
2) Cruise control (page 7-45)
3) Shift paddle (page 7-26)
4) Multi information display control switches
(page 3-38)
5) SRS airbag (page 1-39)
6) Horn (page 3-111)
– CONTINUED –
15
0
Black plate (18,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Crosstrek models
1) Audio control switches (page 5-63)/
Talk switch for voice command system
(page 5-82)/Hands-free phone switches
(page 5-73)
2) Cruise control (page 7-45)
3) Shift paddle (page 7-26)
4) Multi information display control switches
(page 3-38)
5) SRS airbag (page 1-39)
6) Horn (page 3-111)
16
Black plate (19,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Light control and wiper control levers/switches
1) Windshield wiper (page 3-96)
2) Mist (page 3-97)
3) Windshield washer (page 3-98)
4) Rear window wiper and washer switch
(page 3-99)
5) Wiper intermittent time control switch
(page 3-98)
6) Wiper control lever (page 3-97)
7) Light control switch (page 3-89)
8) Fog light switch (page 3-94)
9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 3-89)
10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam
change (page 3-91)
11) Turn signal lever (page 3-92)
– CONTINUED –
17
0
Black plate (20,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Combination meter
! U.S.-spec. models (type A)
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter
may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.
1) Tachometer (page 3-11)
2) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-10)
3) Select lever/gear position indicator
(page 3-30)
4) Speedometer (page 3-10)
5) Information display selection knob
(page 3-32)
6) ECO gauge (page 3-12)
7) Fuel gauge (page 3-12)
8) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-11)
18
Black plate (21,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! U.S.-spec. models (type B)
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter
may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.
1) Tachometer (page 3-11)
2) Multi information display (page 3-38)
3) Fuel gauge (page 3-12)
4) Select lever/gear position indicator
(page 3-30)
5) Speedometer (page 3-10)
6) Information display selection knob
(page 3-32)
7) ECO gauge (page 3-12)
8) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-10)
9) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-11)
– CONTINUED –
19
0
Black plate (22,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Except U.S.-spec. models (type A)
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter
may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.
1) Tachometer (page 3-11)
2) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-10)
3) Select lever/gear position indicator
(page 3-30)
4) Speedometer (page 3-10)
5) Information display selection knob
(page 3-32)
6) ECO gauge (page 3-12)
7) Fuel gauge (page 3-12)
8) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-11)
20
Black plate (23,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Except U.S.-spec. models (type B)
The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter
may be slightly different than that shown in the illustration.
1) Tachometer (page 3-11)
2) Multi information display (page 3-38)
3) Fuel gauge (page 3-12)
4) Select lever/gear position indicator
(page 3-30)
5) Speedometer (page 3-10)
6) Trip meter A/B selection and trip meter
reset knob (page 3-11)
7) ECO gauge (page 3-12)
8) Trip meter and odometer (page 3-10)
– CONTINUED –
21
0
Black plate (24,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Warning and indicator lights
Mark Name Page
Seatbelt warning light 3-14
Front passenger’s
seatbelt warning light
3-14
SRS airbag system
warning light
3-15
/
Front passenger’s
frontal airbag ON indi-
cator
3-16
/
Front passenger’s
frontal airbag OFF in-
dicator
3-16
CHECK ENGINE
warning light/Malfunc-
tion indicator light
3-16
Coolant temperature
low indicator light/
Coolant temperature
high warning light
3-17
Charge warning light 3-18
Oil pressure warning
light
3-18
Engine oil level warn-
ing light
3-18
Mark Name Page
AT OIL TEMP warning
light (CVT models)
3-19
ABS warning light 3-21
Brake system warning
light
3-21
Door open warning
light
3-23
AWD warning light
(CVT models)
3-23
Power steering warn-
ing light
3-23
Hill start assist warn-
ing light/Hill start assist
OFF indicator light
3-22
Vehicle Dynamics
Control warning light/
Vehicle Dynamics
Control operation indi-
cator light
3-24
Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF indicator
light
3-25
Turn signal indicator
lights
3-31
Mark Name Page
High beam indicator
light
3-31
Automatic headlight
beam leveler warning
light (if equipped)
3-31
Front fog light indicator
light (if equipped)
3-31
Access key warning
indicator (if equipped)
3-25
Security indicator light 3-30
Headlight indicator
light (if equipped)
3-32
Cruise control indica-
tor light (if equipped)
3-31
Cruise control set in-
dicator light (if
equipped)
3-31
Low fuel warning light 3-22
Low tire pressure
warning light
(U.S.-spec. models)
3-19
Windshield washer
fluid warning light
3-19
22
Black plate (26,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Function settings
A SUBARU dealer can change the settings of the functions shown in the following table to meet your personal requirements. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details. If your vehicle is equipped with a multi function display, the settings for some of these functions
can be changed using the display. For details, refer to “Multi function display” F3-42.
Item Function Possible settings Default setting
Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation
Monitoring start delay time (after
closure of doors)
0 seconds/30 seconds 30 seconds
Impact sensor operation (only
models with shock sensors (dealer
option))
Operation/Non-operation Non-operation
Passive arming (models without
“Keyless Access with Push-button
Start system”)
Operation/Non-operation Non-operation
Dome light and map lights illumina-
tion (models with moonroof)
ON/OFF OFF
Dome light illumination (models
without moonroof)
Keyless Access (if equipped) Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation
Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5
Door unlock selection function (dri-
ver’s door unlock)
Driver’s door only/All doors Driver’s door only
Door unlock selection function (rear
gate unlock)
Rear gate only/All doors Rear gate only
Remote keyless entry system Hazard warning flasher Operation/Non-operation Operation
Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation
Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5
24
Black plate (27,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Item Function Possible settings Default setting
Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation Operation
Defogger and deicer system for
models with the automatic climate
control system
Rear window defogger, outside
mirror defogger and windshield wi-
per deicer
Operation for 15 minutes/
Continuous operation
Operation for 15 minutes
Dome light Operation of dome light/map light/
cargo area light OFF delay timer
OFF/10 seconds/20 seconds/30
seconds
30 seconds
Map light for models with a moon-
roof
Cargo area light (5-door)
Battery drainage prevention func-
tion
Battery drainage prevention func-
tion
Operation/Non-operation Operation
Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation Operation
Auto on/off headlights (if equipped) Sensitivity of the operation of the
auto on/off headlights
Low/Mid/High/Max Mid
Welcome lighting function (if
equipped)
Welcome lighting function (when
approaching)
OFF/30 seconds/60 seconds/90
seconds
30 seconds
Welcome lighting function (when
exiting)
OFF/30 seconds/60 seconds/90
seconds
30 seconds
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper
(5-door)
Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper
operation
Operation/Non-operation U.S.-spec. models: Non-operation
Other models: Operation
One-touch lane changer Operation of the one-touch lane
changer
Operation/Non-operation Operation
25
0
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (1,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Front seats........................................................... 1-2
Forward and backward adjustment ...................... 1-3
Reclining the seatback ........................................ 1-4
Seat height adjustment (driver’s seat) .................. 1-4
Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-5
Seat heater (if equipped) .................................... 1-6
Safety precautions .............................................. 1-6
Operation............................................................ 1-7
Rear seats............................................................ 1-7
Armrest (if equipped)........................................... 1-8
Head restraint adjustment.................................... 1-8
Folding down the rear seatback .......................... 1-10
Seatbelts ............................................................. 1-11
Seatbelt safety tips............................................. 1-11
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................... 1-12
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Retractor (ALR/ELR) ......................................... 1-12
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 1-13
Fastening the seatbelt ........................................ 1-13
Seatbelt maintenance ......................................... 1-20
Front seatbelt pretensioners ............................. 1-20
Seatbelt with shoulder belt pretensioner ............. 1-20
Seatbelt with shoulder belt and lap belt
pretensioners .................................................. 1-22
System monitors ............................................... 1-24
System servicing ............................................... 1-24
Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-24
Child restraint systems ..................................... 1-25
Where to place a child restraint system.............. 1-26
Choosing a child restraint system ...................... 1-27
Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELR
seatbelt ........................................................... 1-28
Installing a booster seat..................................... 1-32
Installation of child restraint systems by use of
lower and tether anchorages (LATCH) .............. 1-33
Top tether anchorages ....................................... 1-36
*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint
System airbag)................................................ 1-39
General precautions regarding SRS airbag
system ............................................................ 1-39
Components...................................................... 1-46
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system ........... 1-48
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag............. 1-58
SRS airbag system monitors.............................. 1-67
SRS airbag system servicing ............................. 1-69
Precautions against vehicle modification ............ 1-70
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags
1
Black plate (30,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats
Front seats
WARNING
. Never adjust the seat while driv-
ing to avoid loss of vehicle con-
trol and personal injury.
. Before adjusting the seat, make
sure the hands and feet of rear
seat passengers and cargo are
clear of the adjusting mechan-
ism.
. After adjusting the seat, push it
slightly to make sure it is se-
curely locked. If the seat is not
securely locked, it may move or
the seatbelt may not operate
properly.
. Do not put objects under the front
seats. They may interfere with
front seat locking and cause an
accident.
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright posi-
tion while the vehicle is running.
If the fr ont seatbacks are not
used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
. The SRS airbags d eploy wit h
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always
sit upright and well back in the
seat as far f rom the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
WARNING
Place children in the rear seat
properly restrained at all times. The
SRS airbag deploys with consider-
able speed and force and can injure
or even kill children, especially if
they are not restrained or impro-
perly restrained. Because children
are lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater. For that rea-
son, we strongly recommend that
ALL children (including those in
child seats and those that have
outgrown child restraint devices)
sit in the REAR seat properly re-
strained at all times in a child
restraint device or in a seatbelt,
1-2
Black plate (31,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
whichever is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight. Se-
cure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing
child seat) in the REAR seats at all
times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions. For instructions and precau-
tions concerning child restraint sys-
tems, refer to “Child restraint sys-
tems” F1-25.
WARNING
Do not let rear passengers rest their
feet between the front seatback and
seat cushion. Doing so may lead to
defective operation of the following
systems and could result in serious
injury.
. Occupant detection system
. SRS side airbag
. Seat heater (if equipped)
& Forward and backward ad-
justment
Pull the lever upward and slide the seat to
the desired position. Then release the
lever and try to move the seat back and
forth to make sure that it is securely locked
into place.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats
– CONTINUED –
1-3
1
Black plate (32,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats
& Reclining the seatback
Pull the reclining lever up and adjust the
seatback to the desired position. Then
release the lever and make sure the
seatback is securely locked into place.
The seatback placed in a reclined position
can spring back upward with force when
the lever is pulled. While operating the
lever to return the seatback, hold the
seatback lightly so that it may be raised
back gradually.
WARNING
To prevent the passenger from slid-
ing under the seatbelt in the event of
a collision, always put the seatback
in the upright position while the
vehicle is in motion. Also, do not
place objects such as cushions
between the passenger and the
seatback. If you do so, the risk of
sliding under the lap belt and of the
lap belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
& Seat height adjustment (dri-
ver’s seat)
1) When the lever is pushed down, the seat
is lowered.
2) When the lever is pulled up, the seat
rises.
The height of the seat can be adjusted by
moving the seat adjustment lever up and
down.
1-4
Black plate (33,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Head restraint adjustment
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Also, never install
the head restraints the opposite
way round. Doing so will prevent
the head restraints from func-
tioning as intended. Therefore,
when you remove the head re-
straints, you mu st r einstall all
head restraints correctly to pro-
tect vehicle occupants.
. All occupants, including the dri-
ver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
Both the driver’s seat and front passen-
ger’s seat are equipped with head re-
straints. Both head restraints are adjusta-
ble in the following ways.
! Head restraint height adjustment
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
Each head restraint should be adjusted so
that the center of the head restraint is
closest to the top of the occupant’s ears.
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks. Press and hold
the release button to lower the head
restraint.
NOTE
When the head restraint cannot be
pulled out or installed due to insuffi-
cient clearance between the head re-
straint and the roof, tilt the seat and
then perform the installation and re-
moval tasks.
! Head restraint angle adjustment
The angle of the head restraint can be
adjusted in several steps. While maintain-
ing a suitable driving posture, adjust the
head restraint to a position where the back
of your head is as close to the head
restraint as possible.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seats
– CONTINUED –
1-5
1
Black plate (34,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seat heater
To tilt:
Tilt the head restraint by hand to the
preferred position. A click will be audible
when the head restraint is locked.
To return:
Tilt the head restraint once as far forward
as it can go . The head restraint will
automatically return to the fully upright
position. Then, adjust the head restraint
again to the preferred angle.
Seat heater (if equipped)
The seat heater is equipped in the front
seats.
The seat heater operates when the igni-
tion switch is either in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
& Safety precautions
CAUTION
. People with delicate skin may
suffer slight burns even at low
temperatures if they use the seat
heater for a long period of time.
When using the heater, always be
sure to warn the persons con-
cerned.
. Do not put anything on the seat
which insulates against heat,
such as a blanket, cushion, or
similar items. This may cause the
seat heater to overheat.
. When the seat is warmed enough
or before you leave the vehicle,
be sure to turn off the seat heater.
NOTE
Use of the seat heater for a long period
of time while the engine is not running
can cause battery discharge.
1-6
Black plate (35,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Operation
1) HI – Rapid heating
2) LO – Normal heating
3) Off
A) Left-hand side
B) Right-hand side
To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO”
or “HI” position on the switch, as desired,
depending on the temperature.
Selecting the “HI” position will cause the
seat to heat up quicker.
To turn off the seat heater, lightly press the
opposite side of the current position.
The indicator located on the switch illumi-
nates when the seat heater is in operation.
Rear seats
WARNING
Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits well
back and upright in the seat. Do not
put cushions or any other materials
between occupants and seatbacks
or seat cushions. If you do so, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
of the lap belt sliding up over the
abdomen will increase, and both can
result in serious internal injury or
death.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats
– CONTINUED –
1-7
1
Black plate (36,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats
WARNING
Never stack luggage or other cargo
higher than the top of the seatback
because it could tumble forward and
injure passengers in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
& Armrest (if equipped)
To lower the armrest, pull on the top edge
of the armrest.
WARNING
To avoid serious injury, passengers
must never be allowed to sit on the
center armrest.
& Head restraint adjustment
Both the rear window side seats and the
rear center seat are equipped with head
restraints.
WARNING
. Never drive the vehicle with the
head restraints removed because
they are designed to reduce the
risk of serious neck injury in the
event that the vehicle is struck
from the rear. Therefore, when
you have removed the head re-
straints, you mu st reinstall all
head restraints to protect vehicle
occupants.
. All occupants, including the dri-
ver, should not operate a vehicle
or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to mini-
mize the risk of neck injury in the
event of a crash.
1-8
Black plate (37,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Rear windows side seating position
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks. Press and hold
the release button to lower the head
restraint.
After installing the head restraint, make
sure it is securely locked.
! Rear center seating position
CAUTION
The head restraint is not intended to
be used at the retracted position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise the
head restraint to the extended posi-
tion.
1) Incorrect (retracted position)
2) Correct (extended position)
1) Head restraint
2) Release button
To raise:
Pull the head restraint up.
To lower:
Push the head restraint down while
pressing the release button on the top of
the seatback.
To remove:
While pressing the release button, pull out
the head restraint.
To install:
Install the head restraint into the holes that
are located on the top of the seatback until
the head restraint locks. Press and hold
the release button to lower the head
restraint.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats
– CONTINUED –
1-9
1
Black plate (38,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Rear seats
When the rear-center seating position is
occupied, raise the head restraint to the
extended position. When the rear center
seating position is not occupied, lower the
head restraint to improve rearward visibi-
lity.
& Folding down the rear seat-
back
WARNING
. When you fold down the seat-
back, check tha t there are no
passengers or objects on the
rear seat. Not doing so creates
a risk of injury or property da-
mage if the seatback suddenly
folds down.
. Never allow passengers to ride
on the folded rear seatback or in
the cargo area or trunk. Doing so
may result in serious injury or
death.
. Secure all objects and especially
long items properly to prevent
them from being thrown around
inside the vehicle and causing
serious injury during a sudden
stop, a sudden steering maneu-
ver or a rapid acceleration.
Lock release knob
1) Unlocked
2) Locked
A) Unlocking marker in red
WARNING
When you return the seatback to its
original position, check that the
unlocking marker on the lock re-
lease knob is not visible . Al so,
shake the seatback slightly to con-
firm that it is securely fixed in place.
If the seatback is not securely fixed
in place, the seatback may suddenly
fold down in the event of sudden
braking, or objects may move out
from the cargo area or trunk, which
could cause serious injury or death.
WARNING
When the seatback is returned to its
original position, observe the follow-
ing precautions. Failure to do so
may lead to serious injury or an
1-10
Black plate (39,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
accident because the operation effi-
ciency of the seatbelt is inhibited.
. The sea tbelt should not pass
behind the securing hook for
the seatback.
. The seatbelt should not be
caught in the seatback and i t
should be fully visible.
Unlock the seatback by pulling the lock
release knob and then fold the seatback
down.
To return the seatback to its origin al
position, raise the seatback until it locks
into place and make sure that the unlock-
ing marker on the lock release knob is no
longer visible.
Seatbelts
& Seatbelt safety tips
WARNING
. All persons in the vehicle should
fasten their seatb elts BEFORE
the vehicle starts to move. Other-
wise, the possibility of serious
injury becomes greater in the
event of a sudden stop or acci-
dent.
. All belts should fit snugly in order
to provide full restraint. Loose
fitting belts are not as effective in
preventing or reducing injury.
. E ach seatbelt is designed to
support only one person. Never
use a single belt for two or more
persons – even children. Other-
wise, in an accident, s erious
injury or death could result.
. Replace all seatbelt assemblies
including retractors and attach-
ing hardware worn by occupants
of a vehicle that has been in a
serious accident. The entire as-
sembly should be replaced even
if damage is not obvious.
. Place children in the rear seat
properly restrained at all times.
The SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force
and can injure or even kill chil-
dren, especially if they are not
restrained or improperly re-
strained. Because children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater. For that
reason, we strongly recommend
that ALL children (including
those in child seats and those
that have outgrown child re-
straint devices) sit in the REAR
seat properly restrained at all
times in a child restraint device
or in a seatbelt, whichever is
appropriate for the child’s height
and weight.
Secure ALL types of child re-
straint devices (including for-
ward facing child seats) in the
REAR seats at all times.
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD
FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE
FRONT SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
According to accident statistics,
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
– CONTINUED –
1-11
1
Black plate (40,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seat-
ing positions. For instructions
and precautions concerning the
child restraint system, refer to
“Child restraint systems” F1-25.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash
sensing and diagnostic module, which will
record the use of the seatbelt by the front
passenger when any of the SRS frontal,
side and curtain airbags deploy.
! Infants or small children
Use a child restraint system that is
suitable for your vehicle. Refer to “Child
restraint systems” F1-25.
! Children
If a child is too big for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear seat
and be restrained using the seatbelts.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions. Never allow a child to
stand up or kneel on the seat.
If the shoulder portion of the belt crosses
the face or neck, move the child closer to
the belt buckle to help provide a good
shoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to
securely place the lap belt as low as
possible on the hips and not on the child’s
waist. If the shoulder portion of the belt
cannot be properly position ed, a child
restraint system should be used. Never
place the shoulder belt under the child’s
arm or behind the child’s back.
! Expectant mothers
Expectant mothers also need to use the
seatbelts. They should consult their doctor
for specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as
possible over the hips, not over the waist.
& Emergency Locking Retrac-
tor (ELR)
The driver’s seatbelt has an Emergency
Locking Retractor (ELR).
The emergency locking retractor allows
normal body movement but the retractor
locks automatically during a sudden stop,
impact or if you pull the belt very quickly
out of the retractor.
& Automatic Locking Retractor/
Emergency Locking Retrac-
tor (ALR/ELR)
Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-
matic Locking Retractor/Emergency Lock-
ing Retractor (ALR/ELR). The Automatic
Locking R etractor/Emerg ency Lo cking
Retractor normally functions as an Emer-
gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The ALR/
ELR has an additional locking mode
“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode” intended to secure a child restraint
system. When the seatbelt is once drawn
out completely and is then retracted even
slightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt in
that position and the seatbelt cannot be
extended. As the belt is rewinding, clicks
will be heard which indicate the retractor
functions as an ALR. When the seatbelt is
retracted fully, the ALR mode is released.
When securing a child restraint system on
1-12
Black plate (41,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
the rear seats by the use of the seatbelt,
the seatbelt must be changed over to the
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.
When the child restraint system is re-
moved, make sure that the s eatbelt
retracts fully and the retractor returned to
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
mode.
For instructions on how to convert the
retractor to the ALR mode and restore it to
the ELR mode, refer to “Installing child
restraint systems with ALR/ELR seatbelt”
F1-28.
& Seatbelt warning light
and chime
Refer to “Seatbelt warning light and
chime” F3-14.
& Fastening the seatbelt
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury.
. Keep the lap belt as low as
possible on your hips. In a colli-
sion, this spreads the force of the
lap belt over stronger hip bones
instead of across the weak er
abdomen.
. Seatbelts provide maximum re-
straint when the occupant sits
well back and upright in the seat.
To reduce the risk of sliding
under the seatbelt in a collision,
the front seatbacks should be
always used in the upright posi-
tion while the vehicle is running.
If the fr ont seatbacks are not
used in the upright position in a
collision, the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen will
increase, and both can result in
serious internal injury or death.
. Do not put cushions or any other
materials between occupants
and seatbacks or seat cushions.
If you do so, the risk of sliding
under the lap belt and of the lap
belt sliding up over the abdomen
will increase, and both can result
in serious internal i njury or
death.
WARNING
Never place the shoulder belt under
the arm or behind the back. If an
accident occurs, this can increase
the risk or severity of injury.
CAUTION
Metallic parts of the seatbelt can
become very hot in a vehicle that
has been closed up in sunny weath-
er; they could burn an occupant. Do
not touch such hot parts until they
cool.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
– CONTINUED –
1-13
1
Black plate (42,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
! Front seatbelts
1. Adjust the seat position according to
the following procedure.
Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to the
upright position. Move the seat as far from
the steering wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control.
Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-
back to the upright position. Move the seat
as far back as possible.
2. Sit well back in the seat.
3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull
it out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving it
a strong pull, then pull it out slowly
again.
4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
6. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
! Adjusting the front seat shoulder
belt anchor height
The shoulder belt anchor height should be
adjusted to the position best suited for the
driver/front passenger. Always adjust the
anchor height so that the shoulder belt
passes over the middle of the shoulder
without touching the neck.
To raise:
Slide the anchor up.
To lower:
Pull the release knob and slide the anchor
down.
Pull down on the anchor to make sure that
it is locked in place.
1-14
Black plate (43,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
WARNING
When wearing the seatbelts, make
sure the shoulder portion of the
webbing does not pass over your
neck. If it does, adjust the seatbelt
anchor to a lower position. Placing
the shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sudden
braking or in a collision.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
1. Push the button on the buckle.
2. Have the seatbelt retracted slowly to
avoid the seatbelt being tangled or
twisted.
Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
! Rear seatbelts (except rear center
seatbelt on 5-door models)
1. Sit well back in the seat.
2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull the
belt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull
it out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving it
a strong pull, then pull it out slowly
again.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
5. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
– CONTINUED –
1-15
1
Black plate (44,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
! Unfastening the seatbelt
1. Push the button on the buckle.
2. Have the seatbelt retracted slowly to
avoid the seatbelt being tangled or
twisted.
Before closing the door, make sure that
the belts are retracted properly to avoid
catching the belt webbing in the door.
! Rear center seatbelt on 5-door
models
1) Center seatbelt tongue plate
2) Connector (tongue)
3) Connector (buckle)
4) Center seatbelt buckle
WARNING
Fastening the seatbelt with the web-
bing twisted can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.
When fastening the belt after it is
pulled out from the retractor, espe-
cially when inserting the connec-
tor’s tongue plate into the mating
buckle (on right-hand side), always
check that the webbing is not
twisted.
1-16
Black plate (45,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
WARNING
. Be sure to fasten both tongue
plates to the respective buckles.
If the seatbelt is used only as a
shoulder belt (with the connec-
tor’s tongue plate not fastened to
the connector’s buckle on the
right-hand side), it cannot prop-
erly restrain the wearer in posi-
tion in an accident, possibly
resulting in serious injury or
death.
. The head restraint is not intended
to be used at the lowest position.
Before sitting on the seat, raise
the head restraint to the ex-
tended position. Otherwise, in
an accident, serious injury or
death could result.
1. Raise the head restraint to the ex-
tended position. Do not remove the head
restraint.
2. Remove the tongue plate from the belt
holder on the right side of the cargo area
and pull out the seatbelt slowly.
3. After drawing out the seatbelt, pass it
through the belt guide as follows: First
insert one edge of the belt into the open
gap in the belt guide; then slide the rest of
the belt in, so that the whole belt fits
inside.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
– CONTINUED –
1-17
1
Black plate (46,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
4. After confirming that the webbing is not
twisted, insert the connector (tongue)
attached at the webbing end into the
buckle on the right-hand side until a click
is heard.
. If the belt stops before reaching the
buckle, return the belt slightly and pull
it out more slowly.
. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,
let the belt retract slightly after giving it
a strong pull, then pull it out slowly
again.
5. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plate
into the center seatbelt buckle marked
“CENTER” on the left-hand side until it
clicks.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on
the shoulder belt.
7. Place the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips, not on your waist.
! Unfastening the seatbelt
1. Push the release button of the center
seatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) to
unfasten the seatbelt.
NOTE
When the seatback is folded down for
greater cargo area, it is necessary to
disconnect the connector.
1-18
Black plate (47,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
2. Insert a tongue plate or other hard
pointed object into the slot in the con-
nector (buckle) on the right-hand side and
push it in. The connector (tongue) plate
will then disconnect from the buckle.
3. Allow the retractor to roll up the belt.
You should hold the webbing end and
guide it back into the retractor while it is
rolling up. Insert the connector (tongue)
into the belt holder.
CAUTION
. Do not allow the retractor to roll
up the seatbelt too quickly.
Otherwise, the metal tongue
plates may hit against the trim,
resulting in damaged trim.
. Have the seatbelt fully rolled up
so that the tongue plates are
neatly stored. A hanging tongue
plate can swing and hit against
the trim during driving, causing
damage to the trim.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Seatbelts
– CONTINUED –
1-19
1
Black plate (48,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners
& Seatbelt maintenance
To clean the seatbelts, use a mild soap
and lukewarm water. Never bleach or dye
the belts because this could seriously
affect their strength.
Inspect the seatbelts and attachments
including the webbing and all hardware
periodically for cracks , cuts, gashes,
tears, damage, loose bolts or worn areas.
Replace the seatbelts even if only minor
damage is found.
CAUTION
. Keep the belts free of polishes,
oils, chemicals and particularly
battery acid.
. Never attempt to make modifica-
tions or changes that will prevent
the seatbelt from operating prop-
erly.
Front seatbelt pretensioners
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat-
belts have a seatbelt pretensioner. The
seatbelt pretensioners are designed to be
activated in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe frontal
and side collision and rollover accident.
& Seatbelt with shoulder belt
pretensioner
NOTE
This section is applicable to the follow-
ing components.
. Except Crosstrek models:
– Driver’s seatbelt
– Front passenger’s seatbelt
. Crosstrek models:
– Driver’s seatbelt
The pretensioner sensor also serves as
follows.
. SRS frontal airbag sensor
. Side impact sensor
. Front door impact sensor
. Rollover sensor (Crosstrek models)
If the sensor detects a certain predeter-
mined amount of force during frontal or
side collisions or rollover accidents, the
front seatbelt is quickly drawn back in by
the retractor to take up the slack so that
the belt more effectively restrains the
driver.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
an operating noise will be heard and a
small amount of smoke will be released.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
1-20
Black plate (49,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt retractor remains
locked. Consequently, the seatbelt can not
be pulled out and retracted and therefore
must be replaced.
NOTE
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
signed to activate in minor impacts or
in rear impacts.
. In the case of rollover accidents
– Crosstrek models:
As the curtain airbags deploy, the
driver’s side seatbelt pretensioner
and front passenger’ sside
shoulder belt pretensioner are acti-
vated simultaneously.
– Except Crosstrek models:
Seatbelt pretensioners are not acti-
vated.
. In cases of frontal collisions, the
following components will operate si-
multaneously.
– Seatbelt pretensioner for driver
– Seatbe lt pretensioner for front
passenger
– SRS frontal airbag for driver
– SRS frontal airbag for front pas-
senger*
– SRS curtain airbags (both sides)
(if an offset frontal collision occurs)
*: This does not operate if the occupant
detection system deactivates airbag op-
eration. For details, refer to “Front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag” F1-48
.
. In cases of side collisions, the
following components will operate si-
multaneously.
– SRS curtain airbag (impacted
side)
– SRS side airbag (impacted side)
(when both the satellite safing sen-
sor and any of the center pillar
impact sensors/front door impact
sensors sense an impact force)
– Seatbelt pretensioner for driver
(when both the satellite safing sen-
sor and the driver’s side front door
impact sensor sense an impact
force)
However, when a center pillar im-
pact sensor detects a signal faster
than the front door impact sensor,
or both sensors detect signals
simultaneously, the seatbelt preten-
sioner does not activate.
– Seatbe lt pretensioner for front
passenger ( shoulder belt preten-
sioner only) (when both the satellite
safing sensor and the front passen-
ger’s side front door impact sensor
sense an impact force)
However, when a center pillar im-
pact sensor detects a signal faster
than the front door impact sensor,
or both sensors detect signals
simultaneously, the seatbelt preten-
sioner does not activate.
. Pretensioners are designed to func-
tion on a one-time-only basis. In the
event that a pretensioner is activated,
both the driver’s and front passenger’s
seatbelt retractor assemblies should
be replaced only by an authorized
SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-
belt retractor assemblies, use only
genuine SUBARU parts.
. If either front seatbelt does not
retract or cannot be pulled out due to
a malfunction or activation of the
pretensioner, contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
. If the front seatbelt retractor assem-
bly or surrounding area has been
damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it has
seatbelt pretensioners by alerting the
buyer to the contents of this section.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners
– CONTINUED –
1-21
1
Black plate (50,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection,
the occupants should sit in an
upright position with their seat-
belts properly fastened. Refer to
“Seatbelts” F1-11.
. Do not modify, remove or strike
the front seatbelt retractor as-
semblies or surrounding area.
This could result in accidental
activation of the seatbelt preten-
sioners or could make the sys-
tem inoperative, possibly result-
ing in serious injury. Seatbelt
pretensioners have no user-ser-
viceable parts. For required ser-
vicing of front seatbelt retractors
equipped with seatbelt preten-
sioners, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
. When discarding front seatbelt
retractor assemblies or scrap-
ping the entire vehicle due to
collision damage or for other
reasons, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
& Seatbelt with shoulder belt
and lap belt pretensioners
NOTE
This section is applicable to the front
passenger’s seatbelt in Crosstrek mod-
els.
1) Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulder
belt pretensioner)
2) Lap belt pretensioner
On the front passenger’s side in Crosstrek
models, the shoulder belt pretensioner is
supplemented by a lap belt pretensioner,
which is located at the base of the center
pillar. Like the shoulder belt pretensioner,
the lap belt pretensioner instantaneously
pulls in the belt to eliminate slack if a
certain level of frontal collision force is
detected. As a result, the seatbelt re-
strains the front seat occupant more
effectively.
When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,
an operating noise will be heard and a
small amount of smoke will be released.
These occurrences are normal and not
harmful. This smoke does not indicate a
fire in the vehicle.
Once the seatbelt pretensioner has been
activated, the seatbelt pretensioner re-
mains locked. Consequently, the seatbelt
cannot be pulled out and retracted and
therefore must be replaced.
NOTE
. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-
signed to activate in minor impacts or
in rear impacts.
. When a rollover accident occurs, the
lap belt pretensioner does not activate;
however, as the curtain airbags deploy,
the shoulder belt pretensioner is acti-
vated. At this time, the driver’s side
seatbelt pretensioner and passenger’s
side shoulder belt pretensioner acti-
vate simultaneously.
. In cases of frontal collisions, the
following components will operate si-
multaneously.
– Seatbelt pretensioner for driver
– Seatbelt pret ensioner for front
1-22
Black plate (51,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
passenger
– SRS frontal airbag for driver
– SRS frontal airbag for front pas-
senger*
– SRS curtain airbags (both sides)
(if an offset frontal collision occurs)
*: This does not operate if the occupant
detection system deactivates airbag op-
eration. For details, refer to “Front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag” F1-48
.
. In cases of side collisions, the
following components will operate si-
multaneously.
– SRS curtain airbag (impacted
side)
– SRS side airbag (impacted side)
(when both the satellite safing sen-
sor and any of the center pillar
impact sensors/front door impact
sensors sense an impact force)
– Seatbelt pretensioner for driver
(when both the satellite safing sen-
sor and the driver’s side front door
impact sensor sense an impact
force)
However, when a center pillar im-
pact sensor detects a signal faster
than the front door impact sensor,
or both sensors detect signals
simultaneously, the seatbelt preten-
sioner does not activate.
– Seatbe lt pretensioner for front
passenger ( shoulder belt preten-
sioner only) (when both the satellite
safing sensor and the front passen-
ger’s side front door impact sensor
sense an impact force)
However, when a center pillar im-
pact sensor detects a signal faster
than the front door impact sensor,
or both sensors detect signals
simultaneously, the seatbelt preten-
sioner does not activate.
. Pretensioners are designed to func-
tion on a one-time-only basis. In the
event that a pretensioner is activated,
both the driver’s and front passenger’s
seatbelt retractor assemblies should
be replaced only by an authorized
SUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-
belt retractor assemblie s, use only
genuine SUBARU parts.
. If either front seatbelt does not
retract or cannot be pulled out due to
a malfunction or activation of the
pretensioner, contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible.
. If the front seatbelt retractor assem-
bly or surrounding area has been
damaged, contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it has
seatbelt pretensioners by alerting the
buyer to the contents of this section.
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection,
the occupants should sit in an
upright position with their seat-
belts properly fastened. Refer to
“Seatbelts” F1-11.
. Do not modify, remove or strike
the front seatbelt retractor as-
semblies or surrounding area.
This could result in accidental
activation of the seatbelt preten-
sioners or could make the sys-
tem inoperative, possibly result-
ing i n serious injury. Seatbelt
pretensioners have no user-ser-
viceable parts. For required ser-
vicing of front seatbelt retractors
equipped with seatbelt preten-
sioners, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
. When discarding front seatbelt
retractor assemblies or scrap-
ping the entire vehicle due to
collision damage or for other
reasons, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners
– CONTINUED –
1-23
1
Black plate (52,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Front seatbelt pretensioners
& System monitors
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the seatbelt pretensioner
while the vehicle is being driven. The
seatbelt pretensioners share the control
modulewiththeSRSairbagsystem.
Therefore, if any malfunction occurs in a
seatbelt pretensioner, the SRS airbag
system warning light will illuminate. For
details, refer to “SRS airbag system
monitors” F1-67.
& System servicing
WARNING
. When discarding a seatbelt re-
tractor assembly or scrapping
the entire vehicle damaged by a
collision, consult your SUBARU
dealer.
. Tampering with or disconnecting
the system’s wiring could result
in ac cidental activat ion of the
seatbelt pretensioner and/or
SRS airbag or could make the
system inoperative, which may
result in serious injury. Do not
use electrical test equipment on
any circuit related to the seatbelt
pretensioner and SRS airbag
systems. For required servicing
of the seatbelt pretensioner, con-
sult your nearest SUBARU deal-
er.
CAUTION
The sensors and SRS airbag control
module are located in the following
locations.
. Front sub sensors: on both the
right and left side at the front of
the vehicle
. Front door impact sensors: on
both front doors
. Satellite safing sensor: under the
rear center seat
. SRS airbag control module (in-
cluding the impact sensors): un-
der the center of the instrument
panel
If you need service or repair in those
areas or near the front s eatbelt
retractors, have the work performed
by your authorized SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
If the front or side part of the vehicle is
damaged in an accident to the extent
that the seatbelt pretensioner does not
operate, contact your SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
& Precautions against vehicle
modification
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
you want to install any accessory parts to
your vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modifications
can interfere with proper operation
of the seatbelt pretensioners.
. Attach ment of any equip ment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
ine SUBARU accessory parts to
the front end.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for indivi-
dual vehicle models in this Own-
er’s Manual.
1-24
Black plate (53,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Child restraint systems
Infants and small children should always
be placed in an infant or child restraint
system in the rear seat while riding in the
vehicle. You should use an infant or child
restraint system that meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards or Canada
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards, is com-
patible with your vehicle and is appro-
priate for the child’s age and size. All child
restraint sy stems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or
the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt
(except those described in “Installation of
child restraint systems by use of lower and
tether anchorages (LATCH)” F1-33).
Children could be endangered in an
accident if their child restraints are not
properly secured in the vehicle. When
installing the child restraint system, care-
fully follow the manufacturer ’s instructions.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces
require that infants and small children be
restrained in an approved child restraint
system at all times while the vehicle is
moving.
WARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child
on his or her lap or in his or her
arms while the vehicle is moving.
The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a collision,
because the child will be caught
between the passenger and objects
inside the vehicle.
Additionally, holding a child in your
lap or arms in the front seat exposes
that child to another serious danger.
Since the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed and force, the
child could be injured or even killed.
WARNING
Children should be properly re-
strained at all times. Never allow a
child to stand up, or to kneel on any
seat. Unrestrained children will be
thrown forward during sudden stop
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
– CONTINUED –
1-25
1
Black plate (54,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
or in an accident and can be injured
seriously.
Additionally, children standing up or
kneeling on or in front of the front
seat are exposed another serious
danger. Since the SRS airbag de-
ploys with considerable speed and
force, the child could be injured or
even killed.
& Where to place a child re-
straint system
The following are SUBARU’s recommen-
dations on where to place a child restraint
system in your vehicle.
A: Front passenger’s seat
You should not install a child restraint
system (including a booster seat) due to
the hazard to children posed by the
passenger’s airbag.
B: Rear seat, window-side seating
positions
Recommended positions for all types of
child restraint systems.
In these positions, the following equip-
ment is provided for installing a child
restraint system.
. Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer-
gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat-
belts
. Lower anchorages (bars)
. Upper anchorages (tether anchorages)
Some types of child restraints might not be
able to be secured firmly due to projection
of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
C: Rear seat, center seating position
The ALR/ELR seatbelt and an upper
anchorage (tether anchorage) are pro-
vided in this position.
Some types of child restraints might not be
able to be secured firmly due to projection
of the seat cushion.
In this seating position, you should use
only a child restraint system that has a
bottom base that fits snugly against the
contours of the seat cushion and can be
securely retained using the seatbelt.
When you install a child restraint system in
the rear seat’s center seating position,
raise the center head restraint.
Lower anchorages (bars) for window-side
seating positions may be used for a seat
in the center seating position if a child
restraint system manufacturer’s instruc-
tions permit and specify using anchors as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
If a child restraint system is not correctly
fixed in place (for example, if a child
restraint system can be moved more than
1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), you
should install the child restraint system in
a rear seat, window-side seating position.
WARNING
. Even with advanced airbags, chil-
dren can be seriously injured by
the airbag. Place children in the
rear seat properly restrained at
all times. The SRS airbag de -
ploys with considerable speed
1-26
Black plate (55,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
and force and can injure or even
kill children, especially if they are
not restrained or improperly re-
strained . B ecause children are
lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
For that reason, be sure to se-
cure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing
child seats) in the REAR seats at
all times. You should choose a
restraint device which is appro-
priate for the child’s age, height
and weight. According to acci-
dent statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the
front seating positions.
. Do not use lower anchorages
(bars) for a seat in the center
seating position unless a child
restraint system manufacturer’s
instructions permit and specify
using anchors spaced as far
apart as those in this vehicle.
WARNING
SINCE YOUR VEHICLE IS
EQUIPPED WITH A PASSENGER’ S
SRS AIRBAG, NEVER INSTALL A
REARWARD FACING CHILD
SAFETY SEAT IN THE FRONT PAS-
SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SO RISKS
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO
THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’SHEADTOOCLOSETO
THE SRS AIRBAG.
& Choosing a child restraint
system
Choose a child restraint system that is
appropriate for the child’s age and size
(weight and height) in order to provide the
child with proper protecti on. The child
restraint system should meet all applic-
able requirements of Federal Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standards for the United States
or of Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards for Canada. It can be identified by
looking for the label on the child restraint
system or the manufacturer’s statement of
compliance in the document attached to
the system.
Also it is important for you to make sure
that the child restraint system is compa-
tible with the vehicle in which it will be
used.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
– CONTINUED –
1-27
1
Black plate (56,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
& Installing child restraint sys-
tems with ALR/ELR seatbelt
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
. When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufac-
turer’s instructions supplied with
it. After installing the child re-
straint system, check to ensure
that it is held securely in posi-
tion. If it is not held tight and
secure, the danger of your child
suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be
increased.
. When installing a child restraint
system in the rear center seating
position, set both seatbacks to
the original position. Otherwise,
the child restraint system cannot
be securely restrained, which
may result in death or serious
injuries in the event of sudden
stop, sudden steering maneuver
or an accident.
! Installing a rearward facing child
restraint
1. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
5. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
retractor functions as ALR.
1-28
Black plate (57,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
6. Push and pull the child restraint
system forward and from side to side to
check if it is firmly secured. Sometimes a
child restraint can be more firmly secured
by pushing it down into the seat cushion
and then tightening the seatbelt.
7. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning).
8. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’SSEAT.DOINGSO
RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH
TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE
CHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE
SRS AIRBAG.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
! Installing forward facing child re-
straint
WARNING
Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that the
seatback is securely locked into
place. Otherwise, in an acc ident,
serious injury or death could result.
1. Shake the seatback slightly to confirm
that it is securely locked into place.
– It is possible to check whether the
seatback is locked visually. If the
seatback is locked into place, the red
colored unlocking marker which is
attached to the bottom of the lock
release knob is invisible. For details,
refer to “Folding down the rear seat-
back” F1-10.
2. Prepare the rear seat head restraint
where a child restraint system is intended
to be installed in the following way.
– When a child restraint system is
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
– CONTINUED –
1-29
1
Black plate (58,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
installed on the window-side seating
position or the rear center seating
position of a 4-door model, remove
the rear seat head restraint. For de-
tails, refer to “Head restraint adjust-
ment” F1-8.
Store the head restraint in the trunk (4-
door models) or cargo area (5-door
models). Avoid placing the head re-
straint in the passenger compartment
to prevent it from being thrown around
in the passenger compartment in a
sudden stop or a sharp turn.
– When a child restraint system is
installed on the rear center seating
position of a 5-door model, raise the
rear seat head restraint to the ex-
tended position. Do not remove the
head restraint. For details, refer to
“Rear center seating position” F1-9.
3. Place the child restraint system in the
rear seating position.
WARNING
When you intend to install a child
restraint system on the rear center
seating position, if the child restraint
system does not fit snugly against
the contours of the rear center seat
cushion, install the child restraint
system on the window-side seating
position to be safe. For details, refer
to “Where to place a child restraint
system” F1-26.
4. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the child restraint system
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
– When a child restraint system is
installed on the rear center seating
position of a 5-door model, pass the
rear center seatbelt through the belt
guide properly. For details, refer to
“Rear center seatbelt on 5-door mod-
els” F1-16.
5. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click.
6. Take up the slack in the lap belt.
7. Pull out the seatbelt fully from the
retractor to change the retractor over from
the Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
to the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
function. Then, allow the belt to rewind
into the retractor. As the belt is rewinding,
clicks will be heard which indicate the
retractor functions as ALR.
1-30
Black plate (59,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
8. Before having a child sit in the child
restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and right and left to check if it is firmly
secured. Sometimes a child r estraint
system can be more firmly secured by
pushing it down into the seat cushion and
then tightening the seatbelt.
9. Pull at the shoulder portion of the belt
to confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALR
properly functioning).
4-door models
5-door models
10. Latch the top tether hook onto the
tether anchorage that is located behind
the rear seat and tighten the top tether
firmly. For additional instructions, refer to
“Top tether anchorages” F1-36.
11. To remove the child restraint system,
press the release button on the seatbelt
buckle and allow the belt to retract
completely. The belt will return to the
ELR mode.
If you have installed a child restraint
system for the rear center seating posi-
tion on a 5-door model, when you
remove the child restrain t system, the
seatbelt may not be restored to the ELR
mode even if the seatbelt is retracted. In
this case, lower the head restraint to the
retracted position to allow the seatbelt to
retract moreover. The seatbelt will return
to the ELR mode.
Remember that the head restraint is not
intended to be used at the lowest position
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
– CONTINUED –
1-31
1
Black plate (60,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
(retracted position). Therefore, when the
rear center seat is occupied (including
when a child restraint system is installed)
next time, be sure to raise the head
restraint to the extended position.
NOTE
When the child restraint system is no
longer in use, remove it and restore the
ELR function of the retractor. That
function is restored by allowing the
seatbelt to retract fully.
& Installing a booster seat
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to ensure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
1. Place the booster seat in the rear
seating position and sit the child on it. The
child should sit well back on the booster
seat.
2. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the booster seat and the child
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckle
until you hear a click. Take care not to
twist the seatbelt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of child’s shoulder and
that the lap belt is positioned as low as
possible on the child’s hips.
1-32
Black plate (61,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
4. To remove the booster seat, press the
release button on the seatbelt buckle and
allow the belt to retract.
WARNING
. Never use a belt that is twisted or
reversed. In an accident, this can
increase the risk or severity of
injury to the child.
. Never place the shoulder belt
under the child’s arm or behind
the child’s back. If an accident
occurs, this can increase the risk
or severity of injury to the child.
. The seatbelt should fit snugly in
order to provide full restraint.
Loose fitting belts are not as
effective in preventing or redu-
cing injury.
. Place the lap belt as low as
possible on the child’s hips. A
high-positioned lap belt will in-
crease the risk of sliding under
the lap belt and of the lap belt
sliding up over the abdomen, and
both can result in serious inter-
nal injury or death.
. Make sure the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. Placing the
shoulder belt over the neck may
result in neck injury during sud-
den braking or in a collision.
& Installation of child restraint
systems by use of lower and
tether anchorages (LATCH)
WARNING
. Child restraint systems and seat-
belts can become hot in a vehicle
that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small
child. Check the child restraint
system before you place a child
in it.
. Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint system in your vehicle.
Unsecured child restraint sys-
tems can be thrown around in-
side of the vehicle in a sudden
stop, turn or accident; they can
strike and injure vehicle occu-
pants as well as result in serious
injuries or death to the child.
CAUTION
When you install a child restraint
system, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions supplied with it. After
installing the child restraint system,
check to e nsure that it is held
securely in position. If it is not held
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
– CONTINUED –
1-33
1
Black plate (62,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
tight and secure, the danger of your
child suffering personal injury in the
event of an accident may be in-
creased.
! Lower and tether anchorages
Some types of child restraint systems can
be installed on the rear seat of your
vehicle without use of the seatbelts. Such
child restraint systems are secured to the
designated anchorages provided on the
vehicle body. The lower and tether an-
chorages are sometimes referred to as the
LATCH system (Lower Anchors and
Tethers for CHildren).
Your vehicle is equipped with four lower
anchorages (bars) and three upper an-
chorages (tether anchorages) for accom-
modating such child restraint systems.
! Lower anchorages
The lower anchorages (bars) are used for
installing a child restraint system only on
the rear seat window-side seating posi-
tions. For each window-side seating posi-
tion, two lower anchorages are provided.
Each lower anchorage is located where
the seat cushion meets the seatback.
! Tether anchorages
The tether anchorages (upper an-
chorages) are provided at the locations
shown in the above illustration. For de-
tails, refer to “Top tether anchorages” F1-
36.
1-34
Black plate (63,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! To install a child restraint system
using lower and tether an-
chorages
To install a child restraint system using
lower and tether anchorages, perform the
following procedure.
WARNING
Before installing a child restraint
system, be sure to confirm that the
seatback is securely locked into
place. Otherwise, in an accident,
serious injury or death could result.
1. Shake the seatback slightly to confirm
that it is securely locked into place.
– It is possible to check whether the
seatback is locked visually. If the
seatback is locked into place, the red
colored unlockin g marker which is
attached to the bottom of the lock
release knob is invisible. For details,
refer to “Folding down the rear seat-
back” F1-10.
2. You will find marks “ ” at the bottom of
the rear seat seatbacks. These marks
indicate the positions of the lower an-
chorages (bars).
Remove the covers and locate the lower
anchorages (bars).
3. Remove the rear seat head restraint.
For details, refer to “Rear windows side
seating position” F1-9.
4. While following the instructions sup-
plied by the child restraint system manu-
facturer, connect the lower hooks onto the
lower anchorages located at “
” marks on
the bottom of the rear seatback. When the
hooks are connected, make s ure the
adjacent seatbelts are not caught.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
– CONTINUED –
1-35
1
Black plate (64,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
5. [If your child restraint system is of a
flexible attachment type (which uses
tether belts to connect the child restraint
system properly to the lower anchorages)]
While pushing the child restraint into the
seat cushion, pull both left and right lower
tether belts up to secure the child restraint
system firmly by taking up the slack in the
belt.
6. Latch the top tether hook onto the
tether anchorage that is located behind
the rear seat and tighten the top tether
firmly. For additional instructions, refer to
“Top tether anchorages” F1-36.
7. Before seating a child in the child
restraint system, try to move it back and
forth and right and left to verify that it is
held securely in position.
8. To remove the child restraint system,
follow the reverse procedures of installa-
tion.
If you have any question concerning this
type of child restraint system, ask your
SUBARU dealer.
& Top tether anchorages
Your vehicle is equipped with three top
tether anchorages so that a child restraint
system having a top tether can be
installed in the rear seat. When installing
a child restraint system using top tether,
proceed as follows, while observing the
instructions by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
Since a top tether can provide additional
stability by offering another connection
between a child restraint system and the
vehicle, we recommend that you use a top
tether whenever one is required or avail-
able.
1-36
Black plate (65,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Anchorage location
! 4-door models
1) For left seat
2) For center seat
3) For right seat
Three upper anchorages are installed on
the rear shelf behind the rear seat.
! 5-door models
1) For left seat
2) For center seat
3) For right seat
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
– CONTINUED –
1-37
1
Black plate (66,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/Child restraint systems
Three upper anchorages are installed on
the back side of the rear seatback.
! To hook the top tether
CAUTION
. Except for the center seating
position on 5-door models, re-
move the head restraint when
mounting a child restraint sys-
tem. Otherwise, it might be pos-
sible that the top tether cannot be
fastened tightly.
. For the center seating position on
5-door models, raise the center
head restraint to the extended
position when mounting a child
restraint system. Otherwise, it
will be impossible to use the
seatbelt guide that is attached
to the head restraint correctly.
The seatbelt guide is essential
for routing the belt webbing at
the center seating position. For
information about using the seat-
belt guide, refer to “Rear center
seatbelt on 5-door models” F1-
16.
4-door models
5-door models
1. Open the cover (4-door models) and
attach the top tether hook to the appro-
priate upper anchorage.
For the center seating position on 5-
door models, route the top tether under
the head restraint as illustrated below.
1) Seatbelt guide
2) Seatbelt of the center seating position
3) Top tether
2. Tighten the top tether securely.
Please contact your SUBARU dealer if
you have any questi on regarding the
installation of a child restraint system.
1-38
Black plate (67,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
*SRS airbag (Supplemental
Restraint System airbag)
*SRS: This stands for supplemental re-
straint system. This name is used be-
cause the airbag system supplements the
vehicle’s seatbelts.
Your vehicle is equipped with a supple-
mental restraint system in addition to a
lap/shoulder belt at each front seating
position and each rear window-side seat-
ing positions. The supplemental restraint
system (SRS) consists of seven airbags.
The configurations are as follows.
. Driver’s and front passenger’s frontal
airbags
. Driver’s and front passenger’s side
airbags
. Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas-
senger, and window-side rear passen-
gers)
. Knee airbag for driver
These SRS airbags are designed only
as a supplement to the primary protec-
tion provided by the seatbelt.
The system also controls front seatbelt
pretensioners. For operation instructions
and precautions concerning the seatbelt
pretensioner, refer to “Front seatbelt pre-
tensioners” F1-20.
& General precautions regard-
ing SRS airbag system
WARNING
. To obtain maximum protection in
the event of an accident, the
driver and all passengers must
always wear seatbelts when in
the vehicle. The SRS airbag is
designed only to be a supple-
ment to the primary protection
provided by the seatbelt. It does
not eliminate the need to fasten
seatbelts. In combination with
the seatbelts, it offers the best
combined protection in case of a
serious accident.
Not wearing a seatbelt increases
the chance of severe injury or
death in a crash even when the
vehicle has the SRS airbag.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the seatbelt system,
refer to “Seatbelts” F1-11.
. The SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are designed only
to be a supplement to the primary
protection provided by the seat-
belt. They do not eliminate the
need to fasten seatbelts. It is also
important to wear your seatbelt
to help avoid injuries that can
result when an occupant is not
seated in a proper upright posi-
tion.
WARNING
. The SRS airbags deploy with
considerable speed and force.
Occupants who are out of proper
position when the SRS airbag
deploys could suffer very serious
injuries. Because the SRS airbag
needs enough space for deploy-
ment, the driver should always
sit upright and well back in the
seat as far from the steering
wheel as practical while still
maintaining full vehicle control
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-39
1
Black plate (68,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
and the front passenger should
move the seat as far back as
possible and sit upright and well
back in the seat.
WARNING
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to either front door. The
SRS side airbags are stored in
both front seat seatbacks next to
the door, and they provide pro-
tection by deploying rapidly (fas-
ter than the blink of an eye) in the
event of a side impact or frontal
collision. However, the force of
SRS side airbag deployment may
cause injuries if your head or
other parts of the body are too
close to the SRS side airbag.
. Since your vehicle is equipped
with SRS curtain airbags, do not
sit or lean unnecessarily close to
the front or rear door on either
side. Also, do not put your head,
arms or hands out of the window.
The SRS curtain airbags on both
sides of the cabin are stored in
the roof side (between the front
pillar and a point behind the rear
quarter glass), and they provide
protection by deploying rapidly
(faster than the blink of an eye) in
the event of a side impact or
frontal collision. For Crosstrek
models, the SRS curtain airbags
also deploy in the event of a
rollover. However, the force of
its deployment may cause inju-
ries if your head is too close to it.
. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the SRS airbag. Because
the SRS airbag deploys with
considerable speed – faster than
the blink of an eye – and force to
protect in high speed collisions,
the force of an airbag can injure
an occupant whose body is too
close to SRS airbag.
It is also important to wear your
seatbelt to help avoid injuries
that can resul t when the SRS
airbag contacts an occupant not
in proper position such as one
thrown forward during pre-acci-
dent braking.
Even when properly positioned,
there remains a possibility that
an occupant may suffer minor
injury such as abrasions and
bruises to the face or arms
because of the SRS airbag de-
ployment force.
WARNING
. Do not rest your arm on either
front door or its internal trim. You
could be injured in the event of
1-40
Black plate (69,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
SRS side airbag deployment.
. Do not place any objects over or
near the SRS airbag cover or
between you and the SRS airbag.
If the SRS airbag deploys, these
objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be
propelled inside the vehicle,
causing injury.
WARNING
. Do not put any objects over the
steering wheel pad and dash-
board. If the SRS frontal airbag
deploys, these objects could in-
terfere with its proper operation
and could be propelled inside the
vehicle, causing injury.
. Do not put any objects under the
driver’s side of the instrument
panel. If the SRS knee airbag
deploys, those objects could in-
terfere with its proper operation
and could be propelled inside the
vehicle, causing injury.
. The key must not be attached to
heavy, sharp or hard acces-
sories, or another key. If the
SRS knee airbag deploys, those
objects could interfere with its
proper operation and could be
propelled inside the vehicle and
cause injury.
WARNING
Do not attach accessories to the
windshield, or fit an extra-wide mir-
ror over the rear view mirror. If the
SRS airbag deploys, those objects
could become projectiles that could
seriously injure vehicle occupants.
WARNING
. Do not attach accessories to the
door trim or near either SRS side
airbags and do not place objects
near the SRS side airbags. In the
event of SRS side airbag deploy-
ment, they could be propelled
dangerously toward the vehicle’s
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-41
1
Black plate (70,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
occupants and cause injuries.
. Do not attach a hands-free micro-
phone or any other accessory to
a front pillar, a center pillar, a rear
pillar, the windshield, a side win-
dow, an assist grip, or any other
cabin surface that would be near
a deploying SRS curtain airbag.
A hands-free microphone or
other accessory in such a loca-
tion could be propelled through
the cabin with great force by the
curtain airbag, or it could prevent
correct deployment of the curtain
airbag. In either case, the result
could be serious injuries.
WARNING
Do not hang coat hangers or other
hard or pointed objects on the coat
hooks. If such items were hanging
on the coat hooks during deploy-
ment of the SRS curtain airbags,
they could cause serious injuries by
coming off the coat hooks and being
thrown through the cabin or by
preventing deployment of the cur-
tain airbags.
Before hanging clothing on the coat
hooks, make sure there are no sharp
objects in the pockets. Hang cloth-
ing directly on the coat hooks with-
out using hangers.
WARNING
Do not put any kind of cover or
clothes or other objects over either
front seatback and do not attach
labels or stickers to the front seat
surface on or near the SRS side
airbag. They could prevent proper
deployment of the SRS side airbag,
reducing protection available to the
front seat’s occupant.
WARNING
Place children in the rear seat
properly restrained at all times. The
SRS airbag deploys with consider-
able speed and force and can injure
1-42
Black plate (71,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
or even kill children, especially if
they are not restrained or impro-
perly restrained. Because children
are lighter and weaker than adults,
their risk of being injured from
deployment is greater.
For that reason, we strongly recom-
mend that ALL children (including
those in child seats and those that
have outgrown child restraint de-
vices) sit in the REAR seat properly
restrained at all times in a child
restraint device or in a seatbelt,
whichever is appropriate for the
child’s age, height and weight.
Secure ALL types of child restraint
devices (including forward facing
child seats) in the REAR seats at
all times.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating posi-
tions than in the front seating posi-
tions.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the child restraint sys-
tem, refer to “Child restraint sys-
tems” F1-25.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD
BY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEAD
TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING
Never allow a child to stand up or
kneel on the front passenger’s seat.
The SRS airbag deploys with con-
siderable force and can injure or
even kill the child.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-43
1
Black plate (72,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
WARNING
Never hold a child on your lap or in
your arms. The SRS airbag deploys
with considerable force and can
injure or even kill the child.
WARNING
. Never allow a child to do the
following.
– Kneel on any passenger ’s
seat facing the side window
– Wrap his/her arms around the
front seat seatback
– Put his/he r head, arms or
other parts of the body out of
the window
In the event of an accident, the
force of SRS side airbag and/or
SRS curtain airbag deployment
could injure the child seriously
because his/her head, arms or
other parts of the body are too
close to the SRS side airbag and/
or SRS curtain airbag.
. Since your vehicle is also
equipped with a front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag, children
should be placed in the rear seat
anyway and should be properly
restrained at all times.
CAUTION
. When the SRS airbag deploys,
some smoke will be released.
This smoke could cause breath-
ing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. If you or your
passengers have breathing pro-
blems after SRS airbag deploys,
1-44
Black plate (73,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
get fresh air promptly.
. A deploying SRS airbag releases
hot gas. Occupants could get
burned if they come into direct
contact with the hot gas.
NOTE
. When you sell your vehicle, we urge
you to explain to the buyer that it is
equipped with SRS airbags by alerting
the buyer to the applicable section in
this Owner’s Manual.
. If the SRS airbag deploys, fuel
supply will be cut off to reduce the risk
of fire caused by leaking fuel. For
details about restarting of the engine,
refer to “If your vehicle is involved in
an accident” F9-20.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-45
1
Black plate (74,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
& Components
1) SRS frontal airbag
2) SRS side airbag
3) SRS curtain airbag
4) SRS knee airbag
The SRS airbags are stowed in the
following locations.
Driver’s SRS frontal airbag: in the center
portion of the steering wheel
A “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at the
pad of the airbag.
Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag:
near the top of the dashboard under the
“SRS AIRBAG” mark
SRS side airbag: in the door side of each
front seat seatback which bears an “SRS
AIRBAG” label
SRS cur tain airbag: in the roof side
(between the front pillar and a point
behind the rear quarter glass)
“SRS AIRBAG” marks are located at the
top of each center pillar and each rear
pillar.
SRS knee airbag: unde r the steering
column
A “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at the
door of the airbag.
1-46
Black plate (75,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
1) Airbag control module (including impact
sensor [all models] and rollover sensor
[Crosstrek models])
2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)
3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
4) Front sub sensor (left-hand side)
5) Front sub sensor (right-hand side)
6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)
7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s
side)
8) Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand
side)
9) Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-
hand side)
10) Airbag wiring
11) Seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)
12) Seatbelt pretensioner (front passenger’s
side)
13) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
right-hand side)
14) Curtain airbag sensor (rear wheel house
left-hand side)
15) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)
16) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)
17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s
side)
18) Knee airbag module (driver’s side)
19) Front passenger’s occupant detection
system sensor
20) Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module
21) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicator
22) SRS airbag system warning light
23) Satellite safing sensor (under the rear
center seat)
24) Front door impact sensor (left-hand side)
25) Front door impact sensor (right-hand
side)
26) Lap belt pretensioner (front passenger’s
side in Crosstrek models)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-47
1
Black plate (76,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
& SUBARU advanced frontal
airbag system
Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system that com-
plies with the new advanced frontal airbag
requirements in the amended Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
No. 208.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system automatically determines the de-
ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag at the time of deployment as well as
whether or not to activate t he front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, if
activated, the deployment force of the
SRS frontal airbag at the time of deploy-
ment.
Your vehicle has warning labels on the
driver’s and front passenger’s sun visors
beginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH
ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag
attached to the glove box lid beginning
with the phrase “Even with Advanced Air
Bags”. Make sure that you carefully read
the instructions on the warning labels and
tag.
Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARU
advanced frontal airbag system is a
supplemental restraint system and must
be used in combination with a seatbelt. All
occupants should wear a seatbelt or be
seated in an appropriate child restraint
system.
For the locations of the SRS airbags, refer
to “Components” F1-46.
In a moderate to severe frontal collision,
the following components deploy.
. SRS frontal airbag for driver
. SRS frontal airbag for front passenger
. SRS knee airbag for driver
. SRS curtain airbag*
1
*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag occurs.
These components supplement the seat-
belts by reducing the impact to the
occupant’s head, chest and knees.
! Driver’s SRS frontal airbag
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a
dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in
different ways depending on the severity
of impact.
Have the system inspected by your
SUBARU dealer immediately if the SRS
airbag system warning light illuminates.
NOTE
The driver’s SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are not controlled by the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-
tem.
! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-
bag
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator
operates in different ways depending on
the severity of impact.
The occupant detection system sensor is
installed under the seat upholstery and
monitors the physique and posture of the
front passenger. Using this information,
the occupant detection system determines
whether the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag should be deployed or not.
The occupant detection system may not
inflate the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys. This is normal. In this
case, although the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag does not operate, the front
passenger’s seatbelt pretensioner oper-
ates with the driver’s seatbelt preten-
sioner. For detai ls ab out the seatbelt
pretensioner, refer to “Front seatbelt pre-
tensioners” F1-20.
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may prevent the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system from functioning correctly
or cause the system to fail.
1-48
Black plate (77,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
. Do not apply any strong impact
to the front passenger ’sseat
such as by kicking.
. Do not let rear passengers rest
their feet between the front seat-
back and seat cushion.
. Do not spill liquid on the front
passenger ’s seat. If l iquid is
spilled, wipe it off immediately.
. Do not remove or disassemble
the front passenger’s seat.
. Do not install any accessory
(such as an audio amplifier) other
than a genuine SUBARU acces-
sory under the front passenger’s
seat.
. Do not place anything (shoes,
umbrella, etc.) under the front
passenger’s seat.
. Do not use the front passenger’s
seat with the head restraint re-
moved.
. Do not leave any articles on the
front passenger ’s seat or the
seatbelt tongue and buckle en-
gaged when you leave your ve-
hicle.
. Do not put sharp object(s) on the
seat or pierce the seat uphols-
tery.
. Do not place a magnet near the
seatbelt buckle and the seatbelt
retractor.
. Do not use front seats with their
forward-backward position and
seatback not being locked into
place securely. If any of them are
not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure,
refer to “Forward and backward
adjustment” F1-3 and “Reclining
the seatback” F1-4.
If the seatbelt buckle switch and/or front
passenger’s occupant detection system
have failed, the SRS ai rbag system
warning light will illuminate. Have the
system inspected by your SUBARU deal-
er immediately if the SRS airbag system
warning light illuminates.
If your vehicle has sustained impact, this
may affect the proper function of the
SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.
Have your vehicle i nspected at your
SUBARU dealer. Do not use the front
passenger’s seat while driving the vehicle
to your SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
The front passenger’s SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag are not con-
trolled by the SUBARU advanced fron-
tal airbag system.
! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and
OFF indicators
Refer to “Front passenger’s frontal airbag
ON and OFF indicators” F3-16.
! Occupant detection system
The occupant detection system sensor is
installed under the seat upholstery and
monitors the physique and posture of the
front passenger. Using this information,
the occupant detection system determines
whether the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag should be deployed or not.
If the front passenger’s seat cushion is
wet, this may adversely affect the ability of
the system to determine deployment. If
the seat cushion is wet, the front passen-
ger should stop sitting on the front
passenger’s seat. Wipe off liquid from
the seat immediately, let the seat dry
naturally and then check the SRS airbag
system warning light as follows.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-49
1
Black plate (78,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
SRS airbag system warning light (type A)
SRS airbag system warning light (type B)
. If the SRS airbag system warning light
illuminates, keep the seat dry until the
warning light turns off. If the SRS airbag
system warning light stays on even when
the seat has dried, do not allow anyone to
sit on the front passenger’s seat and have
the system checked by your SUBARU
dealer.
. If the SRS airbag system warning light
does not illuminate, check that the front
passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF
indicators work properly. If the indicators
do not work properly, do not allow anyone
to sit on the front passenger’s seat and
have the system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
Also, if luggage or electronic devices are
placed on the front passenger’s seat, this
may adversely affect the ability of the
system to determine deployment. This
may prevent the front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON and OFF indicators from work-
ing properly. Check that the indicators
work properly.
When the OFF indicator turns off and the
ON indicator illuminates, the front passen-
ger’s frontal airbag may deploy during a
collision. Remove luggage and electronic
devices from the front passenger’s seat.
CAUTION
Electrical devices, such as cell
phones, lap tops, po rtable music
players, or electronic games, espe-
cially when connected to the acces-
sory power outlet and placed on the
front passenger’s seat or used by
the person sitting in the front pas-
senger’s seat, may affect the opera-
tion of the occupant detection sys-
tem. If either of the following situa-
tions occurs when using an electro-
nic device in the vehicle, at first try
to relocate that device to avoid it
creating any interference.
. The SRS airbag system warning
light illuminates.
. The front passenger’s frontal air-
bag ON and OFF indicators oper-
ate erratically.
1-50
Black plate (79,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
If the device continues to cause
interference, the use of that device
in the vehicle should be discontin-
ued.
NOTE
This device complies with Part 18 of
the FCC Rules. This device may cause
interference. If this device causes inter-
ference, consult the nearest SUBARU
dealer. Also, for maintenance of the
system, consult the nearest SUBARU
dealer. This product may cause inter-
ference to radio equipment and should
not be installed near maritime safety
communications equipment or other
critical navigation or communication
equipment operating between 0.45-30
MHz.
! Conditions in which front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is not
activated
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will not be activated when any of the
following conditions are met regarding the
front passenger’s seat:
. The seat is empty.
. The seat is equipped with an appro-
priate child restraint system and an infant
is restrained in it. (See WARNING that
follows.)
. The front passenger’s occupant detec-
tion system is malfunctioning.
WARNING
NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FA-
CING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT
PASSENGER’S SEAT EVEN IF THE
FRONT PASSENGER’S SRS FRON-
TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be
sure to install it in the REAR seat in
a correct manner. Also, it is strongly
recommended that any forward fa-
cing child seat or booster seat be
installed in the REAR seat, and that
even children who have outgrown a
child restraint system be also
seated in the REAR seat. This is
because children sitting in the front
passenger’s seat may be killed or
severely injured should the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-
ploy. REAR seats are the safest
place for children.
CAUTION
When the front passenger’s seat is
occupied by an infant in an appro-
priate child restraint system, ob-
serve the following precautions.
Failure to do so may interfere with
the proper operation of the occu-
pant detection system, activating
the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag even though that seat is
occupied by the infant in the child
restraint system.
. Do not place any article (includ-
ing electronic devices) on the
seat other than the infant in the
child restraint system.
. Do not place more than one
infant in the child restraint sys-
tem.
! If the front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON indicator illuminates
and the OFF indicator turns off
even when an infant or a small
child is in a child restraint sys-
tem (including booster seat)
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
2. Remove the child restraint system
from the seat.
3. By referring to the child restraint
manufacturer’s recommendations as well
as the child restraint system installation
procedures in “Child restraint systems”
F1-25, correctly install the child restraint
system.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-51
1
Black plate (80,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and make sure that the front
passenger’s frontal airbag ON indicator
turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.
If still the ON indicator remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off, take the
following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than the child restraint system
and the child occupant.
. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
sition and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth.
If the ON indicator still remains illuminated
while the OFF indicator turns off after
taking relevant corrective actions de-
scribed above, relocate the child restraint
system to the rear seat and immediately
contact you r SUBAR U dealer for an
inspection.
NOTE
When a child who has outgrown a child
restraint system or a small adult is
seated in the front passenger’s seat,
the SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system may or may not activate the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
depending on the occupant’s seating
posture. Children should always wear a
seatbelt when sitting in the seat irre-
spective of whether the airbag is
deactivated or activated. If the front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag is acti-
vated (the ON indicator remains illumi-
nated while the OFF indicator turns off),
take the following action.
. Ensure that no article is placed on
the seat other than the occupant.
If the ON indicator still remains illumi-
nated while the OFF indicator turns off
despite the fact that the actions noted
above have been taken, seat the child/
small adult in the rear seat and im-
mediately contact your SUBARU dealer
for an inspection. Even if the system
has passed the dealer inspection, it is
recommended that on subsequent trips
the child/small adult always take the
rear seat.
Children who have outgrown a child
restraint system should always wear the
seatbelt irrespective of whether the airbag
is deactivated or activated.
! Conditions in which front passen-
ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated
The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
will be activated for deployment upon
impact when any of the following condi-
tions are met regarding the front passen-
ger’s seat.
. When the seat is occupied by an adult.
. When certain items (e.g. jug of water)
are placed on the seat.
! If the passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator illuminates and
the ON indicator turns off even
when the front passenger’s seat
is occupied by an adult
This can be caused by the adult incor-
rectly sitting in the front passenger’s seat.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
2. Ask the front passenger to set the
seatback to the upright position, sit up
straight in the center of the seat cushion,
correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/
her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to
the rearmost position.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
If the OFF indicator remains illuminated
while the ON indicator remains off, take
the following actions.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
2. Make sure that the front passenger
does not use a blanket, seat cushion, seat
cover, seat heater or massager, etc.
1-52
Black plate (81,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing,
the front passenger should remove any
unnecessary items before sitting in the
front passenger’s seat, or should sit in a
rear seat.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and wait 6 seconds to allow the
system to complete self-checking. Follow-
ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator
should illuminate while the OFF indicator
remains off.
If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-
nated while the ON indicator remains off,
ask the occupant to move to the rear seat
and immediately contact your SUBARU
dealer for an inspection.
! How to contact the vehicle manu-
facturer concerning modifications
for persons with disabilities that
may affect the advanced airbag
system
Changing or moving any parts of the front
seats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper,
front side frame, radiator panel, instrument
panel, combination meter, steering wheel,
steering column, tire, suspension or floor
panel can affect the operation of the
SUBARU advanced airbag system. If
you have any questions, you may contact
the following SUBARU distributors.
<Continental U.S., Alaska and the District
of Columbia>
Subaru of America, Inc.
Customer Dealer Services Department
P.O. Box 6000
Cherry Hill, NJ 08034-6000
1-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)
<Hawaii>
Subaru Hawaii
2850 Pukoloa Street, Suite 202,
Honolulu, HI 96819-4467
808-839-2273
<Guam>
Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-
bile
491, East Marine Corps Drive, Route 1
Dededo, Guam 96921-6225
671-633-2698
<Puerto Rico>
Trebol Motors
P.O. Box 11204, San Juan, Puerto Rico
00910
787-793-2828
<Canada>
Subaru Canada, Inc.
Consumer Support Department
560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, Ontario
L5R 4J7
1-800-894-4212
There are currently no SUBARU distribu-
tors in any other U.S. territories. If you are
in such an area, please contact the
SUBARU distributor or dealer from which
you bought your vehicle.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-53
1
Black plate (82,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
! Operation
A) Driver’s side
B) Passenger’s side
1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.
2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not
obstructed.
The SRS airbags can function only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The SUBARU advanced frontal airbag
system is designed to determine the
activation or deactivation condition of the
front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
depending on the characteristic of item
(s) or person on the front passenger’s seat
monitored by the front passenger’s occu-
pant detection system sensor. For this
reason, only the driver ’s SRS frontal
airbag may deploy in the e vent of a
collision, but this does not mean failure
of the system.
If the following sensors detect a predeter-
mined amount of force during a frontal
collision, the control module sends signals
to the airbag module(s) (only driver’s
module or both driver’s and front passen-
ger’s modules) instructing the module(s)
to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s).
. the front sub sensors
. the impact sensors in the airbag control
module
On the driver’s side, the SRS knee airbag
also inflates with the SRS frontal airbag.
1-54
Black plate (83,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags use dual stage inflators.
The two inflators of each airbag are
triggered either sequentially or simulta-
neously, depending on the severity of
impact, in the case of the driver’s SRS
frontal airbag and depending on the
severity of impact and the characteristic
of item(s) or person on the seat in the case
of the front passenger ’s S RS frontal
airbag.
After deployment, the SRS airbag imme-
diately starts to deflate so that the driver’s
vision is not obstructed and the driver’s
ability to maintain control of the vehicle is
not impaired. The time required from
detecting impact to the deflation of the
SRS airbag after deployment is shorter
than the blink of an eye.
Both when only the driver’s SRS frontal
airbag deploys and the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,
the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt
pretensioners operate at the same time.
When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,
fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and
some smoke will be released. These
occurrences are a normal result of the
deployment. This smoke does not indicate
a fire in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS airbag system
components around the steerin g
wheel and dashboard w ith bare
hands right after deployment. Doing
so can cause burns because the
components can be very hot as a
result of deployment.
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-
signed as follows.
. to deploy in the event of an accident
involving a moderate to severe frontal
collision
. to function on a one-time-only basis
The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbag are not
designed as follows.
. to deploy in most lesser frontal im-
pacts
*1
. to deploy in most side or rear impacts
or in most roll-over accidents
*2
*1: Because the necessary protection can be
achieved by the seatbelt alone.
*2: Because deployment of only the driver’s
SRS frontal airbag or both the driver’s and front
passenger ’s SRS frontal airbags would not
protect the occupant in those situations.
SRS airbag deployment depends on the
level of force experienced in the passen-
ger compartment during a collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on
the visible damage done to the vehicle
itself.
! Example of accident in which the
driver’s/driver’s and front pas-
senger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)
will most likely deploy
A head-on collision against a thick con-
crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19
mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates
only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-
vated when the vehicle is exposed to a
frontal impact similar in fashion and
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-55
1
Black plate (84,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
magnitude to the collision described
above.
! Examples of the types of acci-
dents in which it is possible that
the driver’s/driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy
Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or
both driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags may be activated when the
vehicle sustains a hard impact in the
undercarriage area from the road surface
(such as when the vehicle plunges into a
deep ditch, is severely impacted or
knocked hard against an obstacle on the
road such as a curb).
1-56
Black plate (85,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/
driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur
1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as a
telephone pole or sign pole.
2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of
a truck.
3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offset
frontal impact.
4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontal
collision.
5) The vehicle strikes an object that can
move or deform, such as a parked
vehicle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require deployment
of driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s
SRS frontal airbag(s). In the eve nt of
accidents like those illustrated, the dri-
ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-
ing on the level of accident forces in-
volved.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-57
1
Black plate (86,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
! Examples of the types of acci-
dents in which the driver’s/dri-
ver ’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag(s) are not de-
signed to deploy in most cases
The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbags are not designed to deploy
in most of the following cases.
. If the vehicle is struck from the side or
from behind
. If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
. If the vehicle is involved in a low-speed
frontal collision
1) First impact
2) Second impact
In an accident where the vehicle is
impacted more than once, the driver’s
and/or front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag(s) will deploy only once on the first
impact.
Example: In the case of a double collision,
first with another vehicle, then against a
concrete wall in immediate succession,
once either or both of the driver’s and front
passenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/are
activated on the first impact, it/they will not
be activated on the second impact.
& SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag
The SRS side airbag is stored in the door
side of each front seat seatback, which
bears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.
Inamoderatetoseveresideimpact
collision, the SRS side airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the door panel
and supplements the seatbelt by reducing
the impact on the occupant’s chest and
waist. The SRS side airbag operates only
for front seat occupants.
The SRS curtain airbag on each side of
1-58
Black plate (87,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
the cabin is stored in the ro of side
(between the front pillar and a point over
the rear seat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is
located at the top of each center pillar.
In a moderate to severe side impact
collision, the SRS curtain airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle deploys
between the occupant and the side
window and supplements the seatbelt by
reducing the impact on the occupant’s
head.
For Crosstrek models, in a rollover, SRS
curtain airbags on both sides o f the
vehicle deploy between the occupant
and the side window and supplement the
seatbelt by reducing the impact to the
occupant’s head.
In an offset frontal collision, SRS curtain
airbags on both sides of the vehicle
deploy between the occupant and the
side window and supplement the seatbelt
by reducing the impact to the occupant’s
head and chest.
! Operation
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag can function only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The following airbags deploy indepen-
dently of each other since each has its
own impact sensor.
. Driver’s SRS side airbag
. Front passenger’s SRS side airbag
. SRS curtain airbag (right-hand side)
. SRS curtain airbag (left-hand side)
Therefore, they may not both deploy in the
same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag deploys indepen-
dently of the driver’s and front passen-
ger ’s SRS frontal airbags in the steering
wheel and instrument panel.
An impact sensor, which senses impact
force, is located in each of the following
locations.
. In the left and right front doors
. In the left and right center pillars
. In the left and right rear wheel houses
. Under the rear center seat
For Crosstrek models, a rollover sensor is
also located inside the airbag control
module.
If both of the following sensors together
sense an impact force above a predeter-
mined level in a side collision, the control
module causes both the SRS side airbag
and curtain airbag on the impacted side
to inflate regardless of whether the rear
wheel house impact sensor on the same
side senses an impact.
. the impact sensor that is located under
the rear center seat
. one of the center pillar impact sensors
or front door impact sensors
If both of the following sensors together
sense an impact force above a predeter-
mined level in a side collision, the control
module causes only the SRS curtain
airbag on the impacted side to inflate.
. the impact sensor that is located under
the rear center seat
. one of the rear wheel house impact
sensors
For Crosstrek models, if the rollover
sensor detects rollover of the vehicle, the
control module inflates the SRS curtain
airbags on both sides. At this time, the
driver’s and front passenger’s seatbelt
pretensioners also operate at the same
time.
After the deployment, the SRS side airbag
immediately starts to deflate. The time
required from detection of an impact to
deflation of an SRS side air bag after
deployment is shorter than the blink of
an eye.
The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated
for a while following depl oyment then
slowly deflates.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-59
1
Black plate (88,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
airbag deploy even when no one occupies
the seat on the side on which an impact is
applied.
When the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud
inflation noise will be heard and some
smoke will be relea sed. These occur-
rences are a normal result of the deploy-
ment. This smoke does not indicate a fire
in the vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not touch the SRS side airbag
system components around the
front seat seatback with bare hands
right after deployment. Doing so can
cause burns because the compo-
nents can be very hot as a result of
deployment.
After deployment, do not touch any
part of the SRS curtain airbag
system (from the front pillar to the
part of the roof side over the rear
seat). Doing so can cause burns
beca use the components can be
very hot as a result of deployment.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are designed as follows:
. to deploy in the event of an accident
involvingamoderatetosevereside
impact collision
. to function on a one-time-only basis.
The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain
airbag are not designed to deploy in the
following cases:
. in most lesser side impact
. in most frontal or most rear impacts
(because the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag deployment would not
protect the occupant in those situations)
For Crosstrek models, the SRS curtain
airbags are also designed to deploy when
the vehicle is in an extremely inclined
state such as during a rollover. They are
not designed to deploy in most lesser
inclined state.
SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag
deployment depend on the level of force
experienced in the passenger compart-
ment during a side impact collision. That
level differs from one type of collision to
another, and it may have no bearing on
the visible damage done to the vehicle
itself.
! Example of the type of accident
in which the SRS side airbag will
most likely deploy.
1) A severe side impact near the front seat.
1-60
Black plate (89,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Examples of the types of acci-
dents in which the SRS curtain
airbag will most likely deploy.
Except Crosstrek models
1) A severe side impact near the front seat
or the rear seat.
2) An offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-61
1
Black plate (90,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
Crosstrek models
1) The vehicle is involved in a severe side
impact near the front seat or the rear
seat.
2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
3) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or
the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curb-
stone laterally.
4) An offset frontal collision that is severe
enough to deploy the front airbag.
1-62
Black plate (91,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side
airbag and the SRS curtain airbag will deploy (Crosstrek models).
1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard
surface
2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3) Landing hard or vehicle falling
It is possible that the SRS side and curtain
airbags will deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle.
Some examples are shown in the illustra-
tion.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-63
1
Black plate (92,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely
to deploy.
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS side
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS side
airbag may not deploy depending on the
level of accident forces involved.
1-64
Black plate (93,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is
unlikely to deploy.
Except Crosstrek models
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-65
1
Black plate (94,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
Crosstrek models
1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique
side-on impact.
2) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact in an area outside the vicinity of
the passenger compartment.
3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or
similar object.
4) The vehicle is involved in a side-on
impact from a motorcycle.
There are many types of collisions which
might not necessarily require SRS curtain
airbag deployment. In the event of acci-
dents like those illustrated, the SRS
curtain airbag may not deploy depending
on the level of accident forces involved.
1-66
Black plate (95,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Examples of the types of acci-
dents in which the SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag
are not designed to deploy in
most cases
1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collision
with another vehicle (moving or station-
ary).
2) The vehicle is struck from behind.
3) The vehicle pitches end over end.
In the event of acci dents like those
illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS
curtain airbag are not designed to deploy
in most cases.
1) First impact
2) Second impact
A) SRS curtain airbag
B) SRS side airbag
In an accident where the vehicle is struck
from the side more than once, the SRS
side airbag and SRS curtain airbag deploy
only once on the first impact.
Example: In the case of a double side
impact collision, first with one vehicle and
immediately followed by another from the
same direction, once the SRS side airbag
and SRS curtain airbag are activated on
the first impact, they will not be activated
on the second.
& SRS airbag system monitors
SRS airbag system warning light (type A)
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-67
1
Black plate (96,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
SRS airbag system warning light (type B)
A diagnostic system continually monitors
the readiness of the SRS airbag system
(including front seatbelt pretensioners)
while the vehicle is being driven. The
SRS airbag system warning light will show
normal system operation by illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
The following components are monitored
by the indicator:
. Front sub sensor
– Right-hand side
– Left-hand side
. Airbag control module (including im-
pact sensor [all models] a nd rollover
sensor [Crosstrek models])
. Frontal airbag module
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Knee airbag module (driver’s side)
. Side airbag sensor
– Center pillar right-hand side
– Center pillar left-hand side
. Front door impact sensor
– Right-hand side
– Left-hand side
. Side airbag module
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Curtain airbag sensor
– Rear wheel house right-hand side
– Rear wheel house left-hand side
. Curtain airbag module
– Right-hand side
– Left-hand side
. Satellite safing sensor (under the rear
center seat)
. Seatbelt pretensioner
– Driver’s side
– Front passenger’s side
. Lap belt pretensioner (front passen-
ger ’s side in Crosstrek models)
. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-
ger ’s side)
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
system sensor
. Front passenger’s occupant detection
control module
. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicator
. All related wiring
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
be a malfunction in the seatbelt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
system.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn-
ing light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
Immediately take your vehicle to
your nearest SUBARU dealer to
have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbag will not operate properly in
the event of a collision, which may
increase the risk of injury.
1-68
Black plate (97,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& SRS airbag system servicing
WARNING
. When discarding an airbag mod-
ule or scrapping the entire vehi-
cle damaged by a collision, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer.
. The SRS airbag has no user-
serviceable parts. Do not use
electrical test equipment on any
circuit related to the SRS airbag
system. For required servicing of
the SRS airbag, consult your
nearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-
ing with or disconnecting the
system’s wiring could result in
accidental inflation of the SRS
airbag or could make the system
inoperative, which may result in
serious injury.
CAUTION
If you need service or repair in areas
indicated in the following list, have
the work performed by an author-
ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air-
bag control module, impact sensors
and airbag modules are stored in
these areas.
. Under the center of the instru-
ment panel
. On both the right and left sides at
the front of the vehicle
. Steering wheel and column and
nearby areas
. Bottom of the steering column
and nearby areas
. Top of the dashboard on front
passenger’s s ide and nearby
areas
. Each front seat and nearby area
. Inside each center pillar
. Inside each front door
. In each roof side (from the front
pillar to a point over the rear seat)
. Between the rear seat cushion
and rear wheel house on each
side
. Under the rear center seat
In the event that the SRS airbag is
deployed, replacement of the system
should be performed only by an author-
ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-
nents of the SRS airbag system are
replaced, use only genuine SUBARU
parts.
NOTE
In the following cases, contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The front part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident in which only
the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or both
driver ’s and front passenger’sSRS
frontal airbags did not deploy.
. The pad of the steering wheel, the
cover over the front passenger’s SRS
frontal airbag, or either roof side (from
the front pillar to a point over the rear
seat) is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
. The center pillar, front door, rear
wheel house or rear sub frame, or an
area near these parts, was involved in
an accident in which the SRS side
airbag and SRS curtain airbag did not
deploy.
. The fabric or leather of either front
seatback is cut, frayed, or otherwise
damaged.
. The rear part of the vehicle was
involved in an accident in which no
SRS airbag was deployed.
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
– CONTINUED –
1-69
1
Black plate (98,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags/*SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)
& Precautions against vehicle
modification
WARNING
To avoid accidental activation of the
system or rendering the system
inoperative, which may result in
serious injury, no modifications
should be made to any components
or wiring of the SRS airbag system.
This includes f ollowing modifica-
tions.
. Installat ion of custom steering
wheels
. A ttachment of additional trim
materials to the dashboard
. Installation of custom seats
. Replacement of seat fabric or
leather
. Installation of additional fabric or
leather on the front seat
. Attachment of a hands-free mi-
crophone or any other accessory
to a front pillar, a center pillar, a
rear pillar, the windshield, a side
window, an assist grip, or any
other cabin surface that would be
near a deploying SRS curtain
airbag.
. Installation of additional electri-
cal/electronic equipment such as
a mobile two-way radio on or
near the SRS airbag system
components and/or wiring is not
advisable. This coul d interfere
with proper operation of the
SRS airbag system.
CAUTION
Do not perform any of the following
modifications. Such modi fications
can interfere with proper operation
of the SRS airbag system.
. Attachment of any equipment
(bush bar, winches, snow plow,
skid plate, etc.) other than genu-
ine SUBARU accessory parts to
the front end.
. Modification of the suspension
system or front end structure.
. Installation of a tire of different
size and construction from the
tires specified on the vehicle
placard attached to the driver’s
door pillar or specified for indivi-
dual vehicle models in this Own-
er’s Manual.
. Attachment of any equipment
(side steps or side sill protectors,
etc.) other than genuine SUBARU
accessory parts to the side body.
Always consult your SUBARU dealer if
you want to install any accessory parts on
your vehicle.
1-70
Black plate (3,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys ..................................................................... 2-3
Key number plate................................................ 2-3
Immobilizer .......................................................... 2-3
Security indicator light ........................................ 2-4
Key replacement ................................................. 2-4
Certification for immobilizer system..................... 2-4
Door locks ........................................................... 2-5
Locking and unlocking from the outside .............. 2-5
Locking and unlocking from the inside ................ 2-7
Battery drainage prevention function ................... 2-7
Power door locking switches............................. 2-8
Key lock-in prevention function ........................... 2-9
Keyless access with push-button start
system (if equipped) ........................................ 2-9
Safety precautions ............................................. 2-10
Locking and unlocking with “keyless access”
entry function................................................... 2-13
Selecting audible signal operation ...................... 2-18
Warning chimes and warning indicator ............... 2-18
Disabling keyless access function ...................... 2-18
When access key does not operate properly ....... 2-20
Replacing battery of access key ......................... 2-20
Replacing access key......................................... 2-20
Certification for keyless access with push-button
start system..................................................... 2-20
PIN Code Access (models with “keyless
access with push-button start system”)........ 2-21
Registering a PIN code ....................................... 2-22
Unlocking .......................................................... 2-23
Remote keyless entry system ........................... 2-23
Locking the doors .............................................. 2-25
Unlocking the doors .......................................... 2-25
Opening the trunk lid (4-door) ............................ 2-25
Unlocking the rear gate (5-door) ......................... 2-25
Vehicle finder function ....................................... 2-25
Sounding a panic alarm ..................................... 2-25
Selecting audible signal operation (models
without “keyless access with push-button start
system”).......................................................... 2-26
Replacing the battery......................................... 2-26
Replacing lost transmitters ................................ 2-26
Certification for remote keyless entry system ..... 2-26
Alarm system..................................................... 2-27
System operation............................................... 2-28
Activating and deactivating the alarm system ..... 2-28
If you have accidentally triggered the alarm
system ............................................................ 2-28
Arming the system ............................................ 2-29
Disarming the system ........................................ 2-32
Valet mode ........................................................ 2-32
Passive arming (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”) ....................... 2-32
Tripped sensor identification .............................. 2-34
Shock sensors (dealer option)............................ 2-34
Child safety locks .............................................. 2-35
Windows............................................................. 2-35
Power window operation by driver ..................... 2-35
Power window operation by passengers............. 2-37
Initialization of power window ............................ 2-38
Trunk lid (4-door) ............................................... 2-38
To open and close the trunk lid from outside...... 2-39
To open the trunk lid from inside........................ 2-39
Keys and doors
2
Black plate (4,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys and doors
Internal trunk lid release handle.......................... 2-39
Rear gate (5-door) .............................................. 2-41
Lock/unlock ....................................................... 2-41
Open/close......................................................... 2-41
Moonroof (if equipped)...................................... 2-42
Moonroof switches ............................................ 2-43
Sun shade ......................................................... 2-44
Black plate (103,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys
NOTE
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, refer to
“Keyless access with push-button start
system” F2-9.
1) Master key
2) Submaster key
3) Sub key
4) Key number plate
Three types of keys are provided for your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it bangs
against your knees while you are
driving, it could turn the ignition
switch from the “ON” position to the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position, thereby
stopping the engine.
& Key number plate
The key number is stamped on the key
number plate attached to the key set.
Write down the key number and keep it in
another safe place, not in the vehicle. This
number is needed to make a replacement
key if you lose your key or lock it inside the
vehicle. Refer to “Key replacement” F2-4.
Immobilizer
The immobilizer system is designed to
prevent an una uthorized pe rson from
starting the engine. Only keys registered
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system can
be used to operate your vehicle. This
system, however, is not a 100% anti-theft
guarantee.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
If you press the push-button ignition
switch when carrying an unregistered
access key, the switch will not turn to the
“ON” position and the engine will not start.
If the engine does not start, perform the
procedure described in “Starting engine”
F9-19.
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
Even if an unregistered key fits into the
ignition switch and can be turned to the
“START” position, the engine will auto-
matically stop after several seconds.
If the engine does not start, pull out the
key once before trying again. Refer to
“Ignition switch (models without “keyless
access with push-button start system”)”
F3-4.
Keys and doors/Keys
– CONTINUED –
2-3
2
Black plate (104,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys and doors/Immobilizer
CAUTION
. Do not place the key under direct
sunlight or anywhere it may
become hot.
. Do not get the key wet. If the key
gets wet, wipe it dry with a cloth
immediately.
NOTE
. To protect your vehicle from theft,
please pay close attention to the fol-
lowing security precautions:
– Never leave your vehicle unat-
tended with its keys inside.
– Before leaving your vehicle,
close all windows and the moon-
roof, and lock the doors and rear
gate.
– Do not leave spare keys or any
record of your key number in the
vehicle.
. The vehicle has a maintenance-free
type immobilizer system.
& Security indicator light
Refer to “Security indicator light” F3-30.
& Key replacement
Your key number plate will be required if
you ever need a replacement key made.
Any new key must be registered for use
with your vehicle’s immobilizer system
before it can be used. The maximum
number of keys that can be registered
for use with one vehicle is as follows.
. Four (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”)
. Seven (models with “keyless access
with push-button start system”)
One key that has already been registered
is required in order to register a new key.
If you lose a key, the lost key’s ID code still
remains in the memory of the vehicle’s
immobilizer system. For security reasons,
the lost key’s ID code should be erased
from the memory. To erase the lost key’s
ID code, all keys that will be used are
required.
For details about new key registration and
erasing the lost key’s ID code, contact
your SUBARU dealer.
& Certification for immobilizer
system
. For models with “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
Refer to “Certification for keyless access
with push-button start system” F2-20.
. For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
– U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: MOZRI-38BFH
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, includi ng
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
2-4
Black plate (105,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
– Canada-spec. models – Mexico-spec. models
Door locks
& Locking and unlocking from
the outside
NOTE
If you unlock the driver’s door with a
key (including a mechanical key) and
open the door while the alarm system
is armed, the alarm system is triggered
and the vehicle ’s horn sounds. In this
case, perform any of the following
operations:
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
. Press any button on the access key
(except when the access key battery is
discharged).
. Press the push-button i gnition
switch to “ACC”.
. Carry the access key and perform
either of the following procedures.
– Grip the front door handle
– Press the rear gate opener button
Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
. Press any button on the remote
transmitter (except when the transmit-
ter battery is discharged).
. Insert the key into the ignition
switch and turn the ignition switch to
Keys and doors/Door locks
– CONTINUED –
2-5
2
Black plate (106,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys and doors/Door locks
“ON”.
For details about the alarm system,
refer to “Alarm system” F2-27.
To lock the driver’s door from the outside
with the key, turn the key toward the front.
To unlock the door, turn the key toward the
rear. Pull the outside door handle to open
an unlocked door.
NOTE
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
The mechanical key is directional. If the
key cannot be inserted, change the
direction that the grooved side is
facing and insert it again.
To lock the door from outside without the
key, the following methods are available.
Locking using lock lever
1) Rotate the lock lever forward.
2) Close the door.
2-6
Black plate (107,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Locking using power door locking switch
1) Press the front side (lock side) of the
power door locking switch.
2) Close the door.
In this case, all closed doors and the rear
gate (for 5-door) are locked at the same
time.
Always make sure that all doors and the
rear gate (for 5-door) are locked before
leaving your vehicle.
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle when locking the
doors from the outside without the key.
& Locking and unlocking from
the inside
1) Unlock
2) Lock
To lock the door from the inside, rotate the
lock lever forward. To unlock the door from
the inside, rotate the lock lever rearward.
The red mark on the lock lever appears
when the door is unlocked.
Pull the inside door handle to open an
unlocked door.
Always make sure that all doors and the
rear gate (for 5-door) are closed before
starting to drive.
WARNING
Keep all doors locked when you
drive, especially when small chil-
dren are in your vehicle.
Along with the proper use of seat-
belts and child restraints, locking
the doors reduces the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in an
accident.
It also helps prevent passengers
from falling out if a door is acciden-
tally opened, and intruders from
unexpectedly opening doors and
entering your vehicle.
& Battery drainage prevention
function
If a door or the rear gate (5-door) is not
completely closed, the interior lights will
remain illuminated as a result. However,
several lights are automatically turned off
by the battery drainage prevention func-
tion to prevent the battery from dischar-
ging. The following interior lights are
affected by this function.
Keys and doors/Door locks
– CONTINUED –
2-7
2
Black plate (108,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys and doors/Power door locking switches
Item
Switch
position
Automatically turning
off
Map
lights
*1
OFF
*1
Approximately 20
minutes later
Dome light DOOR
Approximately 20
minutes later
Ignition
switch light
—
Approximately 20
minutes later
Cargo area
light
DOOR
Approximately 20
minutes later
*1: The battery drainage prevention function
affects only the map lights on models with the
moonroof, and only when the m ap light
switches are in the OFF position. The map
lights on models without the moonroof do not
turn off automatically, so push the light switches
manually to turn them off.
The operational/non-operational setting of
this function can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer to change the setting.
NOTE
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”.
. When lea ving the vehicle, please
make sure that all doors and the rear
gate (5-door) are completely closed.
. The battery drainag e prevention
function does not operate while the
key is in the ignition switch.
Power door locking switches
1) Lock
2) Unlock
All doors and the rear gate (for 5-door) can
be locked and unlocked by the power door
locking switches located at the driver’s
side and the front passenger’s side doors.
To lock the doors, push the front side of
the switch.
To unlock the doors, push the rear side of
the switch.
When you close the doors after you set
the door locks, the doors remain locked.
2-8
Black plate (109,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
NOTE
Make sure that you do not leave the key
inside the vehicle before locking the
doors from the outside using the power
door locking switches.
& Key lock-in prevention func-
tion
This function prevents the doors from
being locked under the following condi-
tions.
. The key is still in the ignition switch
(models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
. The ignition switch is in the “ON”
position (models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
This function’s operational/non-opera-
tional setti ng can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. C ontact a SUBARU
dealer for details.
NOTE
. The factory setting (default setting)
for this function is set as “operational”.
. When leaving the vehicle, make sure
you are holding the key before locking
the doors.
! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
tion function operational
With the driver’s door open, the doors are
automatically kept unlocked even if the
front side of the power door locking switch
is pressed.
! Behavior with key lock-in preven-
tion function non-operational
. If the lock lever is turned to the front
(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s door
open and the driver’s door is then closed
with the lock lever in that position, the
driver’s door is locked.
. If the spare key is used to lock the
driver’s door from the outside of the
vehicle, the door is locked.
Keyless access with push-
button start system (if
equipped)
1) Access key (main)
2) Access key (sub)
3) Key number plate
The vehicle has two access keys and a
key number plate. For details about the
key number plate, refer to “Key number
plate” F2-3.
The keyless access with push-button start
system allows you to perform the following
functions when you are carrying the
access key.
. Locking and unlocking of the doors and
rear gate (5-door)
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
– CONTINUED –
2-9
2
Black plate (110,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
. Opening the trunk (4-door)
. Starting and stopping the engine. For
detailed information, refer to “Starting and
stopping engine (models with push-button
start system)” F7-12.
. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
tem. For detailed information, refer to
“Alarm system” F2-27.
Locking and unlocking by the remote
keyless entry system can also be con-
trolled with the buttons on the access key.
For detailed information, refer to “Remote
keyless entry system” F2-23.
A mechanical key is attached to each
access key. The mechanical key is used
for the following operations.
. Locking and unlocking the driver’s door
. Locking and unlocking the glove box
You cannot unlock the glove box without
using the mechanical key. You can keep
the glove box locked when you leave your
vehicle and the access key (with the
mechanical key removed) at a parking
facility.
1) Release button
2) Mechanical key
While pressing the release button of the
access key, take out the mechanical key.
& Safety precautions
WARNING
If you wear an implanted pacemaker
or an implanted defibrillator, stay at
least 8.7 in (22 cm) away from the
transmitting antennas installed on
the vehicle.
The radio waves from the transmit-
ting antennas on the vehicle could
adversely affect the operation of
implanted pacemakers and im-
planted defibrillators.
If you wear electronic m edical
equipment other than an implanted
pacemaker or an implanted defibril-
lator, before using the keyless ac-
cess with push-button start system,
refer to “Radio waves used for the
keyless access with push-button
start system” mentioned later, and
contact the electronic medical
equipment manufacturer for more
information. The radio waves from
the transmitting antennas on the
vehicle could adversely affect the
operation of the electronic medical
equipment.
“Radio waves used for the keyless
access with push-button start sys-
tem”
. The keyless access with push-
button start system uses radio
waves of the following fre-
quency* in addition to the radio
waves used for the remote key-
less entry system. The radio
waves are periodically output
from the antennas installed on
the vehicle as shown in the
following illustrations.
* Radio frequency: 134 kHz
2-10
Black plate (111,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
4-door
1) Antenna
5-door
1) Antenna
CAUTION
. Never leave or store the access
key inside the vehicle or within
6.6 ft (2 m) around the vehicle
(e.g., in the garage). The access
key may be locked inside the
vehicle, or the battery may dis-
charge rapidly.
. The access key contains electro-
nic components. Observe the
following precautions to prevent
malfunctions.
– Although you can replace the
battery of the access key
yourself, it is recommended
that the battery be replaced by
a SUBARU dealer to avoid the
risk of damage at the time of
replacement.
– Do not get the access key wet.
If the access key gets wet,
wipe it off immediately and let
it dry completely.
– Do not apply strong impacts
to the access key.
– Keep the access key away
from magnetic sources.
– Never leave the access key in
direct sunlight or anywhere
that may become hot, such
as on the dashboard. It may
damage the battery or cause
circuit malfunctions.
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
– CONTINUED –
2-11
2
Black plate (112,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
– Do not wash the access key in
an ultrasonic washer.
– Do not leave the access key in
humid or dusty locations.
Doing so may cause malfunc-
tions.
– Do not leave the access key
near personal computers or
home electric appliances.
Doing so may cause the ac-
cess key to malfunction, re-
sulting in battery discharge.
. If the access key is dropped, the
integrated mechanical key inside
may become loose. Be careful
not to lose the mechanical key.
. When you carry the access key
on an airplane, do not press the
button of the access key while in
the airplane. When any button of
the access key is pressed, radio
waves are sent and may affect
the operation of the airplane.
When you carry the access key
in a bag on an airplane, take
measures to prevent the buttons
of the access key from being
pressed.
NOTE
. The operational/non-operational
setting for the keyless access function
can be changed. For the setting proce-
dure, refer to “Disabling keyless ac-
cess function” F2-18. The setting can
also be changed by a SUBARU dealer.
For more details, contact a SUBARU
dealer.
. For detailed information about the
operation method for the push-button
ignition switch while the keyless ac-
cess function is switched to the non-
operational mode, refer to “Access key
– if access key does not operate
properly” F9-18.
. The keyless access with push-but-
ton start system uses weak radio
waves. The status of the access key
and environmental conditions may in-
terfere with the comm unication be-
tween the access key and the vehicle
under the following conditions, and it
may not be possible to lock or unlock
the doors or start the engine.
– When operating near a facility
where strong radio waves are trans-
mitted, such as a broadcast station
and power transmission lines
– When products that transmit
radio waves are used, such as an
access key or a remote transmitter
key of another vehicle
– When carrying more than one
access key
– When the access key is placed
near wireless communication
equipment such as a cell phone
– When the access key is placed
near a metallic object
– When metallic accessories are
attached to the access key
– When carrying the access key
with electronic appliances such as
a laptop computer
– When the battery of the access
key is discharged
. The access key is always commu-
nicating with the vehicle and is con-
tinuously using the battery. Although
the life of the battery varies depending
on the operating conditions, it is ap-
proximately 1 to 2 years. If the battery
becomes fully discharged, replace it
with a new one.
. If an access key is lost, it is
recommended that all of the remaining
access keys be reregistered. For rere-
gistration of an access key, contact a
SUBARU dealer.
. For a spare access key, contact a
SUBARU dealer.
. Up to 7 access keys can be regis-
tered for one vehicle.
2-12
Black plate (113,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
. Carefully store the key number plate
supplied with t he access key. It is
necessary for vehicle repair.
. Do not leave the access key in the
storage spaces inside the vehicle, such
as the door pocket, dashboard and the
corner of the cargo area. Vibrations
may damage the key or turn on the
switch, possibly resulting in a lockout.
. After the vehicle battery is dis-
charged or replaced, initialization of
the steering lock system may be re-
quired to start the engine. In this case,
perform the following procedure to
initialize the steering lock.
(1) Turn the push-button ignition
switch to the “OFF” position. For
details, refer to “Switching power
status” F3-7.
(2) Open and close the driver ’s
door.
(3) Wait for approximately 10 sec-
onds.
When the steering is locked, the initi-
alization is completed.
. Do not leave the access key in the
following places.
– On the instrument panel
– On the floor
– Inside the glove box
– Inside the door trim pocket
– On the rear seat
– On the rear shelf (4-door)
– Inside the trunk (4-door)
– In the cargo area (5-door)
If you do, the following situations
may occur.
– The access key is mistakenly
locked inside the vehicle.
– A false warning issues although
no malfunction actually occurs.
– No warning issues even when
any malfunction occurs.
& Locking and unlocking with
“keyless access” entry func-
tion
! Operating ranges
4-door
1) Antenna
2) Operating range
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
– CONTINUED –
2-13
2
Black plate (114,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
5-door
1) Antenna
2) Operating range
. The operating range of the door lock-
ing/unlocking function is approximately 16
to 32 in (40 to 80 cm) from the respective
door handle.
. For 4-door, the operating range of the
trunk opening function is approximately 16
to 32 in (40 to 80 cm) from the trunk
opener button.
. For 5-door, the operating range of the
rear gate locking/unlocking function is
approximately 16 to 32 in (40 to 80 cm)
from the rear gate ornament.
1) LED indicator
When the access key is within either of the
operating ranges of the front doors, the
LED indicator on the access key flashes.
When the keyless access functions are
disabled, the LED indicator does not flash
unless a button on the access key is
pressed.
! Operating range tips
. Locking by using the keyless access
function can be operated only by the door
lock sensor in the operating range in
which the access key is detected.
. Unlocking by using the keyless access
function can be operated only by the door
handle in the operating range in which the
access key is detected.
. If the access key is placed too close to
the vehicle body, the keyless access
functions may not operate properly. If they
do not operate properly, repeat the opera-
tion from further away.
. If the access key is placed near the
ground or in an elevated location from the
ground, even if it i s in the in dicate d
operating range, the keyless access func-
tion may not operate properly.
. When the access key is within the
operating range, it is possible for anyone,
even someone who is not carrying the
access key, to operate the keyless access
function. Note that the keyless access
function can be operated only by the door
handle, door lock sensor, rear gate opener
button, trunk opener button or rear lock
button in the operating range in which the
access key is detected.
. It is not possible to lock the doors and
rear gate using the keyless access func-
tion when the access key is inside the
vehicle. However, depending on the status
of the access key and the environmental
conditions, the access key may be locked
inside the vehicle. Before locking, make
sure that you have the access key.
. When the battery of the access key is
dischar ged, or when operating it in a
location with strong radio waves or noise
(e.g., near a radio tower, power plant,
broadcast station or an area where wire-
2-14
Black plate (115,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
less equipment is used), or while talking
on a cell phone, the operating ranges may
be reduced, or the keyless access func-
tion may not operate.
In such a case, perform the procedure
described in “Locking and unlocking” F9-
18.
. When an access key is in the operating
range, if the door handle becomes wet
due to exposure to a significant amount of
water when the vehicle is washed or
dur ing heavy rain, the doors may be
locked or unlocked.
. The keyless access function may not
operate properly depending on the status
of the access key and the radio wave
conditions around the vehicle. In such a
case, perform the procedure described in
“Locking and unlocking” F9-18.
! How to use keyless access func-
tions
! Keyless access function tips
. When you lock the doors and rear gate
(5-door) using the keyless access func-
tion, turn the push-button ignition switch
off. It is not possible to lock the doors and
rear gate using the keyless access func-
tion when the push-button ignition switch
is on the “ACC” or “ON” position. Refer to
“Switching power status” F3-7.
. If the door handle is gripped with a
gloved hand, the door lock may not be
released.
. If the door lock sensor is touched three
times or more repeatedly, the system will
ignore the sensor operation.
. When performing the locking proce-
dure too quickly, locking may not have
been completed. After performing the
locking procedure, it is recommended to
pull the REAR door handle to confirm that
the doors have been locked.
. It is possible to lock the doors even
when one of the doors is open. After
performing the locking procedure, close
the opened door or rear gate to lock it.
. Within 3 seconds after locking the
doors and the rear gate by using the
keyless access function, it is not possible
to unlock doors and/or the rear gate by
using the keyless access function.
. When locking, be sure to carry the
access key to prevent locking the access
key in the vehicle.
. The setting of the hazard warning
flasher operation and the volume of the
audible signal can be changed by your
SUBARU dealer. We recommend that you
contact your SUBARU dealer for details.
. For models with the multi function
display, the setting of the hazard warning
flasher operatio n can be changed by
operating the multi function display. For
details, refer to “Hazard warning flasher
setting” F3-79.
! Unlocking
Carry the access key, and grip the door
handle.
. When the driver ’s door handle is
gripped, only the driver’s door will be
unlocked.
. When the front passenger’s door han-
dle is gripped, all doors (for 5-door
models, including the rear gate) will be
unlocked.
Also, an electronic chirp will sound twice
and the hazard warning flashers will flash
twice.
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
– CONTINUED –
2-15
2
Black plate (116,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
! Opening rear gate (5-door)
1) Rear gate opener button
Carry the access key, and press the rear
gate opener button. Only the rear gate will
be unlocked and opened. Also, an elec-
tronic chirp will sound twice and the
hazard warning flashers will flash twice.
! Opening trunk (4-door)
1) Trunk opener button
Carry the access key, and press the trunk
opener button. The trunk will open.
An electronic chirp will sound twice and
the hazard warning flashers w ill flash
twice.
! Locking with the door lock
sensor
1) Door lock sensor
Carry the access key, close all doors (for
5-door, including the rear gate) and touch
the door lock sensor on the door handle.
All doors including the rear gate will be
locked. Also, an electronic chirp will sound
once and the hazard warning flashers will
flash once.
NOTE
After touching the door lock sensor to
lock all of the doors (including the rear
gate), if you touch the door lock sensor
once more to attempt the lock opera-
tion without first unlocking the doors,
nothing will happen, even if the door
lock sensor is touched. In this case,
2-16
Black plate (117,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
perform the unlocking operation once
first. You can then touch the door lock
sensor to lock the doors.
! Locking with the rear lock button
(5-door)
1) Rear lock button
Carry the access key, close all doors
including the rear gate and press the rear
lock button. The rear gate and all doors
will be locked. Also, an electronic chirp will
sound once and the hazard warning
flashers will flash once.
! Power saving function
The keyl ess access function will be
disabled in the following cases to protect
the access key battery and the vehicle
battery.
. Case 1: When the keyless access
function and the remote keyless entry
system have not been used for 2 weeks
or longer while all doors are locked
To recover the keyless access func-
tion:
Operate one of the following items.
– Unlock the doors by operating any
procedure other than gripping the front
passenger’s door handle
– Lock the doors
– Open a door and then close it
. Case 2: When the access key has
been left in the operating range for 10
minutes or longer while all do ors are
locked
To recover the keyless access func-
tion:
Operate one of the following items.
– Unlock the doors by gripping the
door handle
– Unlock the doors by pressing the
rear gate opener button
– Lock the doors by touching the door
lock sensor
– Lock or unlock the doors by using
the remote keyless entry system
– Lock or unlock the doors by using
the power door locking switch
– Open either of the front doors
! Door unlock selection function
The door unlock selection function makes
the following operations possible.
. Unlocking the driver’s door without
unlocking any other doors (including the
rear gate) when gripping the driver’s door
handle
. Opening the rear gate without unlock-
ing any doors when pressing the rear gate
opener button (5-door)
The operational/non-operational settin g
for this function can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer.
Operational:
. Only the driver’s door will be unlocked
when the driver’s door handle is gripped.
. The rear gate will open, but the other
doors will remain locked when the rear
gate opener button is pressed. (5-door)
Non-operational:
. All doors and the rear gate will be
unlocked when the driver’s door handle is
gripped.
. The rear gate will open and all doors
will be unlocked when the rear gate
opener button is pressed. (5-door)
The factory setting (default setting) is set
as “operational”.
For further details, consult a SUBARU
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
– CONTINUED –
2-17
2
Black plate (118,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
dealer.
NOTE
The setting can be changed by your
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU
dealer for details. Also, for models with
the multi function display, the setting
can be changed by operating the multi
function display. For details, refer to
“Keyless access setting (models with
“keyless access with push-button start
system”)” F3-84.
& Selecting audible signal op-
eration
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
the audible signal off. For more details,
contact a SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
For models with the multi function
display, the setting can be changed by
operating the multi function display.
For details, refer to “Keyless buzzer
volume setting” F3-79.
& Warning chimes and warning
indicator
The keyless access with push-button start
system sounds a warning chime and
flashes the access key warning indicator
on the combination meter in order to
minimize improper operations and help
protect your vehicle from theft.
For details, refer to “Warning chimes and
warning indicator of the keyless access
with push-button start system” F3-25.
& Disabling keyless access
function
WARNING
If you wear an implanted pacemaker
or an implanted defibrillator, per-
form the procedure described in
“By opera ting the driver’s door ”
F2-19 to disable the keyless access
function. If you perform the proce-
dure described in “By operating the
access key” F2-18, the operation of
an implanted pacemaker or im-
planted defibrillator may be affected
by the radio waves from the trans-
mitter antenna.
When the vehicle is not going to be used
for a long time, or when you choose not to
use the keyless access function, the
keyless access function can be disabled.
NOTE
. The locking and unlocking function
by the remote keyless entry system is
not disabled.
. The setting can also be changed at
SUBARU dealers. For more details,
contact a SUBARU dealer.
. To start the engine while the func-
tions are disabled, perform the proce-
dure described in “Starting engine”
F9-19.
. We recommend that you disable the
keyless access functions under the
following conditions.
– When the vehicle is not going to
be used for an extended period of
time
– When the keyless access func-
tions are not going to be used
! Disabling functions
! By operating the access key
If you have registered a PIN code for PIN
Code Access, you can disable the keyless
access function by operating the access
key. For details about registering a PIN
code, refer to “Registering a PIN code”
F2-22.
1. Open the driver’s door.
2-18
Black plate (119,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
2. Rotate the lock lever forward.
3. Press and hold the “ ” button and
“
” button on the access key simulta-
neously for more than 5 seconds.
A chirp sound will be heard, and the
function will be disabled.
! By operating the driver’s door
1. Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the
door.
2. Push the rear side (unlock side) of the
power door locking switch.
3. Within 5 seconds after step 2 is
performed, open the driver’s door.
4. Within 5 seconds after step 3 is
performed, push the rear side (unlock
side) of the power door locking switch
twice while the door is open.
5. Within 10 se conds after step 4 is
performed, close and open the driver’s
door twice.
6. Within 10 se conds after step 5 is
performed, push the rear side (unlock
side) of the power door locking switch
twice while the door is open.
7. Within 10 seconds after step 6 is
performed, close and open the driver’s
door once.
8. Within 5 seconds after step 7 is
performed, close the door.
A chirp sound will be heard, and the
functions will be disabled.
NOTE
In steps 4 and 6, press the power door
locking switch slowly. If the switch is
pressed quickly, the functions may not
be disabled.
! Enabling functions
When the procedure to disable the func-
tions is performed again, a chirp sound will
be heard, and the functions are enabled.
NOTE
. The keyless access function will be
enabled only if you perform the proce-
dure in the same manner you disabled
the function (for example, when dis-
abling by operating the driver’s door,
the function will not be enabled even if
you operate the access key).
. Press the push-button i gnition
switch if you do not know the proce-
dure in which the keyless access
function was disabled.
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
– CONTINUED –
2-19
2
Black plate (120,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys and doors/Keyless access with push–button start system
– When disabling by operating the
driver’s door: a chirp will not be
heard
– When disabling by operating the
access key: a chirp will be heard
& When access key does not
operate properly
Refer to “Access key – if access key does
not operate properly” F9-18.
& Replacing battery of access
key
Refer to “Replacing battery of access key”
F11-44.
& Replacing access key
Access keys can be replaced at SUBARU
dealers. For more details, contact a
SUBARU dealer.
& Certification for keyless ac-
cess with push-button start
system
. U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: HYQ14AHC
FCC ID: HYQ13CZZ
FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02
FCC ID: Y8PSSPLF02
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
. Canada-spec. models
2-20
Black plate (121,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
. Mexico-spec. models
IFT
RLVDE1413-2269
14AHC
DENSO
PIN Code Access (models
with “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
1) Trunk opener button (4-door)
1) Rear lock button (5-door)
While all doors (for 5-door, including the
rear gate) are locked, you can unlock the
doors (including rear gate) without a key
by performing the following procedure.
. 4-door: press the trunk opener button
. 5-door: press the rear lock button
NOTE
PIN Code Access will be helpful if the
key is accidentally left in the vehicle. It
is recommended that a 5-digit security
code (PIN code) is registered.
Keys and doors/PIN Code Access (models with “keyless access with push–button start system”)
– CONTINUED –
2-21
2
Black plate (122,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys and doors/PIN Code Access (models with “keyless access with push–button start system”)
& Registering a PIN code
! Preparation
1. Turn off the ignition switch.
2. Close all doors (including trunk/rear
gate).
3. Press and hold the “
” button on the
access key. Then all doors (including rear
gate) will be locked.
4. Keep the “
” butt on pressed, and
press the following button within 5 sec-
onds after step 3.
. 4-door: the trunk opener button
. 5-door: the rear lock button
5. Press and hold the above button for
more than 5 seconds. Then a chirp will
sound.
6. Release the “
” button and trunk
opener button/rear lock button.
7. Press the “
” button on the access key
while the chirp sounds.
Then the chirp will stop and the prepara-
tion is complete.
NOTE
If you do not press the “ ” button on
the access key, the chirp will sound for
30 seconds. In this case, the prepara-
tion for registering a PIN code does not
complete even if the chirp stops.
! Registration
For example, to register “32468” as the
PIN code, perform the following proce-
dure.
4-door:
1. Press the trunk opener button three
times.
2. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
press the trunk opener button twice.
3. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
press the trunk opener button four times.
4. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
press the trunk opener button six times.
5. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
press the trunk opener button eight times.
6. Perform steps 1 to 5 again within
approximately 30 seconds after the buz-
zer starts sounding intermittently.
7. All doors will be unlocked and locked.
Then the PIN code will be registered.
5-door:
1. Press the rear lock button three times.
2. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
press the rear lock button twice.
3. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
press the rear lock button four times.
4. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
press the rear lock button six times.
5. After a buzzer (ding) sounds once,
press the rear lock button eight times.
6. Perform steps 1 to 5 again within
approximately 30 seconds after the buz-
zer starts sounding intermittently.
7. All doors (including rear gate) will be
unlocked and locked. Then the PIN code
will be registered.
NOTE
. Press the trunk opener button/rear
lock button ten times to enter “0”.
. Change the PIN code frequently to
protect your vehicle from theft.
. If you have lent your vehicle to
another person, confirm that the PIN
code has not been changed or deleted.
If the PIN code has been changed or
deleted, reregister a new PIN code.
. If you make an error during the
registration procedure, press the “
”
or “
” button on the acc ess key.
Then, start over from the procedure
described in “Preparation”.
. To protect your vehicle from theft,
you cannot register a string of the
same five numbers together, such as
“00000”, nor “12345” as a PIN code.
. Do not register your vehicle license
plate number or simple numbers such
as “11122” or “12121” as a PIN code.
Doing so wi ll increase the risk of
vehicle theft.
. When you try to register “22222”,
2-22
Black plate (123,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
the registered PIN code will be deleted.
You cannot unlock the doors by PIN
Code A ccess until a new code is
registered.
. After registering a new PIN code,
make sure that you can unlock the
doors using the PIN code.
. The PIN code cannot be deleted
while the keyless access function is
disabled by operating the access key.
. Reregister the PIN code in the
following case.
– when you forget the PIN code
– when you want to change the PIN
code
& Unlocking
Perform steps 1 to 5 described in “Regis-
tration”.
NOTE
. You cannot unlock by PIN Code
Access in the following cases.
– when the access key is within the
operating ranges
– when the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position
. If you make an operation erro r
during the unlocking procedure, start
over with the unlocking procedure after
waiting for 5 seconds or longer.
. To protect your vehicle from theft, a
buzzer will sound if incorrect PIN codes
are entered five times continuously. If
this occurs, you cannot unlock the
doors by PIN Code Access for 5
minutes.
Remote keyless entry system
CAUTION
. Do not expose the remote trans-
mitter to severe shocks, such as
those experienced as a result of
dropping or throwing.
. Do not take the remote transmit-
ter apart except when replacing
the battery.
. Do not get the remote transmitter
wet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry with
a cloth immediately.
. When you carry the remote trans-
mitteronanairplane,donot
press the button of the remote
transmitter while in the airplane.
When any button of the remote
transmitter is pressed, radio
waves are sent and may affect
the operati on of the airplane.
When you carry the remote trans-
mitter in a bag on an airplane,
take measures to prevent the
buttons of the remote transmitter
from being pressed.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, the access
Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system
– CONTINUED –
2-23
2
Black plate (124,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system
key is used as the transmitter for the
remote keyless entry system. For models
without “keyless access with push-button
start system”, the transmitter for the
remote keyless entry system is located
inside the key head.
The remote keyless entry system has the
following functions.
. Locking and unlocking the doors (and
rear gate for 5-door) without a key
. Opening the trunk lid for 4-door without
key
. Sounding a panic alarm
. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-
tem. For detailed information, refer to
“Alarm system” F2-27.
The operable distance of the remote
keyless entry system is approximately 30
feet (10 meters). However, this distance
will vary depending on environmental
conditions. The system’s operable dis-
tance will be shorter in areas near a
facility or electronic equipment emitting
strong radio waves such as a power plant,
broadcast station, TV tower, or remote
controller of home electronic appliances.
NOTE
. For models with “keyless access
with push-button start system”,the
remote keyless entry system will not
be activated when the push-button
ignition switch is in any position other
than the “OFF” position.
. For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”,the
remote keyless entry system will not
be activated when the key is inserted in
the ignition switch.
Access key
1) Lock/arm button
2) Unlock/disarm button
3) Trunk lid opener/rear gate unlock button
4) PANIC button
Transmitter
1) Lock/arm button
2) Unlock/disarm button
3) Trunk lid opener/rear gate unlock button
4) PANIC button
NOTE
The hazard warning flashers will flash
once or twice when the access key/
transmitter button is pressed in the
following cases.
– When locking the doors
– When unlocking the doors
– When opening the trunk lid (4-door
models)
– When unlocking the rear gate (5-
door models)
Operation of the hazard warning
2-24
Black plate (125,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
flashers in the above cases can be set
to “On” or “Off” by a SUBARU dealer.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for de-
tails. Also, for models with a multi
function display, the setting can be
changed using the display. For details,
refer to “ Hazard warning flasher
setting” F3-79.
& Locking the doors
Press the lock/arm button to lock all doors
and rear gate (5-door). An electronic chirp
will sound once and the hazard warning
flashers will flash once.
If any of the doors (or the rear gate/trunk
lid) is not fully closed, the following will
occur to alert you that the doors (or the
rear gate/trunk lid) are not properly closed.
. an electronic chirp sounds five times.
. the hazard warning flashers flash five
times.
When you close the door, it will automa-
tically lock and then the following will
occur.
. an electronic chirp sounds once.
. the hazard warning flashers flash once.
& Unlocking the doors
Press the unlock/disarm button to unlock
the driver’s door. An electronic chirp will
sound twice and the hazard warning
flashers will flash twice. To unlock all
doors and the rear gate (5-door), briefly
press the unlock/disarm button a second
time within 5 seconds.
NOTE
If the interval between the first and
second presses of the unlock/disarm
button (for unlocking of all of the doors
and the rear gate) is extremely short,
the system may not respond.
& Opening the trunk lid
(4-door)
Press and hold the trunk lid opener button
to open the trunk lid. An electronic chirp
will sound twice and the hazard warning
flashers will flash twice.
& Unlocking the rear gate
(5-door)
Press the rear gate unlock button to
unlock the rear gate.
An electronic chirp will sound twice and
the hazard warning flashers w ill flash
twice.
& Vehicle finder function
Use this function to find your vehicle
parked among many vehicles in a large
parking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet
(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing the
lock/arm button three times in a 5-second
period will cause your vehicle’s horn to
sound once and its hazard warning
flashers to flash three times.
NOTE
If the interval between presses is too
short when you press the lock/arm
button three times, the system may
not respond to the signals from the
remote transmitter.
& Sounding a panic alarm
To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”
button once.
The horn will sou nd and the hazard
warning flashers will flash.
To deactivate the panic alarm, press any
button on the remote transmitter. Unless a
button on the remote transmitter is
pressed, the alarm will be deactivated
after approximately 30 seconds.
Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system
– CONTINUED –
2-25
2
Black plate (126,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys and doors/Remote keyless entry system
& Selecting audible signal op-
eration (models without
“keyless access with push-
button start system”)
Using an electronic chirp, the system will
give you an audible signal when the doors
lock and unlock. If desired, you may turn
the audible signal off.
Perform the following steps to deactivate
the audible signal. You can also use the
same steps to restore the function.
1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors and the rear gate.
2. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side
of the power door locking switch.
3. While holding down the REAR (UN-
LOCK) side of the power door locking
switch, pull the key out and re-insert it into
the ignition switch at least 6 times within
10 seconds after Step 2.
4. Open and close the driver’s door once
within 10 seconds after Step 3.
5. The hazard warning flashers flash 3
times to indicate completion of the setting.
You may have the above settings done by
your SUBARU dealer. Also, for models
with a multi function display, the setting
can be changed using the display. For
details, refer to “Keyless buzzer volume
setting” F3-79.
& Replacing the battery
Refer to “Replacing key battery” F11-43.
& Replacing lost transmitters
If you lose a transmitter or want to
purchase additional transmitters (up to
four can be programmed), your transmit-
ters should be reprogrammed for security
reasons. For details, contact your
SUBARU dealer and have the transmitters
programmed into the remote keyless entry
system.
& Certification for remote key-
less entry system
! U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: CWTWB1U811
FCC ID: CWTWD1U781
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, includi ng
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
2-26
Black plate (127,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Canada-spec. models ! Mexico-spec. models
COFETEL RCPSUTW13-2221
COFETEL RLVSU8813-2140
Alarm system
The alarm system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables from theft. The horn
sounds and the hazard warning flashers
flash if someone attempts to break into
your vehicle.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
The system can be armed or disarmed
with the keyless access function or access
key.
The system will not be activated when the
push-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
The system can be armed or disarmed
with the remote transmitter.
The system will not be activated when the
key is inserted into the ignition switch.
Your vehicle’s alarm system has been set
for activation at the time of shipment from
the factory. You can set the system for
deactivation yourself or have it done by
your SUBARU dealer.
Keys and doors/Alarm system
– CONTINUED –
2-27
2
Black plate (128,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys and doors/Alarm system
& System operation
The alarm system will sound the following
alarms when triggered.
. The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30
seconds.
. The hazard warning flashers will flash
for 30 seconds.
If any of the doors or the rear gate/trunk lid
remains open after the 30-second period,
the horn will continue to sound for a
maximum of 3 minutes. If the door or the
rear gate/trunk lid is closed while the horn
is sounding, the horn will stop sounding
with a delay of up to 30 seconds.
The alarm is triggered by:
. Opening any of the doors, the rear gate
or trunk lid
. Physical impact to the vehicle, such as
forced entry (only models wi th shock
sensors (dealer option))
NOTE
The alarm system can be set to trigger
the illumination of the following interior
lights.
. Map lights (models with moonroof)
. Dome light (illuminates only when
the dome light switch is in the “DOOR”
position)
. Cargo area light (illuminates only
when the cargo area light switch is in
the “DOOR” position)
The notifications regarding the map
lights, dome light and cargo area light
are deactivated as the factory setting. A
SUBARU dealer can activate the sys-
tem. Contact your SUBARU dealer for
details.
& Activating and deactivating
the alarm system
To change the setting of your vehicle’s
alarm system for activation or deactiva-
tion, do the following.
1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to
“Disarming the system” F2-32.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut all
doors (and the rear gate if your vehicle is a
5-door).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
4. Hold down the REAR (UNLOCK) side
of the driver’s power door locking switch,
open the driver’s door within the following
1 second, and wait 10 seconds without
releasing the switch. The setting will then
be changed as follows.
If the system was previously activated:
The odometer/trip meter screen displays
as follows and the horn sounds twice,
indicating that the system is now deacti-
vated.
. “AL oF” (models with type A combina-
tion meter)
. “ALOF” (models with type B combina-
tion meter)
If the system was previously deacti-
vated:
The odometer/trip meter screen displays
as follows and the horn sounds once,
indicating that the system is now acti-
vated.
. “AL on” (models with type A combina-
tion meter)
. “ALON” (models with type B combina-
tion meter)
NOTE
You may have the above setting
change done by your SUBARU dealer.
& If you have accidentally trig-
gered the alarm system
! To stop the alarm
Do any of the following operations:
. Press any button on the access key/
remote transmitter.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”).
2-28
Black plate (129,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
. Turn the push-button ignition to the
“ACC” position (model s with “keyless
access with push-button start system”).
NOTE
Only registered keys will stop the
alarm. If the immobilizer transponder
is not registered, the alarm will not
stop.
& Arming the system
! Tips
. The system can be armed even if the
engine hood, windows and/or moonroof
are open. Always make sure that they are
fully closed before arming the system.
. The 30-second standby time can be
eliminated if you prefer. Have it performed
by your SUBARU dealer.
. If your vehicle is a 4-door and you open
the trunk using the access key/remote
transmitter’s “
” button with the alarm
system armed, the system will be tem-
porarily placed in a standby state. The
system will go back to the surveillance
state upon locking the trunk.
. The system is in the standby mode for
a 30-second period after locking the doors
with the remote transmitter. The security
indicator light will flash at short intervals
during this period.
. If any of the following actions are done
during the standby period, the system will
not switch to the surveillance state.
– Doors (including the rear gate/trunk
lid) are unlocked using the access key/
remote transmitter.
– Doors (including the rear gate/trunk
lid) are unlocked using the keyless
access function (models with “keyless
access with push-button start sys-
tem”).
– Any door (including the rear gate/
trunk lid) is opened.
– The ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position (models without “keyless
access with push-button start sys-
tem”).
– Push-button ignition switch is
turned to the “ACC” position (models
with “keyless access with push-button
start system”).
! To arm the system using access
key/remote transmitter
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
equipped).
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”)/turn the
push-button ignition switch to the “OFF”
position (models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”).
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood (and
the trunk lid on the 4-door) are locked.
5. Close all doors (and the rear gate on
the 5-door).
Access key
1) Arm button: Press to arm the system
2) Disarm bu tton: Press to disarm the
system
Keys and doors/Alarm system
– CONTINUED –
2-29
2
Black plate (130,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys and doors/Alarm system
Transmitter
1) Arm button: Press to arm the system
2) Disarm button: Press to disarm the
system
Security indicator light (type A)
Security indicator light (type B)
6. Briefly press the “ ” button (for less
than 2 seconds). All doors (and the rear
gate on the 5-door) will lock, an electronic
chirp will sound once, the hazard warning
flashers will flash once, and the security
indicator light will start flashing rapidly.
After rapid flashing for 30 seconds (stand-
by time), the indicator lights will then flash
slowly (twice approximately every 2 sec-
onds), indicating that the system has been
armed for surveillance.
If any of the doors, (rear gate or trunk lid)
is not fully closed, an electronic chirp
sounds five times, the hazard warning
flashers flash five times to alert you that
the doors (or the rear gate) are not
properly closed. When you close the door,
the system will automatically arm and
doors will automatically lock.
! To arm the system using power
door locking switches
1. Close all windows.
2. Remove the key from the ignition
switch (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”)/turn the
push-button ignition switch to the “OFF”
position (models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”).
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood is
locked.
5. Close the doors (and the rear gate on
the 5-door) but leave only the driver’s door
or the front passenger’s door open.
6. Press the front side (“LOCK” side) of
2-30
Black plate (131,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
the power door locking switch to set the
door locks.
7. Close the door. An electronic chirp will
sound once, the hazard warning flashers
will flash once and the security indicator
light will start flashing rapidly. After rapid
flashing for 30 seconds (standby time), the
indicator lights will then flash slowly (twice
approximately every 2 seconds), indicat-
ing that the system has been armed for
surveillance.
! To arm the system using the key-
less access function (if equipped)
1. Close all windows and the moonroof (if
equipped)
2. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “OFF” position.
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Make sure that the engine hood is
locked.
5. Close all doors and the rear gate/trunk
lid.
1) Door lock sensor
Security indicator light (type A)
Security indicator light (type B)
6. Carry the access key and touch the
door lock sensor. All doors (for 5-door,
including the rear gate) will lock, an
electronic chirp wil l sound once, the
hazard warning flashers will flash once,
and the security indicator light will start
flashing rapidly. After rapid flashing for 30
seconds (standby time), the security in-
dicator light will then flash slowly (twice
approximately every 2 seconds), indicat-
ing that the system has been armed for
surveillance.
If any of the doors or the rear gate is not
fully closed, an electronic chirp sounds
five times, the hazard warning flashers
flash five times to alert you that the doors
(or the rear gate/trunk lid) are not properly
closed. When you close the door, the
Keys and doors/Alarm system
– CONTINUED –
2-31
2
Black plate (132,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys and doors/Alarm system
system will automatically arm and doors
will automatically lock.
& Disarming the system
Perform either of the following procedures.
. Briefly press the disarm button (for less
than 2 seconds) on the access key/remote
transmitter.
. Carry the access key and perform
either of the following procedures (models
with “keyless access with push-button
start system”).
– Grip the front door handle.
– Press the rear gate opener button
(5-door).
The following door(s) will unlock, an
electronic chirp will sound twice and the
hazard warning flashers will flash twice.
. Driver ’s door: when either of the
following procedures is performed
– Press the disarm button on the
access key/remote transmitter briefly
(for less than 2 seconds).
– Grip the driver’s door handle (mod-
els with “keyless access with push-
button start system”).
. Rear gate (5-door): when pressing the
rear gate opener button (models with
“keyless access with push-button start
system”)
. All doors: when gripping the front
passenger’s door handle (models with
“keyless access with push-button start
system”)
The flashing of the security indicator light
will then change slowly (once approxi-
mately every 3 seconds from twice ap-
proximately every 2 seconds), indicating
that the alarm system has been disarmed.
To unlock all other doors and the rear gate
(5-door), briefly press the disarm button a
second time within 5 seconds.
! Emergency disarming
If you cannot disarm the system using the
access key/transmitter (i.e. the transmitter
is lost, broken or the transmitter battery is
too weak), you can disarm the system
without using the access key/rem ote
transmitter.
The system can be disarmed if you turn
the ignition switch from the “LOCK”/“OFF”
to the “ON” position with a registered key/
access key.
NOTE
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, if the ac-
cess key battery is discharged, perform
the procedure described in “Switching
power status” F9-18. In such a case,
replace the battery immediately. Refer
to “Replacing battery of access key”
F11-44.
& Valet mode
When you choose the valet mode, the
alarm system does not operate. In valet
mode, the remote transmitter is used only
for locking and unlocking the doors and
rear gate (5-door) and panic activation.
To ent er the valet mode, change the
setting of your vehicle’s alarm system for
deactivation mode. Refer to “Activating
and deactivating the alarm system” F2-
28. The security indicator light will con-
tinue to flash once every 3 seconds
indicating that the system is in the valet
mode.
To exit valet mode, change the setting of
your vehicle’s alarm system for activation
mode. Refer to “Activating and deactivat-
ing the alarm system” F2-28.
& Passive arming (models
without “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
! Passive arming mode
When passive arming mode has been
programmed by the dealer, arming of the
system is automatically accomplished
2-32
Black plate (133,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
without using the remote transmitter. Note
that in this mode, DOORS MUST BE
MANUALLY LOCKED.
! To enter the passive mode
If you wish to program the passive arming
mode, have it done by your SUBARU
dealer.
! Arming the system
CAUTION
In passive mode, the system will
automatically activate the alarm but
WILL NOT automatica lly lock th e
doors. In order to lock the doors
you must either lock them as in-
dicated in step 4 below or with the
key once they have been closed.
Failure to lock the doors manually
will result in a higher security risk.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
1) ON
2) LOCK
2. Turn the ignition switch from “ON” to
“LOCK” position and remove the key from
the ignition switch.
3. Open the doors and get out of the
vehicle.
4. Before closing the doors, lock all doors
with the inside door lock levers.
5. Close the doors. The system will
automatically arm after 1 minute.
In the passive mode, the system can also
be armed with the remote transmitter or
with the power door locking switches. If
the remote transmitter or power doo r
locking switch is used to lock the vehicle,
arming will take place immediately regard-
less of whether or not the passive mode
has been selected.
! Disarming the system
To disarm the system, briefly press the
“
” button on the transmitter.
Keys and doors/Alarm system
– CONTINUED –
2-33
2
Black plate (134,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys and doors/Alarm system
& Tripped sensor identification
The security indicator light flashes when
the alarm system has been triggered.
Also, the number of flashes indicates the
location of unauthorized intrusion or the
severity of impact on the vehicle.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the indicator light will light
for 1 second and then flash as follows.
. When a door or the rear gate (5-door)
was opened: 5 times
. When a door or the trunk (4-door) was
opened: 4 times
. When the ignition switch was turned to
the “ON” position: 3 times
. When a strong impact or multiple
impacts were sensed: twice (only models
with shock sensors (dealer option))
. When a light impact was sensed: once
(only models with shock sensors (dealer
option))
NOTE
Any of the above indicator light flash-
ings will recur each time the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
Rearming the alarm system cancels the
flashing.
& Shock sensors (dealer op-
tion)
The shock sensors trigger the alarm
system when they sense impacts applied
to the vehicle and when any of their
electric wires are cut. The alarm system
causes the horn to sound and the hazard
warning flashers to flash for a short time
when the sensed impact is weak, but it
warns of a s trong impact or multiple
impacts by sounding the horn and flashing
the hazard warning flashers, both lasting
approximately 30 seconds.
If you desire, your SUBARU dealer can
connect them and set them for activation
or deactivation.
NOTE
. The shock sensors are not always
able to sense impacts caused by break-
ing in, and cannot sense an impact that
does not cause vibration (such as
breaking the glass using a rescue
hammer).
. The shock sensors may sense vi-
bration as indicated in the following
examples and trigger the alarm system.
Select the settings of the alarm system
and shock sensors appropriately de-
pending on where you usually park
your vehicle.
Examples:
– Vibration from a construction site
– Vibration in a multistory car park
– Vibration from trains
. You can have the sensitivity of the
shock sensors adjusted to your pre-
ference by your SUBARU dealer.
2-34
Black plate (135,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Child safety locks
Each rear door has a child safety lock.
When the child safety lock lever is in the
lock position, the door cannot be opened
from inside. The door can only be opened
from the outside.
WARNING
Always turn the child safety locks to
the “LOCK” position when children
sit in the rear seat. Serious injury
could result if a child accidentally
opens the door and falls out.
Windows
WARNING
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, always con-
form to the following instructions
without exception.
. When operating the power win-
dows, be extremely careful to
prevent anyone’s fingers, arms,
neck, head or other objects from
being caught in the window.
. Always lock the passengers’ win-
dows using the lock switch when
children are riding in the vehicle.
. Always carry the key when you
leave the vehicle for safety rea-
sons and never allow an unat-
tended child to remain in the
vehicle. Failure to follow this
procedure could result in injury
to a child operating the power
window.
The power windows operate only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
& Power window operation by
driver
! Driver’s side power window
switches
1) Lock switch
2) For driver’s window (with one-touch auto
up and down feature)
3) For front passenger’s window
4) For rear left window
5) For rear right window
All door windows can be controlled by the
power window switch cluster at the driver
side door.
Keys and doors/Child safety locks
– CONTINUED –
2-35
2
Black plate (136,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys and doors/Windows
! Operating the driver’s window
1) Automatically open/close
2) Open/close
To open:
Push the switch down lightly and hold it.
The window will open as long as the
switch is held.
This switch also has a one-touch auto
down feature that allows the window to be
opened fully without holding the switch.
Push the switch down until it clicks and
release it, and the window will fully open.
To stop the window halfway, pull the
switch up lightly.
To close:
Pull the switch up lightly and hold it. The
window will close as long as the switch is
held.
This switch also has a one-touch auto up
feature that allows the window to be
closed fully without holding the switch.
Pull the switch up until it clicks and release
it, and the window will fully close. To stop
the window halfway, push the switch down
lightly.
NOTE
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected
due to situations such as battery or
fuse replacement, the one-touch auto
up/down function will be deactivated.
Initialize the power window to reacti-
vate the one-touch auto up/down func-
tion. Refer to “Initialization of power
window” F2-38.
! Anti-entrapment function
CAUTION
. Never attempt to test this func-
tion using fingers, hands or other
parts of your body.
. The anti-entrapment function
may not operate properly if some
object gets trapped just before
the window fully closes.
NOTE
. If a window detects an impact simi-
lar to that caused by trapping an object
(for example, when the vehicle encoun-
ters a deep pothole), the anti-entrap-
ment function may operate.
. The window cannot be operated for
a few seconds after the anti-entrap-
ment function operates.
. If the vehicle’s battery is discon-
nected due to situations such as
battery or fuse replacement, the anti-
entrapment function is deactivated.
Initialize the power window to reacti-
vate the anti-entrapment function. Re-
fer to “Initialization of power window”
F2-38.
While closing the driver’s window auto-
matically, if the window senses a sub-
stantial enough object trapped between
the window and the window frame, it
automatically moves down slightly and
stops.
2-36
Black plate (137,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Operating the passengers’ win-
dows
To open:
Push the appropriate switch down and
hold it un til the wi ndow rea ches the
desired position.
To close:
Pull the switch up and hold it until the
window reaches the desired position.
! Locking the passengers’ windows
1) Lock
2) Unlock
To lock:
Press the lock switch. When the lock
switch is in the lock position, the passen-
gers’ windows cannot be opened or
closed.
To unlock:
Press the lock switch again.
& Power window operation by
passengers
! Passenger’s side power window
switches
Each passenger window can be controlled
by the power window switch located on
the door.
Keys and doors/Windows
– CONTINUED –
2-37
2
Black plate (138,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys and doors/Trunk lid (4–door)
! Operating the windows
To open:
Press the switch down and hold it until the
window reaches the desired position.
To close:
Pull the switch up and hold it until the
window reaches the desired position.
When the lock switch on the power
window switch cluster, located on the
driver’s side door, is in the lock position,
the passengers’ windows cannot be oper-
ated with the passengers’ switches.
& Initialization of power win-
dow
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected due
to situations such as battery or fuse
replacement, the following functions are
deactivated.
. One-touch auto up/down function
. Anti-entrapment function
Initialize the power window using the
following procedure to reactivate these
functions.
1. Close the driver’s door.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
3. Open the driver’s side window halfway
by pushin g dow n the power wi ndow
switch.
4. Pull up the power window switch and
close the window completely. Continue
pulling up the switch for approximately 1
second after the window is closed com-
pletely.
5. Open the driver’s side window com-
pletely by fully pushing down the power
windows switch.
Trunk lid (4-door)
WARNING
. To prevent dangerous ex haust
gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the trunk lid closed
while driving.
. Help prevent children, adults or
animals from locking themselves
in the trunk. On hot or sunny
days, the temperature in the
trunk could quickly become high
enough to cause death or serious
heat-related injuries including
brain damage to anyone locked
inside, particularly for small chil-
dren.
. When leaving the vehicle, either
close all windows and lock all
doors. Also make certain that the
trunk is closed.
2-38
Black plate (139,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& To open and close the trunk
lid from outside
The trunk lid can be opened using the
keyless access function or remote keyless
entry system. For details, refer to the
following section.
. For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, refer to “Open-
ing trunk (4-door)” F2-16 or “Opening the
trunk lid (4-door)” F2-25.
. For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”, refer to
“Opening the trunk lid (4-door)” F2-25.
To close the trunk lid, lightly press the
trunk lid down until the latch engages.
NOTE
Do not leave your valuable s in the
trunk when you leave your vehicle.
& To open the trunk lid from
inside
Pull the trunk lid release lever upward.
The lever is on the floor at the left of the
driver’s seat.
& Internal trunk lid release
handle
The internal trunk lid release handle is a
device designed to open the trunk lid from
inside the trunk. In the event children or
adults become locked inside the trunk, the
handle allows them to open the lid. The
handle is located on the inside of the trunk
lid.
To open the trunk lid from inside the trunk,
pull the yellow handle upward as indicated
by the arrow on the handle.
This operation unlocks the trunk lid. Then,
push up the lid.
The handle is made of material that
remains luminescent for approx imately
an hour in the dark trunk space after it is
exposed to ambient light even for a short
Keys and doors/Trunk lid (4–door)
– CONTINUED –
2-39
2
Black plate (140,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys and doors/Trunk lid (4–door)
time.
WARNING
Never allow any child to get in the
trunk and play with the release
handle. If the driver starts the vehi-
cle without knowing that a child is
inside the trunk and the child opens
the lid using the release handle, the
child could fall out and be killed or
seriously injured.
CAUTION
. Do not close the lid while grip-
ping the release handle. The
handle may be damaged.
. Do not use the handle as a hook
to fas ten straps or ropes to
secure your cargo in the trunk.
Such use may result in damage
of the handle.
. Load the trunk so that cargo can
not strike the release handle. If
the cargo hits the handle while
the vehicle is being driven, the
handle may be pulled up and the
trunk lid may open. That may
cause cargo to fall out of the
trunk, which could create a traffic
safety hazard.
! Inspection
Perform the following steps at least twice
a year to check the release handle for
correct operation.
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Use a flat-head screwdriver with a thin
blade. Slide the screwdriver blade from
the slit aperture of the lock assembly to
the end until you hear a click.
This places the latch in the locked posi-
tion.
3. Pull the trunk lid release handle from
outside the vehicle, as indicated by the
arrow on the handle to check if the latch is
2-40
Black plate (141,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
released.
If the latch is not released, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
In this case, press the “
” button on the
key lug to release the latch, then close the
trunk lid.
Also, if the movement of the trunk lid
release handle feel s restr icted or not
entirely smooth during operation, or the
handle and/or handle base is cracked,
contact your SUBARU dealer.
Rear gate (5-door)
& Lock/unlock
The rear gate can be locked and unlocked
using any of the following systems.
. Power door locking switch: Refer to
“Power door locking switches ” F2-8.
. Keyless access with the push-button
start system (if equipped): Refer to “Key-
less access with push-button start system”
F2-9.
. Remote keyless entry system: Refer to
“Remote keyless entry system” F2-23.
NOTE
If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due
to a discharged vehicle battery, a
malfunction in the door locking/unlock-
ing system or other causes, you can
unlock it by manually operating the
rear gate lock release lever.
For the procedure, refer to “Rear gate –
if the rear gate cannot be opened” F9-
19.
& Open/close
To open:
First unlock the rear gate lock then push
the rear gate opener button.
To close:
Lower the rear gate slowly and push down
Keys and doors/Rear gate (5–door)
– CONTINUED –
2-41
2
Black plate (142,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys and doors/Moonroof
firmly until the latch engages.
The rear gate can be lowered easily if you
pull it down holding the recessed grip.
WARNING
. To prevent dangerous exhaust
gas from entering the vehicle,
always keep the rear gate closed
while driving.
. Do not attempt to shut the rear
gate while holding the recessed
grip. Also avoid closing the rear
gate by pulling on the recessed
grip from inside the cargo space.
There is a danger of your hand
being caught and injured.
CAUTION
. Do not jam a plastic bag in or
place cellophane tape on the rear
gate stays or scratch the stays
while loading or unloading cargo.
That could cause leakage of gas
from the stays, which may result
in their inability to hold the rear
gate open.
. Be careful not to hit your head or
face on the rear gate when open-
ing or closing the rear gate and
when loading or unloading car-
go.
NOTE
If the rear gate cannot be unlocked due
to a discharged vehicle battery, a
malfunction in the door locking/unlock-
ing system or other causes, you can
unlock it by manually operating the
rear gate lock release lever. For the
procedure, refer to “Rear gate – if the
rear gate cannot be opened” F9-19.
Moonroof (if equipped)
WARNING
Never let anyone’shands,arms,
head or any objects protrude from
the moonroof. A person could be
seriously injured if any of the follow-
ing conditions occur.
. The vehicle stops suddenly.
. The vehicle turns sharply.
. The vehicle is involved in an
accident.
. Body parts protruding from the
vehicle are struck by outside
objects.
To avoid serious personal injury
caused by entrapment, always con-
form to the following instructions
without exception.
. Before closing the moonroof,
make sure that no one’s hands,
arms, head or other objects will
be accidentally caught in the
moonroof.
. Always carry the key when you
leave the vehicle for safety rea-
sons and never allow an unat-
tended child to remain in the
2-42
Black plate (143,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
vehicle. Failure to follow this
procedure could result in injury
to a child operating the moon-
roof.
. Never try to check the anti-en-
trapment function by deliberately
placing part of your body in the
moonroof.
CAUTION
. Do not sit on the edge of the open
moonroof.
. Do not operate the moonroof if
falling snow or extremely cold
conditions have caused it to
freeze shut.
. The anti-entrapment function
does not operate when the moon-
roof is being tilted down. Be sure
to confirm that it is safe to do so
before tilting the moonroof down.
. If the moonroof does not close,
we recommend that you have the
system checked by a SUBARU
dealer.
The moonroof has both tilting and sliding
functions.
The moonroof operates only when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
& Moonroof switches
! Tilting moonroof
1) Raise
2) Lower
The tilting function is activated only when
the moonroof is fully closed.
To raise:
Press the rear side of the “UP/DOWN”
switch momentarily. The moonroof raises
completely.
To lower:
Press and hold the front side of the “UP/
DOWN” switch until the preferred position
has reached.
Release the switch after the moonroof has
been raised or has been lowered com-
pletely. Pressing the switch continuously
may cause damage to the moonroof.
! Sliding moonroof
1) Open
2) Close
To open:
Press and hold the rear side of the
“OPEN/CLOSE” switch. The sun shade
will also be opened together with the
moonroof. The moonroof will stop at a
position approximately 1.6 in (4 cm) away
from the fully opened position. Press and
hold the rear side of the switch again to
open the moonroof completely.
To close:
Press and hold the front side of the
Keys and doors/Moonroof
– CONTINUED –
2-43
2
Black plate (144,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Keys and doors/Moonroof
“OPEN/CLOSE” switch.
To stop the moonroof at a selected mid-
way position while opening or closing it,
momentarily push the switch to the
“OPEN” side or “CLOSE” side.
After washing the vehicle or after it rains,
wipe away water on the roof prior to
opening the moonroof to prevent drops
of water from falling into the passenger
compartment.
NOTE
Driving with the moonroof fully open
can cause an annoying sound to be
generated at high speeds. If this oc-
curs, use the moonroof at the initial
stop position of 1.6 in (4 cm) away from
the fully opened position.
! Anti-entrapment function
When the moonroof senses a substantial
enough object trapped between its glass
and the vehicle’s roof during closure, it
automatically moves back to the fully open
position and stops there. The anti-entrap-
ment function may also be activated by a
strong shock on the moonroof even when
there is nothing trapped.
CAUTION
Never attempt to test this function
using fingers, hands or other parts
of your body.
NOTE
For the sake of safety, it is recom-
mended that you avoid driving with the
moonroof fully opened.
& Sun shade
The sun shade can be slid forward or
backward by hand while the moonroof is
closed.
If the moonroof is opened, the sun shade
also moves back.
2-44
Black plate (5,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Ignition switch (models without “keyless
access with push-button start system”)......... 3-4
LOCK.................................................................. 3-4
ACC.................................................................... 3-5
ON ...................................................................... 3-5
START ................................................................ 3-5
Key reminder chime ............................................ 3-5
Ignition switch light (if equipped) ......................... 3-6
Push-button ignition switch (models with
push-button start system) ............................... 3-6
Safety precautions .............................................. 3-6
Operating range for push-button start system ...... 3-6
Switching power status ....................................... 3-7
When access key does not operate properly ........ 3-8
Hazard warning flasher....................................... 3-8
Meters and gauges.............................................. 3-9
Combination meter illumination ........................... 3-9
Canceling the function for meter/gauge needle
movement upon turning on the ignition
switch............................................................... 3-9
Speedometer...................................................... 3-10
Odometer........................................................... 3-10
Double trip meter ............................................... 3-11
Tachometer ........................................................ 3-11
Fuel gauge......................................................... 3-12
ECO gauge (if equipped) .................................... 3-12
Warning and indicator lights ............................. 3-13
Initial illumination for system check .................... 3-13
Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................ 3-14
SRS airbag system warning light ........................ 3-15
Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF
indicators ........................................................ 3-16
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction
indicator light .................................................. 3-16
Coolant temperature low indicator light/Coolant
temperature high warning light......................... 3-17
Charge warning light.......................................... 3-18
Oil pressure warning light .................................. 3-18
Engine low oil level warning light ....................... 3-18
Windshield washer fluid warning light ................ 3-19
AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT models) ........... 3-19
Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec.
models) ........................................................... 3-19
ABS warning light.............................................. 3-21
Brake system warning light (red)........................ 3-21
Low fuel warning light ....................................... 3-22
Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF
indicator light .................................................. 3-22
Door open warning light .................................... 3-23
All-Wheel Drive warning light (CVT models)........ 3-23
Power steering warning light.............................. 3-23
Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle
Dynamics Control operation indicator light ....... 3-24
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ..... 3-25
Warning chimes and warning indicator of the
keyless access with push-button start system (if
equipped) ........................................................ 3-25
Security indicator light....................................... 3-30
Select lever/gear position indicator (CVT
models) ........................................................... 3-30
Turn signal indicator lights................................. 3-31
High beam indicator light ................................... 3-31
Instruments and controls
3
Black plate (6,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls
Cruise control indicator light (if equipped) .......... 3-31
Cruise control set indicator light (if
equipped)......................................................... 3-31
Automatic headlight beam leveler warning light
(models with HID headlights) ............................ 3-31
Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) .......... 3-31
Headlight indicator light (if equipped) ................. 3-32
Steering responsive fog lights warning indicator/
Steering responsive fog lights OFF indicator
(models with EyeSight system) ......................... 3-32
BSD/RCTA warning indicator (if equipped) .......... 3-32
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator (if equipped) ................ 3-32
Information display (if equipped) ...................... 3-32
Outside temperature indicator ............................ 3-33
Driving information display................................. 3-33
Clock ................................................................. 3-37
Multi information display (models with type
B combination meter) ..................................... 3-38
Basic operation.................................................. 3-39
Welcome screen and Good-bye screen ............... 3-39
Warning screen .................................................. 3-40
Basic screens .................................................... 3-40
Menu screens .................................................... 3-40
Multi function display ........................................ 3-42
Models without multi function display ................. 3-42
Safety precautions ............................................. 3-43
Features ............................................................ 3-43
Locations........................................................... 3-43
Basic operation.................................................. 3-44
Welcome screen................................................. 3-44
Date screen........................................................ 3-44
Ending screen ................................................... 3-45
Self-check screen .............................................. 3-45
Interruption screen ............................................ 3-46
Basic screens.................................................... 3-47
Selection screen ................................................ 3-54
Date and time settings ....................................... 3-57
Image quality and volume settings ..................... 3-64
Screen settings.................................................. 3-66
Maintenance settings ......................................... 3-74
Driving history registration................................. 3-77
Car settings....................................................... 3-78
Initialize............................................................. 3-86
Light control switch........................................... 3-89
Precautions and tips.......................................... 3-89
Headlights ......................................................... 3-89
High/low beam change (dimmer) ........................ 3-91
Headlight flasher ............................................... 3-91
Daytime running light system ............................. 3-92
Turn signal lever ................................................ 3-92
One-touch lane changer..................................... 3-93
Illumination brightness control ......................... 3-93
Headlight beam leveler (if equipped) ............... 3-94
Automatic headlight beam leveler (models with
HID headlights) ................................................ 3-94
Fog light switch (if equipped) ........................... 3-94
Steering responsive fog lights system (models
with EyeSight system) ..................................... 3-95
Wiper and washer.............................................. 3-96
Windshield wiper and washer switches .............. 3-97
Rear window wiper and washer switch –
5-door ............................................................. 3-99
Black plate (7,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls
Mirrors. .............................................................. 3-100
Inside mirror .................................................... 3-100
Auto-dimming mirror/compass (if equipped)...... 3-100
Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink
®
(if equipped)................................................... 3-102
Outside mirrors................................................ 3-108
Defogger and deicer ........................................ 3-108
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel ......................... 3-110
Horn.................................................................. 3-111
Black plate (150,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without “keyless access with push–button start system”)
Ignition switch (models with-
out “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK” position while the
vehicle is being driven or towed
because that will lock the steer-
ing wheel, preventing steering
control. And when the engine is
turned off, it takes a much great-
er effort than usual to steer.
. Before leaving the vehicle, al-
ways remove the key from the
ignition switch for safety and
never allow an unattended child
to remain in the vehicle. Failure
to follow this procedure could
result in injury to a child or
others. Children could operate
the power windows, the moon-
roof or other controls or even
make the vehicle move.
CAUTION
Do not attach a large key holder or
key case to either key. If it banged
against your knees or hands while
you are driving, it could turn the
ignition switch from the “ON” posi-
tion to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi-
tion, thereby stopping the engine.
Also, if the key is attached to a key
holder or to a large bunch of other
keys, centrifugal force may act on it
as the vehicle moves, resulting in
unwanted turning of the ignition
switch.
The ignition switch has four positions:
LOCK, ACC, ON and START.
NOTE
. Keep the i gnition switch in the
“LOCK” position when the engine is
not running.
. Using electrical accessories for a
long time with the ignition switch in the
“ON” or “ACC” position can cause the
battery to go dead.
. If the ignition switch will not move
from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”
position, turn the steering wheel
slightly to the left and right as you turn
the ignition switch.
& LOCK
The key can only be inserted or removed
in this position. The ignition switch will lock
the steering wheel when you remove the
key.
If turning the key is difficult, turn the
steering wheel slightly to the right and left
as you turn the key.
3-4
Black plate (151,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
The key can be turned from the “ACC” to
“LOCK” position only when the select
lever is in the “P” position (CVT models)
and the key is pushed in while turning it
(all models).
& ACC
In this position the electrical accessories
(audio, accessory power outlet, etc.) can
be used.
& ON
This is the normal operating position after
the engine is started.
& START
The engine is started in this position. The
starter cranks the engine to start it. When
the key is released (after the engine has
started), the key automatically returns to
the “ON” position.
CAUTION
Do not turn the ignition switch to the
“START” position while the engine
is running.
If your registered key fails to start the
engine, pull out the key once (the security
indicator light will blink), and then insert
the key into the ignition switch and turn it
to the “START” position and again try to
start the engine.
NOTE
The engine may not start in the follow-
ing cases:
. The key grip is touching another key
or a metallic key holder.
. The key is near another key that
contains an immobilizer transponder.
. The key is near or touching another
transmitter.
& Key reminder chime
The reminder chime sounds when the
driver’s door is opened and the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.
The chime stops unde r the following
conditions.
. when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position
. when the key is removed from the
ignition switch
. when the driver’s door is closed
Instruments and controls/Ignition switch (models without “keyless access with push–button start system”)
– CONTINUED –
3-5
3
Black plate (152,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Push–button ignition switch (models with push–button start system)
& Ignition switch light (if
equipped)
For easy access to the ignition switch in
the dark, the ignition switch light illumi-
nates when the driver’s door is opened or
when the driver’s door is unlocked using
the remote keyless entry transmitter.
The light remains illuminated for several
tens of seconds and then gradually turns
off under the following conditions.
. when the driver’s door is closed
. when the doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry transmitter
The light turns off immediately under the
following conditions.
. when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position
. when all doors and the rear gate (5-
door) are locked using the remote keyless
entry transmitter
Push-button ignition switch
(models with push-button
start system)
& Safety precautions
Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-10.
& Operating range for push-
button start system
4-door
1) Antenna
2) Operating range
5-door
1) Antenna
2) Operating range
NOTE
. If the access key is not detected
within the operating range of the an-
tennas inside the vehicle, the push-
button ignition switch and the engine
start cannot be operated.
. Even when the access key is outside
the vehicle, if it is placed too close to
the glass, it may be possible to switch
the power or to start the engine.
. Do not leave the access key in the
following places. It may become im-
possible to operate the push-button
ignition switch and the engine start. It
may also cause a false warning to
3-6
Black plate (153,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
issue although no malfunction actually
occurs, or not to issue a warning when
any malfunction occurs.
– On the instrument panel
– On the floor
– Inside the glove box
– Inside the door trim pocket
– On the rear seat
– On the rear shelf (4-door)
– Inside the trunk (4-door)
– In the cargo area (5-door)
. When operating the push-bu tton
ignition switch or starting the engine,
if the access key battery is discharged,
perform the procedure described in
“Access key – if access key does not
operate properly” F9-18. In such a
case, replace the battery immediately.
Refer to “Replacing battery of access
key” F11-44.
& Switching power status
1) Operation indicator
2) Push-button ignition switch
The power is switched every time the
push-button ignition switch is pressed.
1. Carry the access key, and sit in the
driver’s seat.
2. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch
without depressing the brake pedal. Every
time the button is pressed, the power is
switched i n the sequence of “OFF”,
“ACC”, “ON” and “OFF”. When the engine
is stopped and the push-button ignition
switch is in “ACC” or “ON”, the operation
indicator on the pu sh-button ignition
switch illuminates in orange.
Power
status
Indicator color Operation
OFF Turned off
Power is turned
off.
ACC Orange
The following
systems can be
used:
audio and ac-
cessory power
outlet.
ON
Orange
(while engine is
stopped)
All electrical
systems can be
used.
Turned off
(while engine is
running)
CAUTION
. When the push-button ignition
switch is left in “ON” or “ACC”
for a long time, it may result in
vehicle battery discharge.
. Do not spi ll drinks or other
liquids on the push-button igni-
tion switch. It may cause a mal-
function.
. Do not touch the push-button
ignition switch with a hand soiled
with oil or other contaminants. It
may cause a malfunction.
. If the push-button ignition switch
Instruments and controls/Push–button ignition switch (models with push–button start system)
– CONTINUED –
3-7
3
Black plate (154,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Hazard warning flasher
does not operate smoothly, stop
the operation. Contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
. If the push-button ignition switch
does not illuminate even when
the instrument panel illumination
is turned on, have the vehicle
inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
. If the vehicle was left in the hot
sun for a long time, the surface of
the push-button ignition switch
may get hot. Be careful not to
burn yourself.
NOTE
. When operating the push-bu tton
ignition switch, firmly press it all the
way.
. If the push-button ignition switch is
pressed quickly, the power may not
turn on or off.
. If the indicator light on the push-
button ignition switch flashes in green
when the push-button ignition switch is
pressed, steering is locked. When this
occurs, press the push-button ignition
switch while turning the steering wheel
left and right.
! Battery drainage prevention func-
tion
When the push-button ignition switch is
left in the “ACC” or “ON” position for
approximately 1 hour, the push-button
ignition switch will be automatica lly
switched to “OFF” to prevent the battery
from going dead. This function is activated
when the select lever is in the “ P” position.
& When access key does not
operate properly
Refer to “Access key – if access key does
not operate properly” F9-18.
Hazard warning flasher
Models without multi function display
Models with multi function display
The hazard warning flasher is used to
warn other drivers when you have to park
3-8
Black plate (155,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
your vehicle under emergency conditions.
The hazard warning flasher works regard-
less of the position of the ignition switch.
To turn on the hazard warning flasher,
push the hazard warning button on the
instrument panel. All the turn signal lights
and the turn signal indicator lights will
flash. To turn off the flasher, push the
button again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
Meters and gauges
NOTE
Some of the meters and gauges on the
combination meter use liquid-crystal
displays. You will find their indications
hard to see if you wear polarized
glasses.
& Combination meter illumina-
tion
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, various parts of the combi-
nation meter will illuminate in the following
sequence.
1. Warning lights, indicator lights, meter
needles, gauge needles and liquid crystal
display illuminate.
2. Meter and g auge i ndicatio ns each
show MAX position.
3. Meter and g auge i ndicatio ns each
show MIN position.
4. Regular illumination (for driving) be-
gins.
& Canceling the function for
meter/gauge needle move-
ment upon turning on the
ignition switch
It is possible to activate or deactivate the
movement of the meter needles and
gauge needles that takes place when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
! Type A combination meter
To change the setting, perform the follow-
ing procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” or “ACC” position.
1) Trip knob
2. Press the trip knob to show “ ” or
“
” on the trip meter display.
Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges
– CONTINUED –
3-9
3
Black plate (156,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges
The display can be switched as shown in
the following sequence by pressing the
trip knob.
*: They cannot be displayed when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
To change the current setting, press the
trip knob for at least 2 seconds.
: Activated
: Deactivated
NOTE
. Your vehicle’s initial movement
setting of the meter/gauge needles
has been set for activation “
” at
the time of shipment from the factory.
. It is not possible to change the initial
movement setting of the meter/gauge
needles when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position. Change the setting
whentheignitionswitchisinthe
“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position.
! Type B combination meter
Perform the procedures describe d in
“Gauge Initial Movement” F3-41.
& Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle
speed.
& Odometer
Type A
1) Trip knob
Type B
1) Trip knob (U.S.-spec. models)
2) Trip knob (except U.S.-spec. models)
This meter displays the odometer when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The odometer shows the total distance
that the vehicle has been driven.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC”
position, the odometer/trip meter will light
up. If you do not press the trip knob within
10 seconds of illumination of the od-
ometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip meter
will turn off.
Also, if you open and close the driver’s
door within 10 seconds of illumination of
the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip
meter will turn off.
3-10
Black plate (157,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Double trip meter
Type A
1) Trip knob
Type B
1) Trip knob (U.S.-spec. models)
2) Trip knob (except U.S.-spec. models)
This meter displays the two trip meters
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
The trip meter shows the distance that the
vehicle has been driven since you last set
it to zero.
If you press the trip knob when the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC”
position, the odometer/trip meter will light
up. It is possible to switch between the A
trip meter and B trip meter indications
while the odometer/trip meter is lit up. If
you do not press the trip knob within 10
seconds of illumination of the odometer/
trip meter, the odometer/trip meter will turn
off.
Also, if you open and close the driver’s
door within 10 seconds of illumination of
the odometer/trip meter, the odometer/trip
meter will turn off.
The display can be switched as shown in
the following sequence by pressing the
trip knob.
*: They cannot be displayed when the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
To set the trip meter to zero, select the A
trip or B trip meter by pressing the knob
and keep the knob pressed for more than
2 seconds.
CAUTION
To ensure safety, do not attempt to
change the function of the indicator
during driving, as an accident could
result.
NOTE
If the connection between the combina-
tion meter and battery is broken for any
reason such as vehicle maintenance or
fuse replacement, the data recorded on
the trip meter will be lost.
& Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine speed
in thousands of revolutions per minute.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
pointer of the tachometer in the red
zone. In this range, fuel injection will
be cut by the engine control module
to protect the engine from overrev-
Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges
– CONTINUED –
3-11
3
Black plate (158,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Meters and gauges
ving. The engine will resume run-
ning normally after the engine speed
is reduced below the red zone.
NOTE
To protect the engine/transmission
while the select lever is in the “P” or
“N” position (for CVT models) or the
shift lever is in the neutral position (for
MT models), the engine is controlled so
that the engine speed may not become
too high even if the accelerator pedal is
pressed hard.
& Fuel gauge
Fuel gauge (type A)
1) Trip knob
Fuel gauge (type B)
1) Trip knob (U.S.-spec. models)
2) Trip knob (except U.S.-spec. models)
The fuel gauge is displayed when the
ignition is in the “ON” position, and it
shows the approximate amount of fuel
remaining in the tank.
The gauge indication may change slightly
during braking, turning or acceleration due
to fuel level movement in the tank.
If you press the trip knob while the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC”
position, the fuel gauge will light up and
indicate the amount of fuel remaining in
the tank. If, while the f uel gau ge is
indicating the amount of fuel remaining in
the tank, you (a) do not press the trip knob
for 10 seconds or (b) open and close the
driver’s door, the fuel gauge indication will
turn off.
NOTE
You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler
door (lid) is located on the right side of
the vehicle.
& ECO gauge (if equipped)
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
The ECO gauge shows the difference
between the current rate of fuel consump-
tion and the average rate of fuel consump-
tion since the trip meter was last reset.
If the needle of the gauge moves towards
the right side, this indicates better fuel
3-12
Black plate (159,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
efficiency.
NOTE
. The E CO gauge shows only an
approximate indication of fuel effi-
ciency.
. After resetting the trip meter, the
average rate of fuel consumption is not
shown until driving 0.6 mile (1 km).
Before that time, the ECO gauge does
not operate.
Warning and indicator lights
& Initial illumination for system
check
Several of the warning and indicator lights
illuminate when the ignition switch is
initially turned to the “ON” position. This
permits checking the operation of the
bulbs.
Apply the parking brake and turn the
ignition switch to the “ON” position. For
the system check, the following lights
illuminate and then turn off after several
seconds or after the engine has started.
: Seatbelt warning light
(The seatbelt warning light turns off
only when the d river fastens the
seatbelt.)
: Front passenger’s seatbelt warning
light
(The seatbelt warning light turns off
only when the front seat passenger
fastens the seatbelt.)
: SRS airbag system warning light
ON /
: Front passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator light
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag
OFF indicator light
: CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-
function indicator light
: Coolant temperature lo w indi cato r
light/Coolant temperature high warn-
ing light
: Charge warning light
: Oil pressure warning light
: Engine low oil level warning light
: Windshield washer fluid warning light
: AT OIL TEMP warning light
(CVT models)
: Low tire pressure warning light
(U.S.- spec. models)
/ : ABS warning light
/ : Brake system warning light
: Low fuel warning light
: Hill start assist warning light/Hill start
assist OFF indicator light
: Door open warning light
: AWD warning light (CVT models)
: Power steering warning light
: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
tion indicator light
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
– CONTINUED –
3-13
3
Black plate (160,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indica-
tor light
: Cruise control indicator light
(if equipped)
: Cruise control set indicator light
(if equipped)
: Automatic headlight beam leveler
warning light (models with HID head-
lights)
: Steering responsive fog lights warn-
ing indicator/Steering responsive fog
ligh ts OFF indicator (models with
EyeSight system)
If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates a
burned-out bulb or a malfunction of the
corresponding system.
Consult your authorized SUBARU dealer
for repair.
& Seatbelt warning light
and chime
Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbelt
warning device at the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat, as required by current
safety standards.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, this device reminds the driver
and front passenger to fasten their seat-
belts by illuminating the warning lights in
the locations indicated in the following
illustration and sounding a chime.
Driver’s warning light (type A)
Driver’s warning light (type B)
Front passenger’s warning light
! Operation
If the driver and/or front passenger have/
has not yet fastened the seatbelt(s) when
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position, the seatbelt warning light(s) will
flash for 6 seconds, to warn that the
seatbelt(s) is/are unfastened. If the dri-
ver’s seatbelt is not fastened, a chime will
also sound simultaneously.
NOTE
. If the driver’s and/or front passen-
ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is still not fastened
6 seconds later, the seatbelt warning
device operates as follows according
to the vehicle speed.
– At speeds lower than approxi-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
3-14
Black plate (161,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
The warning light(s) for unfastened
seatbelt(s) will alternate between
steady illumination and flashing at
15-second intervals. The chime will
not sound.
– At speeds higher than approxi-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h)
The warning light(s) for unfastened
seatbelt(s) will alternate between
flashing and steady illumination at
15-second intervals and the chime
will sound while the warning light(s)
is/are flashing.
. It is possible to cancel the warning
operation th at follows the 6-second
warning after turning ON the ignition
switch . When the ignition switch is
turned ON next time, however, the
complete sequence of the warning
operation resumes. For further details
about canceling the warning operation,
please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If there is no passenger on the front
passenger’s seat, the seatbelt warning
device for the front passenger’s seat will
be deactivated. The front passenger’s
occupant detection system monitors
whether or not there is a passenger on
the front passenger’s seat.
Observe the following precautions. Failure
to do so may prevent the device from
functioning correctly or cause the device
to fail.
. Do not install any accessory such as a
table or TV onto the seatback.
. Do not store a heavy l oad in the
seatback pocket.
. Do not allow the rear seat occupant to
place his/her hands or legs on the front
passenger’s seatback, or allow him/her to
pull the seatback.
. Do not use front seats with their back-
ward-forward position and seatback not
being locked into place securely. If any of
them are not locked securely, adjust them
again. For adjusting procedure, refer to
“Front seats” F1-2.
If the seatbelt warning device for the front
passenger’s seat does not function cor-
rectly (e.g., it is activated even when the
front passenger’s seat is empty or it is
deactivated even when the front passen-
ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt),
take the following actions.
. Ensure that no article is placed on the
seat other than a child restraint system
and its child oc cupant, altho ugh we
strongly recommend that all children sit
in the rear seat properly restrained.
. Ensure that there is no article left in the
seatback pocket.
. Ensure that the backward-forward po-
sition and seatback of front passenger’s
seat are locked into place securely by
moving the seat back and forth.
If still the seatbelt warning device for front
passenger’s seat does not function cor-
rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-
tions described above, immediately con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion.
& SRS airbag system
warning light
WARNING
If the warning light exhibits any of
the following conditions, there may
be a malfunction in the seatbelt
pretensioners and/or SRS airbag
system. Immediately take your vehi-
cle to your nearest SUBARU dealer
to have the system checked. Unless
checked and properly repaired, the
seatbelt pretensioners and/or SRS
airbag will not operate properly in
the event of a collision, which may
increase the risk of injury.
. Flashing or flickering of the warn-
ing light
. No illumination of the warning
light when the ignition switch is
first turned to the “ON” position
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
– CONTINUED –
3-15
3
Black plate (162,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
. Continuous illumination of the
warning light
. Illumination of the warning light
while driving
For details about the components mon-
itored by the warning light, refer to “SRS
airbag system monitors” F1-67.
& Front passenger’s frontal
airbag ON and OFF indica-
tors
ON / : Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
indicator
/ : Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFF
indicator
The front passenger’s frontal airbag ON
and OFF indicators show you the status of
the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.
The indicators are located next to the
clock in the center portion of the dash-
board.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, both the ON and OFF
indicators illuminate for 6 seconds during
which time the system is checked. Follow-
ing the system check, both indicators turn
off for 2 seconds. After that, one of the
indicators illuminates depending on the
status of the front passenger’s SRS frontal
airbag determined by the SUBARU ad-
vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is activated, the passenger’s frontal airbag
ON indicator will illuminate while the OFF
indicator will remain off.
If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag
is deactivated, the passenger’sfrontal
airbag ON indicator will remain off while
the OFF indicator will illuminate.
With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”
position, if both the ON and OFF indica-
tors remain illuminated or off simulta-
neously even after the system check
period, the system is malfunctioning.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately for an inspection.
& CHECK ENGINE warn-
ing light/Malfunction in-
dicator light
CAUTION
If the CHECK ENGINE light illumi-
nates while you are driving, have
your vehicle checked/repaired by
your SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible. Continued vehicle opera-
tion without having the emi ssion
control system checked and re-
paired as necessary could cause
serious damage, which may not be
covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
If this light illuminates steadily or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate
that th ere is a problem or po tential
problem somewhere in the emission con-
trol system.
! If the light illuminates steadily
If the light illuminates steadily while driving
or does not turn off after the engine starts,
an emission control system malfunction
has been detected.
You should have your vehicle checked by
an authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
3-16
Black plate (163,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
NOTE
This light also illuminates when the fuel
filler cap is not tightened until it clicks.
If you have recently refueled your vehicle,
the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warning
light/malfunction indicator light illuminating
could be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.
Remove the cap and retighten it until it
clicks. Make sure nothing is interfering
with the sealing of the cap. Tightening the
cap will not make the CHECK ENGINE
warning light turn off immediately. It may
take several driving trips. If the light does
not turn off, take your vehicle to your
authorized SUBARU dealer immediately.
! If the light is blinking
If the light is blinking while driving, an
engine misfire condition has been de-
tected which may damage the emission
control system.
To prevent serious damage to the emis-
sion control system, you should do the
following.
. Reduce vehicle speed.
. Avoid hard acceleration.
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-
ble.
. If towing a trailer, stop doing so as soon
as possible (trailer towing permitted with
Crosstrek models only).
The CHECK ENGINE warning light may
stop blinking and illuminate steadily after
several driving trips. You should have your
vehicle checked by an authorized
SUBARU dealer immediately.
& Coolant temperature
low indicator light/Cool-
ant temperature high
warning light
CAUTION
. After turning the ignition switch
to the “ON” position, if this
indicator light/warning light be-
haves in any of the following
ways, the electrical system may
be malfunctioning. Contact your
SUBARU dealer immediately for
an inspection.
– It remains blinking in RED.
– It remains illuminated in RED
for more than 2 seconds.
– It remains blinking in RED and
BLUE alternately.
. While driving, if thi s indicator
light/warning light behaves in
any of the following ways, take
the specif ied appropriate mea-
sure listed below.
– Blinking or il luminated in
RED:
Safely stop the vehicle as
soon as possible, and refer
to the emergency steps to
take in the case of engine
overheating. After that, have
the system checked by your
nearest SUBARU dealer. Refer
to “Engine overheating” F9-
13.
– Blinking in RED and BLUE
alternately:
The electrical system may be
malfunctioning. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for an inspec-
tion.
This coola nt temperature low indicator
light/coolant temperature high warning
light has the following three functions.
. Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi-
cient warming up of the engine
. Blinking in RED indicates that the
engine is close to overheating
. Illumination in RED indicates overheat-
ing condition of the engine
For a system check, this indicator light/
warning light illuminates in RED for
approximately 2 seconds when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
– CONTINUED –
3-17
3
Black plate (164,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
After that, this indicator light/warning light
changes to BLUE and maintains illumina-
tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated light
turns off when the engine is warmed up
sufficiently.
If the engine coolant temperature in-
creases over the specified range, the
indicator light/warning light blinks in
RED. At this time, the engine is close to
overheating.
If the engine coolant temperature in-
creases further, the indicator light/warning
light illuminates in RED continuously. At
this time, the engine may be overheating.
When the ind icator l ight/warning light
blinks in RED or illuminates in RED, safely
stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and
refer to the emergency steps to take in the
case of engine overheating. Refer to
“Engine overheating” F9-13. After that,
have the system checked by your nearest
SUBARU dealer.
Also, if the indicator light/warning light
often blinks in RED, the electrical system
may be malfunctioning. Contact your
SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
NOTE
If the engine is restarted after a certain
driving condition, this indicator light/
warning light may illuminate in RED.
However, this is not a malfunction if the
indicator light/warning light turns off
after a short time.
& Charge warning light
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the charging
system is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
check the alternator belt. If the belt is
loose, broken or if the belt is in good
condition but the light remains illuminated,
contact your nea rest S UBA RU de aler
immediately.
& Oil pressure warning
light
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the engine oil
pressure is low and the lubricating system
is not working properly.
If the light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off after the engine starts, stop the
engine at the first safe opportunity and
check the engine oil level. If the oil level is
low, add oil immediately. If the engine oil is
at the proper level but the light remains
illuminated, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer immediately.
For details about checking the engine oil
level or adding the engine oil, refer to
“Engine oil” F11-8.
CAUTION
Do not operate the engine with the
oil pressure warning light illumi-
nated. This may cause serious en-
gine damage.
& Engine low oil level
warning light
This light illuminates when the engine oil
level decreases to the lower limit.
If the engine low oil level warning light
illuminates while driving, park the vehicle
in a safe and level location, and then
check the engine oil level. When the
engine oil level is not within the normal
range, refill with engine oil. Refer to
“Engine oil” F11-8.
If the warning light does not turn off after
refilling the engine oil, or the warning light
illuminates even though the engine oil
level is within the normal range, have the
vehicle checked by a SUBARU dealer.
3-18
Black plate (165,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
NOTE
. After replacing or adding the engine
oil, if the engine oil level is within the
normal range when restarting the en-
gine on a level surface, the warning
light will turn off.
. The warning light may illuminate
temporarily in the following conditions
because a low oil level may be detected
as a result of significant oil movement
in the engine.
– when the vehicle is considerably
inclined on an uphill or steep slope
– when the vehicle has continu-
ously accelerated and decelerated
– when the vehicle is continuously
turned
– when the vehicle is driven on a
road that alternates cont inuously
between uphill and downhill
& Windshield washer
fluid warning light
This light illuminates when the fluid level in
the windshield washer fluid tank de-
creases to the lower limit (approximately
1.1 US qt, 1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt).
& AT OIL TEMP warning
light (CVT models)
If this light illuminates when the engine is
running, it may indicate that the transmis-
sion fluid temperature is too hot.
If the light illuminates while driving, im-
mediately stop the vehicle in a safe place
and let the engine idle until the warning
light turns off.
! Transmission control system warn-
ing
If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashes
after the engine has started, it may
indicate that the transmission control
system is not working properly. Contact
your nearest SUBARU dealer for service
immediately.
& Low tire pressure
warning light (U.S.-spec.
models)
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-
ing light will illuminate for approximately 2
seconds to check that the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) is functioning
properly. If there is no problem and all tires
are properly inflated, the light will turn off.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufac-
turer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of
a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label , yo u sho uld d eterm ine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-
inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for pr oper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver ’s responsibil ity to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
– CONTINUED –
3-19
3
Black plate (166,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction,
the telltale will flash for approximately one
minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exi sts. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of re-
placement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Alw ays check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
Should the warning light illuminate stea-
dily after blinking for approximately one
minute, have the system inspected by
your nearest SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
If this light does not illuminate
briefly after the ignition switch is
turned ON or the light illuminates
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute, you should have
your Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem checked at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly and keep
driving straight ahead while gradu-
ally reducing speed. Then slowly
pull off the road to a safe place.
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and serious
personal injury could occur.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
sure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the Low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting.
If the light illuminates steadily after
blinking for approximately one min-
ute, promptly contact a SUBARU
dealer to have the system inspected.
CAUTION
The tire pressure monitoring system
is NOT a substitute for manually
checking tire pressure. The tire
pressure should be checked peri-
odically (at least monthly) using a
tire gauge. After any change to tire
pressure(s), the tire pressure mon-
itoring system will not re-check tire
inflation pressures until the vehicle
is first driven more than 20 mph (32
km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-
sures, increase the vehicle speed to
at least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start the
TPMS re-checking of the tire infla-
tion pressures. If the tire pressures
are now above the severe low
pressure threshold, the low tire
pressure warning light should turn
off a few minutes later. Therefore, be
sure to install the specified size for
the front and rear tires.
3-20
Black plate (167,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& ABS warning light
CAUTION
. If any of the following conditions
occur, we recommend that you
have the ABS repaired at the first
available opportuni ty by you r
SUBARU dealer.
– The warning light does not
illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
– The warning light illuminates
when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position,
but it does not turn off even
when the vehicle speed ex-
ceeds approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h).
– The warning light illuminates
during driving.
. When the warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is
off), the ABS fun ction shuts
down. However, the conventional
brake system continues to oper-
ate normally.
The ABS warning light illuminates to-
gether with the brake system warning light
if the EBD sy stem malfuncti ons. For
further details of the EBD system mal-
function warning, refer to “Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system
warning” F3-22.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following conditions,
the ABS may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates when
the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position and turns off approxi-
mately 2 seconds after the engine has
started.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light remains illumi-
nated after the engine has been started,
but it turns off when the vehicle speed
reaches approximately 25 mph (40
km/h).
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and
remains off.
When driving with an insufficient battery
voltage such as when the engine is jump
started, the ABS warning light may illumi-
nate. This is due to the low battery voltage
and does not indicate a malfunction.
When the battery becomes fully charged,
the light will turn off.
& Brake system
warning light (red)
The light illuminates with the parking
brake applied while the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position. It turns off when the
parking brake is fully released.
WARNING
. Driving with the brake system
warning light on is dangerous.
This indicates your brake system
may not be working properly. If
the light r emains illuminated,
have the brakes inspected by a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether
the brakes are operating prop-
erly, do not drive the vehicle.
Have your vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for re-
pair.
The brake system warning light has the
following functions.
! Brake fluid level warning
This light illuminates when the brake fluid
level has dropped to near the “MIN” level
of the brake fluid reservoir with the ignition
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
– CONTINUED –
3-21
3
Black plate (168,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
switch in the “ON” position and with the
parking brake fully released.
If the brake system warning light should
illuminate while driving (with the parking
brake fully released and with the ignition
switch positioned in “ON”), it could be an
indication of leaking of brake fluid or worn
brake pads. If this occurs, immediately
stop the vehicle at the nearest safe
location and check the brake fluid level.
If the fluid level is below the “MIN” mark in
the reservoir, do not drive the vehicle.
Have the vehicle towed to the nearest
SUBARU dealer for repair.
! Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD) system warning
The brake system warning light also
illuminates if a malfunction occurs in the
EBD system. In that event, it illuminates
together with the ABS warning light.
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously
during driving.
Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-
tional braking system will still function.
However, the rear wheels will be more
prone to locking when the brakes are
applied harder than usual and the vehi-
cle’s motion may therefore become some-
what harder to control.
If the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously,
take the following steps.
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
flat location.
2. Shut down the engine, appl y the
parking brake and then restart it.
3. Release the parking brake. Even if
both warning lights turn off, the EBD
system may be malfunctioning. Drive
carefully to the nearest SUBARU dealer
and have the system inspected.
4. If both warning lights illuminate again
and remain illuminated after the engine
has been restarted, shut down the engine
again, apply the parking brake, and check
the brake fluid level.
5. If the brake fluid level is not below the
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
6. If the brake fluid level is below the
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
& Low fuel warning light
The l ow fuel warning light illuminates
when the tank is nearly empty, at approxi-
mately 2.6 US gal (10.0 liters, 2.2 Imp gal).
It only operates when the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position.
CAUTION
Promptly put fuel in the tank when-
ever the low fuel warning light
illuminates. Engine misfires as a
result of an empty tank could cause
damage to the engine.
NOTE
This light does not turn off unless the
tank is replenished up to an internal
fuel quantity of approximately 4.5 US
gal (17 liters, 3.7 Imp gal).
& Hill start assist warning
light/Hill start assist
OFF indicator light
! Hill start assist warning light
While the engine is running, if there are
any malfunctions in the Hill start assist
system, the warning light will illuminate.
WARNING
When the Hill start assist warning
light illuminates, have the vehicle
inspected at an authorized SUBARU
3-22
Black plate (169,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
dealer.
! Hill start assist OFF indicator light
While the Hill start assist system is
deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF
indicator light illuminates continuously to
inform the driver that the Hill start assist
system is not operational.
& Door open warning
light
The warning light illuminates if any door,
the rear gate (5-door models) or trunk lid
(4-door models) is not fully closed. This
function is effective even if the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC”
position, or the key is removed from the
ignition switch.
Always make sure this light is not illumi-
nated before you start to drive.
& All-Wheel Drive warn-
ing light (CVT models)
This light blinks if the vehicle is driven with
tires of differing diameters fitted on the
wheels or with an excessively low air
pressure in any of the tires.
WARNING
If the AWD warning light flashes,
promptly park in a safe location then
check whether all four tires are the
same diameter and whether any of
the tires has a puncture or has lost
air pressure for some other reason.
Continuing to drive with the AWD
warning light flashing can lead to
powertrain damage.
& Power steering warn-
ing light
This warning light illuminates when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position and turns off after the engine
has started. This indicates that the warn-
ing system is working properly.
While the engine is running, this warning
light illuminates when a malfunction has
been detected in the electric power steer-
ing system.
CAUTION
When the power steering warning
light is illuminated, there may be
more resistance when the steering
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and
have the vehicle inspected immedi-
ately.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the
following ways, the power steering
control system may temporarily limit
the power assist in order to prevent the
system components, such as the con-
trol computer and drive motor, from
overheating.
. The steering wheel is operated fre-
quently and turned sharply while the
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low
speeds, such as while frequently turn-
ing the steering wheel during parallel
parking.
. The steering wheel remains in the
fully turned position for a long period
of time.
At this time, there will be more resis-
tance when steering. However this is
not a malfunction. Normal steering
force will be restored after the steering
wheel is not operated for a while and
the power steering control system has
an opportunity to cool down. However,
if the power steering is operated in a
non-standard way which causes power
assist limitation to occur too fre-
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
– CONTINUED –
3-23
3
Black plate (170,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
quently, that may result in a malfunc-
tion of the power steering control
system.
& Vehicle Dynamics
Control warning light/
Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol operation indicator
light
! Vehicle Dynamics Control warning
light
CAUTION
The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem provides its ABS control
through the electrical circuit of the
ABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is
inoperative, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system becomes unable to
provide ABS control. As a result, the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system
also becomes inoperative, causing
the warning light to i lluminate.
Although both the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system and ABS are inop-
erative in this case, the ordinary
functions of the brake system are
still available. You will be safe while
driving with this condition, but drive
carefully and have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
NOTE
. If the electrical circuit of the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system itself mal-
functions, the warning light only illumi-
nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System) remains fully opera-
tional.
. The warning light illuminates when
the electronic control system of the
ABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
malfunctions.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably inoperative under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
. The warning light does not illuminate
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
. The warning light illuminates while the
vehicle is running.
NOTE
If the warning light behavior is as
described in the following examples,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
may be considered normal.
. The warning light illuminates when
the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position and turns off approxi-
mately 2 seconds after the engine has
started.
. The warning light illuminates right
after the engine is started but turns off
immediately, remaining off.
. The warning light illuminates after
the engine has started and turns off
while the vehicle is subsequently being
driven.
. The warning light illuminates during
driving, but it turns off immediately and
remains off.
. The warning light illuminates when
the engine has stalled and continues to
illuminate after the engine has been
restarted. However, it will turn off once
the vehicle starts moving.
! Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
tion indicator light
The indicator light flashes during activa-
tion of the skid suppression function and
during activation of the traction control
function.
NOTE
. The light may remain illuminated for
a short period of time after the engine
has been started, especially in cold
weather. This does not indicate the
3-24
Black plate (171,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
existence of a probl em. The light
should turn off as soon as the engine
has warmed up.
. The indicator light illuminates when
the engine has developed a problem
and the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator light is on.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under the follow-
ing condition. Have your vehicle checked
at a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
. The light does not turn off even after
the lapse of several minutes (the engine
has warmed up) after the engine has
started.
& Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF indicator
light
The light illuminates when the Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF switch is pressed
to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system.
The Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
probably malfunctioning under any of the
following conditions. Have your vehicle
checked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately.
. The light does not illuminate when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
. The light does not turn off even once
several seconds have elapsed after the
ignition switch has been turned to the
“ON” position.
& Warning chimes and warning
indicator of the keyless ac-
cess with push-button start
system (if equipped)
Access key warning indicator (type A)
Access key warning indicator (type B)
The keyless access with push-button start
system sounds a w arni ng chim e and
flashes the access key warning indicator
on the combinatio n meter in order to
minimize improper operations and help
protect your vehicle from theft.
When the warning chime sounds and/or
the warning indicator flashes, take the
appropriate action.
WARNING
Never drive the vehicle if the indi-
cator on the push-button ignition
switch is flashing in green when
starting the engine. This indicates
the status that the steering wheel is
not released and could result in an
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
– CONTINUED –
3-25
3
Black plate (172,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
accident involving serious injury or
death.
CAUTION
. When starting the engine again
after the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch
flashes in green, if the operation
indicator is still flashing in green,
there could be a steering lock
malfunction. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
. When the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch
flashes in orange, contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
NOTE
. When doors are not locked because
the access key is left inside the trunk,
you cannot open the trunk lid by
pushing the trunk opener button on
the trunk lid. Pull the trunk lid release
lever upward to open the trunk lid.
Refer to “To open the trunk lid from
inside” F2-39.
. Do not leave the access key inside
the trunk. Depending on the status of
the access key and situation, the trunk
lockout protect function may not oper-
ate. Make sure that you carry the
access key, and close the trunk lid.
. Even when the access key is within
the operating ranges inside the vehicle,
the access key warning for engine start
may be provided depending on the
status of the access key and the
environmental conditions.
. When the access key is taken out of
the vehicle through an open window,
the access key takeout warning or
passenger access key takeout warning
will not be provided.
! List of warnings
CAUTION
When any of the following warnings
occurs even if the access key warn-
ing indicator does not appear, take
the appropriate action.
3-26
Black plate (173,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Access key
warning indica-
tor on meter
Operation indica-
tor on push-but-
ton ignition switch
Status Action
Ding,
ding ...
(intermittent)
—— —
The driver’s door was opened while
the push-button ignition switch is
“ACC” and the select lever is in the
“P” position.
Switch the push-button ignition
switch to “OFF”, or close the driver’s
door.
*When exiting the vehicle, be sure to
switch the push-button ignition
switch to “OFF”.
The push-button ignition switch was
switched to “OFF” while the driver’s
door is open.
Close the driver’s door.
Ding
Short beep
(2 seconds)
——
Lockout warning:
An attempt was made to lock all
doors while the access key is left
inside the vehicle.
Take out the access key from the
vehicle, and lock the doors.
*The doors cannot be locked while
the access key is inside the vehicle.
*A chirp sound will be heard, and all
doors will be unlocked.
—
Short beep
(2 seconds)
——
Trunk lockout warning:
The trunk was closed with the
access key in it while all doors are
locked (or during the automatic lock
time period) (4-door).
Take out the access key from the
trunk, and close the trunk.
*By pressing the trunk opener button
after this warning chime sounds, the
trunk can be unlocked.
Access key lock-in warning:
The door lock sensor was touched
while the push-button ignition switch
is “OFF” and the access key is
inside the vehicle.
Take out the access key from the
vehicle, and lock the doors.
*If the access key is inside the
vehicle, the doors cannot be locked.
—
Beep, beep,
beep, beep,
beep
(5 times)
——
Door ajar warning:
The door lock sensor is touched
while the ignition switch is in the
“OFF” position and one of the doors
including the rear gate is opened.
Close the doors securely and lock
them.
*If one of the doors including the rear
gate is opened, the doors cannot be
locked.
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
– CONTINUED –
3-27
3
Black plate (174,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Access key
warning indica-
tor on meter
Operation indica-
tor on push-but-
ton ignition switch
Status Action
Ding
Long beep (60
seconds max.)
——
Power warning:
The door lock sensor was touched
while carrying the access key, the
push-button ignition switch is in a
position other than “OFF” and the
select lever is in the “P” position.
Return the access key inside the
vehicle, or switch the push-button
ignition switch to “OFF”.
*If the push-button ignition switch is
not switched to “OFF”, the doors
cannot be locked.
Ding,
ding ...
(7 seconds)
—
(Flashes 1 sec.
intermittent)
—
Access key warning:
The vehicle was driven while the
access key is not inside the vehicle.
Carry the access key, and drive the
vehicle.
Ding —
(Flashes 1 sec.
intermittent)
—
Access key warning for engine
start:
The push-button ignition switch was
pressed while the access key is not
inside the vehicle.
Carry the access key, and press the
push-button ignition switch.
Ding
Beep, beep,
beep (3 times)
(Flashes 1 sec.
intermittent)
—
Access key takeout warning:
The driver exited the vehicle with the
access key and closed the driver’s
door while the push-button ignition
switch is in a position other than
“OFF” and the select lever is in the
“P” position.
Switch the push-button ignition
switch to “OFF”, and get out of the
vehicle.
Ding
Beep, beep,
beep (3 times)
(Flashes 1 sec.
intermittent)
—
Passenger access key takeout
warning:
A fellow passenger exited the vehi-
cle with the access key and closed a
door other than the driver’s door
while the push-button ignition switch
is in a position other than “OFF”.
Return the access key to inside the
vehicle, or switch the push-button
ignition switch to “OFF”.
3-28
Black plate (175,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Inside warning
chime
Outside warning
chime
Access key
warning indica-
tor on meter
Operation indica-
tor on push-but-
ton ignition switch
Status Action
Long beep
(continuous)
Long beep
(continuous)
(Flashes 1 sec.
intermittent)
—
The driver exited the vehicle with the
access key and closed the driver’s
door while the push-button ignition
switch is in a position other than
“OFF” and the select lever is in a
position other than the “P” position.
Shift the select lever to the “P”
position, switch the push-button
ignition switch to “OFF” and exit the
vehicle.
Long beep
(continuous)
—— —
Select lever position warning:
The engine is turned off by pressing
the push-button ignition switch and
the select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
Start the engine, shift the select
lever to the “P” position, switch the
push-button ignition switch to “OFF”
and exit the vehicle.
Long beep
(continuous)
—— —
Select lever position warning:
The driver’s door was opened while
the push-button ignition switch is in
a position other than “OFF” and the
select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
Shift the select lever to the “P”
position, switch the push-button
ignition switch to “OFF” and exit the
vehicle.
Ding —— —The battery of the access key is low.
Replace the battery of the access
key.
Ding ——
Flashes in green
(15 seconds
max.)
Steering lock warning:
The engine start procedure was
performed, but the steering is still
locked.
While turning the steering wheel
right and left lightly, depress the
brake pedal and press the push-
button ignition switch.
Ding ——Flashes in orange
System malfunction warning:
A malfunction was detected in the
power system or steering lock.
Contact a SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately and have the vehicle in-
spected.
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
– CONTINUED –
3-29
3
Black plate (176,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
& Security indicator light
This indicator light shows the status of the
alarm system. It also indicates operation
of the immobilizer system.
! Alarm system
It blinks to show the driver the operational
status of the alarm system. For detailed
information, refer to “Alarm system ” F2-
27.
! Immobilizer system
The security indicator light starts blinking
in the following conditions.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
. Immediately after the push-button igni-
tion switch is turned to the “OFF” position.
. Immediately after the driver’s door is
opened or closed when all of the following
conditions are met.
– The push-button ignition switch is in
the “ON” or “ACC” position.
– The access key is outside the
vehicle.
– The engine is not running.
In the event that the push-button ignition
switch is pressed to turn it on or to start
the engine carrying an unauthorized key
(for example, the key is unregistered or
the ID code does not match), the power is
not switched to “ON” and the security
indicator light continues blinking.
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
. Approximately 60 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned from the “ON”
position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
. Immediately after the key is pulled out.
If the indicator light does not blink in the
above conditions, it may indicate that
immobilizer system may be malfunction-
ing. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
immediately.
In the event that an unauthorized key (for
example, an unauthorized duplicate) is
used to start the engine, the security
indicator l ight illumin ates. For details
about the immobilizer system, refer to
“Immobilizer” F2-3.
NOTE
. The security indicator light remains
off in the following conditions. This is
normal and does not indicate a mal-
function.
– while the engine is running
– for approximately 60 seconds
after the ignition switch is turned
from t he “ON” position to the
“ACC” or “LOCK”/“OFF” position
. Even if the security indicator light
blinks irregularly or its fuse blows (the
light does not blink if its fuse is blown),
the immobilizer system will function
normally.
& Select lever/gear position in-
dicator (CVT models)
Type A
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
3) Select lever/gear position indicator
3-30
Black plate (177,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Type B
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
3) Select lever/gear position indicator
This indicator shows the position of the
select lever.
For models with manual mode, when the
manual mode is selected, the gear posi-
tion indicator (which shows the current
gear selection) and the upshift/downshift
indicator light up. Refer to “Continuously
variable transmission” F7-23.
& Turn signal indicator
lights
These lights show the operation of the turn
signal or lane change signal.
If the indicator lights do not blink or blink
rapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burned
out. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Refer to “Replacing bulbs” F11-36.
& High beam indicator
light
This light shows that the headlights are in
the high beam mode.
This indicator light also illuminates when
the headlight flasher is operated.
& Cruise control indica-
tor light (if equipped)
This light illuminates when the cruise
control main button is pressed to activate
the cruise control function. For details,
refer to “To set cruise control” F7-45.
CAUTION
If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/
malfunction indicator li ght illumi-
nates, the cruise control indicator
light flashes at the same time. At
this time, a void driving at high
speed and have your vehicle in-
spected at a SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
& Cruise control set in-
dicator light (if
equipped)
This light illuminates when vehicle speed
has been set to use the cruise control
function. Refer to “To set cruise control”
F7-45.
& Automatic headlight
beam leveler warning
light (models with HID
headlights)
This light illuminates when the automatic
headlight beam leveler does not operate
normally.
If this light illuminates while driving or does
not turn off approximately 3 seconds after
turning the ignition switch to the “ON”
position, have your vehicle inspected at
your SUBARU dealer.
& Front fog light indicator
light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates while the
front fog lights are illuminated.
Instruments and controls/Warning and indicator lights
– CONTINUED –
3-31
3
Black plate (178,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Information display
& Headlight indicator
light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates under the
following conditions.
. when the light switch is turned to the
“
” or “ ” position
. when the light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position and the headlights illumi-
nate automatically
& Steering responsive
fog lights warning indi-
cator/Steering respon-
sive fog lights OFF in-
dicator (models with
EyeSight system)
NOTE
For details about the steering respon-
sive fog lights system, refer to “Steer-
ing responsive fog lights system (mod-
els with EyeSight system)” F3-95.
! Steering responsive fog lights
warning indicator
This indicator appears when the steering
responsive fog lights system malfunctions.
When this indicator appears while the
system is activated, contact your
SUBARU dealer for an inspection.
! Steering responsive fog lights OFF
indicator
This indicator appears when the steering
responsive fog lights system is deacti-
vated. This indicator disappears when the
system is activated.
& BSD/RCTA warning in-
dicator (if equipped)
This warning indicator appears when the
BSD/RCTA is malfunctioning. In this case
the BSD/RCTA warning indicator will be
shown on the multi information display of
the combination meter. When this indica-
tor appears, have your vehicle inspected
by your SUBARU dealer as soon as
possible.
& BSD/RCTA OFF indica-
tor (if equipped)
The indicator appears when the BSD/
RCTA OFF switch is pressed to deactivate
the BSD/RCTA. In this case the BSD/
RCTA OFF indicator will be shown on the
multi information display of the combina-
tion meter. For details, refer to “BSD/
RCTA (5-door models — if equipped)”
F7-50.
Information display (if
equipped)
NOTE
For models with color multi function
display, refer to “Multi function dis-
play” F3-42.
1) Outside temperature indicator
2) Driving information display
3) Clock
With the ignition switch in the “ACC”
position, the clock appears on the display.
With the ignition switch in the “ON”
position, the outside temperature indica-
tor, driving information display and clock
all appear on the display.
3-32
Black plate (179,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Outside temperature indica-
tor
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
The outside temperature indicator shows
the outside temperature in a range from
−40 to 1228F(−40 to 508C).
The indicator can give a false reading
under any of the following conditions.
. When there is too much sun.
. During idling; whil e running a t low
speeds in a traffic jam; when the engine
is restarted immediately following a shut-
down.
. When the actual outside temperature
falls outside the specified indicator range.
! Road surface freeze warning indi-
cation
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
When the outside temperature drops to
378F(38 C) or lower, the temperature
indication flashes to show that the road
surface may be frozen.
If the outside temperature drops to 378F
(38C) or lower while the display is giving
an indication other than the outside
temperature, the display switches to the
outside temperature indication and flashes
for 5 seconds before returning to its
original indication.
If the display is already indicating an
outside temperature of 378F(38C) or lower
when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the indication does not
flash.
NOTE
The outsi de te mperature i ndication
may differ from the actual outside
temperature. The road surface freeze
warning indication should be treated
only as a guide. Be sure to check the
condition of the road surface before
driving.
& Driving information display
1) Information display selection knob
With the ignition switch in the “ON”
position, each successive press of the
information display selection knob
switches the display in the following
Instruments and controls/Information display
– CONTINUED –
3-33
3
Black plate (180,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Information display
sequence.
! Driving range on remaining fuel
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
The driving range indicates the distance
that can be driven taking into account the
amount of fuel remaining in the tank and
the average rate of fuel consumption.
When the low fuel warning light illumi-
nates, the driving range display flashes for
5 seconds. (The display first switches to
the driving range value if a different value
was previously displayed.)
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
If the driving range is shown as “ ”,
there is only a tiny amount of fuel left in the
tank. You must refuel the vehicle immedi-
ately.
NOTE
The driving range on remaining fuel is
only a guide. The indicated value may
differ from the actual driving range on
remaining fuel, so you must immedi-
ately fill the tank when the low fuel
warning light illuminates.
3-34
Black plate (181,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Average fuel consumption
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
This display shows the average rate of
fuel consumption since the trip meter was
last reset.
1) Trip knob
Pressing the trip knob toggles the display
between the average fuel consumption
corresponding to the A trip meter display
and the average fuel consumption corre-
sponding to the B trip meter display.
When either of the trip meter displays is
reset, the corresponding a verage fue l
consumption value is also reset.
NOTE
. The indicated values vary in accor-
dance with changes in the vehicle’s
running conditions. Also, the indicated
values m ay differ slightly from the
actual values and sho uld thus be
treated only as a guide.
. When either trip meter display is
reset, the average fuel consumption
corresponding to that trip meter dis-
play is not shown until the vehicle has
subsequently covered a distance of 1
mile (or 1 km).
! Current fuel consumption
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
This indication shows the rate of fuel
consumption at the present moment.
Instruments and controls/Information display
– CONTINUED –
3-35
3
Black plate (182,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Information display
! Journey time
The journey time shows the time that has
elapsed since the ignition switch was
turned to the “ON” position.
The journey time indication flashes each
time a complete hour has elapsed. If the
display is giving a reading other than the
journey time, the display switches to the
journey time, flashes for 5 seconds, and
returns to its original reading each time a
complete hour has elapsed.
NOTE
The journey time is reset when the
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position. It is also reset if the
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” or “ACC” position prior to
restarting of the engine.
! Average vehicle speed
1) U.S.-spec. models
2) Except U.S.-spec. models
This display shows the average vehicle
speed since the trip meter was last reset.
1) Trip knob
Pressing the trip knob toggles the display
between the average vehicle speed cor-
responding to the A trip meter display and
the average vehicle speed corresponding
to the B trip meter display.
When either of the trip meter displays is
reset, the corresponding average vehicle
speed value is also reset.
NOTE
When either trip meter display is reset,
the average vehicle speed correspond-
ing to that trip meter display is not
shown until the vehicle has subse-
quently covered a distance of 1 mile
(or 1 km).
3-36
Black plate (183,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Turn off display of driving informa-
tion display
The driving information display can be
turned off.
To turn off the display, turn the ignition
switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and
press the “+” button adjacent to the clock
display for approximately 5 seconds.
Then, the driving information display and
the clock display will blink for 3 seconds to
notify you that the driving information
display has been turned off.
To restore the driving information display,
once again press the “+” button for
approximately 5 seconds.
NOTE
. The initial d isplay setti ng of the
driving information display has been
set to operational at the time of ship-
ment from the factory.
. The average fuel consumption and
average vehicle speed are calculated
even while the driving information dis-
play is not displayed.
. Evenifyouturnoffthedriving
information display, the display will
automatically turn on when the battery
voltage is disconnected and then re-
connected for battery replacement or
fuse replacement.
& Clock
To adjust the time shown by the clock,
press the “+” button or “−” button. If you
press the “+” button, the indicated time will
change in one-minute increments. If you
press the “−” button, the indicated time will
change in one-minute decrements. If you
keep the button pressed, the rate at which
the indicated time changes will speed up.
The clock can be set to 12-hour or 24-hour
clock displays. Perform the followi ng
procedure to switch the display format.
1. Place the ig nition switch in the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position.
2. Press and hold the “−” button that is
located near the clock display for approxi-
mately 5 seconds. The clock display will
then start to flash.
3. While the clock display is flashing,
press and hold the “+” button for approxi-
mately 2 seconds. The clock format will
then change.
4. The clock display will continue to flash
for approximately 3 seconds to inform you
that the clock display has been changed.
If you want to change the clock display
again, press and hold the “+” button for
approximately 2 seconds while the clock
display is flashing.
Instruments and controls/Information display
3-37
3
Black plate (184,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi information display (models with type B combination meter)
Multi information display
(models with type B combi-
nation meter)
WARNING
Always pay adequate attention to
safe driving when operating the
multi information display while the
vehicle is in motion. When operation
of the multi information display
interferes with your ability to con-
centrate on driving, stop the vehicle
before performing operations on the
screen. Also, do not concentrate on
the display while driving. Doing so
may cause you to look away from
the road and could result in an
accident.
Various information will be shown on the
multi information display. Also, a warning
message will appear on the display if a
malfunction, etc. is detected. In addition,
several settings for the displayed content
can be performed.
Multi information display
1) Fuel gauge (refer to “Fuel gauge” F3-
12.)
2) Warning screen (refer to “Warning
screen” F3-40.)/Basic screen (refer to
“Basic screens” F3-40.)
3) Cruise control information display
4) Warning indicator
5) Select lever/gear position indicator (refer
to “Select lever/gear position indicator
(CVT models)” F3-30.)
6) Odometer (refer to “Odometer” F3-10.)/
double trip meter (refer to “Double trip
meter” F3-11.)
Control switch (except Crosstrek models)
1) Up (select)
2) Set (enter)
3) Down (select)
3-38
Black plate (185,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Control switch (Crosstrek models)
1) Up (select)
2) Set (enter)
3) Down (select)
& Basic operation
By operating “ ” or “ ” of the control
switch, the screens and selection items
can be switched. When the “
/SET”
switch is pulled toward you, the item can
be selected and set.
If there are some useful messages, such
as vehicle information, warning informa-
tion, etc., they will interrupt the current
screen, and appear on the display accom-
panied by a beep. If such a screen is
displayed, take proper action according to
the message shown on the screen.
The warning screen will return to the
original screen after a few seconds. While
the “
” information reminder is shown on
the display, it may be possible to display
the warning screen again. To recall the
message marked with “
” on the display,
pull the “
/SET” switch on the steering
wheel toward you.
& Welcome screen and Good-
bye screen
When the driver’s door is opened and
closed a fter unl ocking the door, the
welcome screen will appear on the multi
information display for approximately 20
seconds.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the multi informa-
tion display gradually turns off (Good-bye
screen).
NOTE
. The basic screen will be shown
when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position while the welcome
screen is displayed.
. Once the welcome screen appears,
it takes a certain period of time to
display it again.
. If the ignition switch is operated
after unlocking the driver’s door, the
welcome screen will not appear even
when the driver’s door is opened and
closed.
. The welcome screen will disappear
when you lock the driver’s door by
using the remote keyless entry system
(all models) or the keyless access
function (if equipped) while the wel-
come screen is displayed.
. If any of the doors (including the
rear gate) is opened while the welcome
screen is dis played, the d oor ajar
warning will appear.
. The welcome screen can be set to
on or off. For details, refer to “Welcome
Good-bye Screen” F3-41.
Instruments and controls/Multi information display (models with type B combination meter)
– CONTINUED –
3-39
3
Black plate (186,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi information display (models with type B combination meter)
& Warning screen
Example of warning
If there is a warning message or a
maintenance notification, it will appear for
approximately 3 seconds. Take the appro-
priate actions based on the messages
indicated.
& Basic screens
By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the
steering wheel, you can change the
screen that is always displayed.
Default screen:
Digital speedometer:
Menu screen entering screen:
While this screen is selected, pull the “ /
SET” switch to enter the menu screen.
& Menu screens
Pull the “ /SET” switch to enter the menu
screens when all of the following condi-
tions are satisfied.
. The vehicle has been completely
stopped.
. The select lever is in the “P” position.
. The menu screen entering screen is
selected.
. The “
” information reminder is off.
3-40
Black plate (187,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
The menu list is as follows.
First menu
Second menu
Screen Settings Welcome Good-bye Screen
Gauge Initial Movement
Languages
Go Back
EyeSight (models with EyeSight system) Warning Volume
Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound
Lead Vehicle Moving Monitor Function
Go Back
BSD/RCTA (if equipped) Warning Volume
Default Settings
―
By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on the
steering wheel, you can select the menu.
Pull the “
/SET” switch to enter the
selected menu.
NOTE
If you enter the “Go Back” menu, the
system will return to the previous
screen.
! Screen Settings
After entering the “Screen Settings” menu,
select one of the following menus.
! Welcome Good-bye Screen
The welcome screen/good-bye screens
can be activated or deactivated. Select
“On” to activate the screens. Select “Off”
to deactivate the screens.
! Gauge Initial Movement
The movement of the meter needles and
gauge needles that occurs when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position can be activated or deactivated.
Select “On” to activate. Select “Off” to
deactivate.
Instruments and controls/Multi information display (models with type B combination meter)
– CONTINUED –
3-41
3
Black plate (188,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
! Languages
Operate the “
” or “ ” switch on the
steering wheel to display the preferred
language. Then pull the “
/SET” switch to
select the displayed language.
! EyeSight (models with EyeSight
system)
NOTE
For models with the EyeSight system,
refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for the EyeSight system.
After entering the “EyeSight” menu, select
one of the following menus.
! Warning Volume
The volume of the warning buzzer that
sounds when the EyeSight system is in
use can be set in 3 stages (“Max”, “Mid”
and “Min”).
! Lead Vehicle Acquisition Sound
When adaptive cruise control is used, the
buzzer that sounds if a vehicle is detected
in front or if detection is not possible can
be activated or deactivated. Select “On” to
activate the buzzer. Select “Off” to deac-
tivate the buzzer.
! Lead Vehicle M o vin g M oni t or
Function
When the lead vehicle moving monitor
function is in operation, the buzzer that
sounds if a vehicle in front has started can
be activated or deactivated. Select “On” to
activate the buzzer. Select “Off” to deac-
tivate the buzzer.
! BSD/RCTA (if equipped)
After entering the “BS D/RC TA” menu,
select the “Warning Volume” menu. You
can set the volume of the warning buzzer
for RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert). You
can select “Max”, “Mid”, “Min” or “Off”.
! Default Settings
Select “Yes” to use the menu screen to
restore customized settings to the factory
default settings. Select “No” to return to
the previous screen without restoring to
the factory default settings.
Multi function display
& Models without multi func-
tion display
NOTE
For models with information display
(black and white), refer to “Information
display” F3-32.
The U.S.-spec models are not equipped
with the multi function display. The other
models may be equipped with the multi
function display or not, depending on the
model.
3-42
Black plate (189,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Safety precautions
WARNING
Always pay adequate attention to
safe driving when operating the
multi function display while the
vehicle is in motion. When operation
of the multi function display is
disturbing your awareness and abil-
ity to concentrate on driving, stop
the vehicle in a safe place before
performing operations on the
screen. Also, do not concentrate
on the display while driving. Doing
so may cause you to look away from
the road and could result in an
accident.
& Features
The multi function display has the follow-
ing functions.
Description Page
Displays useful messages, such
as warning information, etc.
3-46
Displays basic screens (e.g. fuel
consumption screen, etc.)
3-47
Sets and adjusts maintenance
notification
3-74
Registers driving history 3-77
Sets and customizes car opera-
tion
3-78
Also, the multi function display can also be
used to set and initialize the multi function
display itself.
NOTE
When the vehicle is in motion, certain
functions and selections may not be
available.
& Locations
Multi function display
1) Outside temperature indicator
2) Top display (For the display setting, refer
to “Top display setting” F3-66.)
3) Clock
4) Driving information display (For the dis-
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-43
3
Black plate (190,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
played contents, refer to “Basic screens”
F3-47.)
& Basic operation
Control switch
1) Up (select)
2) ENTER (push)
3) Down (select)
By operating “ ” or “ ” of the control
switch, the screens and selection items
can be switched. When the
button is
pushed, the item can be selected and set.
& Welcome screen
When the door is unlocked and the
driver’s door is opened, the welcome
screen will appear for a short time.
NOTE
. The welcome screen will disappear
when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position while the welcome
screen is displayed.
. If any of the doors (including the
rear gate) is opened while the welcome
screen is display ed, the door ajar
warning will appear.
. The welcome screen can be set to
on or off. For details, refer to “Bypass
screen setting” F3-72.
. For a certain period of time after the
welcome screen has once appeared, it
may not appear again even when the
driver’s door is opened again. This
does not indicate a malfunction.
& Date screen
If you have set the date and time in the
selection screen, after the welcome
screen is displayed, the current date will
be displayed for a certain period of time. If
“On/Off setting” is set to “On” in the
“Maintenance settings”, the date screen
will be displayed after the self-check
screen.
! Birthday/anniversary screen
Example of notification on an anniversary
If you have set a birthday or anniversary,
after the date screen is displayed, the
notification (reminder) will be displayed for
a certain period of time from 7 days prior
to the set date.
3-44
Black plate (191,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
NOTE
. Displaying the birthday/anniversary
screen can be set to on or off. Refer to
“Bypass screen setting” F3-72.
. Up to five items can be set for
birthdays and anniversaries respec-
tively. Refer to “Selection screen” F3-
54.
& Ending screen
If “Eco Summary” is set to “On” in the
“Bypass screen setting”, the “Fuel con-
sumption results screen” will be displayed
before the screen turns off when the
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
Fuel consumption results screen
1) The average fuel consumption for the
entire driving distance, from when the
ignition switch was turned to the “ON”
position to when it was turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position.
2) This display shows the average rate of
fuel consumption since the trip meter
was last reset. It displays the average
fuel consumption corresponding to the A
trip meter mileage or the one corre-
sponding to the B trip meter mileage.
& Self-check screen
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the vehicle self-check will
be performed. The screens corresponding
to the following items will appear one after
another for several seconds each.
1) Engine oil: Checks the interval of engine
oil replacement.
2) Oil filter: Checks the interval of oil filter
replacement.
3) Tires: Checks the interval of tire rotation.
4) Inspection and maintenance: Checks the
interval of inspection and maintenance.
When the checks are performed, the color
of the icon corresponding to the checked
item will turn green.
If there is no warning message, the self-
check will be complete without notification.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-45
3
Black plate (192,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
Example of notification
If there is a warning message or a
maintenance notification, the color of the
icon corresponding to the item will turn
yellow and the warning message or the
maintenance notification will be displayed.
Take the appropriate actions based on the
messages indicated.
NOTE
. The self-check screen can be set to
on or off. For details, refer to “On/Off
setting” F3-75.
. After performing the maintenance,
change the setting of the correspond-
ing maintenance item. For details, refer
to “Maintenance settings” F3-74.
. The maintenance notification screen
will be displayed under either of the
following conditions.
– The period of time remaining
until the registered notification date
is 15 days or less.
– The total driving distance remain-
ing until the registered notification
distance is approximately 311 miles
(500 km) or less.
. The maintenance notification screen
will be displayed until either of the
following conditions is satisfied.
– The period of time passed after
the registered notification date is 15
days or more.
– The total distance driven after the
registered notification distance is
approximately 311 miles (500 km) or
more.
& Interruption screen
Warning information (display example)
Useful messages, such as reminder in-
formation, vehicle information, warning
information, etc. may interrupt the current
screen and appear on the display accom-
panied by a beep. Take proper action
according to the message.
The warning screen will return to the
original screen after a few seconds.
3-46
Black plate (193,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Basic screens
! Basic screen items
These are the basic screens of the multi
function display.
Item Page
Information bar 3-47
Fuel consumption screen 3-48
ECO gauge screen (if
equipped)
3-49
ECO history screen 3-49
Vehicle activation status
screen
3-50
EyeSight screen (models with
the EyeSight system)
3-51
Triple meter screen 3-51
Guidance screen 3-52
Clock/calendar screen
3-52
By operating the “ ” or “ ” of the control
switch, you can switch the screen that is
always displayed. Also, when the
button is pressed and held, the selection
screen can be displayed. For details about
the selection screen, refer to “Selection
screen” F3-54.
! Information bar
1) Information bar
2) Outside temperature indicator
3) Top display
4) Clock
While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position, the outside temperatu re
indicator, clock, etc. will be shown on the
information bar.
! Outside temperature indicator
This displays the outside temperature
between − 408F(− 408C) and 1228F
(508C).
Icy road surface warning screen
When the outside temperature becomes
378F(38C) or less, the icy road surface
warning screen interrupts to inform the
driver that the road surface may be frozen.
NOTE
. The outside temperature indicator
shows the temperature around the
sensor. Therefore, the temperature in-
dication may differ from the actual
outside air temperature.
. The icy road surface warning screen
should be treated only as a guide. Be
sure to check the condition of the road
surface before driving.
. Once the icy road surface warning
screen is displayed, it will not be
displayed again unless the outside
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-47
3
Black plate (194,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
temperature has increased to 418F
(58C) or higher.
! Top display
One of the following items can be dis-
played on the top display.
. Average fuel consumption correspond-
ing to the driving distance of each trip
meter
. Current fuel consumption (This may
not be displayed when driving at a low
speed.)
. Driving range on remaining fuel
For details about the setting of the top
display, refer to “Top display setting” F3-
66.
NOTE
The driving range on the remaining fuel
is calculated using the average fuel
consumption of the last 19 miles (30
km) driven. This value may be different
from the values calculated using the
average fuel consumption correspond-
ing to the driving distance of each trip
meter or the current fuel consumption.
! Clock
The clock can be displayed in either 12-
hour display or 24-hour display. For details
about the setting, refer to “Current date
and time setting” F3-57.
NOTE
If the vehicle battery is disconnected,
the clock shown in the information bar
will be reset. Set the time again after
the vehicle battery is connected. For
details about the setting, refer to “Top
display setting” F3-66.
! Fuel consumption screen
1) Average fuel consumption corresponding
to the driving distance of each trip meter
2) Current fuel consumption
3) Driving range on remaining fuel
The displayed l ocation can be custo-
mized. For details, refer to “Fuel consump-
tion screen setting” F3-67.
3-48
Black plate (195,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! ECO gauge screen (if equipped)
1) Average fuel consumption corresponding
to the driving distance of each trip meter
2) ECO gauge
The gauge pointer shows the difference
between the current fuel consumption and
the average fuel consumption that is
displayed on the center part of the screen.
If the gauge pointer moves toward the
green side, this indicates better fuel
efficiency.
! ECO history screen
1) Average fuel consumption per unit time
(bar graph)
2) Average fuel consumption corresponding
to the driving distance of each trip meter
(red line)
This screen displays the fuel economy
history for the vehicle using a bar graph.
The horizontal scale represents the past
time range and the vertical scale repre-
sents the fuel consumption. The green
bars show driving with good fuel economy
and the yellow bars show driving with poor
fuel economy.
The time range of the history can be set.
The width of the bar graph is adjusted as
follows depending on the set time range.
Time range Width of bar graph
30 minutes 1 minute
60 minutes 2 minutes
120 minutes
4 minutes
For details about the setting, refer to
“Economy history setting” F3-68.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-49
3
Black plate (196,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
! Vehicle activation status screen
When the vehicle stops
1) Steering axle
When the vehicle is being driven regularly
1) Power train (illuminated in blue)
When the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem is being activated: the tires illuminate
in yellow.
1) History of Vehicle Dynamics Control
system activation
When the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem has been activated: the tires remain
illuminated in yellow while the Vehicle
Dynamics Control System is activated.
1) Activation status of the ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System)
2) Vehicle Dynamics Control system oper-
ating indicator (flashing in yellow)
3) History of Vehicle Dynamics Control
system activation
This screen displays the following vehicle
information.
. steering angle and driving wheel status
. activation status of the ABS (Anti-lock
Brake System)
. activation status of the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system
While driving, the vehicle wheels are
illuminated in blue and the driving direc-
3-50
Black plate (197,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
tion is represented using an animation of
the traffic lane.
If the ABS is activated, all of the vehicle’s
wheels will be illuminated in yellow and
the length of operation in seconds and the
number of activations will be displayed in
the bar indicator, located on the lowermost
part of the display.
If the Vehicle Dynamics Control system is
activated, the activated vehicle wheels will
be illuminated in yellow and the operating
indicator “
” will appear on the upper right
part of the display. Also, the length of
operation in seconds and the number of
activations will be displayed in the bar
indicator.
! EyeSight screen (models with
EyeSight system)
1) Current vehicle speed
2) Set vehicle speed
3) Preceding vehicle
4) Your vehicle
This screen displays the status of the
EyeSight system. For details, refer to the
Owner ’s Manual supple ment for the
EyeSight system.
! Triple meter screen
Triple meter screen (display example)
This screen displays up to three optional
pieces of information that can be selected
from the following items.
The items shown in the triple meter screen
can be changed. For de tails, refer to
“Triple meter setting” F3-70.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-51
3
Black plate (198,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
Item Details
Average vehicle speed (Average
vehicle speed for the entire driving
time from when the trip meter was
reset)
Lifetime fuel consumption
Engine oil temperature
Accelerator opening ratio
Journey time (the time that has
elapsed since the ignition switch
was turned to the “ON” position) (if
equipped)
Journey distance (the distance
that has been driven since the
ignition switch was turned to the
“ON” position)
Average fuel consumption for the
entire driving distance from when
the ignition switch was turned to
the “ON” position
Boost pressure
! Guidance screen
When the button is pressed and held,
the selection screen can be displayed.
The displayed contents can be set or
customized from the selection screen. For
details, refer to “Selection screen” F3-54.
! Clock/calendar screen
Clock (analog format)
Clock (digital format)
3-52
Black plate (199,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Calendar
1) Today’s date
2) Birthday/Anniversary
In addition to the clock/calendar, the out-
side temperature and average fuel con-
sumption can also be displayed.
You can select clock (analog format),
clock (digital format) or calendar. The
clock/calendar can also be set so that it
is not displayed. For details, refer to
“Clock/calendar screen setting” F3-71.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-53
3
Black plate (200,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
& Selection screen
When the button is pushed and held, the setting screen for each menu can be displayed. Select the preferred menu by operating
the “
” or “ ” switch.
Top menu Menu option Description Page
Time/Date
Time/Date Set and adjust the time and date. 12h or 24h format can be selected. 3-57
Birthday Set a birthday. 3-58
Anniversary Set an anniversary day. 3-60
Daylight Saving Time Turn the daylight saving time on or off 3-63
Go Back Return to the top menu. —
Display
Contrast Adjust the contrast. +5 ↔ −53-64
Screen Off Turn the screen on or off. On or Off 3-64
Beep Adjust the beep sound volume. High, Low or Off 3-65
Go Back Return to the top menu. —
Screen Setting
Top Display
Set and customize the top display information
contents.
Avg Cons, Inst Cons, Range or
Off
3-66
Cons Customize the fuel consumption information display. 3-67
Eco History
Set and customize the time of logging fuel
consumption history.
30 min, 60 min or 120 min 3-68
Triple Meter Set and customize the triple meter. 3-70
Clock Select the clock format. Analog, Digital, Calendar or Off 3-71
Bypass Screen Set the bypass screen for each item. On or Off 3-72
Languages Select the display language. English or French 3-73
Go Back Return to the top menu. —
3-54
Black plate (201,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Top menu Menu option Description Page
Maintenance
Engine Oil Set and adjust the oil maintenance notification date. 3-74
Oil Filter Set and adjust the oil filter maintenance notification date. 3-75
Tires Set and adjust the tire maintenance notification date. 3-75
Maintenance Schedule Set and adjust the vehicle maintenance notification date. 3-75
On/Off
Turn on or off the self-check screen that is
activated when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position.
On or Off 3-75
Clear All Settings Clear all settings for maintenance items. Yes or No 3-76
Go Back Return to the top menu. —
Driving History
Set Register and overwrite the driving record. 3-77
Go Back Return to the top menu. —
Car Setting
Keyless Buzzer Volume Set the audible signal volume. 0 (OFF) to 7 3-79
Hazard Warning Flasher Set the hazard warning flasher. On or Off 3-79
Defogger Set and customize the operation of the defogger. 15 minutes or Continuous 3-80
Interior Light
Set and customize the interior light off delay
timer.
10, 20, 30 seconds or Off 3-82
Auto Light Sensor (if equipped)
Set and customize the sensitivity of the auto
light sensor.
Low, Mid, High or Max 3-83
Keyless Access Setting (if
equipped)
Set and customize the keyless access function.
Driver’s Door Unlock 3-84
Rear Gate Unlock 3-85
Go Back Return to top menu.
—
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-55
3
Black plate (202,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
Top menu Menu option Description Page
Initialize
Reset to Defaults Reset all settings to the default settings. Yes or No 3-87
Lifetime Fuel Consumption Reset Clear logged lifetime fuel consumption data. Yes or No 3-88
Go Back Return to the top menu. —
Go Back
— Return to the top menu.
—
3-56
Black plate (203,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Date and time settings
The items in the date and time settings
can be set. To change the items, operate
the “
” or “ ” switch.
NOTE
. The “Time/Date” item must be set to
display the “Birthday”, “Anniversary”
and notifications for vehicle mainte-
nance.
. The “Birthday” and “Anniversary”
items can be entered after the “Date”
item has been set.
. Dates that do not exist in the
Gregorian calendar cannot be set (for
example, April 31).
. If your vehicle is equipped with
genuine SUBARU navigation system,
the clock of navigation system must be
set separately.
! Preparation for date setting
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Push and hold the
button to show
the selection screen.
3. After the selection screen is displayed,
operate the “
” or “ ” switch to show the
“Time/Date” item. Then, push the
button.
! Current date and time setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-
57.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Time/Date” item. Then push
the
button.
3. Select the item to set by operating the
“
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-57
3
Black plate (204,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
4. Select a number by operating the “ ”
or “
” switch. Then push the button.
When “12 h” is selected, the clock will be
set to a 12-hour display. When “24 h” is
selected, the clock will be set to a 24-hour
display.
5. After entering the date and time, select
“Set” by operating the “
” switch and
confirm the setting by pushing the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
! Birthday setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-
57.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Birthday” item. Then push the
button.
3. Select an entry in the list to set by
operating the “
” or “ ” switch. Then
push the
button.
3-58
Black plate (205,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
4. The selected item will be shown. Push
the
button to set the selected item.
5. Select numbers by operating the “ ”
or “
” switch. Then push the button.
6. After entering the date by repeating
step 5, you can enter the name.
7. Select characters by operating t he
“
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
– You can select characters of the
English alphabet (upper case charac-
ters and lower case characters are
available), eleven symbols or blank
spaces.
– The word being edited will be
displayed with an underline.
8. After entering the name by repeating
step 7, select “Set” by operating the “
”
switch and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-59
3
Black plate (206,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
9. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
If a birthday is approaching, the following
screen will be displayed accompanied by
a beep when the ignition switch has been
turned to the “ON” position. This function
can be set to on or off. For details, refer to
“Bypass screen setting” F3-72.
From 1 to 7 days prior to the birthday
On a birthday (displayed in red)
NOTE
If “__” is selected for either the
“Month” or “Day” item instead of
numbers, the birthday notification will
be deactivated.
! Anniversary setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-
57.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Anniversary” item. Then push
the
button.
3-60
Black plate (207,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
3. Select an entry in the list to set by
operating the “
” or “ ” switch. Then
push the
button.
4. The selected item will be shown. Push
the
button to set the selected item.
5. Select numbers by operating the “ ”
or “
” switch. Then push the button.
6. After entering the date by repeating
step 5, you can enter the name.
7. Select characters by operating the
“
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
– You can select characters of the
English alphabet (upper case charac-
ters and lower case characters are
available), eleven symbols or blank
spaces.
– The word being edited will be
displayed with an underline.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-61
3
Black plate (208,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
8. After entering the name by repeating
step 7, select “Set” by operating the “
”
switch and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
9. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
If an anniversary is approaching, the
following screen will be displayed accom-
panied by a beep when the ignition switch
has been turned to the “ON” position. This
function can be set to on or off. For details,
refer to “Bypass screen setting” F3-72.
From 1 to 7 days prior to the anniversary
On an anniversary (displayed in orange)
NOTE
If “__” is selected for either the
“Month” or “Day” item instead of
numbers, the anniversary notification
will be deactivated.
! Clearing birthday or anniversary
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-57
and display “Birthday” or “Anniversary” on
the screen.
2. Select the preferred birthday/anniver-
sary.
3. When “__” is selected for either the
“Month” or “Day” item instead of numbers,
the setting of “Birthday” or “Anniversary”
will be cleared.
3-62
Black plate (209,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Daylight saving time setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for date setting” F3-
57.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Daylight Saving Time” item.
Then push the
button.
3. The current setting will be displayed.
Push the
button to enter the selection
mode.
4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the
“
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-63
3
Black plate (210,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
& Image quality and volume
settings
The image quality and volume settings
can be adjusted. To change the items,
operate the “
” or “ ” switch.
! Preparation for image quality and
volume settings
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Push and hold the
button to show
the selection screen.
3. After the selection screen is displayed,
operate the “
” or “ ” switch to show the
“Display” item. Then, push the
button.
! Contrast setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for image quality and
volume settings” F3-64.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Contrast” item. Then push the
button.
3. Select a contrast level by operating the
“
” or “ ” switch, and confirm the setting
by pushing the
button.
! Screen OFF setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for image quality and
volume settings” F3-64.
3-64
Black plate (211,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Screen Off” item. Then push
the
button.
3. Push the button once more.
4. The screen is turned off.
Restoring the screen
When the “
”, “ ” or button is
pushed after the ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” position, the screen will be
restored. The screen will be restored with
the basic screen that was displayed when
the screen was turned off. While the
screen is off, a warning message will be
displayed if necessary, but other screens
will not be displayed.
! Beep volume setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for image quality and
volume settings” F3-64.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Beep” item. Then push the
button.
3. Push the button.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-65
3
Black plate (212,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
4. Select an item by operating the “ ” or
“
” switch. Then push the button.
5. Select “Set” by operating t he “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
& Screen settings
The items in screen settings can be set.
To change the items, operate the “
” or
“
” switch, and then push the button.
! Preparation for screen settings
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Push and hold the
button to show
the selection screen.
3. After the selection screen is displayed,
operate the “
” or “ ” switch to show the
“Screen Setting” item. Then, push the
button.
! Top display setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for screen settings”
F3-66.
3-66
Black plate (213,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Top Display” item. Then push
the
button.
3. Push the button once more.
4. Select an item by operating the “ ” or
“
” switch. Then push the button.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
! Fuel consumption screen setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for screen settings”
F3-66.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-67
3
Black plate (214,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Cons” item. Then push the
button.
3. Push the button once more.
4. Select the displayed configuration by
operating the “
” or “ ” switch. Then
push the
button.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
! Economy history setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for screen settings”
F3-66.
3-68
Black plate (215,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Eco History” item. Then push
the
button.
3. Push the button once more.
4. Select the time of the logged fuel
consumption history by operat ing t he
“
” or “ ” switch, and then push the
button.
5. Select “Go Back” by operating the “ ”
switch.
6. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
7. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-69
3
Black plate (216,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
! Triple meter setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for screen settings”
F3-66.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Triple Meter” item. Then push
the
button.
3. Select the setting location (left, center
or right) by operating the “
” or “ ”
switch. Then push the
button.
NOTE
The same item cannot be selected for
the left, center or right location.
4. Select the preferred item by operating
the “
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
If you also want to change the setting for
another location, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
3-70
Black plate (217,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
! Clock/calendar screen setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for screen settings”
F3-66.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Clock” item. Then push the
button.
3. Push the button once more.
4. Select “Analog Clock”, “Digital Clock”,
“Calendar” or “Off” by operating the “
”
switch. Then push the
button.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-71
3
Black plate (218,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
! Bypass screen setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for screen settings”
F3-66.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Bypass Screen” item. Then
push the
button.
3. Select the item to set by operating the
“
” or “ ” switches. Then push the
button.
4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the
“
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
If you want to change setting for another
item, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” or
3-72
Black plate (219,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
“ ” switch, and confirm the setting by
pushing the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
! Language setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for screen settings”
F3-66.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Languages” item. Then push
the
button.
3. The current language setting will be
displayed. Push the
button to enter
the language selection mode.
4. Select the preferred language by
operating the “
” or “ ” switch. Then
push the
button.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-73
3
Black plate (220,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
& Maintenance settings
The items in the maintenance settings can
be set. To change the items, operate the
“
” or “ ” switch.
! Preparation for maintenance set-
tings
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Push and hold the
button to show
the selection screen.
3. After the selection screen is displayed,
operate the “
” or “ ” switch to show the
“Maintenance” item. Then, push the
button.
! Engine oil setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for maintenance set-
tings” F3-74.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Engine Oil” item. Then push
the
button.
3. Select the setting location (month, day,
year or distance) by operating the “
” or
“
” switch. Then push the button.
3-74
Black plate (221,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
4. Select a number by operating the “ ”
or “
” switch. Then push the button.
If you also want to change the setting for
another location, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ” or
“
” switch and confirm the setting by
pushing the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
NOTE
. The notification will be displayed
with information of both date and
distance or either date or distance in
accordance with the setting
. When “__” is selected for either the
“Month”, “Day”, “Year” or “Distance”
item instead of numbers, the set noti-
fication will be deactivated.
. If the notification continues for 15
days or more, the system will display
“__” on the screen.
. When the distance announcement
reaches 0 km, the display will show
“0000” for the next 311 miles (500 km).
After exceeding 311 miles (500 km), “_
___” will be displayed.
! Oil filter setting
The setting procedure is the same as
“Engine oil setting” F3-74, but select the
“Oil Filter” item in step 2.
! Tires setting
The setting procedure is the same as
“Engine oil setting” F3-74, but select the
“Tires” item in step 2.
! Maintenance schedule setting
The setting procedure is the same as
“Engine oil setting” F3-74, but select the
“Maintenance Schedule” item in step 2.
! On/Off setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for maintenance set-
tings” F3-74.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-75
3
Black plate (222,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “On/Off” item. Then push the
button.
3. The current setting will be displayed.
Push the
button to enter the selection
mode.
4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the
“
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
! Clear setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for maintenance set-
tings” F3-74.
3-76
Black plate (223,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Clear All Settings” item. Then
push the
button.
3. The system will prompt a Yes/No
dialogue (“No” is selected first). To clear
all maintenance settings, select “Yes” by
operating the “
” switch.
4. Confirm the setting by pushing the
button.
5. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
& Driving history registration
The items in the driving history can be
registered. To change the items, operate
the “
” or “ ” switch, and then push the
button.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Push and hold the
button to show
the selection screen.
3. After the selection screen is displayed,
operate the “
” or “ ” switch to show the
“Driving History” item. Then, push the
button.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-77
3
Black plate (224,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
4. Push the button once more to
enter the setting mode.
5. The system will notify you of the place
to be selected for approximately 2 sec-
onds.
6. Select one of the registration lines by
operating the “
” or “ ” switch. Then
push the
button.
7. To overwrite the previous registration,
push the
button. When registration is
performed the first time, it is registered
directly without a notification.
8. The system will notify you that the
registration is complete.
& Car settings
The items in the car settings can be set.
To change the items, operate the “
” or
“
” switch, and then push the button.
! Preparation for car settings
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Push and hold the
button to show
the selection screen.
3. After the selection screen is displayed,
operate the “
” or “ ” switch to show the
“Car Setting” item. Then, push the
button.
3-78
Black plate (225,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Keyless buzzer volume setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “ Preparation for car settings” F3-78.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Keyless Buzzer Volume” item.
Then push the
button.
3. Select a volume level by operating the
“
” or “ ” switch, and confirm the setting
by pushing the
button.
4. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
If the setting is not available, the following
notification will be displayed. In this case,
perform the setting procedure again.
! Hazard warning flasher setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “ Preparation for car settings” F3-78.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Hazard Warning Flasher” item.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-79
3
Black plate (226,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
Then push the button.
3. The current setting will be displayed.
Push the
button to enter the selection
mode.
4. Select “On” or “Off” by operating the
“
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
If the setting is not available, the following
notification will be displayed. In this case,
perform the setting procedure again.
! Defogger setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “ Preparation for car settings” F3-78.
3-80
Black plate (227,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Defogger” item. Then push the
button.
3. The current setting will be displayed.
Push the
button to enter the selection
mode.
4. Select the preferred setting by operat-
ing the “
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
If the setting is not available, the following
notification will be displayed. In this case,
perform the setting procedure again.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-81
3
Black plate (228,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
! Interior light off delay timer setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “ Preparation for car settings” F3-78.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Interior Light” item. Then push
the
button.
3. The current setting will be displayed.
Push the
button to enter the selection
mode.
4. Select the preferred setting by operat-
ing the “
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
If the setting is not available, the following
notification will be displayed. In this case,
perform the setting procedure again.
3-82
Black plate (229,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Auto light sensor sensitivity setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “ Preparation for car settings” F3-78.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Auto Light Sensor” item. Then
push the
button.
3. The current setting will be displayed.
Push the
button to enter the selection
mode.
4. Select the preferred setting by operat-
ing the “
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-83
3
Black plate (230,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
If the setting is not available, the following
notification will be displayed. In this case,
perform the setting procedure again.
! Keyless access setting (models
with “keyless access with push-
button start system”)
! Preparation for keyless access
settings
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “ Preparation for car settings” F3-78.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Keyless Access Setting” item.
Then push the
button.
! Driver’s door unlock setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for keyless access
settings” F3-84.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Driver’s Door Unlock” item.
Then push the
button.
3. The current setting will be displayed.
Push the
button to enter the selection
mode.
3-84
Black plate (231,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
4. Select the preferred setting by operat-
ing the “
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
5. Select “Set” by operating t he “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
If the setting is not available, the following
notification will be displayed. In this case,
perform the setting procedure again.
! Rear gate unlock setting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “ Preparation for keyless access
settings” F3-84.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Rear Gate Unlock” item. Then
push the
button.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-85
3
Black plate (232,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
3. The current setting will be displayed.
Push the
button to enter the selection
mode.
4. Select the preferred setting by operat-
ing the “
” or “ ” switch. Then push the
button.
5. Select “Set” by operating the “ ”
switch, and confirm the setting by pushing
the
button.
6. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
If the setting is not available, the following
notification will be displayed. In this case,
perform the setting procedure again.
& Initialize
Items that have been set to your pre-
ference can be initialized. To select an
initialization menu, operate the “
” or “ ”
switch as follows.
! Preparation for initialization
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Push and hold the
button to show
the selection screen.
3-86
Black plate (233,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
3. After the selection screen is displayed,
operate the “
” or “ ” switch to show the
“Initialize” item. Then, push the
button.
! Reset to factory default settings
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for initialization” F3-
86.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Reset to Defaults” item. Then
push the
button.
3. The system will prompt a Yes/No
dialogue (“No” is selected first). To return
to the factory default settings, select “Yes”
by operating the “
” switch.
4. Confirm the setting by pushing the
button.
5. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
– CONTINUED –
3-87
3
Black plate (234,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Multi function display
! Lifetime fuel consumption resetting
1. Perform the preparation steps accord-
ing to “Preparation for initialization” F3-
86.
2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch to
select the “Lifetime Fuel Consumption
Resetting” item. Then push the
button.
3. The system will prompt a Yes/No
dialogue (“No” is selected first). To reset
the lifetime fuel consumption, select “Yes”
by operating the “
” switch.
4. Confirm the setting by pushing the
button.
5. Reconfirmation will be di splayed. If
you are sure you want to proceed, select
“Yes” by operating the “
” switch.
6. Confirm the setting again by pushing
the
button.
3-88
Black plate (235,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
7. The system will notify you that the
setting is complete.
Light control switch
& Precautions and tips
CAUTION
. Use of any lights for a long period
of time while the engine is not
running can cause the battery to
discharge.
. Before leaving the vehicle, make
sure that the lights are turned off.
If the vehicle is left unattended
for a long time with the lights
illuminated, the battery may be
discharged.
NOTE
. Even if the key is removed from the
ignition switch, the lights can be illu-
minated by operating the light control
switch from the “
” (off) position to the
“
” or “ ” position.
. If the driver’s door is opened while
the lights are illuminated and the key is
removed from the ignition switch, the
chirp sound will inform the driver that
the lights are illuminated.
& Headlights
To turn on the headlights, turn the knob on
the end of the turn signal lever.
“
” position
Instrument panel illumination, headlights,
parking lights, front side marker lights, rear
side marker lights, tail lights and license
plate lights are on.
“
” position
Instrument panel il lumination, pa rking
lights, front side marker lights, rear side
marker lights, tail lights and license plate
lights are on.
Instruments and controls/Light control switch
– CONTINUED –
3-89
3
Black plate (236,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Light control switch
“ ” position: auto on/off headlights (if
equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the instrument panel illumination,
headlights, parking lights, front side mar-
ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lights
and license plate lights are automatically
on or off depending on the level of the
ambient light.
“
” position
The headlights are all off.
NOTE
The sensitivity of the auto on/off head-
lights can be changed by a SUBARU
dealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer
for details. Also, for models with a multi
function display, the setting can be
changed using the display. For details,
refer to “Auto light sensor sensitivity
setting” F3-83.
! Welcome lighting function (if
equipped)
The welcome lighting function turns on the
low beam headlight for smooth approach-
ing to or exiting from the vehicle at night or
in a dark place.
The function is activated while all of the
following conditions are met.
. The light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position
. It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/
off headlights
When approaching:
While the welcome lighting function is
activated, the low beam headlights will
automatically illuminate when unlocking
the doors (for 5-door, including the rear
gate) by using the remote keyless entry
system.
The low beam headlights will remain
illuminated for 30 seconds
*1
and then turn
off. However, if any of the following
operations is done, the low beam head-
lights will turn off.
. The doors are locked.
. The light control switch is turned to a
position other than “AUTO”.
. The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position.
When exiting:
While the welcome lighting function is
activated, the low beam headlights will
remain illuminated even when either of the
following operation is done.
. Thepush-buttonignitionswitchis
turned to the “OFF” status (models with
“keyless access with push-button start
system”)
. The key is pulled out from the ignition
switch (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”)
The low beam headlights will turn off
under any of the following conditions.
. 3 minutes have passed since the low
beam headlights were illuminated by the
welcome lighting function.
. 30 seconds have passed since the
door is opened and closed.
*1
. The light control switch is turned to a
position other than “AUTO”.
. The locking procedure is performed
twice. When performing the unlocking
procedure after performing the locking
procedure, perform the locking procedure
twice again.
*1: The setting for the period of time in which
the low beam headlights remain on by the
welcome lighting function can be changed by a
SUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer
for details.
3-90
Black plate (237,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Sensor for the auto on/off head-
lights (if equipped)
The sensor is on the instrument panel as
shown in the illustration.
CAUTION
If any object is placed on or near the
sensor, the sensor may not detect
the level of the ambient light cor-
rectly and the auto on/off headlights
may not operate properly.
& High/low beam change
(dimmer)
To change from low beam to high beam,
push the turn signal lever forward. When
the headlights are on high beam, the high
beam indicator light “
” on the combina-
tion meter is also on.
To switch back to low beam, pull the lever
back to the center position.
& Headlight flasher
CAUTION
Do not hold the lever in the flashing
position for more than just a few
seconds.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
toward you and then release it. The high
beam will stay on for as long as you hold
the lever. The headlight flasher works
even though the lighting switch is in the
“
” (off) position.
When the headlights are on high beam,
the high beam indicator light “
” on the
combination meter also illuminates.
Instruments and controls/Light control switch
– CONTINUED –
3-91
3
Black plate (238,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Turn signal lever
& Daytime running light system
WARNING
The brightness of the illumination of
the high beam headlights is reduced
by the daytime running light system.
The light switch must always be
turned to the “
” position when it
is dark outside.
The high beam headlights will automati-
cally illuminate at reduced brightness
when the following conditions are fulfilled.
. The engine is running.
. The parking brake is fully released.
. The light control switch is in the
“AUTO” (if equipped), “
” or off position.
. For CVT models, the select lever is in a
position other than the “P” position.
NOTE
. When the light switch is in the “ ”
position, the instrument panel illumina-
tion, front side marker lights, tail lights
and license plate lights are also illumi-
nated.
. For models with the auto on/off
headlights, while the light control
switch is in the “AUTO” position and
the system is activated to the auto-on
mode depending on the ambient light
level, the high beam headlights that
have illuminated at reduced brightness
turn off, and the low beam headlights
turn on alternatively. At this time, the
instrument panel illumination, front
side marker lights, tail lights and
license plate lights are also illuminated.
Turn signal lever
To activate the right turn signal, push the
turn signal lever up. To activate the left
turn signal, push the turn signal lever
down. When the turn is finished, the lever
will return automatically. If the lever does
not return after cornering, return the lever
to the neutral position by hand.
To signal a lane change, push the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and hold it
during the lane change. The turn signal
indicator lights will flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change. The lever will
return automatically to the neutral position
when you release it.
3-92
Black plate (239,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& One-touch lane changer
To flash the turn signal and turn signal
indicator light three times, push the turn
signal lever up or down sl ightly and
immediately release it.
The operational/non-operational setting of
the one-touch lane change r’s can be
changed by a SUBARU dealer. Contact
the nearest SUBARU dealer for details.
Illumination brightness con-
trol
The illumination brightness of the instru-
ment panel dims under the follo wing
conditions.
. when the light switch is in the “
” or
“
” position
. when the light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position and the headlights illumi-
nate automatically (models with auto on/
off headlights: Refer to “Headlights” F3-
89.)
You can also adjust the illumination bright-
ness for better visibility in the following
ways.
To brighten, turn the control dial upward.
To darken, turn the control dial downward.
NOTE
. When the control dial is turned fully
upward, the il luminati on brightne ss
becomes the maximum and the auto-
matic dimming function does not work
at all.
. The brightness setting is not can-
celed even when the ignition switch is
turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.
Instruments and controls/Illumination brightness control
3-93
3
Black plate (240,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Headlight beam leveler
Headlight beam leveler (if
equipped)
& Automatic headlight beam
leveler (models with HID
headlights)
The HID headlights generate more light
than conventional halogen headlights.
Therefore a driver of an oncoming vehicle
may experience too much glare if your
headlight beam height adjustment is high
when the vehicle is carrying a heavy load.
The automatic headli ght beam leveler
adjusts the headlight beam height auto-
matically and optimally according to the
load being carried by the vehicle.
Fog light switch (if equipped)
1) Headlight switch
2) Fog light switch
The front fog lights will turn on when the
fog light switch is placed in the “
”
position while the headlights are in the
following condition.
. while the headlight switch is in the “
”
position
. for models with the auto on/off head-
lights, while the headlight switch is in the
“AUTO” position and the low beam head-
lights turn on automatically
To turn off the front fog lights, turn the
switch back down to the “
” position.
Indicator light (type A)
Indicator light (type B)
The indicator light on the combination
meter will illuminate when the front fog
lights are illuminated.
3-94
Black plate (241,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Steering responsive fog
lights system (models with
EyeSight system)
The steering responsive fog lights system
automatically turns the front fog light on
and off based on the steering angle and
vehicle speed when entering a curve or
driving on curved roads. The system is
intended to help prevent accidents by
enabling better visibility of curves ahead
and early recognition of any disabled
vehicles or other obstacles.
The front fog light on the inside of a curve
will turn on if all of the following conditions
are met.
. The light control switch is in the “
”
position
. The light control switch is in the
“AUTO” position and the low beam head-
lights turn on automatically
. The fog light switch is in the “
”
position
. The low beam mode is selected
. The select lever is in a position other
than the “R” position
. The steering response fog lights sys-
tem has not been deactivated
. The operating conditions such as the
steering angle and vehicle speed are met
The front fog lights on both sides will turn
on as usual if all of the following conditions
are met.
. The light control switch is in either of
the following conditions.
– in the “
” position
– in the “AUTO” position and the low
beam headlights turn on automatically
. The fog light switch is in the “
”
position
. The low beam mode is selected
! Steering responsive fog lights OFF
switch
Steering responsive fog lights OFF switch
Press this switch to deactivate the steer-
ing responsive fog lights system. Press
the switch again to activate the system.
Instruments and controls/Fog light switch
– CONTINUED –
3-95
3
Black plate (242,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer
! Steering responsive fog lights OFF
indicator
Steering responsive fog lights OFF indica-
tor
This indicator appears when the steering
responsive fog lights system is deacti-
vated. This indicator disappears when the
system is activated.
Wiper and washer
WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use the
windshield washer until the wind-
shield is sufficiently warmed by the
defroster.
Otherwise t he washer fluid can
freeze on the windshield, blocking
your view.
CAUTION
. Do not operate the washer con-
tinuously for more than 10 sec-
onds, or when the washer fluid
tank is empty. This may cause
overheating of the washer motor.
Check the washer fluid level
frequently, such as at fuel stops.
. Do not operate the wipers when
the windshield or rear window is
dry. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades and
might cause the wiper motor to
fail. Before operating the wiper
on a dry winds hield or re ar
window, always use the wind-
shield washer.
. In freezing weather, be sure that
the wiper blades are not frozen to
the windshield or rear window
before switching on the wipers.
Attempting to operate the wiper
with the blades frozen to the
window glass could cause not
only the wiper blades to be
damaged but also might cause
the wiper motor to fail. If the
wiper blades are frozen to the
window glass, be sure to operate
the defroster, windshield wiper
deicer (if equipped) or rear win-
dow defogger before turning on
the wiper.
. If the wipers stop during opera-
tion because of ice or some other
obstruction on the window, this
might cause the wiper motor to
fail even if the wiper switch is
turned off. If this occurs,
promptly stop the vehicle in a
safe place, turn the ignition
switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” po-
sition and clean the window
glass to allow proper wiper op-
eration.
. Use clean water if windshield
washer fluid is unavailable. In
areas where water freezes in
winter, use SUBARU Windshield
3-96
Black plate (243,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Washer Fluid or the equivalent.
Refer to “Windshield washe r
fluid” F11-28.
Also, when driving the vehicle
when there are freezing tempera-
tures, use non-freezing type wi-
per blades.
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause d eterioration of th e
wiper blades.
NOTE
. The windshield wiper motor is pro-
tected against overloads by a circuit
breaker. If the motor operates continu-
ously under an unusually heavy load,
the circuit breaker may trip to stop the
motor temporarily. If this happens, park
your vehicle in a safe place, turn off the
wiper switch, and wait for approxi-
mately 10 minutes. The circuit breaker
will reset itself, and the wipers will
again operate normally.
. Clean your wiper blades and win-
dow glass periodically with a washer
solution to prevent streaking, and to
remove accumulations of road salt or
road film. Operate the windshield
washer for at least 1 second so that
washer solution will be sprinkled all
over the windshield or rear window.
. Grease, wax, insects or other mate-
rial on the windshield or the wiper
blade results in jerky wiper operation
and streaking on the glass. If you
cannot remove those streaks after
operating the washer or if the wiper
operation is jerky, clean the outer sur-
face of the windshield or rear window
and the wiper blades using a sponge or
soft cloth with a neutral detergent or
mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,
rinse the window glass and wiper
blades with clean water. The glass is
clean if no beads form on the glass
when you rinse with water.
. If you cannot eliminate the streaking
even after following this procedure,
replace the wiper blades with new
ones. For replacement instructions,
refer to “Replacement of wiper blades ”
F11-30.
& Windshield wiper and washer
switches
The wiper operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.
! Windshield wipers
: Mist (for a single wipe)
: Off
: Intermittent
: Low speed
:
High speed
To turn the wipers on, push the wiper
control lever down.
To turn the wipers off, return the lever to
the “
” position.
Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer
– CONTINUED –
3-97
3
Black plate (244,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer
For a single wipe of the wipers, push the
lever up. The wipers operate until you
release the lever.
! Wiper intermittent time control
When the wiper switch is in the “ ”
position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-
ing interval of the wiper. The operating
interval can be adjusted in several steps
from the shortest interval to the longest.
! Windshield washer
To wash the windshield, pull the wiper
control lever toward you. The washer fluid
sprays until you release the lever. The
wipers operate while you pull the lever.
NOTE
Windshield washer fluid warning light
(type A)
3-98
Black plate (245,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Windshield washer fluid warning light
(type B)
The windshield washer fluid warning
light illuminates when the washer fluid
level in the tank has dropped to the
lower limit. If the warning light illumi-
nates, refill the tank with fluid. For the
refilling procedure, refer to “Wind-
shield washer fluid” F11-28.
& Rear window wiper and
washer switch – 5-door
:
Washer (accompanied by wiper op-
eration)
: Continuous
: Intermittent
: Off
:
Washer (accompanied by wiper op-
eration)
! Rear wiper
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob
switch upward.
To turn the wiper off, return the knob
switch to the “
” position.
With the switch turned to the “
” posi-
tion, the rear wiper will operate intermit-
tently at intervals corresponding to the
vehicle speed. In this position, when you
move the select lever to the “R” position
(CVT models) or the shift lever to the
reverse position (MT models), the rear
wiper will switch to continuous operation.
When you move the select lever/shift lever
from the “R” (reverse) position to another
position, the rear wiper will return to
intermittent operation.
CAUTION
Do not attach anything that disturbs
the rear wiper operation on the rear
gate. Doing so may damage the rear
wiper when it operates.
NOTE
Even if the rear wiper switch is in the
“
” position, while the shift lever/
select lever is in the “R” position with
the front windshield wiper operating
continuously, the rear wiper will oper-
ate intermittently (reverse gear inter-
locked rear wiper).
! Washer
To wash the rear window while the rear
wiper is operating, turn the knob switch
upward to the “
” position. The washer
Instruments and controls/Wiper and washer
– CONTINUED –
3-99
3
Black plate (246,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
fluid sprays until you release the knob.
To wash the rear window when the rear
wiper is not in use, turn the knob switch
downward to the “
” position. The washer
fluid sprays and the wiper operates until
you release the knob.
Mirrors
Always check that the inside and outside
mirrors are properly adjusted before you
start driving.
& Inside mirror
The inside mirror has a day and night
position. Pull the tab at the bottom of the
mirror toward you for the night position.
Push it away for the day position. The
night position reduces glare from head-
lights.
& Auto-dimming mirror/com-
pass (if equipped)
1) LED
2) Switch
3) Sensor
4) Compass display
The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare
feature which automatically reduces glare
coming from headlights of vehicles behind
you. It also contains a built-in compass.
. By pressing and holding the switch for
3 seconds, the automatic dimming func-
tion is toggled on or off. When the
automatic dimming function is on , the
LED indicator will illuminate.
Even with the mirror in anti-glare mode,
the mirror surface turns bright if the
transmission is shifted into reverse. This
3-100
Black plate (247,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
is to ensure good rearward visibility during
reversing.
. By pressing and releasing the switch
for less than 3 seconds, the compass
display is toggled on or off. When the
compass is on, an illuminated compass
reading will appear in the upper right
corner of the mirror.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that may cause
theliquidcleanertoenterthemirror
housing and damage the mirror.
! Photosensors
The mirror has a photosensor attached on
the front and back sides. During nighttime
driving, these sensors detect distracting
glare from vehicle headlights behind you
and automatically dim the mirror to elim-
inate glare and preserve your vision. For
this reason, use care not to cover the
sensors with stickers, or other similar
items. Periodically wipe the sensors clean
using a piece of dry soft cotton cloth or an
applicator.
! Compass zone adjustment
Compass calibration zones
1. Refer to the “Compass calibration
zones” map shown above to verify that
the compass zone setting is correct for
your geographical location.
2. Press and hold the switch for 6
seconds until the zone selection comes
up (a number will be displayed in the
mirror compass window).
3. Press the switch repeatedly until the
correct zone setting for your location is
displayed.
4. Releasing the button for 10 seconds
will exit the zone setting mode.
! Compass calibration
1. If a “C” is displayed in the compass
window, the compass needs to be cali-
brated.
2. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 5 mph (8
km/h) or less until the display reads a
direction.
3. You can also calibrate the compass by
driving your vehicle on your everyday
routine. The compass will be calibrated
once it has tracked a complete circle.
4. To recalibrate your compass, push and
hold the switch for 9 seconds until a “C”
appears in the compass window.
5. Calibrate the compass according to
step 2 or step 3.
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
– CONTINUED –
3-101
3
Black plate (248,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
& Auto-dimming mirror/com-
pass with HomeLink
®
(if
equipped)
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) LED
4) HomeLink
®
button 3
5) Sensor
6) Automatic dimming on/off button
7) Compass display button
8) Compass display
The auto-dimming mirror has an anti-glare
feature which automatically reduces glare
coming from headlights of vehicles behind
you. It also contains a built-in compass
and HomeLink
®
wireless control system.
. By pressing the automatic dimming on/
off button, the automatic dimming function
is toggled on or off. When the automatic
dimming function is on, the LED indicator
will illuminate.
Even with the mirror in the automatic
dimming mode, the mirror surface turns
bright if the transmission is shifted into
reverse. This is to ensure good rearward
visibility during reversing.
. By pressing the compass display but-
ton, the compass display is toggled on or
off. When the compass is on, an illumi-
nated compass reading will appear in the
upper right corner of the mirror.
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror
housing and damage the mirror.
! Photosensors
The mirror has a photosensor attached on
both the front and back sides. During
nighttime driving, these sensors detect
distracting glare from vehicle headlights
behind you and automatically dim the
mirror to eliminate glare and preserve
your vision. For this reason, use care not
to cover the sensors with stickers, or other
similar items. Periodically wipe the sen-
sors clean using a piece of dry soft cotton
cloth or an applicator.
3-102
Black plate (249,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Compass zone adjustment
Compass calibration zones
1. Refer to the “Compass calibration
zones” map shown above to verify that
the compass zone setting is correct for
your geographical location.
2. Press and hold the compass display
button for 3 seconds until the zone
selection comes up (a number will be
displayed in the mirror compass window).
3. Press the compass display button
repeatedly until the correct zone setting
for your location is displayed.
4. Releasing the button for 5 seconds will
exit the zone setting mode.
! Compass calibration
1. If a “C” is displayed in the compass
window, the compass needs to be cali-
brated.
2. Drive the vehicle in a circle at 5 mph (8
km/h) or less until the display reads a
direction.
3. You can also calibrate the compass by
driving your vehicle on your everyday
routine. The compass will be calibrated
once it has tracked a complete circle.
4. To recalibrate your compass, push and
hold the compass display button for 9
seconds until a “C” appears in the
compass window.
5. Calibrate the compass according to
step 2 or step 3.
! HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System
can be used to activate remote control
devices such as gate operators, garage
door openers, door locks, home lighting
and security systems.
There are three HomeLink
®
buttons on the
mirror, each of which can be programmed
for operation of one desired device. For
details on the device types which can be
operated by this system, consult the
HomeLink
®
website at:
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515.
. U.S.-spec. models
FCC ID: NZLWLHL4
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, includi ng
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
. Canada-spec. models
NOTE
This device complies with Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard
(s). Operation is subject to the follow-
ing two conditions: (1) this device may
not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference,
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
– CONTINUED –
3-103
3
Black plate (250,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
NOTE
Le présent appareil est conforme aux
CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne
doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2)
l’utilisateur de l ’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible
d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
HomeLink
®
and the HomeLink
®
house are
registered trademarks of Johnson Con-
trols, Inc.
WARNING
. When programming the
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control Sys-
tem, you may be operatin g a
garage door opener or other
device. Make sure that people
and objects are out of the way
of the garage door or other
device to prevent potential harm
or damage.
. Do not use the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System with a gar-
age door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature
as required by applicable safety
standards. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet these
safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these fea-
tures increases risk of serious
injury or death. For more infor-
mation, consult the HomeLink
®
website at www.homelink.com or
call 1-800-355-3515.
CAUTION
When programming the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System to operate
a garage door opener or an entrance
gate, unplug the device’s motor
from the outlet during programming
to prevent motor burnout.
NOTE
. After programming your HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for the de-
sired devices, retain the hand-held
transmitters for further programming
or de vice tes ting in the event of a
problem.
. It is recommended that you insert a
new battery in the hand-held transmit-
ter of a device to ensure correct
programming.
! Garage door opener program-
ming in the U.S.A.
NOTE
When programming the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for a garage
door opener, it is suggested that you
park the vehicle outside the garage.
1. Unplug the motor of the garage door
opener from the outlet.
NOTE
If any of the HomeLink
®
buttons are
already programmed for other devices,
skip step 2 because it clears the
memory of all three buttons.
3-104
Black plate (251,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) HomeLink
®
button 3
2. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons (button 1 and button
3) until the indicator light begins to flash
(after approximately 20 seconds). Then
release both buttons.
3. Hold the end of the garage door
opener’s hand-held transmitter between
1 and 3 inches (25 and 76 mm) away from
the HomeLink
®
button you wish to pro-
gram.
4. Simultaneously press and hold both
the hand-held transmitter button and the
desired HomeLink
®
button. DO NOT re-
lease the buttons until step 5 has been
completed.
NOTE
Some gate operators and garage door
openers may require you to replace
this programming step 4 with proce-
dures in “Programming for entrance
gates and g arage do or op eners i n
Canada” F3-106.
5. Hold down both buttons unti l the
HomeLink
®
indicator light flashes, first
slowly then rapidly. When the indicator
light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. (The rapidly flashing light indi-
cates successful programming of the new
frequency signal.)
6. Press and hold the programmed but-
ton and check the HomeLink
®
indicator
light. If the indicator light stays on con-
tinuously, your garage door should acti-
vate and the programming is completed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then stays on continuously,
your garage door opener may be pro-
tected by a rolling code feature. In this
case you need to perform the additional
steps that are described in “Programming
rolling-code-protected garage door open-
ers in the U.S.A.” F3-105.
! Programming rolling-code-pro-
tected garage door openers in
the U.S.A.
If your garage door opener has a rolling
code feature, program the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System for it by following
steps 1 through 5 in “Garage door opener
programming in the U.S.A.” F3-104. Then
continue with the following steps.
NOTE
The assistance of a second person
may make the programming quicker
and easier.
1. Locate the training button on the
garage door opener motor head unit.
The exact location and color of the button
may vary by brand of garage door opener.
If it is difficult to locate the training button,
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
– CONTINUED –
3-105
3
Black plate (252,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
refer to your garage door opener’s instruc-
tion manual.
1) Training button
2. Press the training butto n on the
garage door opener motor h ead unit
(which activates the “training light” on the
unit). Proceed to step 3 within 30 seconds.
3. Inside the vehicle, firmly press, hold for
2 seconds and release the HomeLink
®
button that was programmed in the pre-
vious section. Press and release the
button a second time to complete the
programming procedure.
NOTE
Some garage door openers may re-
quire you to do the above press-hold-
release sequence a third time to com-
plete the programming.
4. The garage door opener should now
recognize the HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System and your garage door opener
should activate when the H omeLink
®
button is pressed.
! Programming for entrance gates
and garage door openers in
Canada
1. Unplug the motor of the entrance gate
or garage door opener from the outlet.
NOTE
If any of the HomeLink
®
buttons are
already programmed for other devices,
skip step 2 because it clears the
memory of all three buttons.
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) HomeLink
®
button 3
2. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons (button 1 and button
3) until the Home Link
®
indicator light
begins to flash (after approximately 20
seconds). Then release both buttons.
3. Hold the end of the entrance gate’s/
garage door opener’s hand-held transmit-
ter between 1 and 3 inches (25 and 76
mm) away from the HomeLink
®
button you
wish to program.
4. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
®
button.
5. Press and release (“ cycle”) the hand-
held transmitter button every 2 seconds
until step 6 is complete.
3-106
Black plate (253,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
6. When the indicator light flashes slowly
and then rapidly after several seconds,
release both buttons.
7. Plug the motor of the entrance gate/
garage door opener to the outlet.
8. Test your entrance gate/garage door
opener by pressing the programmed
HomeLink
®
button.
! Operating the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System
Once programmed, the HomeLink
®
Wire-
less Control System can be used to
remote-control the devices to which its
buttons are programmed. To activate a
device, simply press the appropriate but-
ton. The indicator light illuminates, indicat-
ing that the signal is being transmitted.
! Programming other devices
To program other devices such as door
locks, home lighting and security systems,
contact HomeLink
®
at www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
! Reprogramming a single
HomeLink
®
button
1. Press and hold the HomeLink
®
button
you wish to reprogram. DO NOT release
the button until step 4 has been com-
pleted.
2. When the HomeLink
®
indicator light
begins to flash slowly (after approximately
20 seconds), position the hand-held trans-
mitter of the device between 1 to 3 inches
(25 to 76 mm) away from the HomeLink
®
button you wish to program.
3. Press and hold the hand-held trans-
mitter button. The HomeLink
®
indicator
light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash
rapidly, release both buttons.
The programming for the previous device
is now erased and the new device can be
operated by pressing the HomeLi nk
®
button.
! Erasing HomeLink
®
button mem-
ory
NOTE
. Performi ng this procedure eras es
the memory of all the preprogrammed
buttons simultaneously. The memory
of individual buttons cannot be erased.
. It is recommended that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the memory of all
programmed HomeLink
®
buttons be
erased for security purposes.
1) HomeLink
®
button 1
2) HomeLink
®
button 2
3) HomeLink
®
button 3
1. Press and hold the two outer buttons
(button 1 and button 3) until the indicator
light begins to flash (after approximately
20 seconds).
2. Release both buttons.
! In case a problem occurs
If you cannot activate a device using the
corresponding HomeLink
®
button after
programming, contact HomeLink
®
at
www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-
3515 for assistance.
Instruments and controls/Mirrors
– CONTINUED –
3-107
3
Black plate (254,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Defogger and deicer
& Outside mirrors
! Convex mirror (passenger side)
WARNING
Objects look smaller in a convex
mirror and farther away than when
viewed in a flat mirror. Do not use
the convex mirror to judge the
distance of vehicles behind you
when changing lanes. Use the inside
mirror (or glance backwards) to
determine the actual size and dis-
tance of objects that you view in
convex mirror.
! Remote control mirror switch
: Select side to adjust
: Direction control
The remote control mirrors operate only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“ACC” position.
1. Turn the control switch to the side that
you want to adjust. “L” is for the left mirror,
“R” is for the right mirror.
2. Move the control switch in the direction
you want to move the mirror.
3. Return the control switch to the neutral
position to prevent unintentional opera-
tion.
The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-
ally.
Defogger and deicer
1) Rear window defogger
2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)
3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)
The vehicle is equipped with a rear
3-108
Black plate (255,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
window defogger. Some models are also
equipped with an outside mirror defogger
and/or windshield wiper deicer. The de-
fogger and deicer system is activated only
when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
Climate control system type A and type B
Climate control system type C and type D
To activate the defogger and deicer
system, press the control switch that is
located on the climate control panel. The
rear window defogger, outside mirror
defogger and windshield wiper deicer are
acti vated simultaneously. The indicator
light on the control switch illuminates while
the defogger and deicer system is acti-
vated.
To turn them off, press the control switch
again. They also turn off when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
The defogger and deicer system will
automatically shut off after approximately
15 minutes. If the rear window and the
outside mirrors have been cleared and the
windshield wiper blades have been deiced
completely before that time, press the
control switch to turn them off. If defrost-
ing, defogging or deicing is not complete,
you have to press the control switch to
turn them on again.
For models with the automatic climate
control system (type B, C and D), it is
possible for the defogger a nd deicer
system to be set to continuous operation
mode by a SUBARU dealer. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for details. Also, for
models with a multi function display, the
setting can be changed using the display.
For details, refer to “Multi function display”
F3-42.
If the battery voltage drops below the
permissible level, continuous operation of
the defogger and deicer system is can-
celed and the system stops operating.
CAUTION
. To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not operate the
defogger and deicer system con-
tinuously for any longer than
necessary.
. Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaner containing abra-
sives to clean the inner surface
Instruments and controls/Defogger and deicer
– CONTINUED –
3-109
3
Black plate (256,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Instruments and controls/Tilt/telescopic steering wheel
of the rear window. They may
damage the conductors printed
on the window.
NOTE
. Turn on the defogger and deicer
system if the wipers are frozen to the
windshield.
. If the windshield is covered with
snow, remove the snow so that the
windshield wiper deicer works effec-
tively.
. While the defogger and deicer sys-
tem is i n the continuous operation
mode, if the vehicle speed remains at
9mph(15km/h)orlowerfor15
minutes, the windshield wiper deicer
automatically stops operating, though
the rear window defogger and outside
mirror defogger maintain continuous
operation in this condition.
. While the defogger and deicer sys-
tem is i n the continuous operation
mode, if the battery voltage dro ps
below the permissible level, continu-
ous operation of the defogger and
deicer system is canceled and the
system stops operating.
Tilt/telescopic steering wheel
WARNING
. Do not adjust the steering wheel
tilt/telescopic position while driv-
ing. This may cause loss of
vehicle control and result in
personal injury.
. If the lever cannot be raised to
the fixed position, adjust the
steering wheel again. It is dan-
gerous to drive without locking
the steering wheel. T his may
cause loss of vehicle control
and result in personal injury.
1) Tilt adjustment
2) Telescopic adjustment
1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to
“Front seats” F1-2.
2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.
3. Move the steering wheel to the desired
level.
4. Pull the lever up to lock the steering
wheel in place.
5. Make sure that the steering wheel is
securely locked by moving it up and down,
and forward and backward.
3-110
Black plate (257,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Horn
Except Crosstrek models
Crosstrek models
To sound the horn, push the horn pad.
Instruments and controls/Horn
3-111
3
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (9,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Ventilator control................................................. 4-2
Center and side ventilators .................................. 4-2
Climate control panel.......................................... 4-3
Type A ................................................................ 4-3
Type B ................................................................ 4-4
Type C ................................................................ 4-5
Type D ................................................................ 4-6
Automatic climate control operation (type
B, C and D) ....................................................... 4-7
Type B ................................................................ 4-7
Type C and D ...................................................... 4-7
Operation tips ..................................................... 4-7
Sensors .............................................................. 4-8
Manual climate control operation ...................... 4-8
Airflow mode selection........................................ 4-8
Temperature control ............................................ 4-9
Fan speed control .............................................. 4-10
Air conditioner control ....................................... 4-10
Air inlet selection ............................................... 4-10
Defrosting........................................................... 4-11
Type A and B..................................................... 4-11
Type C............................................................... 4-11
Type D............................................................... 4-11
Operating tips for heater and air
conditioner ...................................................... 4-11
Cleaning ventilation grille................................... 4-11
Efficient cooling after parking in direct
sunlight ........................................................... 4-11
Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerant
circuit.............................................................. 4-12
Checking air conditioning system before summer
season ............................................................ 4-12
Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidity and
low temperature weather conditions ................. 4-12
Air conditioner compressor shut-off when engine
is heavily loaded.............................................. 4-12
Refrigerant for your climate control system ........ 4-12
Air filtration system ........................................... 4-12
Replacing an air filter......................................... 4-13
Climate control
4
Black plate (260,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Climate control/Ventilator control
Ventilator control
& Center and side ventilators
Center ventilators
1) Open
2) Close
Side ventilators
1) Open
2) Close
To adjust the flow direction, move the tab.
To open or close the ventilator, turn the
thumb-wheel up or down.
4-2
Black plate (261,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Climate control panel
& Type A
1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Tem-
perature control” F4-9.)
2) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
conditioner control” F4-10.)
3) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan
speed control” F 4-10.)
4) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” F4-10.)
5) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to
“Airflow mode selection” F4-8.)
6) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
“Defogger and deicer” F3-108.)
Climate control/Climate control panel
– CONTINUED –
4-3
4
Black plate (262,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Climate control/Climate control panel
& Type B
1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-
matic climate control operation (type B, C
and D)” F4-7 and/or “Temperature con-
trol” F4-9.)
2) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
conditioner control” F4-10.)
3) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Auto-
matic climate control operation (type B, C
and D)” F4-7 and/or “Fan speed control”
F4-10.)
4) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” F4-10.)
5) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to
“Automatic climate control operation
(type B, C and D)” F4-7 and/or “Airflow
mode selection” F4-8.)
6) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
“Defogger and deicer” F3-108.)
NOTE
The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.
4-4
Black plate (263,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Type C
1) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to
“Airflow mode selection” F4-8.)
2) Defroster button (Refer to “Airflow mode
selection” F4-8.)
3) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
“Defogger and deicer” F3-108.)
4) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan
speed control” F 4-10.)
5) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
conditioner control” F4-10.)
6) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” F4-10.)
7) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-
matic climate control operation (type B, C
and D)” F4-7 and/or “Temperature con-
trol” F4-9.)
8) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-
mate control operation (type B, C and D)”
F4-7.)
9) OFF button (Refer to “Automatic climate
control operation (type B, C and D)” F4-
7.)
Climate control/Climate control panel
– CONTINUED –
4-5
4
Black plate (264,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Climate control/Climate control panel
& Type D
1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-
matic climate control operation (type B, C
and D)” F4-7 and/or “Temperature con-
trol” F4-9.)
2) Defroster button (Refer to “Airflow mode
selection” F4-8.)
3) Rear window defogger button (Refer to
“Defogger and deicer” F3-108.)
4) DUAL mode button (Refer to ““DUAL”
mode (type D)” F4-10.)
5) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan
speed control” F 4-10.)
6) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air
conditioner control” F4-10.)
7) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air
inlet selection” F4-10.)
8) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to
“Airflow mode selection” F4-8.)
9) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-
matic climate control operation (type B, C
and D)” F4-7 and/or “Temperature con-
trol” F4-9.)
10) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-
mate control operation (type B, C and D)”
F4-7.)
11) OFF button (Refer to “Automatic climate
control operation (type B, C and D)” F4-
7.)
4-6
Black plate (265,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Automatic climate control
operation (type B, C and D)
When this mode is selected, the fan
speed, airflow distribution, air-inlet control,
and air conditioner compressor operation
are automatically controlled. To activate
this mode, perform the following.
& Type B
1. Turn the airflow mode selection dial
and fan speed control dial to the “AUTO”
position.
2. Set the preferred temperature using
the temperature control dial.
NOTE
. Each function can be individually
set to the AUTO mode independently of
the other functions. Any function set to
the AUTO mode is controlled automa-
tically. Any function not set to the
AUTO mode can be manually adjusted
as desired.
. The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.
To turn off the climate control system, turn
the fan speed control dial to the “OFF”
position. Then the air inlet selection will be
set as follows.
. when the AUTO mode is selected: OFF
(outside air)
. when the AUTO mode is not selected:
the mode that was selected when turning
off the climate system will be selected.
& Type C and D
1. Depress the “AUTO” butt on. T he
indicator light “FULL AUTO” on the display
illuminates.
2. Set the preferred temperature using
the temperature control dial.
NOTE
. The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.
. If you operate any of the buttons on
the control panel other than the “OFF”
button, rear window defogger button
and temperature control dial(s) during
FULL AUTO mode operation, the
“FULL” indicator light on the control
panel will turn off and the “AUTO”
indicator light will remain illuminated.
You can then manually control the
system as desired using the button
you operated. To change the system
back to the FULL AUTO mode, press
the “AUTO” button.
To turn off the climate control system,
press the “OFF” button. Then the air inlet
selection will be set to OFF (outside air).
& Operation tips
. Operate the automatic climate control
system when the engine is running.
. Even when cooling is not necessary,
setting the temperature much lower than
the current outlet air temperature turns on
the air conditioner compressor automati-
cally and the “A/C” indicator light on the
control panel illuminates.
Climate control/Automatic climate control operation (type B, C and D)
– CONTINUED –
4-7
4
Black plate (266,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Climate control/Manual climate control operation
& Sensors
1) Interior air temperature sensor
2) Solar sensor
The automa tic climate contr ol s yst em
employs several sensors. These sensors
are delicate. If they are not treated
properly and become damaged, the sys-
tem may not be able to control the interior
temperature correctly. To avoid damaging
the sensors, observe the following pre-
cautions.
– Do not subject the sensors to impact.
– Keep water away from the sensors.
– Do not cover the sensors.
The sensors are located as follows.
– Solar sensor: beside the windshield
defroster grille
– Interior air temperature sensor: next to
the steering column
– Outside temperature sensor: near the
front bumper opening
Manual climate control op-
eration
& Airflow mode selection
To select the airflow mode:
Type A, B and C: Turn the airflow mode
selection dial.
Type D: Press the airflow mode selection
button.
To select the defrost mode:
Type A and B: Turn the airflow mode
selection dial.
Type C and D: Press the defroster button.
Airflow modes are as follows.
(Ventilation): Instrument panel outlets
4-8
Black plate (267,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
(Bi-level): Instrument panel outlets and
foot outlets
(Heat): Foot outlets, both side outlets of
the instrument panel and some through
windshield defroster outlets (A small
amount of air flows to the windshield and
both side windows to prevent fogging.)
(Heat-def): Windshield defroster outlets,
foot outlets and both side outlets of the
instrument panel (Refer to “Defrosting”
F4-11.)
(Defrost): Windshield defroster outlets
and both side outlets of the instrument
panel (Refer to “Defrosting” F4-11.)
& Temperature control
! Type A
Turn the temperature control dial over a
range from the blue side (cool) to red side
(warm) to regulate the temperature of
airflow from the air outlets.
! Type B, C and D
Turn the temperature control dial to set the
preferred interior temperature. With the
dial set to your preferred temperature, the
system automatically adjusts the tempera-
ture of air supplied from the outlets so that
the preferred temperature is achieved and
maintained.
If the dial is turned fully counterclockwise,
the system provides maximum cooling
performance. If the dial is turned fully
clockwise, the system provides maximum
heating performance.
NOTE
The controllable temperature range
may vary depending on the regional
specifications of the vehicle.
Climate control/Manual climate control operation
– CONTINUED –
4-9
4
Black plate (268,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Climate control/Manual climate control operation
! “DUAL” mode (type D)
You can change the setting of the driver’s
side and front passenger’s side tempera-
ture independentl y by sele cting the
“DUAL” mode.
You can select the “DUAL” mode by
performing either of the following proce-
dures.
. Press the “DUAL” button
. Turn the passenger’s side temperature
control dial
The “DUAL” mode can be canceled by
pressing the “DUAL” button.
When the “DUAL” mode is selected:
Turn the driver’ssidedialtosetthe
driver’s side temperature. Turn the front
passenger’ssidedialtosetthefront
passenger’s side temperature.
When the “DUAL” mode is canceled:
Set the desired temperature by turning the
driver’s side dial.
& Fan speed control
The fan operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position. Select the
preferred fan speed by turning the fan
speed control dial.
& Air conditioner control
The air conditioner operates only when
the engine is running.
Press the air conditioner button while the
fan is in operation to turn on the air
conditioner. When the air conditioner is
on, the “A/C” indicator light illuminates.
To turn off the air conditioner, press the
button again.
NOTE
For efficient defogging or dehumidify-
ing in cold weather, turn on the air
conditioner. However, if the ambient
temperature decreases to approxi-
mately 328F(08C), the air conditioner
compressor will stop operating.
& Air inlet selection
Select the air inlet by pressing the air inlet
selection button.
ON position (recirculation): Interior air is
recirculated inside the vehicle. Press the
air inlet selection button to the ON position
for fast cooling with the air conditioner or
when driving on a dusty road.
OFF position (outside air): Outside air is
drawn into the passenger compartment.
Press the air inlet selection button to the
OFF position when the interior has cooled
to a comfortable temperature and the road
is no longer dusty.
WARNING
Continued operation in the ON posi-
tion may fog up the windows. Switch
to the OFF position as soon as the
outside conditions are no longer
dusty.
NOTE
. When the indicator light on the air
inlet selection button is flashing at
engine starting, a malfunction might
be occurring in the electrical system.
Contact your SUBARU dealer for in-
spection.
. The indicator light on the air inlet
selection button may flash in the
following cases. However, this does
not indicate a malfunction.
– After the vehicle battery has been
disconnected and reconnected.
– When the vehicle battery voltage
is low.
4-10
Black plate (269,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Defrosting
& Type A and B
Select the “ ” or “ ” mode by turning the
airflow mode selection dial to defrost or
dehumidify the windshield and front door
windows.
& Type C
Select the “ ” mode by pressing the
defroster button, or select the “
” mode
by turning the airflow mode selection dial
to defrost or dehumidify the windshield
and front door windows.
& Type D
Select the “ ” mode by pressing the
defroster button, or select the “
” mode
by pressing the airflow mode selection
button to defrost or dehumidify the wind-
shield and front door windows.
NOTE
. When the “ ” or “ ” mode is
selected, the air conditioner compres-
sor operates automatically regardless
of the position of the air conditioner
button to defrost the windshield more
quickly. However the indicator on the
air conditioner button will not illumi-
nate. At the same time, the air inlet
selection is automatically set to the
outside air mode.
For type A climate control system, in
this state:
– You cannot stop the air condi-
tioner compressor by pressing the
air conditioner button.
– You cannot select the recircula-
tion mode by pressing the air inlet
selection button.
. For type C and D climate control
system, after defrosting the windshield
by pressing the defroster button “
”,
pressing the button again returns the
system to the setting that had been
selected before the defroster was acti-
vated.
Operating tips for heater and
air conditioner
& Cleaning ventilation grille
1) Front ventilation inlet grille
Always keep the front ventilation inlet grille
free of snow, leaves, or other obstructions
to ensure efficient heating and defrosting.
Since the condenser is located in front of
the radiator, this area should be kept clean
because cooling performance is impaired
by any accumulation of insects and leaves
on the condenser.
& Efficient cooling after parking
in direct sunlight
After parking in direct sunlight, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes to
Climate control/Defrosting
– CONTINUED –
4-11
4
Black plate (270,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Climate control/Air filtration system
allow outside air t o circulate into the
heated interior. This results in quicker
cooling by the air conditioner. Keep the
windows closed during the operation of
the air conditioner for maximum cooling
efficiency.
& Lubrication oil circulation in
the refrigerant circuit
Operate the air conditioner compressor at
a low engine speed (at idle or low driving
speeds) a few minutes each month during
the off-season to circulate its oil.
& Checking air conditioning
system before summer sea-
son
Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-
ant leaks, hose conditions, and proper
operation each spring. Have the air con-
ditioning system checked by your
SUBARU dealer.
& Cooling and dehumidifying in
high humidity and low tem-
perature weather conditions
Under certain weather conditions (high
relative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) a
small amount of water vapor emission
from the air outlets may be noticed. This
condition is normal and does not indicate
any problem with the air conditioning
system.
& Air conditioner compressor
shut-off when engine is
heavily loaded
To improve acceleration and gas mileage,
the air conditioner compressor is designed
to temporarily shut off during air condi-
tioner operation whenever the accelerator
is fully depressed such as during rapid
acceleration or when driving on a steep
upgrade.
& Refrigerant for your climate
control system
Your air conditioner uses ozone friendly
refrigerant HFC134a. Therefore, the meth-
od of adding, changing or checking the
refrigerant is different from the method for
CFC12 (freon). Consult your SUBARU
dealer for service. Repairs needed as a
result of using the wrong refrigerant are
not covered under warranty.
Air filtration system
Your vehicle’s air conditioning system is
equipped with an air filtration system.
Replace the air filter element according
to the replacement schedule found in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. This
schedule should be followed to maintain
the filter’s dust collection ability. Under
extremely dusty conditions, the filter
should be replaced more frequently. Have
your filter checked or replaced by your
SUBARU dealer. For replacement, use
only a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.
CAUTION
Contact your SUBARU dealer if the
following occurs, even if it is not yet
time to change the filter:
. Reduction of the airflow through
the vents.
. Windshield gets easily fogged or
misted.
NOTE
The filter can influence the air condi-
tioning, heating and defroster perfor-
mance if not properly maintained.
4-12
Black plate (271,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Replacing an air filter
1. Remove the glove box.
NOTE
We recommend that you take mea-
sures to protect the center console
with masking tape first, so that you
avoid scratching the center console
with the glove box.
(1) Open the glove box.
(2) Remove the damper shaft from the
glove box.
(3) Push in the stoppers located on
both sides of the glove box and then
pull down the glove box as far as it will
go.
(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally
and remove the hinge portion. When
doing this, be careful not to damage
the hinge.
2. Remove the air filter according to the
following procedure in order to prevent
dust on the air cleaner from falling to the
inside of its housing.
(1) Push in the four stoppers t o
unlock, and then slowly pull out the
air filter 4 in (10 cm) from the housing.
(2) Completely pull out the air filter by
gently tilting the front side of the air
filter downward.
Climate control/Air filtration system
– CONTINUED –
4-13
4
Black plate (272,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Climate control/Air filtration system
3. Replace the air filter element with a
new one.
CAUTION
The arrow mark on the filter must
point UP.
4. Reinstall the glove box, and connect
the damper shaft.
5. Close the glove box.
4-14
Black plate (11,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Antenna................................................................ 5-2
Roof antenna (for Rod type) ................................ 5-2
Roof antenna (for Shark fin type) ......................... 5-2
Audio set ............................................................. 5-3
Base display audio set (if equipped) .................... 5-4
STARLINK
TM
7.0 Multimedia Plus audio set
(U.S. spec. models only, if equipped) ................. 5-6
Tips for operating the audio/visual system ........... 5-7
Basic information before use .............................. 5-15
Basic operation.................................................. 5-18
Unit settings ...................................................... 5-19
SUBARU STARLINK (if equipped) ....................... 5-26
AM/FM radio....................................................... 5-28
SiriusXM Satellite Radio (if equipped) ................. 5-37
aha
TM
by HARMAN ............................................. 5-44
Pandora
®
(if equipped) ....................................... 5-50
CD..................................................................... 5-53
USB memory...................................................... 5-55
iPod................................................................... 5-56
Bluetooth audio.................................................. 5-58
AUX ................................................................... 5-61
Steering switches for audio .............................. 5-63
Bluetooth
®
settings ........................................... 5-66
Regulatory information ...................................... 5-66
Registering/connecting Bluetooth
®
device .......... 5-66
Setting Bluetooth details.................................... 5-69
Hands-free phone system ................................. 5-71
Control screen................................................... 5-72
Registering/connecting a Bluetooth phone ......... 5-73
Using the phone switch/microphone................... 5-73
How to change the hands-free phone system ..... 5-74
Making a call ..................................................... 5-74
Receiving a call ................................................. 5-78
Talking on the phone ......................................... 5-78
Phone settings .................................................. 5-79
Voice command system .................................... 5-82
Using the voice command system...................... 5-82
Voice command system operation...................... 5-83
Command list .................................................... 5-85
What to do if....................................................... 5-89
Troubleshooting................................................. 5-89
Appendix ............................................................ 5-93
Certification....................................................... 5-93
Certification for the Hands-free system............... 5-93
Certification for Mexico models.......................... 5-94
Audio
5
Black plate (276,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Antenna
Antenna
& Roof antenna (for Rod type)
CAUTION
. Be sure to remove the antenna
rod before entering garages,
parking towers and other loca-
tions with low ceilings.
. Remove the antenna rod before
washing your car at a car wash. If
the antenna rod is left attached, it
may scratch the roof.
. When reinstalling th e removed
antenna rod, be sure to fully
tighten it.
1) Unscrew
2) Remove
The roof antenna is installed in the center
at the rear part of the roof.
The antenna rod can be removed by
unscrewing it from its base.
& Roof antenna (for Shark fin
type)
The SUBARU STARLINK antenna is
installed in the center of the roof at the
rear.
5-2
Black plate (277,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio set
Your vehicle may be equipped with one of
the following audio sets. Refer to the
pages indicated in this section for operat-
ing details.
CAUTION
. Always consult your SUBARU
dealer before installing a citizen
band radio or other transmitting
device in your vehicle. Such
devices may cause the electronic
control system to malfunction if
they are incorrectly installed or if
they are not suited for the vehi-
cle.
. To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the
audio/visual system on when
the engine is not running.
NOTE
. If a cell phone is placed near the
audio set, it may cause the audio set to
emit noise when the phone receives
calls. This noise does not indicate an
audio set malfunction. Note that a cell
phone should not be placed near the
audio set.
. Some functions may not be avail-
able depending on the market and
specifications of your vehicle.
. The images shown in this Owner’s
Manual are sample images. The actual
images may vary depending on the
market and specifications of your ve-
hicle.
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-3
5
Black plate (278,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
& Base display audio set (if equipped)
1) Power/VOLUME knob
2) Eject button
3) AUDIO/TUNE knob
4) HOME button
5) APPS button
6) Display
7) SEEK/TRACK buttons
The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
. Power and audio controls: refer to
“Basic operation” F5-18.
. SUBARU STARLINK (if equipped):
refer to “SUBARU STARLINK” F5-26.
. Radio operation: refer to “AM/FM radio”
F5-28.
. Satellite radio operation (if equipped):
refer to “SiriusXM Satellite Radio” F5-37.
. aha
TM
: refer to “aha
TM
by HARMAN”
F5-44.
. Pandora
®
(if equipped): refer to “Pan-
dora
®
” F5-50.
. CD (compact disc) player operation:
refer to “CD” F5-53.
. USB storage device: refer to “USB
memory” F5-55.
. iPod operation: refer to “iPod” F5-56.
. Bluetooth
®
audio: refer to “Bluetooth
audio” F5-58.
. Auxiliary input jack: refer to “AUX” F5-
61.
. Hands-free phone system: refer to
“Hands-free phone system” F5-71.
5-4
Black plate (279,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
NOTE
HD Radio
TM
Technology (if equipped)
should be included as a feature in the
base display audio set.
This display audio set is referred to as
follows.
. U.S. customers: STARLINK
TM
6.2 Mul-
timedia
. Canadian customers: 6.2-inch infotain-
ment system
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-5
5
Black plate (280,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
& STARLINK
TM
7.0 Multimedia Plus audio set (U.S. spec. models
only, if equipped)
The audio set will operate only when the
ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON”
position.
For details about how to use the
STARLINK
TM
7.0 Multimedia Plus audio
set, refer to the STARLINK
TM
7.0 Multi-
media Plus or STARLINK
TM
7.0 Multi-
media Navigation Owner’s Manual.
NOTE
HD Radio Technology should be in-
cluded as a feature in the STARLINK
TM
7.0 Multimedia Plus audio set.
5-6
Black plate (281,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Tips for operating the audio/
visual system
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the audio/visual
system:
. Be careful not to spill beverages
over the audio/visual system.
. Do not put anything other than an
appropriate disc into the disc
slot.
NOTE
The use of a cell phone inside or near
the vehicle may cause a noise from the
speakers of the audio/visual system
which you are listening to. However,
this does not indicate a malfunction.
! Radio
Usually, a problem with radio reception
does not mean there is a problem with the
radio — it is just the normal result of
conditions outside the vehicle.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain
can interfere with FM reception. Power
lines or phone wires can interfere with AM
signals. And of course, radio signals have
a limited range. The farther the vehicle is
from a station, the weaker its signal will
be. In addition, reception conditions
change constantly as the vehicle moves.
Here, some common reception problems
that probably do not indicate a problem
with the radio are described.
! FM
Fading and drifting stations: Generally, the
effective range of FM is about 25 miles (40
km). Once outside this range, you may
notice fading and drifting, which increase
with the distance from the radio transmit-
ter. They are often accompanied by
distortion.
Multi-path: FM signals are reflective,
making it possible for 2 signals to reach
the vehicle’s antenna at the same time. If
this happens, the signals will cancel each
other out, causing a momentary flutter or
loss of reception.
Static and fluttering: These occur when
signals are blocked by buildings, trees or
other large objects. Increasing the bass
level may reduce static and fluttering.
Station swapping: If the FM signal being
listened to is interrupted or weakened, and
there is another strong station nearby on
the FM band, the radio may tune in the
second station until the original signal can
be picked up again.
! AM
Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by
the upper atmosphere — especially at
night. These reflected signals can inter-
fere with those received directly from the
radio station, causing the radio station to
sound alternately strong and weak.
Station interference: When a reflected
signal and a signal received directly from
a radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each
other, making it difficult to hear the broad-
cast.
Static: AM is easily affected by external
sources of electrical noise, such as high
tension power lines, lightening or electrical
motors. This results in static.
! SiriusXM (if equipped)
. Cargo loaded on th e roof lu ggage
carrier, especially metal objects, may
adversely affect the reception of SiriusXM
Satellite Radio.
. Alternation or modifications carried out
without appropriate authorization may in-
validate the user’s right to operate the
equipment.
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-7
5
Black plate (282,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
! CD player and disc
. This CD player is intended for use with
4.7 in. (12 cm) discs only.
. Extremely high temperatures can keep
the CD player from working. On hot days,
use the air conditioning system to cool the
inside of the vehicle before using the
player.
. Bumpy roads or other vibrations may
make the CD player skip.
. If moisture gets into the CD player, the
discs may not be able to be played.
Remove the discs from the player and
wait until it dries.
WARNING
CD players use an invisible laser
beam which could cause hazardous
radiation exposure if directed out-
side the unit. Be sure to operate the
player correctly.
Audio CDs
. Use only discs marked as shown
above. The following products may not
be playable on your player:
– SACD
– dts CD
– Copy-protected CD
– Video CD
Special shaped discs
Transparent/translucent discs
5-8
Black plate (283,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Low quality discs
Labeled discs
CAUTION
. Do not use special shaped, trans-
parent/translucent, low quality or
labeled discs such as those
shown in the illustrations. The
use of such discs may damage
the player, or it may be impossi-
ble to eject the disc.
. This system is not designed for
use of Dual Discs. Do not use
Dual Discs because they may
cause damage to the player.
. Do not use discs with a protec-
tion ring. The use of such discs
may damage the player, or it may
be impossible to eject the disc.
. Do not use printable discs. The
use of such discs may damage
the player, or it may be impossi-
ble to eject the disc.
1) Correct
2) Wrong
. Handle discs carefully, especially when
inserting them. Hold them on the edge and
do not bend them. Avoid getting finger-
prints on them, particularly on the shiny
side.
. Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes or
other disc damage could cause the player
to skip or to repeat a section of a track. (To
see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the
light.)
. Remove discs from the players when
not in use. Store them in their plastic
cases away from moisture, heat and direct
sunlight.
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-9
5
Black plate (284,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint-
free cloth that has been dampened with
water. Wipe in a straight line from the
center to the edge of the disc (not in
circles). Dry it with another soft, lint-free
cloth. Do not use a conventional record
cleaner or anti-static device.
! CD-R/RW discs
. CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been
subject to the “finalizing process” (a
process that allows discs to be played
on a conventional CD player) cannot be
played.
. It may not be possible to play CD-R/
CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD
recorder or a personal computer because
of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on
the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the
lens of the unit.
. It may not be possible to play discs
recorded on a personal computer depend-
ing on the application settings and the
environment. Record with the c orrect
format. (For details, contact the appropri-
ate application manufacturers of the ap-
plications.)
. CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged
by direct exposure to sunlight, high tem-
peratures or other storage conditions. The
unit may be unable to play some damaged
discs.
. If you insert a CD-RW disc into the
player, playback will begin more slowly
than with a conventional CD or CD-R disc.
. Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot
be played using the DDCD (Double
Density CD) system.
! USB memory device
. US B commun ication formats: USB
1.1/2.0 HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps)
. File formats: FAT 16/32
. Correspondence class: Mass storage
class
! iPod
The followi ng iPod, iPod nano, iPod
classic, iPod touch and iPhone devices
can be used with this system.
Made for
. iPod touch (5th generation)*
. iPod touch (4th generation)
. iPod touch (3rd generation)
. iPod touch (2nd generation)
. iPod touch (1st generation)
. iPod classic
. iPod nano (7th generation)*
. iPod nano (6th generation)*
. iPod nano (5th generation)
. iPod nano (4th generation)
. iPod nano (3rd generation)
. iPod nano (2nd generation)*
. iPod nano (1st generation)*
. iPhone 5s*
. iPhone 5c*
. iPhone 5*
. iPhone 4s
. iPhone 4
. iPhone 3GS
. iPhone 3G
. iPhone
*: iPod video not supported
Depending on differences between mod-
els or software versions etc., some mod-
els might be incompatible with this sys-
tem.
5-10
Black plate (285,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! File information
Compatible compressed files (Audio)
Item USB DISC
Compatible
file format
MP3/WMA/AAC
Folders in the
device
Maximum
512
Maximum
255
Files in the
device
Maximum
8000
Maximum
512
Files per
folder
Maximum
255
—
Corresponding sampling frequency
(Audio)
File type Frequency (kHz)
MP3 files:
MPEG 1 LAYER 3
32/44.1/48
MP3 files:
MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3
16/22.05/24
WMA files:
Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2)
32/48/64/80/96/128/
160/192
AAC files:
MPEG4/AAC-LC
48/44.1/32/24/22.05/
16/12/11.025/8
Corresponding bit rates (Audio)
File type Bit rate (kbps)
MP3 files:
MPEG 1 LAYER 3
32 - 320
MP3 files:
MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3
8 - 160
WMA files: Ver. 7, 8 CBR 48 - 192
WMA files:
Ver. 9 (9.1/9.2)
CBR 32 - 192
AAC files:
MPEG4/AAC-LC
16 - 320
(Variable Bit Rate (VBR) compatible)
. MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3), WMA
(Windows Media Audio) and AAC (Ad-
vanced Audio Coding) are audio compres-
sion standards.
. This system can play MP3/WMA/AAC
files on CD-R, CD-RW discs, USB mem-
ory, and Bluetooth device.
. This system can play disc recordings
compatible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level
2 and with the Romeo and Joliet file
system.
. When naming an MP3/WMA/AAC file,
add an appropriate file extension (.mp3/
.wma/.m4a).
. This system plays back files with .mp3/
.wma/.m4a file extensions as MP3/WMA/
AAC files respectively. To prevent noise
and playback errors, use the appropriate
file extension.
. This system can play only the first
session when using multi-session compa-
tible CDs.
. MP3 files are compatible with the ID3
Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and Ver. 2.3
formats. This system cannot display disc
title, track title and artist name in other
formats.
. WMA/AAC files can contain a WMA/
AAC tag that is used in the same way as
an ID3 tag. WMA/AAC tags carry informa-
tion such as track title and artist name.
. The emphasis function is available only
when playing MP3/WMA files recorded at
32, 44.1 and 48 kHz.
. This system can play back AAC files
encoded by iTunes.
. The sound quality of MP3/WMA files
generally improves with higher bit rates. In
order to achieve a reasonable level of
sound quality, discs recorded with a bit
rate of at least 128 kbps are recom-
mended.
. The MP3/WMA player does not play
back MP3/WMA files from discs recorded
using packet write data transfer (UDF
format). Discs should be recorded using
“pre-mastering” software rather than pack-
etwrite software.
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-11
5
Black plate (286,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
. M3u playlists are not compatible with
the audio device.
. MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO
formats are not compatible with the audio
device.
. The player is compatible with VBR
(Variable Bit Rate).
. When playing back files recorded as
VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time
will not be correctly displayed if the fast
forward or reverse operations are used.
. It is not possible to check folders that
do not include MP3/WMA/AAC files.
. MP3/WMA/AAC files in folders up to 8
levels deep can be played. However, the
start of playback may be delayed when
using discs containing numerous levels of
folders. For this reason, we recommend
creating discs with no more than 2 levels
of folders.
. The play order of the compact disc with
the structure shown above is as follows:
. The order changes depending on the
personal computer and MP3/WMA/AAC
encoding software you use.
! Terms
! Packet write
. This is a general term that describes
the process of writing data on-demand to
CD-R, etc., in the same way that data is
written to floppy or hard discs.
! ID3 tag
. This is a method of embedding track-
related information in an MP3 file. This
embedded inform ation can include the
track number, track title, the artist’s name,
the album title, the music genre, the year
of production, comments, cover art and
other data. The contents can be freely
edited using software with ID3 tag editing
functions. Although the tags are restricted
to a number of characters, the information
can be viewed when the track is played
back.
! WMA tag
. WMA files can contain a WMA tag that
is used in the same way as an ID3 tag.
WMA tags carry information such as track
title and artist name.
! ISO 9660 format
. This is the international standard for
the formatting of CD-ROM folders and
files. For the ISO 9660 format, there are 2
levels of regulations.
. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format
(8 character file names, with a 3 character
file extension. File names must be com-
posed of one-b yte capi tal l etters an d
numbers. The “_” symbol may also be
included.)
5-12
Black plate (287,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
. Level 2: The file name can have up to
31 characters (including the separation
mark “.” and file extension). Each folder
must contain fewer than 8 hierarchies.
! MP3
. MP3 is an audio compression standard
determined by a working group (MPEG) of
the ISO (International Standard Organiza-
tion). MP3 compresses audio data to
about 1/10 the size of that on conventional
discs.
! WMA
. WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an
audio compression format developed by
Microsoft
®
. It compresses files into a size
smaller than that of MP3 files. The
decoding formats for WMA files are Ver.
7, 8 and 9.
. This product is protected by certain
intellectual property rights of Microsoft
Corporation and third parti es. Use or
distribution of such technology outside of
this product is prohibited without a license
from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft
subsidiary and third parties.
! AAC
. AAC is short for Advanced Audio
Coding and refers to an audio compres-
sion technology standard used with
MPEG2 and MPEG4.
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-13
5
Black plate (288,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
! Error messages
Mode Message Explanation
CD
“Disc read error.”
. This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are included in the disc.
. This indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged, or it was inserted upside
down. Clean the disc or insert it correctly. It indicates a disc which is
not playable is inserted.
“Please eject disc.”
There is a trouble inside the system.
Eject the disc.
USB
“Media not connected. Press AUDIO/TUNE knob
to exit.”
This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection. Refer to
“Connecting and disconnecting a USB memory/portable device” F5-17.
“No audio file. ”
This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files are included in the USB
memory.
“Unplayable file” This indicates that the accessed file cannot play back.
iPod
“Media not connected” This indicates that a USB device/iPod is not connected to the system.
“No audio file” This indicates that there is no audio file in the connected iPod.
“Unplayable file”
This indicates that the accessed file cannot play back.
NOTE
If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your SUBARU dealer.
5-14
Black plate (289,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Basic information before use
WARNING
When the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running, always apply the
parking brake for safety. Failure to
do so may result in loss of control of
your vehicle and cause an accident
or serious injury.
CAUTION
. To prevent damaging the screen,
touch the screen keys with your
finger lightly.
. Wipe off fingerprints using a
glass cleaning cloth. Do not use
chemical cleaners to clean the
screen, as they may damage the
touch screen.
! Touch screen gestures
Operations are performed by touching the touch screen directly with your finger.
Operation method Outline Main use
Touch
Quickly touch and release
once.
Changing and selecting various
settings
Drag*
Touch the screen with your
finger, and move the screen
to the desired position.
Scrolling the lists
Flick*
Quickly move the screen by
flicking with your finger.
Scrolling the main screen page
*: The above operations may not be performed on all screens.
NOTE
There may be a delayed response to flick operation that are performed at high
altitudes.
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-15
5
Black plate (290,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
! Touch screen operation
This system is operated mainly by the
keys on the screen.
When a screen key is touched, a beep
sounds. You can set the beep sound.
Refer to “Unit settings” F5-19.
NOTE
. If the system does not respond to
touching a screen key, move your
finger away from the screen and touch
it again.
. Grayed-out screen keys cannot be
operated.
. The displayed image may become
darkerandmovingimagesmaybe
slightly distorted when the screen is
cold.
. In extremely cold conditions, the
screen may not be displayed correctly.
Also, the screen keys may be less
responsive than usual when pressed.
. When you look at the screen
through polarized material such as
polarized sunglasses, the screen may
be dark and difficult to see. If so, look at
the screen from different angles, adjust
the screen settings or take off your
sunglasses. Refer to “Unit settings”
F5-19.
! Entering letters and numbers/list
screen operation
! Entering letters and numbers
When entering the Bluetooth device name
or PIN-code, or the phone number, letters
and numbers can be e ntered via the
screen.
Enter letters (example: In-Car-Device
setting)
No. Function
&
1
Enter the desired characters (alpha-
bet key mode).
&
2
Switch to the screen for characters.
&
3
Enter a space.
&
4
Confirm the characters/numbers en-
tered into the window.
No. Function
&
5
Delete a character/number entered
into the window.
! List screen
Multimedia playlists (example: iPod play-
list)
No. Function
&
1
Select a category that wants to play
back.
&
2
Return to the playback display of
each mode.
&
3
Select to skip to the next or previous
page.
5-16
Black plate (291,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Initial screen
When the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position, the initial screen will be
displayed and the system will begin
operating.
. When using the SUBARU STARLINK
function (if equipped), the display screen
may be different from the screen above.
. After a few seconds, the caution screen
will be displayed.
. After about 5 second s, the caution
screen automatically switches to the next
screen.
! Connecting and disconnecting a
USB memory/portable device
The USB port and the AUX jack are
located as shown in the following illustra-
tion.
NOTE
. This unit does not support commer-
cially available USB hubs.
. Turn on the power of the device
when it is not turned on.
. This device has a USB port for USB
memory/portable device.
. For compatible USB memory de-
vices, refer to “USB memory device”
F5-10.
. For compatible iPod models, refer to
“iPod” F5-10.
. Even if a USB hub is used to
connect more than two USB devices,
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-17
5
Black plate (292,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
only the first two connected devices
will be recognized.
& Basic operation
This section describes some of the basic
features of the audio/visual system. Some
information may not pertain to your sys-
tem.
Your audio/visual system works when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
CAUTION
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the audio/
visual system on longer than neces-
sary when the engine is not running.
NOTE
Some functions can also be operated
by using the voice command system.
For details, refer to “Voice command
system” F5-82.
! Turning the system on and off
Press the power/VOLUME knob to turn
the audio/visual system on and off. When
the system turns on, the mode that was in
use the last time the system was turned off
will be displayed. Press and hold the knob
to turn the display off.
Turn this knob to adjust the volume.
! Selecting an audio source
1. Press the AUDIO/TUNE knob.
2. Select the desired source.
Example: Source select screen
5-18
Black plate (293,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
NOTE
. If the audio control screen appears,
select the “Source” key on the audio
screen or press the AUDIO/TUNE knob
again.
. When you push the AUDIO/TUNE
knob while any screen other than the
audio control screen is displayed, the
display will return to the audio control
screen.
. When the AUDIO/TUNE knob is
pushed and held, the graphic equalizer
screen will be displayed. Refer to
““Graphic Equalizer”” F5-23.
! Selecting a function menu
Press the HOME button to display home
screen.
Item Function
AUDIO
Select to display the main
screen of the audio source that
was selected previously.
PHONE
Select to display the hands-free
function using your cell phone.
Refer to “Hands-free phone
system” F5-71.
APPS
Select to display the functions
linked with a smartphone. Refer
to “SUBARU STARLINK” F5-
26.
SETTINGS
Select to display the functions
for performing various settings.
Refer to “Unit settings” F5-19.
& Unit settings
Sound quality adjustment, screen adjust-
ment, and information of the audio unit are
displayed.
1. Press the HOME button on the audio
panel.
2. Touch the “SETTINGS” key.
3. Select the items to be set.
Available setting:
. General settings: Select the
tab to
check the system software update infor-
mation. Refer to “General settings” F5-20.
. Bluetooth settings: Select the
tab to
set the Bluetooth settings. Refer to “Blue-
tooth settings” F5-20.
. Sound settings: Select the
tab to set
the sound quality settings. Refer to
“Sound settings” F5-20.
. Display settings: Select the
tab to
set the screen settings. Refer to “Display
settings” F5-25.
. SUBARU STARLINK settings (if
equipped): Select to the
tab set the
SUBARU STARLINK settings. Refer to
“SUBARU STARLINK settings” F5-26.
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-19
5
Black plate (294,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
! General settings
Touch the
tab for the audio unit basic
settings.
Item Function
System
Language
Select to change the language.
Button
Beeps
Select to set the sound beeps
on/off.
System
Software
Select to update software ver-
sions. This menu is not used in
usual operation.
Reset to
Factory
Setting
Select to reset the device to
factory settings. This menu is not
used in usual operation.
After resetting to factory settings,
turn ignition off and on again.
! Bluetooth settings
Touch the
tab to set Bluetooth.
Item Function
BT De-
vices Con-
nection
Select to pair/connect the Blue-
tooth devices.
In-Car-De-
vice setting
Select to enter the Bluetooth
device name or PIN-code.
For details, refer to “Bluetooth
®
settings”
F5-66.
! Sound settings
Touch the
tab to set the sound quality.
Item Function
Balance/
Fader
Select to adjust speaker volume
balance (right/left and front/rear).
Speed Vo-
lume Con-
trol
Select to adjust speaker volume
coupled to vehicle speed.
Graphic
Equalizer
Select to adjust sound quality in
each frequency band.
Sound Re-
storer
Select to add high-pitched tone
to the compressed audio file.
Volume
Smoother
Select to adjust volume differ-
ence between audio sources.
Virtual
Bass
Select to add harmonic tone so
that low-pitched tone is
strengthened.
5-20
Black plate (295,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Item Function
Vocal Im-
age Con-
trol
Select to pick-up vocal sound
signal from the sound data, and
adjust it to right/left or front/rear.
Refer to the following table for the adjustment range of each audio setting item and
default value.
Item Step Default
Balance/
Fader
Volume
Balance
Control
Balance L9-R9 0 (Center)
Fader F9-R9 0 (Center)
Vocal
Image
Control
Balance L9-R9 R3
Fader F9-R9 0 (Center)
Speed Volume Control OFF, Low, High Low
Graphic Equalizer −6-+6 0 (Flat)
Sound Restorer ON, OFF ON
Volume Smoother OFF, Low, Mid, High Mid
Virtual Bass OFF, Low, Mid, High
Mid
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-21
5
Black plate (296,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
! “Balance/Fader”
A good balance of the left and right stereo
channels and of the front and rear sound
levels is important for good quality audio
program listening.
Keep in mind that when listening to a
stereo recording or broadcast, changing
the right/left balance will increase the
volume of 1 group of sounds while
decreasing the volume of another.
Touch the “Set” key of the “Balance/Fader”
key. The “B alance/Fader” screen w ill
appear.
. Volume Balance setting
1. Select the “Volume Balance Control”
key.
2. Adjust the balance by pressing “ ” or
“
” key.
3. Adjust the fader by pressing “
” or
“
” key.
. Vocal image setting
1. Select the “Vocal Image Control” key.
2. Adjust the balance by pressing “ ” or
“
” key.
3. Adjust the fader by pressing “
” or
“
” key.
5-22
Black plate (297,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! “Speed Volume Control”
The system adjusts to the optimum
volume and tone quality according to
vehicle speed to compensate for in-
creased vehicle noise.
1. Touch the right side key of the “Speed
Volume Control” key.
2. Select the desired item. The “High”
key comes to have a bigger effect. When
the “OFF” key is selected, speed volume
control function is cancelled.
! “Graphic Equalizer”
You can adjust the s ound quality by
increasing/decreasing the gain for each
frequency range.
1. Touch the “Set” key of the “Graphic
Equalizer” key.
2. In this mode, 6 preset equalizer
patterns (the “Bass”, “Treble”, “Acoustic”,
“Impact”, “Smooth” and “Flat” key) and 3
customized patterns (the “SET 1” - “SET
3” key) are available.
3. When customizing the equalizer pat-
tern, touch among “SET 1”, “SET 2 ” or
“SET 3” and then touch the “Adjust” key.
4. Adjust the level of each frequency
band by touching “
” or “ ” key.
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-23
5
Black plate (298,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
! “Sound Restorer”
You can play compressed audio data with
a sound quality that is close to the original
sound.
Select the “ON” or “OFF” key by the right
side key of the “Sound Restorer” key.
! “Volume Smoother”
This function reduces the difference in
volume among the sound sources to be
played.
1. Touch the right side key of the “Volume
Smoother” key.
2. Se lect the “OFF”, “ Lo w”, “Mid” or
“High” key. The “High” key comes to have
a bigger effect. When the “OFF” key is
selected, the volume smoother function is
cancelled.
! “Virtual Bass”
This function enables you to adjust the
bass tone.
1. Touch the right side key of the “Virtual
Bass” key.
2. Se lect the “OFF”, “Low”, “Mid” or
“High” key. The “High” key comes to have
a bigger effect. When the “OFF” key is
selected, the virtual bass function is
cancelled.
! “Vocal Image Control”
Refer to ““Balance/Fader”” F5-22.
5-24
Black plate (299,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Display settings
Touch the
tab to set display.
Item Function
Day/Night
Mode
The “Auto”, “Day” or “Night” key
can be selected on the pop-up
screen.
When the “Auto” key is selected,
the screen changes to day or
night mode depending on the
position of the headlight switch.
Brightness
Touch “+” or “−” to adjust the
brightness.
NOTE
. When the screen is viewed through
polarized sunglasses, a rainbow pat-
tern may appear on the screen due to
optical characteristics of the screen. If
this is disruptive, please operate the
screen without polarized sunglasses.
. If the screen is set to “Day” mode
with the headlight switch turned on,
this condition is memorized even with
the engine turned off.
! How to adjust t he rear vi ew
image
In the camera display, the brightness, tint,
color and black level of the screen can be
adjusted.
1. Depress the brake pedal fully and stop
the vehicle.
2. While the vehicle is stopped, set the
shift lever (MT models) or select lever
(CVT models) in the “R” position, and then
touch the display.
3. Touch the “Display Adjustment” key.
4. Touch the items to adjust the rear
camera screen.
Camera display
WARNING
When adjusting camera display
screen, make sure to depress the
brake pedal fully to avoid the vehicle
from moving. Failure to do so may
lead to a serious accident.
NOTE
The camera display can be accessed
when the rear camera monitor is dis-
played.
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-25
5
Black plate (300,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
! SUBARU STARLINK settings (if
equipped)
Touch the
tab to change the SUBARU
STARLINK settings.
Item Function
Browser
cache
Select to initialize cache files
that the browser stores. If the
confirmation screen appears
and the “OK” key is selected, the
cache files will be deleted.
& SUBARU STARLINK (if
equipped)
The SUBARU STARLINK function allows
the system to link with a smartphone using
Bluetooth.
! How to use SUBARU STARLINK
1. Connect to the audio system. Use a
USB port for an iPhone or iPod touch and
Bluetooth for Android devices.
. For details about connecting an
iPhone/iPod touch: Refer to “Connect-
ing and disconnecting a USB memory/
portable device” F5-17.
. For details about registering or con-
necting an Android device: Refer to
“Registering/connecting Bluetooth
®
device” F5-66.
2. Press the HOME button, and then
touch the “APPS” key, or press the APPS
button on the audio panel. The APPS
screen is displayed.
3. Touch the “SUBARU STARLINK” key
on the APPS screen. The disclaimer
screen or the error screen is displayed.
4. Touch the “Check” key on the disclai-
mer screen and then the APPS main
screen will appear. If you touch the
“Cancel” key, the disclaimer screen dis-
appears and the previous screen will be
displayed again.
NOTE
. The SUBARU STARLINK connection
error screen will be displayed due to
one of the following possible reasons.
– Your smartphone and the system
has not been connected via USB
(for iPhone) or Bluetooth (for An-
droid).
– SUBARU STARLINK APPS has
5-26
Black plate (301,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
not been activated.
. You can also switch to aha or
Pandora (if equipped) from the APPS
screen.
! APPS main screen
No. Function
&
1
Select to go to the Music APPS
screen.
&
2
Select to go to the News APPS
screen.
&
3
Select to go to the Calender APPS
screen.
&
4
Select to go to the iHeartRadio
APPS screen.
&
5
Select to go to the Weather APPS
screen.
NOTE
. The error screen will be displayed
while using SUBARU STARLINK due to
one of the following possible reasons.
– When your smartphone has no
service or the Bluetooth communi-
cation is not possible.
– When your smartphone is turned
off.
– When the SUB ARU STARLIN K
APPS is quit.
– When connection to the SUBARU
STARLINK server is not possible.
– When a problem oc curs other
than a server error.
. When using the SUBARU STARLINK
function, a disclaimer screen will be
displayed. Be sure to fully read the
contents before using the function.
. Supported devices
– iPhone: iPhone 4/iPhone 4s/
iPhone 5 (iOS Ver. 5.1 or later)/
iPhone 5c/iPhone 5s
– Android: (OS Ver. 4.0 or later)
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-27
5
Black plate (302,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
& AM/FM radio
! Control screen and audio panel
No. Function
&
1
Select to display the audio source
selection screen.
&
2
Select to change the band.
&
3
The HD Radio indicator on the top
right of the screen changes accord-
ing to the reception condition of HD
Radio (if equipped).
&
4
Select to display a station list (if
equipped). Refer to “Selecting a
station from the list” F5-29.
No. Function
&
5
Select to scan radio channels.
This function enables searching for
receivable stations automatically,
and tunes in to a frequency for 5
seconds if a station is found. When
the 5-second period has elapsed, the
system searches for the next recei-
vable station again, and tunes in to
the frequency for 5 seconds.
&
6
Select to open the “Option” screen.
Refer to “Radio settings” F5-30.
&
7
When you touch a key, the system
tunes to the stored frequency.
When you touch and hold a key, the
system stores the frequency to the
selected preset channel. Refer to
“Presetting a station” F5-29.
No. Function
&
8
Turn to adjust volume.
Press to turn the audio system on/
off.
&
9
Turn to step up/down frequencies.
Turn to move up/down the list. Also,
the knob can be used to enter
selections on the list screens by
pressing.
Press to select an audio mode. For
details, refer to “Selecting an audio
source” F5-18.
&
10
Press to display the sound setting
screen. Refer to “Unit settings” F5-
19.
&
11
Press to seek for a station/channel.
Press and hold for continuous seek.
NOTE
. Although FM is normally static free,
reception can be affected by the sur-
rounding area, atmospheric conditions,
station strength and transmitter dis-
tance. Buildings or other obstructions
may cause momentary static, flutter or
station interference. If reception con-
tinues to be unsatisfactory, switch to a
stronger station.
. The radio automatically changes to
stereo reception when a stereo broad-
cast is received.
5-28
Black plate (303,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
. The radio automatically blends to an
HD Radio signal (if equipped) in AM or
FM where available.
! How to change the source
Select the “AM” or “FM” key on the source
select screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio
source” F5-18.
! Presetting a station
In total 18 stations can be set for the FM
band (6 each for FM1, FM2 and FM3) and
12 stations can be set for the AM band (6
each for AM1 and AM2).
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. If you touch and hold a key, the system
stores the frequency to the selected
preset channel.
! Selecting a station from the list (if
equipped)
A station list can be displayed.
1. Touch the
tab.
2. Touch the tab and the station list will
appear.
3. Select the desired station.
! Update the station list
Touch the “Update Station List” key on the
station list screen and the following screen
will be displayed.
Item Function
OK
Select to execute the manual
update.
Cancel
Select to cancel the manual
update.
NOTE
. The audio system sound is muted
during refresh operation.
. In some situations, it may take some
time to update the station list.
! Bookmark the list
You can store and call up the received
data (images, song titles, artist names,
etc.). The stored data is displayed as a list.
1. Touch the
tab on the station list
screen and the following screen will be
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-29
5
Black plate (304,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
displayed.
2. Select an item from the bookmark list,
the following image will be displayed.
3. When you call up bookmark informa-
tion, a QR code conver ted f rom the
bookmark information will be displayed
on the screen. You can access a URL by
reading the QR code using a smartphone,
etc.
! Delete bookmark from the list
1. Touch the “Delete Bookmark” key on
the station list screen and the following
screen will be displayed.
2. If you select an item from the book-
mark list, the item will be deleted from the
bookmark list.
3. Touch the “Delete All” key. If the
confirmation screen ap pears and the
“OK” key is selected, all bookmark items
in the list will be deleted.
! Radio settings
You can perform various radio settings.
1. Touch the
tab.
2. Select the desired item from the
following table.
Item Function
HD (if
equipped)
Select to turn HD radio on/off.
PTY Select
(if
equipped)
Select to set the PTY group.
Auto Store
Select to detect 6 radio stations
with strong frequencies automa-
tically and to store them in the
order of frequency.
! About HD Radio
TM
technology (if
equipped)
HD Radio
TM
Technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
radio product has a special receiver which
allows it to receive digital broadcasts
(where available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts it already rece ives. Digital
broadcasts have better sound quality than
analog broadcasts as digital broadcasts
provide free, crystal clear audio with no
static or distortion. For more information,
and a guide to available radio stations and
programming, refer to www.hdradio.com.
5-30
Black plate (305,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
AM and FM broadcast sound quality is
now crystal clear, with AM sound quality
that virtually matches FM quality of the
past, and FM broadcasts that have near
CD-level sound quality.
HD Radio Technology manufactured un-
der license from iBiquity Digital Corpora-
tion. Foreign Patents. HD Radio
TM
and the
HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logo s are
proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corp.
FM stations can provide additional digital-
only audio programming on HD2/HD3
Channels.
! Available HD Radio
TM
technology (if
equipped)
! Multicast
On the FM radio frequency most digital
stations have “multiple” or supplemental
programs on one FM station.
1. Touch the “Sub CH” key on the control
screen and the following screen will be
displayed.
2. The indication that shows whether the
current broadcast is digital or analog is
displayed on the top right of the control
screen.
3. Select the desired channel.
Turning the AUDIO/TUNE knob can also
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-31
5
Black plate (306,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
select the desired multicast channel.
NOTE
. HD Radio
TM
stations can be preset.
. An orange
will be displayed on
the screen when in digital. The
will
first appear in a gray color indicating
the station is indeed (an analog and) a
digital station. Once the digital signal is
acquired, the logo will change to a
bright orange color.
. The song title and artist name will
appear on the screen when available by
the radio station. The radio station can
send album pictures when available.
. As a user works through the analog
radio stations, (where applicable) the
radio receiver will automatically tune
from an analog signal to a digital signal
within 5 seconds.
! Preserving a music information
Tag information in the music broadcasting
is preserved in the system and transmits
to an iPod.
1. Touch the “Ta g” key in the control
screen while receiving HD Radio, the tag
setting screen will be displayed.
2. Connect an iPod. Refer to “Connecting
and disconnecting a USB memory/porta-
ble device” F5-17.
. Turn on the power of the iPod if it is
not turned on.
. Once an iPod is connected, the
music tag moves from the radio into
the iPod.
. When the iPod is connected to
iTunes, the tagged information of the
songs which were tagged while listen-
ing to the radio can be viewed. Then a
user may decide to purchase the song
or CD/Album which had been listened
to on their radio.
5-32
Black plate (307,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
In addition, the following messages appear.
Display Message Contents
“Tag storage full”
If there is not enough memory in the digital
audio
“Already Stored”
If the same information is stored in the digital
audio
“Storing Failed” If the store process in the digital audio failed
“iPod full Tags cannot be stored” If there is not enough memory in the iPod
“Starting to transfer the Tag files.”
If the system starts to transmit music informa-
tion to an iPod
“Transferring Failed”
If the transmitting process of music information
to an iPod failed
“X Tag(s) Sent” (X = number of transmitted
information) will be displayed.
If the transmitting process of music information
to an iPod is successful
NOTE
. The tag information can not be
preserved while scanning or caching
the radio station.
. If taggi ng the music information
fails, “Saving the HD Radio tag was
unsuccessful. (Saving the HD Radio
tag was unsuccessful.)” will be dis-
played on the screen. If this occurs, tag
the information again.
. Program Service Data: Presents song
name, artist, station IDs, and other rele-
vant data streams.
. iTunes Tagging provides you the op-
portunity to discover a w ide range of
content and the means to “ tag” that
content for later review and purchase from
the iTunes Store. Also refer to the Apple
Automotive specifications for implement-
ing iTunes Tagging.
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-33
5
Black plate (308,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
. Visual information related to content
being played on your HD Radio receiver,
such as Album Art, historical photographs,
still art from live broadcasts, among other
related content.
5-34
Black plate (309,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Troubleshooting guide
Experience Cause Action
Mismatch of time alignment - a user may hear
a short period of programming replayed or an
echo, stutter or skip.
The radio stations analog and digital volume is
not properly aligned or the station is in ballgame
mode.
None, radio broadcast issue. A user can contact
the radio station.
Sound fades, blending in and out.
Radio is shifting between analog and digital
audio.
Reception issue. May clear-up as the vehicle
continues to be driven. Turning the indicator of the
HD Radio
TM
off will change the radio mode to
analog audio.
Audio mute condition when an HD2/HD3
multicast channel had been playing.
The radio does not have access to digital
signals at the moment.
This is normal behavior, wait until the digital signal
returns. If out of the coverage area, seek a new
station.
Audio mute delay when selecting an HD2/
HD3 multicast channel preset.
The digital multicast content is not available until
HD Radio
TM
broadcast can be decoded and
make the audio available. This takes up to 7
seconds.
This is normal behavior, wait for the audio to
become available.
Text information does not match the present
song audio.
Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.
Broadcaster should be notified. Complete the form;
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio
_station_experiences.
No text information shown for the present
selected frequency.
Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.
Broadcaster should be notified. Complete the form;
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio
_station_experiences.
The “Acquiring” caution message appears
when the system attempts to acquire digital
transmission.
When acquiring digital data while receiving a
digital broadcast and SPS station.
. When the reception in digital of the SPS station
is confirmed.
. When the system determined that the SPS
station could not be received.
. When the SPS broadcast is ended (stopped) by
the radio station while receiving SPS.
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-35
5
Black plate (310,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
Experience Cause Action
The “HD Channel is unavailable” caution
message appears when digital reception is not
possible.
. When the system determined that the SPS
station could not be received while receiving
a digital broadcast and SPS station.
. When the SPS broadcast is ended
(stopped) by the radio station while receiv-
ing SPS.
. When the status is changed to acquiring digital
data because the reception condition of SPS
station has improved.
. When the received station is changed.
5-36
Black plate (311,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& SiriusXM Satellite Radio (if
equipped)
! SiriusXM Data Service
Data service information, which is com-
prised of traffic information and weather
information, can be received via the
SiriusXM Radio.
To receive the data service information in
the vehicle, a subscription to the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio service is necessary.
Content set to use the SiriusXM data
service is reset when personal information
is initialized.
! Control screen and audio panel
Control screen
No. Function
&
1
Perform the SXM setting. See be-
low. Refer to “SXM setting” F5-43.
&
2
Search for a channel which the
direction of higher frequency from
current frequency. Reproduce the
channel that can receive by 5
seconds.
&
3
A list is displayed. There are three
types of lists (“Presets”, “Categories”
or “All Channels”) available.
. “Presets”: Preset channels are
displayed in a list.
. “Categories”: The channels of
the selected category are dis-
played in a list.
. “All Channels”: All selectable
channels are displayed in a list.
No. Function
&
4
Display the contents information of a
channel receiving.
&
5
Presets list (30 channels max.) is
displayed. Refer to “Presetting a
channel” F5-41.
&
6
Categories list is displayed. Refer to
“Selecting a channel from the list”
F5-41.
&
7
All channels list is displayed.
The available received channels are
displayed, and you can select a
channel.
&
8
Change to the Direct Tune display.
Refer to “Direct Tune” F5-42.
&
9
Return to the previous display.
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-37
5
Black plate (312,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
No. Function
&
10
Return to the playback display.
Audio panel
No. Function
&
1
Turn to adjust volume.
Press to turn the audio system on/
off.
&
2
Press to display the sound setting
screen. Refer to “Unit settings” F5-
19.
&
3
Turn right to step up channels and
turn left to step down channels.
Press to select an audio source.
Refer to “Selecting an audio source”
F5-18.
&
4
Press to step up/down channels.
Press and hold to step up/down
channels fast.
5-38
Black plate (313,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! How to subscribe to SiriusXM Sa-
tellite Radio
To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in
the vehicle, a subscription to the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio service is necessary.
A SiriusXM Satellite Radio is a tuner
designed exclusively to receive broad-
casts provided under a separate subscrip-
tion.
! How to subscribe
It is necessary to enter into a separate
service agreement with SiriusXM Satellite
Radio in order to receive satellite broad-
cast programming in the vehicle. Addi-
tional activation and service subscription
fees apply that are not included in the
purchase price of the vehicle and digital
satellite tuner.
For complete information on subscription
rates and terms, or to subscribe to
SiriusXM Satellite Radio:
. U.S. customers:
Refer to www.siriusxm.com or call
1-866-635-2349
. Canadian customers:
Refer to www.siriusxm.ca or call
1-877-209-0079
WARNING
. SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services
— Legal Disclaimers and Warn-
ings
– Fees and Taxes — Subscrip-
tion fee, taxes, one time acti-
vation fee, and other fees may
apply. Subscription fee is con-
sumer only. All fees and pro-
gramming subject to change.
Subscriptions subject to Cus-
tomer Agreement available at
www.siriusxm.com (U.S.) or
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
SiriusXM U.S. satellite and
data services are available
only in the contiguous USA
and DC. SiriusXM satellite
service is also available in
Canada: see www.siriusxm.
ca.
Explicit Language Notice —
Channels with frequent expli-
cit language are indicated
with an “XL” preceding the
channel name. Channel block-
ing is available for SiriusXM
Satellite Radio receivers by
notifying SiriusXM at:
. U.S. customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.com or call
1-866-635-2349
. Canadian customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.ca or call
1-877-209-0079
CAUTION
. It is prohibited to copy, decom-
pile, disassemble, reverse engi-
neer, hack, manipulate or other-
wise make available any technol-
ogy or software incorporated in
receivers compatible with the
SiriusXM Satellite Radio System
or that support the XM website,
the Online Service or any of its
content. Furthermore, the
AMBE
®
voice compression soft-
ware included in this product is
protected by intellectual property
rights including patent rights,
copyrights, and trade secrets of
Digital Voice Systems, Inc.
. Note: this applies to SiriusXM
Satellite Radio receivers only
and not XM Ready devices.
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-39
5
Black plate (314,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
NOTE
. SiriusXM Satellite Services — De-
scriptions
– Only SiriusXM Satellite Radio
®
brings you more of what you love,
all in one place. Get over 175
channels, including commercial-
free music, plus the best sports,
news, talk, comedy and entertain-
ment. Welcome to the world of
satellite radio. More information
about SiriusXM Satellite Radio is
available online at www.siriusxm.
com (U.S.) and www.siriusxm.ca
(Canada).
. SiriusXM Satellite Services — Sub-
scription Instructions
– For SiriusXM Services requiring
a subscription (such as SiriusXM
Satellite Radio, and some Infotain-
ment & data services), the following
paragraph shall be included.
Required SiriusXM Satellite Radio
and some Infotainment & data ser-
vices monthly subscriptions sold
separately after trial period. Sub-
scription fee is consumer only. All
fees and programming subject to
change. Subscriptions are subject
to the Customer Agreement avail-
able at www.siriusxm.com (U.S.) or
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). Sirius,
XM and all related marks and logos
are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio
Inc. All other marks, channel names
and logos are the property of their
respective owners.
For more information, program
schedules, and to subscribe or
extend subscription after compli-
mentary trial period; more informa-
tion is available at:
. U.S. customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.com or call
1-866-635-2349
. Canadian customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.ca or call
1-877-209-0079
. SiriusXM Satellite Radio is solely
responsible for the quality, availability
and content of the satellite radio ser-
vices provided, which are subject to
the terms and conditions of the
SiriusXM Satellite Radio customer ser-
vice agreement.
. Customers should have their radio
ID ready; the radio ID can be found by
tuning to “Ch 000” on the radio. For
details, see “DISPLAYING THE RADIO
ID” below.
. All fees and programming are the
responsibility of SiriusXM Satellite
Radio and are subject to change.
! How to change the source
Select the “Sirius XM” key on the source
select screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio
source” F5-18.
5-40
Black plate (315,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Presetting a channel
1. The presets list is displayed via either
of the following procedures.
. When you touch the
tab in the
SiriusXM main screen (if the list that
was displayed the last time is Presets).
. When you select the
tab in each
list screen.
2. The current channel is stored if you
touch and hold the preset list key. You can
store up to 30 channels (A beep sounds
when a channel stored).
The playing icon is displayed for the
currently selected channel.
! Selecting a channel from the list
1. The categories list is displayed via
either of the following procedures.
. When you touch the
tab in the
SiriusXM main screen (if the list that
was displayed the last time is Cate-
gories).
. When you select the
tab in each
list screen.
2. Each channel list is displayed when
you select each category item.
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-41
5
Black plate (316,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
In addition, the following messages appear.
Display Message Contents
“Subscription Update”
“Press OK to Continue”
An update to your SiriusXM subscription has
been received by the SiriusXM tuner. Touch
any key to continue.
“Channel XXX Not Available”
(“XXX” refers to the selected channel number.)
This channel is not a valid SiriusXM channel.
The channel number has been entered incor-
rectly, or the channel was removed from the
SiriusXM channel lineup.
“Channel XXX Not Subscribed Call.”
“Call SiriusXM to Subscribed.”
(“XXX” refers to the selected channel number.)
This channel is not included in your SiriusXM
subscription plan.
“Ch Locked”
“Lock Code?”
The selected channel has been locked by the
parental controls.
A prompt to enter the unlock code will appear.
“Check Antenna”
Ensure the SiriusXM antenna cable is con-
nected to the SiriusXM tuner correctly.
Check the SiriusXM antenna wire for breaks or
sharp bends.
Replace the antenna if necessary.
“No Signal”
The vehicle must be outside, and the antenna
must have a clear view of the southern sky.
NOTE
Contact SiriusXM
. Listener Care Center (U.S. customers):
1-866-635-2349
. Listener Care Centre (Canadian customers):
1-877-209-0079
! Direct Tune
1. A channel input screen is displayed
when you touch the
tab.
2. Input any number and touch the “OK”
key, receive the channel which input.
5-42
Black plate (317,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! SXM setting
1. An option menu screen is displayed
when you touch the
tab on the lower
left side of the screen. The “Options”
screen will appear.
Option menu screen
No. Function
&
1
Set the lock function of each chan-
nel. Input the password is necessary
for operation.
&
2
Set the password of the lock func-
tion.
2. A password input screen is displayed
when you touch the “Set” key of the
Channel Lock function.
Password input screen
3. When the input password is approved,
change to the lock channel selection
screen.
Lock channel selection screen
4. In the channel list, touch the channel
that should be locked.
! Displaying the Radio ID
Each SiriusXM tuner is identified with a
unique radio ID. The “Radio ID” is required
when activating an SiriusXM Satellite
Services or when reporting a problem.
. If “Ch 000” is selected using the
AUDIO/TUNE knob, the ID code will be
displayed.
. Touch the
key. The Radio ID will be
displayed on the “Options” screen.
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-43
5
Black plate (318,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
& aha
TM
by HARMAN
aha is a cloud-based application that
connects to the system and gives you
access to your favorite web content safely
and easily. There are over 30,000 stations
spanning internet radio, personalized mu-
sic, audiobooks, Facebook, Twitter, res-
taurant and hotel searches, weather and
more. For more about aha, go to the aha
site (http://www.aharadio.com).
When connecting iPhone and iPod touch
or Android devices with the aha applica-
tion installed, you can control, view, and
hear aha content through the system.
In order to connect to this system, use a
USB port for an iPhone or iPod touch and
Bluetooth for Android devices.
In this chapter, iPhone and iPod touch or
Android devices will be referred to as a
smartphone.
WARNING
Do not connect or operate the
smartphone while driving. Doing so
may result in loss of control of your
vehicle and cause an accident or
serious injury.
CAUTION
. Do not leave your smartphone in
the car. In particular, high tem-
peratures inside the vehicle may
damage the smartphone.
. Do not push down on or apply
unnecessary pressure t o the
smartphone while it is connected
as this may damage the smart-
phone or its terminal.
. Do not insert foreign objects into
the port as this may damage the
smartphone or its terminal.
5-44
Black plate (319,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Control screen and panel
Control screen (main screen and station screen)
No. Function
&
1
Select to display the audio source
selection screen.
&
2
Select to open the station list. Refer to
“Using aha application” F5-49.
&
3
Select to fast forward the current con-
tent item by 30 seconds.
&
4
Select to display the contents list of the
selected station.
&
5
Select to make a phone call to the
current content item.
A phone number is distributed depend-
ing on content items.
This feature is available only in these
cases.
No. Function
&
6
The track pauses when pressed during
playback and plays back when touched
during pause.
&
7
Select to set thumbs up.
&
8
Select to set thumbs down.
&
9
Select to start the playback from the
beginning of the content in the target
station.
&
10
Select to rewind the current content
item by 15 seconds.
&
11
Select to display the preset list.
&
12
Return to the control screen.
No. Function
&
13
Select to display the nearby list.
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-45
5
Black plate (320,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
Audio panel
No. Function
&
1
Turn to adjust volume.
Press to turn the audio system on/off.
&
2
Press to display the sound setting
screen. Refer to “Unit settings” F5-19.
&
3
Press to display the station operation
screen.
Press to select an audio mode.
&
4
Turn to display the next/previous con-
tent item.
Press to select an audio source. Refer
to “Selecting an audio source” F5-18.
&
5
Press to display the next/previous con-
tent item.
NOTE
. For safety reasons, certain func-
tions are not available while your
vehicle is in motion.
. In order to maximize signal recep-
tion, performance and precision of the
smartphone, please ensure the smart-
phone is placed as close to the system
as possible, while ensuring it is stowed
and secure while driving.
. When the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position, the battery of
the connected iPhone/iPod touch is
charged.
. iPhone/iPod touch may not be re-
cognized when the ignition switch is in
the “ACC” or “ON” position. In this
case, remove the iPhone/iPod touch
and reconnect it.
. The accuracy of the displayed in-
formation or the signal reception per-
formance depends on the smartphone
or the connected device, and it’s wire-
less connection.
. Since the aha application uses sig-
nals from GPS satellites and wireless
communication lines, it may not work
properly in the following locations.
– In a tunnel
– In underground parking lots
5-46
Black plate (321,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
– Outside wireless communication
range, such as some countryside
areas
– Where the wireless communica-
tion network is congested, or where
communications are restricted
. Depending on the circumstances
and environment, the signal may be
weak or not be received. In such cases,
an error may occur.
. Top 35 entries in the preset station
list on the smartphone are displayed.
When there are more than 35 entries in
the preset station list, change the order
of the entries in the list on the smart-
phone. You can change the priority of
your preset stations within the aha
application (after disconnected from
this system) to modify the station list
shown on the screen. Please see your
smartphone aha application “Edit Pre-
sets (in Main menu)” to modify this list.
. For operating the smartphone, see
the instruction manual that comes with
it.
. If there are multiple music files
stored on your iPhone or iPod touch,
it may take some time until playback
starts.
. Playback may be intermittent when
you switch to streaming Bluetooth
audio from aha on your smartphone
device.
. When connecting the device via
Bluetooth, the communication speed
may become slower than via USB.
! Before using aha application
In order to use the aha application on this
system, the application must be installed
on the smartphone.
! Settings required to use aha
application
. Search and download the aha applica-
tion from your smartphone app store.
– iPhone and iPod touch: Apple App
Store via iTunes
– Android device: Google Play Store
. Create an account and login to the aha
application on the smartphone.
NOTE
Please use the latest version of the aha
application.
! About app-based connected con-
tent
Requirements for using the connected
content services of the aha application
on this system.
. Latest version of the system is compa-
tible with connected content application(s)
for the smartphone, available from aha,
downloaded to your smartphone.
. A current accoun t wit h a wireless
content service provider.
. A smartphone data plan: If the data
plan for your smartphone does not provide
for unlimited data usage, a dditional
charges from your carrier may apply for
accessing app-based connected content
via 3G, 4G, Wi-Fi or 4G LTE wireless
networks.
. Connection to the internet via 3G, 4G,
Wi-Fi or 4G LTE networks.
NOTE
. Changes to product specifications
may result in differences between the
content of the manual and features of
the product.
. Be careful not to exceed the data
usage limits for your smartphone.
Doing so will result in additional data
usage charges from your phone car-
rier.
. Access to a pp-based connected
content will depend on the availability
of wireless cell and/or Wi-Fi network
coverage for the purpose of allowing
your smartphone to connect to the
internet.
. Service availability may be geogra-
phically limited by region. Consult the
wireless connected content service
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-47
5
Black plate (322,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
provider for additional information.
. Abil ity of this pr oduct to access
connected content is subject to change
without notice and could be affected by
any of the following: compatibility
issues with future firmware versions
of the smartphone; compatibility is-
sues with future versions of the con-
nected content application(s) for the
smartphone; changes to or disconti-
nuation of the connected content ap-
plication(s) or service by its provider.
. Communi cation and phone call
charges for smartphones should be
paid by the wireless subscriber.
. If you lose the data in a smartphone
or other device while using it with the
system, no compensation will be given
for the lost data.
. Fuji Heavy Industries makes no
guarantee regarding the content pro-
vided by aha.
. aha may not work due to factors on
smartphones, smartphone applications
or stations. Fuji Heavy Industries is not
responsible for it.
! About the supported devices
This system supports the following de-
vices.
. For iPhone/iPod touch users
Type Generation
Firmware
version or
OS
iPhone
iPhone 3G iOS 4.2.x
iPhone 3GS iOS 6.1.x
iPhone 4 iOS 7.0.x
iPhone 4s iOS 7.0.x
iPhone 5 iOS 7.0.x
iPhone 5c iOS 7.0.x
iPhone 5s iOS 7.0.x
iPod touch
iPod touch iOS 3.1.x
iPod touch 2 iOS 4.2.x
iPod touch 3 iOS 5.1.x
iPod touch 4 iOS 6.1.x
iPod touch 5
iOS 7.0.x
NOTE
Note that the warranty does not apply if
an unsupported iPhone/iPod touch is
connected.
. For Android device users
Android OS Specification Profile
Android Ver.
2.2 or Ver.
2.3
Bluetooth
Specification
Ver. 1.1 or
higher
(Ver. 2.0 +
EDR or higher
is recom-
mended)
. aha Con-
nect Bin-
ary API
over SPP
. Digital
audio by
A2DP
NOTE
The available functions may vary de-
pending on the type of Android device.
! Connecting a smartphone
If you con nect a smartphone to t his
system aft er starting a supported aha
application on the smartphone, you can
display and operate the aha application
displayed on the smartphone on the
system screen.
1. Run t he aha ap plication on your
smartphone.
2. Connect the iPhone/iPod touch to the
USB port or connect the Android device
by utilizing the Bluetooth connection (SPP
and A2DP profile).
. For details about connecting an
iPhone/iPod touch: Refer to “Connect-
ing and disconnecting a USB memory/
portable device” F5-17.
. For details about registering or con-
5-48
Black plate (323,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
necting an Android device: Refer to
“Registering/connecting Bluetooth
®
device” F5-66.
NOTE
When iPhone/iPod touch and Android
device s are connected at th e same
time, iPhone/iPod touch is prioritized.
! How to change the source
. Select the “aha” key on the source
select screen. Refer to “Basic operation ”
F5-18.
. Select the “aha” key on the APPS
screen. Refer to “SUBARU STARLINK”
F5-26.
NOTE
When st arting-up “aha” ,thereare
some smartphone models for which
“aha” application does not start up
automatically.
! Using aha application
1. When the top screen is displayed,
touch the station key.
Example of the main screen
2. Select the desired station from the list.
The selected station is displayed.
NOTE
. The following operations are not
available on this system. Perform these
operations on the smartphone.
– Add/Reorder/Delete stations
– Login to Facebook/Twitter
. For the aha function, the following
touch screen gestures are not avail-
able.
– Multi-touch operation
– Double-tap
. For details on the services or the
operations, check the aha site
(http://www.aharadio.com) on the inter-
net.
. The button display will vary depend-
ing on each station or content item.
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-49
5
Black plate (324,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
& Pandora
®
(if equipped)
Pandora is an application for a smart-
phone. This can automatically select and
play recommended tracks.
By rating the track currently playing, tracks
that better match your preference will be
recommended.
In order to connect to this system, use a
USB port for an iPhone or iPod touch and
Bluetooth for Android devices.
Depending on differences between mod-
els or software version etc., some models
might be incompatible with this system.
This function is not available if the
Pandora application has not been in-
stalled on the smartphone.
WARNING
Do not operate the player’s controls
or connect the smartphone while
driving. Doing so may result in loss
of control of your vehicle and cause
an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
. Do not leave your smartphone in
the car. In particular, high tem-
peratures inside the vehicle may
damage the smartphone.
. Do not push down on or apply
unnecessary pressure t o the
smartphone while it is connected
as this may damage the smart-
phone or its terminal.
. Do not insert foreign objects into
the port as this may damage the
smartphone or its terminal.
NOTE
Follow the specific operation proce-
dures for the smartphone application.
5-50
Black plate (325,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Control screen and audio panel
No. Function
&
1
Select to display the audio source
selection screen.
&
2
Select to open the station list. Refer to
“Station list” F5-52.
&
3
Select to skip the current track.
&
4
The track pauses when touched during
playback and plays when touched
during pause.
&
5
Select to set thumbs up.
This gives a high rating to the current
song.
All other similar songs will be played
back more frequently.
No. Function
&
6
Select to set thumbs down.
This gives a low rating to the current
song.
All other similar songs will be played
back less frequently.
When you select thumbs down, the
current track is skipped.
&
7
During playback of a station, you can
use this key to bookmark a song or
artist. Refer to “Registering Bookmarks”
F5-52.
&
8
Turn to adjust volume.
Press to turn the audio system on/off.
&
9
Turn clockwise to skip to the next track.
Press to select an audio source. Refer
to “Selecting an audio source” F5-18.
&
10
Press to display the sound setting
screen. Refer to “Unit settings” F5-19.
No. Function
&
11
Press to skip to the next track/cover art.
! Connecting a smartphone
Connect the iPhone/iPod touch to the
USB port or connect the Android device
by using Bluetooth connection (SPP and
A2DP profile).
. For detail s about conn ecting an
iPhone/iPod touch: Refer to “Connecting
and disconnecting a USB memory/porta-
ble device” F5-17.
. For details about registering or con-
necting an Android device: Refer to
“Registering/connecting Bluetooth
®
de-
vice” F5-66.
! How to change the source
The Pandora operation screen can be
reached by the following methods:
. Connecting a Pandora device. Refer to
“Connecting a Bluetooth device” F5-69 or
“Connect ing and disconnecting a USB
memory/portable device” F5-17.
. Select the “Pandora” key on the source
select screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio
source” F5-18.
. Select the “Pandora” key on the APPS
screen. Refer to “SUBARU STARLINK”
F5-26.
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-51
5
Black plate (326,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
NOTE
When starting-up Pandora, there are
some smartphone models for which
Pandora application does not start up
automatically.
! Registering Bookmarks
You can register the music and artist now
being played in Bookmark.
1. Touch the
tab.
2. Select the desired key. The following
items are appeared on the screen.
Item Function
Track
When selected after the Book-
mark key is pressed, the current
track is bookmarked.
Artist
When selected after the Book-
mark key is pressed, the current
artist is bookmarked.
Cancel
Select to cancel the bookmark
operation.
! Station list
You can select, add or delete a station.
When the
tab is touched on the main
screen, a station list will be displayed.
No. Function
&
1
Select to sort the list in the chronologi-
cal order of when the Station List was
created.
&
2
Select to create a station.
The station can be created using track
names or artist names.
&
3
Select to delete a station.
&
4
Return to the control screen.
&
5
Select to sort the list based on the
alphabetical order of the station names.
! Store the station
You can register a station.
1. Touch the
tab on the Pandora
main screen.
2. Touch the “New Station” key, and then
select the desired key.
Item Function
From Track
Select to create a station using a
track name.
From Artist
Select to create a station using
an artist name.
Cancel
Select to cancel the operation to
add a station.
! Delete the station
You can delete a station.
1. Touch the
tab on the Pandora top
screen.
2. Touch the “Delete Station” key, and
then the station list is appeared.
3. Select the item to delete the station. If
the confirmation screen appears and the
“OK” key is selected, the selected station
will be deleted from station list.
5-52
Black plate (327,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& CD
! Control screen and audio panel
No. Function
&
1
Select to display the audio source
selection screen.
&
2
Select to display the play mode
currently selected. Refer to “Select
play mode” F5-54.
&
3
Audio CD:
Select to display a track list.
MP3/WMA/AAC disc:
Select to display a folder list.
&
4
Shows progress.
&
5
The tracks in the disc are played
back for 10 seconds each from the
beginning of the track.
No. Function
&
6
MP3/WMA/AAC disc:
Select to choose a folder.
&
7
Turn to adjust volume.
Press to turn the audio system on/
off.
&
8
Press to eject a disc.
&
9
Disc slot
&
10
Turn to select a track/file.
Press to select an audio source.
Refer to “Selecting an audio source”
F5-18.
No. Function
&
11
Press to display the sound setting
screen. Refer to “Unit settings” F5-
19.
&
12
Press to select a track/file.
Press and hold to fast forward/re-
wind.
NOTE
. Depending on the compression data
format of the inserted CD, some keys
may not be displayed on the screen.
. If a disc contains CD-DA files and
MP3/WMA/AAC files, only the CD-DA
files can be played back.
. If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the
title of the disc and track will be
displayed. Up to 32 characters can be
displayed.
. If the disc contains no CD-TEXT,
only the track number would be dis-
played on the screen.
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-53
5
Black plate (328,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
! Loading a disc
CAUTION
Never try to disassemble the audio
kit or lubricate any part of the CD
player. Do not insert anything other
than a disc into the slot.
Insert a disc into the disc slot. After
insertion, the disc is automatically loaded.
NOTE
When inserting a disc, gently insert it
with the label facing up.
! Unloading a disc
Press the eject button to remove the disc.
! How to change the source
The CD operation screen can be reached
by the following methods:
. Insert a disc. Refer to “Loading a disc”
F5-54.
. Select the “DISC” key on the source
select screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio
source” F5-18.
! Select play mode
The play mode settings display will appear
when play mode key is touched. Select
the preferred play mode from the following
items.
Icon Function
Touch to start 1 track repeat.
Touch to start repeat all.
Touch to start folder repeat.
Touch to start shuffle all.
Touch to start shuffle folder.
Return to the control screen.
NOTE
Depending on the compression data
formant of the inserted CD, the dis-
played play mode may differ from the
illustration shown here.
5-54
Black plate (329,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& USB memory
Audio files on the USB memory can be
played.
WARNING
Do not operate the player’s controls
or connect the USB memory while
driving. Doing so may result in
losing control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
. Do not leave your USB memory
in the car. In particular, high
temperatures inside the vehicle
may damage the USB memory.
. Do not push down on or apply
unnecessary pressure to the
USB memory while it is con-
nected as this may damage the
USB memory or its terminal.
. Do not insert foreign objects into
the port as this may damage the
USB memory or its terminal.
! Control screen and audio panel
No. Function
&
1
Select to display the audio source
selection screen.
&
2
Select to display the play mode
currently selected. Refer to “Select
play mode” F5-56.
&
3
Select to display folder list.
&
4
Shows progress.
&
5
The tracks in the folder are played
back 10 seconds each from the
beginning of the track.
&
6
Select to choose a folder.
&
7
Turn to adjust volume.
Press to turn the audio system on/off.
No. Function
&
8
Turn to select a file/track.
Press to select an audio source.
Refer to “Selecting an audio source”
F5-18.
&
9
Press to display the sound setting
screen. Refer to “Unit settings” F5-
19.
&
10
Press to select a file/track.
Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-55
5
Black plate (330,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
! Connecting a USB device
You can connect a USB device to the
vehicle USB port. Refer to “Connecting
and disconnecting a USB memory/porta-
ble device” F5-17.
! How to change the source
The USB Audio playback screen can be
reached by the following methods:
. Connect a USB memory. Refer to
“Connect ing and disconnecting a USB
memory/portable device” F5-17.
. Select the “USB/iPod” key on the
source select screen. Refer to “Selecting
an audio source” F5-18.
! Select play mode
The play mode settings display will appear
when play mode key is touched. Select
the preferred play mode from the following
items.
Icon Function
Touch to start 1 track repeat.
Touch to start repeat all.
Touch to start folder repeat.
Touch to start shuffle all.
Touch to start shuffle folder.
Return to the control screen.
& iPod
Audio files on the iPod can be played.
WARNING
Do not operate the player’s controls
or connect the iPod while driving.
Doing so may result in loss of
control of your vehicle and cause
an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
. Do not leave your portable player
in the car. In particular, high
temperatures inside the vehicle
may damage the portable player.
. Do not push down on or apply
unnecessary pressure to the por-
table player while it is connected
as this may damage the portable
player or its terminal.
. Do not insert foreign objects into
the port as this may damage the
portable player or its terminal.
5-56
Black plate (331,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Control screen and audio panel
No. Function
&
1
Select to display the audio source
selection screen.
&
2
Select to display the play mode
currently selected. Refer to “Select
play mode” F5-58.
&
3
Select to display iPod List. Refer to
“iPod settings” F5-58.
&
4
Shows progress.
&
5
Turn to adjust volume.
Press to turn the audio system on/off.
&
6
Turn to select a track/file.
Press to select an audio source. Refer
to “Selecting an audio source” F5-18.
&
7
Press to display the sound setting
screen. Refer to “Unit settings” F5-19.
&
8
Press to select a track/file.
Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
NOTE
. When an iPod is connected using a
genuine USB cable, the iPod starts
charging its battery.
. When an iPod is connected and the
audio source is changed to iPod mode,
the iPod will resume playing from the
same point it was last used.
. Depending on the iPod that is con-
nected to the system, certain functions
may not be available.
. Files/tracks selected by operating a
connected iPod may not be recognized
or displayed properly.
! Connecting the iPod
You can connect an iPod to the vehicle
USB port using the USB cable. Refer to
“Connect ing and disconnecting a USB
memory/portable device” F5-17.
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-57
5
Black plate (332,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
! How to change the source
TheiPodoperationscreencanbe
reached by the following methods:
. Connect an iPod. Refer to “Connecting
and disconnecting a USB memory/porta-
ble device” F5-17.
. Select the “USB/iPod” key on the
source select screen. Refer to “Selecting
an audio source” F5-18.
! Select play mode
The play mode settings display will appear
when play mode key is touched. Select
the preferred play mode from the following
items.
Icon Function
Touch to start 1 track repeat.
Touch to start repeat all.
Touch to start shuffle all.
Touch to turn off shuffle.
Touch to start shuffle album.
Return to the control screen.
! iPod settings
You can choose the following items from
the list screen after touching the
tab
on the screen.
Icon Function
Select to display the play list.
Select to display tracks list.
Select to display artists list.
Select to display albums list.
Select to open other list (“Gen-
res”, “Composers”, “Audiobooks”
and “Podcast”).
Select to open “Genres” list.
Select to open “Composers” list.
Select to open “Audiobooks” list.
Select to open “Podcasts” list.
& Bluetooth audio
The Bluetooth au dio system enables
users to enjoy listening to music that is
played on a portable player on the vehicle
speakers via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth, a
wireless data system capable of playing
portable audio music without cables. If
your device does not support Bluetooth,
the Bluetooth audio system will not func-
tion.
WARNING
. Do not operate the player’s con-
trols or connect to the Bluetooth
audio system while driving.
Doing so may result in loss of
control of your vehicle and cause
an accident or serious injury.
. Your au dio u nit i s fitted with
Bluetooth antennas. People with
implantable cardiac pacemakers,
cardiac resynchronization ther-
apy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should
maintain a reasonable distance
between themselves and the
Bluetooth antennas. The radio
waves may affect the operation
of such devices.
5-58
Black plate (333,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
. Before using Bluetooth devices,
users of any electrical medical
device other than implantable
cardiac pacemakers, cardiac re-
synchronizatio n thera py-pace-
makers or implantable cardiover-
ter defibrillators should consult
the manufacturer of the device
for information about its opera-
tion under the influence of radio
waves. Radio waves could have
unexpected effects on the opera-
tion of such medical devices.
CAUTION
Do not leave your portable player in
the vehicle. In particular, high tem-
peratures inside the vehicle may
damage the portable player.
! Control screen and audio panel
No. Function
&
1
Select to display the audio source
selection screen.
&
2
Select to display the play mode
currently selected. Refer to “Select
play mode” F5-60.
&
3
Select to display as a list (for the
models with AVRCP Ver. 1.4 or high-
er).
&
4
The track pauses when touched dur-
ing playback and plays when touched
during pause.
&
5
Select to open Bluetooth Settings.
Refer to “Setting Bluetooth details”
F5-69.
&
6
Turn to adjust volume.
Press to turn the audio system on/off.
&
7
Turn to select a track.
Press to select an audio source. Refer
to “Selecting an audio source” F 5-18.
&
8
Select to display the sound setting
screen. Refer to “Unit settings” F5-19.
&
9
Press to select a track.
Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-59
5
Black plate (334,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
NOTE
. Depending on the Bluetooth device
that is connected to the system, the
music may start playing when selecting
the
key while it is paused. Con-
versely, the music may pause when
selecting the
key while it is playing.
. In the following conditions, the sys-
tem may not function:
– The Bluetooth device is turned
off.
– The Bluetooth device is not con-
nected.
– The Bluetooth device has a low
battery.
. It may t ake time to connect the
phone when Bluetooth audio is being
played.
. For operating the portable player,
see the instruction manual that comes
with it.
. If the Bluetooth device is discon-
nected due to poor reception from the
Bluetooth network when the ignition
switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-
tion, the s ystem will automatically
reconnect to the portable player.
. If the Bluetooth device is discon-
nected on purpose, such as it was
turned off, this d oes not happen.
Reconnect the portable player manu-
ally.
. Bluetooth device information is re-
gistered when the Bluetooth device is
connected to the Bluetooth audio sys-
tem. When selling or disposing of the
vehicle, remove the Bluetooth audio
information from the system. Refer to
“Bluetooth
®
settings” F5-66.
! Connecting a Bluetooth device
To use the Bluetooth audio system, it is
necessary to register a Bluetooth device
with the system.
. Registering an additional device
1. Select the “Add” key on the Bluetooth
devices connection screen.
2. For more information: Refer to “Regis-
tering/connecting Bluetooth
®
device” F5-
66.
. Selecting a registered device
1. Select the “Select” key on the Blue-
tooth devices connection screen.
2. For more information: Refer to “BT
Devices Connection screen” F5-69.
! How to change the source
Select the “BT Audio” key on the source
select screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio
source” F5-18.
NOTE
Depending on the type of portable
player connected, some functi ons
may not be available and/or the screen
may look differently than shown in this
manual.
! Select play mode
The play mode settings display will appear
when play mode key is touched. Select
the preferred play mode from the following
items.
Icon Function
Touch to start 1 track repeat.
Touch to start repeat all.
Touch to repeat the tracks in the
group.
Touch to start shuffle all.
Touch to play tracks in the order
in which they are registered in
the audio device.
Touch to start shuffle group.
5-60
Black plate (335,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Icon Function
Return to the control screen.
NOTE
If the connected device does not sup-
port the group repeat mode, the group
functions are not available.
& AUX
WARNING
Do not operate the player’s controls
or connect the portable audio device
while driving. Doing so may result in
loss of control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
. Do not leave portable audio de-
vice in the vehicle. The tempera-
ture inside the vehicle may be-
come high, resulting in damage
to the player.
. Do not push down on or apply
unnecessary pressure to the por-
table audio device while it is
connected as this may damage
the portable audio device or its
terminal.
. Do not insert foreign objects into
the port as this may damage the
portable audio device or its term-
inal.
Audio/Audio set
– CONTINUED –
5-61
5
Black plate (336,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Audio set
! Control screen and audio panel
No. Function
&
1
Select to display the audio source
selection screen.
&
2
Select to adjust the audio gain level.
Refer to “Audio level settings” F5-62.
&
3
Turn to adjust volume.
Press to turn the audio system on/off.
&
4
Press to select an audio source.
Refer to “Selecting an audio source”
F5-18.
&
5
Press to display the sound setting
screen. Refer to “Unit settings” F5-
19.
! Connecting a portable audio device
You can connect a portable audio device
to the vehicle AUX jack. Refer to “Con-
necting and disconnecting a USB mem-
ory/portable device” F5-17.
! How to change the source
The AUX operation screen can be
reached by the following methods:
. Connect a portable audio device. Refer
to “Connecting and disconnecting a USB
memory/portable device” F5-17.
. Select the “AUX” key on the source
select screen. Refer to “Selecting an audio
source” F5-18.
! Audio level settings
You can set the audio gain level.
1. Select the
tab on the screen, and
then touch the right side key of the “Audio
Level” key.
2. Select the audio level from the follow-
ing items.
. Low
. Mid
. High
5-62
Black plate (337,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Steering switches for audio
Some parts of the audio/visual system can
be adjusted using the switches on the
steering wheel.
Except Crosstrek models
Crosstrek models
1) + − switch
2)
/ switch
3) Mute/Enter switch
4) List switch
5) Back switch
6) Source switch
Audio/Steering switches for audio
– CONTINUED –
5-63
5
Black plate (338,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Steering switches for audio
. +/− switch
Mode Operation Function
Except list screen
Press Volume up/down
Press and hold Volume up/down continuously
List screen Press Move cursor up/down
Pandora main screen (if equipped) Press and hold
“+” switch is thumb up/“−” switch is thumb down
. / switch
Mode Operation Function
AM/FM Radio, SiriusXM (if equipped)
Press Preset channel up/down
Press and hold
Seek up/down continuously while the switch is
being pressed
aha
Press Content up/down
Press and hold
Reverse the current content item for 15 sec-
onds/Fast forward the current content item for
30 seconds
Audio CD, MP3/WMA/AAC disc, USB, iPod, BT
audio
Press Select a track/file
Press and hold Fast forward/rewind
Pandora (if equipped) Press and hold Thumbs up
List screen Press
Move cursor left/right
5-64
Black plate (339,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
. Mute/Enter switch
Mode Operation Function
List screen Press Select cursor entry
CD, USB, iPod, BT audio, Pandora (if equipped), aha Press Pause or play back
AM/FM radio, AUX, SiriusXM (if equipped) Press
Mute or cancel mute
. Back switch
Mode Operation Function
All (except for SUBARU STARLINK) Press Return to the previous screen
All Press and hold
Return to the HOME screen
. List switch
Mode Operation Function
All (except for SUBARU STARLINK) Press
Show list screen
. Source switch
Mode Operation Function
All Press
Change audio modes
NOTE
In the aha, Pandora (if equipped) and SUBARU STARLINK (if equipped) mode, some operation may be done on the screen
depend on the selected APPS.
Audio/Steering switches for audio
5-65
5
Black plate (340,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Bluetooth
®
settings
Bluetooth
®
settings
WARNING
Be sure to park the vehicle in a safe
location before connecting or oper-
ating a Bluetooth phone or audio
device. Failure to do so may result
in loss of control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
& Regulatory information
The Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos are
registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc.
& Registering/connecting
Bluetooth
®
device
You ca n reg ister up to f ive devices,
regardless of whether they are Bluetooth
phones or audio devices.
NOTE
. Once the phone has been regis-
tered, it is possible to use the hands-
free system or Bluetooth audio.
. Devices cannot be registered during
driving.
! Registering a Bluetooth phone for
the first time
To use the hands-free system, it is
necessary to register a Bluetooth phone
with the system.
For details about registering a Bluetooth
device: Refer to “Registering a Bluetooth
Audio device for the first time” F5-67.
1. Turn the Bluetooth connection setting
of your cell phone on.
. This function is not available when
Bluetooth connection setting of your
cell phone is set to off.
2. Press the HOME button and select the
“SETTINGS” key.
3. Touch the
tab and then the “SET-
TINGS” screen will appear.
Settings (When the tab is selected)
. Operations up to this point can also
be performed by pressing the off hook
switch on the steering wheel.
4. To register a device, touch the “Set”
key on “BT Devices Connection”.
5-66
Black plate (341,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
“BT Devices Connection” screen (At the
initial startup and when no device is
registered).
5. Touch the “Add” key.
When the “Add” key is selected (Waiting
for the connection request from a device).
. For details about operating the Blue-
tooth device, see the manual that
comes with it.
. To cancel the registration, touch the
“Cancel” key.
6. Register the Bluetooth device using
your Bluetooth device.
. A PIN-code is not required for SSP
(Secure Simple Pairing) compatible
Bluetooth devices. Depending on the
type of Bluetooth device being con-
nected, a message confirming regis-
tration may be displayed on the Blue-
tooth device ’s screen. Respond and
operate the Bluetooth device accord-
ing to the confirmation message.
7. Check that the screen is displayed
when registration is complete.
. The system waits for connection
requests coming from the registered
device.
. At this stage, the Bluetooth func-
tions are not yet available.
! Registering a Bluetooth Audio de-
vice for the first time
To use the Bluetooth Audio, it is necessary
to register an audio devi ce with the
system.
The device registration procedure is the
same for both the hands-free system and
Bluetooth audio.
1. Display the “BT Devices Connection”
screen. Refer to “Registering a Bluetooth
phone for the first time” F5-66.
2. Select the “Add” key.
The “Add” key is not displayed when five
devices are already registered.
To add another device, you need to delete
one of the registered devices.
Press the
key for the device to be
deleted, and then select the “OK” key.
3. Register the Bluetooth device using
your Bluetooth device.
. A PIN-code is not required for SSP
(Secure Sim ple Pairing) compatible
Bluetooth devices. Depending on the
type of Bluetooth device being con-
nected, a message confirming regis-
tration may be displayed on the Blue-
tooth device’s screen. Respond and
operate the Bluetooth device accord-
ing to the confirmation message.
4. Check that the screen is displayed
when registration is complete.
. The system waits for connection
requests coming from the registered
device.
. At this stage, the Bluetooth func-
tions are not yet available.
Audio/Bluetooth
®
settings
– CONTINUED –
5-67
5
Black plate (342,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Bluetooth
®
settings
! Profiles
This system supports the following services.
Bluetooth Device Spec. Function Requirements Recommendations
Bluetooth Phone/Bluetooth
Audio Device
Bluetooth Specification
Registering a Bluetooth de-
vice
Ver. 1.1
Ver. 2.1 + EDR
Bluetooth Device Profile Function Requirements Recommendations
Bluetooth Phone
HFP (Hands-Free Profile) Hands-free system Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.5
OPP (Object Push Profile)
Transferring the contacts
Ver. 1.1 Ver. 1.1
PBAP (Phone Book Access
profile)
Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.0
MAP (Message Access
Profile)
Bluetooth phone message — Ver. 1.0
SPP (Serial Port Profile)
Connecting a Bluetooth
phone
— Ver. 1.1
Bluetooth Audio Device
A2DP (Advanced Audio
Distribution Profile)
Bluetooth audio system
Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.2
AVRCP (Audio/Video Re-
mote Control Profile)
Ver. 1.0
Ver. 1.4
NOTE
. If your cell phone does not support HFP, registering the Bluetooth phone or using OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP profiles
individually will not be possible.
. If the connected Bluetooth device version is older than recommended or incompatible, the Bluetooth device function may
not work properly.
. For USA customers, please visit www.subaru.com for details. Outside of the USA customers, contact your local dealer to
arrange a demonstration in order to confirm whether or not the device can be paired with the vehicle.
5-68
Black plate (343,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Setting Bluetooth details
! BT Devices Connection screen
1. Press the HOME button.
2. Touch the “SETTINGS” key and then
touch the
tab.
3. Touch the “BT Devices Connection”
key and then select the desired device to
register.
“BT Devices Connect ion” screen (One
device is registered.)
No. Function
&
1
Register the device. Refer to “Regis-
tering/connecting Bluetooth
®
device”
F5-66.
&
2
Make the connection to the registered
device.
No. Function
&
3
This shows the status of the device
connection profile. (The icon illuminates
while connected.)
&
4
Delete the registered device. Refer to
“Deleting a Bluetooth device” F5-70.
&
5
Switch to connect/disconnect Bluetooth
communication. Refer to “Bluetooth
ON/OFF” F5-69.
! Connecting a Bluetooth device
Up to 5 Bluetooth devices (phones and
audio devices) can be registered.
If more than 1 Bluetooth device has been
registered, select which device to connect
to.
1. Display the “BT Devices Connection”
screen. Refer to “BT Devices Connection
screen” F5-69.
2. Select the device to be connected.
. Supported profile icons will be dis-
played.
–
: Phone
–
: Audio device
–
: Smartphone Application
. Supported profile icons for currently
connected devices will illuminate.
. The audio icon illuminates only
when in the Bluetooth audio mode.
. All icons are dimmed when Blue-
tooth is set to off or when the connec-
tion cannot be made with the device.
NOTE
. It may take time if the device con-
nection is carried out during Bluetooth
audio playback.
. Depending on the type of Bluetooth
device being connected, it may be
necessary to perform additional steps
on the device.
. It is not possible to establish a
Bluetooth connection with iOS devices
currently connected with a USB cable.
. Supported profile icons of the un-
selected devices are not displayed if
several Bluetooth devices have been
registered.
! Bluetooth ON/OFF
1. Display the “BT Devices Connection”
screen. Refer to “BT Devices Connection
screen” F5-69.
2. Select the “ON” or “OFF” key by the
right side of the “Connect with Bluetooth”
key. The “ON” key establishes a connec-
tion, and the “OFF” key disconnects the
connection.
Audio/Bluetooth
®
settings
– CONTINUED –
5-69
5
Black plate (344,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Bluetooth
®
settings
NOTE
The setting is fixed as the “OFF” key
when no device is registered.
! Deleting a Bluetooth device
1. Display the “BT Devices Connection”
screen. Refer to “BT Devices Connection
screen” F5-69.
2. Select the desired device.
3. Touch the
key for the device to be
deleted, and then select the “OK” key.
NOTE
When deleting a Bluetooth phone, the
contact data will be deleted at the same
time.
! “In-Car-Device setting” screen
The Bluetooth settings can be confirmed
and changed.
1. Display the “SETTINGS” screen. Refer
to “Registering a Bluetooth phone for the
first time” F5-66.
2. On the “SETTINGS” screen for “In-
Car-Device setting”, select the “Set” key.
No. Function
&
1
Display the Bluetooth device address
of the in-vehicle equipment.
&
2
Display the Bluetooth device name of
the in-vehicle equipment. The default
name is “SUBARU BT”, which can be
changed by selecting it and entering
alphanumeric characters.
&
3
Display the PIN code of the in-vehicle
equipment. The default code is
“1234”, which can be changed by
selecting it and entering numbers.
&
4
Delete one character from the cur-
rently selected item (BT device name
or the PIN code).
&
5
Save the current BT device name and
PIN code.
&
6
Numeric input keys.
No. Function
&
7
Switch the screen to input characters.
! Editing the Bl uetooth device
name
The device name can be set or changed.
1. Touch the “Name” key.
2. Enter a name and then select the “Set”
key.
! Editing the PIN-Code
The PIN-code can be set or changed.
1. Select the “PIN” Key.
2. Enter a PIN-code and then select the
“Set” key.
NOTE
If the “PIN” key is already selected, the
“ABC” key is cross-hatched and dis-
abled.
5-70
Black plate (345,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Hands-free phone system
The hands-free system enables calls to be
made and received without having to take
your hands off the steering wheel.
This system supports Bluetooth. Bluetooth
is a wireless data system that enables cell
phones to be used without being con-
nected by a cable or placed in a cradle.
The operating procedure of the phone is
explained here.
WARNING
. While driving, do not use a cell
phone or connect the Bluetooth
phone. Doing so may result in
loss of control of your vehicle
and cause an accident or serious
injury.
. Your audio unit is fitted with
Bluetooth antennas. People with
implantable cardiac pacemakers,
cardiac resynchronization ther-
apy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should
maintain a reasonable distance
between themselves and the
Bluetooth antennas. The radio
waves may affect the operation
of such devices.
. Before using Bluetooth devices,
users of any electrical medical
device other than implantable
cardiac pacemakers, cardiac re-
synchronization therapy-pac e-
makers or implantable cardiover-
ter defibrillators should consult
the manufacturer of the device
for information about its opera-
tion under the influence of radio
waves. Radio waves could have
unexpected effects on the opera-
tion of such medical devices.
CAUTION
Do not leave your cell phone in the
vehicle. The temperature inside may
rise to a level that could damage the
phone.
NOTE
. If your cell phone does not support
Bluetooth, this system cannot function.
. In the following conditions, the sys-
tem may not function:
– The cell phone is turned off.
– The current position is outside
the communication area.
– The cell phone is not connected.
– The cell phone has a low battery.
. When using the hands free function
and other Bluetooth functions at the
same time, the following problems may
occur:
– The Bluetooth connection may
be cut.
– Noise may be heard when play-
ing back voice with the Bluetooth
function.
. The other party’s voice will be heard
from the front speakers. The audio/
visual system will be muted during
phone calls or when hands-free voice
commands are used.
. Talk alternately with the other party
on the phone. If both parties speak at
the same time, the other party may not
hear what has been said. (This is not a
malfunction.)
. Keep call volume down. Otherwise,
the other party’s voice may be audible
outside the vehicle and voice echo may
increase. When talking on the phone,
speak clearly towards the microphone.
. The other party may not hear you
clearly when:
– Drivingonanunpavedroad.
(Making excessive traffic noise.)
– Driving at high speeds.
– The moonroof or windows are
open.
– The air conditioning vents are
Audio/Hands–free phone system
– CONTINUED –
5-71
5
Black plate (346,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Hands–free phone system
pointed towards the microphone.
– The sound of the air conditioning
fan is loud.
– Thereisanegativeeffecton
sound quality due to the phone
and/or network being used.
. When another phone is connected,
the following registered data cannot be
read:
– Contact data
– Call history data
– All phone settings
. When selling or disposing of the
vehicle, initialize the data. Refer to
“Unit settings” F5-19.
. Once initialized, the data and set-
tings will be erased. Take extra caution
when initializing the data.
. The voice command system sup-
ports phone commands, so dialing a
phone number usin g your voi ce is
possible. Refer to “Voice command
system” F5-82.
. The images shown in this Owner’s
Manual are sample images. The actual
images may vary depending on the
market and specifications of your ve-
hicle.
& Control screen
PHONE (Menu) screen
PHONE (Dialpad) screen
No. Function
&
1
Open the “Incoming Calls” screen.
Refer to “By incoming calls” F5-75.
&
2
Open the “Outgoing Calls” screen.
Refer to “By outgoing calls” F 5-75.
&
3
Open the “Contacts” screen. Refer to
“By contacts list” F 5-76.
&
4
Open the dialpad screen. Refer to “By
Dialpad” F5-77.
&
5
Open the phone volume settings
screen. Refer to “Phone volume set-
tings” F5-80.
&
6
Use to make a phone call. You cannot
press this key until you open the
dialpad screen and enter a phone
number.
&
7
Open the “BT Devices Connection”
screen. Refer to “Setting Bluetooth
details” F5-69.
&
8
Enter the phone number that you
want to call.
&
9
Switch the screen to the phone
(menu) screen.
NOTE
When the cell phone is not registered
and the Bluetooth setting is off, a
message is displayed instead of menu
items.
5-72
Black plate (347,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Registering/connecting a
Bluetooth phone
To use the hands-free system for cell
phones, it is necessary to register a cell
phone with the system. Refer to “Register-
ing/connecting Bluetooth
®
device” F5-66.
! Bluetooth phone condition display
The condition of th e Bluetooth phone
appears on the upper right side of the
screen.
& Using the phone switch/mi-
crophone
. Steering switch
By pressing the steering switch, a call can
be received or ended without taking your
hands off the steering wheel.
Except Crosstrek models
Crosstrek models
1) Volume control switch
2) Off hook switch
3) On hook switch
Audio/Hands–free phone system
– CONTINUED –
5-73
5
Black plate (348,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Hands–free phone system
. Microphone
The microphone is used when talking on
the phone.
Type A
Type B
& How to change the hands-
free phone system
The phone (menu) screen can be used to
make a phone call. To display the hands-
free operation screen, press the HOME
button and then select the “PHONE” key,
or press the off hook switch on the
steering wheel.
& Making a call
There are several methods by which a call
can be made, as described below.
1. Press the HOME button on the audio
panel.
2. Touch the “PHONE” key.
3. Select the desired key to make a call
from the list.
Item Function
Incoming
Calls
Display the history of incoming
calls. Refer to “By incoming
calls” F5-75.
Outgoing
Calls
Display the history of outgoing
calls. Refer to “By outgoing calls”
F5-75.
Contacts
Display the phonebook. Refer to
“By contacts list” F5-76.
Dialpad
Dial a phone number. Refer to
“By Dialpad” F5-77.
NOTE
You can also make a call by using the
following functions.
. Make a call using the off hook
switch on the steering wheel. Refer to
“By off hook switch ” F5-77.
. Make a call using voice operation.
Refer to “Voice command system” F5-
82.
5-74
Black plate (349,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! By incoming calls
On the phone (menu) screen, select the
“Incoming Calls” key to open the “Incom-
ing Calls” screen.
You can make a call by selecting an item
in the incoming call history list.
If there is no incoming call history, a
message appears to indicate that there
is no incoming call history data.
Incoming Calls screen
No. Function
&
1
Open the “Outgoing Calls” screen.
&
2
Open the “Contacts” screen.
&
3
Delete all incoming call history data.
The “Delete All” key is disabled when
there is no incoming call history.
When you select an item in the history list
on the “Incoming Calls” screen, the out-
going call screen opens.
NOTE
. Up to 10 items in the incoming call
history are listed. Scroll the screen to
see items that are not on the screen.
. When making a call to the same
number continuously, only the most
recent call is listed in call history.
. When a phone number registered in
the contact list is received, the name is
displayed.
. Number-withheld calls are also
memorized in the system.
. International phone calls may not be
made depending on the type of cell
phone you have.
. The list should group together con-
secutive entries with the same phone
number and same call type.
! By outgoing calls
On the phone (menu) screen, select the
“Outgoing Calls” key to open the “Out-
going Calls” screen. You can make a call
by selecting an item in the outgoing call
history list.
If there is no outgoing call history, a
message appears to indicate that there
is no outgoing call history data.
Outgoing Calls screen
No. Function
&
1
Open the “Incoming Calls” screen.
&
2
Open the “Contacts” screen.
&
3
Delete all outgoing call history data.
The “Delete All” key is disabled when
there is no outgoing call history.
Audio/Hands–free phone system
– CONTINUED –
5-75
5
Black plate (350,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Hands–free phone system
When you select an item in the history list
on the “Outgoing Calls” screen, the out-
going call screen opens.
NOTE
. Up to 10 items in the outgoing call
history are listed. Scroll the screen to
see items that are not on the screen.
. When making a call to the same
number continuously, only the most
recent call is listed in call history.
. When a phone number registered in
the contact list is received, the name is
displayed.
. Number-withheld calls are al so
memorized in the system.
. International phone calls may not be
made depending on the type of cell
phone you have.
. The list should group together con-
secutive entries with the same phone
number and same call type.
! By contacts list
On the phone (menu) screen, select the
“Contacts” key to open the phone number
list screen.
You can make a call by selecting an item
in the list (up to five phone numbers are
listed).
If there is no contact data, a message is
displayed to indicate that there is no
contact data.
Contacts screen
No. Function
&
1
Open the “Incoming Calls” screen.
&
2
Open the “Outgoing Calls” screen.
&
3
Open a pop-up screen for starting the
download of contact data. Refer to
“Update contacts from phone” F5-80.
&
4
Delete all contact data. The “Delete
All” key is disabled when there is no
contact data. Refer to “Deleting the
contact data” F5-81.
No. Function
&
5
Open a list of contacts that starts with
the selected character. This key is
cross-hatched and cannot be se-
lected if there is no contact data that
starts with the selected character.
Select the up/down arrow key to scroll the
list of contacts.
When you select a phone number on the
screen, the outgoing call screen opens.
NOTE
Up to 1000 items in the contact data are
listed. Scroll the screen to see items
that are not on the screen.
! When the contact is empty
For PBAP incompatible but OPP com-
patible Bluetooth phones
On the “Contact s” screen, select the
“Download Contacts” key. A screen where
you can select how to download contacts
opens.
You can select to download all items or
download one item. For details, refer to
“Update contacts from phone” F5-80.
5-76
Black plate (351,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Delete contacts
When the “Delete All” key is selected, all
contact data downloaded into the in-
vehicle equipment will be deleted.
Refer to “Deleting the contact data” F5-
81.
! By Dialpad
Input the phone number manually using
the keypad displayed on the screen.
Phone (Dialpad) screen
No. Function
&
1
Allow you to enter numbers from 0 to
9 and *, #, and +. To enter “+”, press
and hold the “0” key.
&
2
Delete one character from the entered
characters.
No. Function
&
3
Switch the screen to the phone
(menu) screen.
&
4
Open the “Outgoing Calls” screen and
dials the entered phone number. This
is the same as pressing the off hook
switch on the steering wheel. This key
is cross-hatched and cannot be se-
lected until the phone number is
entered.
&
5
Open the “Options” screen. Refer to
“Phone volume settings” F5-80.
&
6
Open the “BT Devices Connection”
screen. Refer to “Setting Bluetooth
details” F5-69.
When you enter a phone number on the
screen and select the
key, the “Out-
going Call” screen opens.
! By off hook switch
Calls can be made using the latest call
history item.
1. Pre ss t he off hook switch o n the
steering wheel to display the phone
(menu) screen.
2. Check that the call screen is dis-
played.
! Outgoing screen
Outgoing call screen
No. Function
&
1
Open the “Options” screen. Refer to
“Phone volume settings” F5-80.
&
2
Abort the call. The screen returns to
the phone (menu) screen. This is the
same as pressing the on hook switch
on the steering wheel.
NOTE
. Depending on the type of Bluetooth
phone being connected, it may be
necessary to perform additional steps
on the phone.
. When you are on the outgoing call
screen, the screen changes to the call
screen when the other party answers
the call.
Audio/Hands–free phone system
– CONTINUED –
5-77
5
Black plate (352,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Hands–free phone system
. The , , and keys are disabled
on the outgoing call screen.
& Receiving a call
! Incoming calls
When a call is received, the incoming call
screen is displayed with a sound.
When you receive a phone call while the
cell phone is connected, the screen
changes to the incoming call screen.
Incoming call screen
No. Function
&
1
Open the “Options” screen. Refer to
“Phone volume settings” F5-80.
No. Function
&
2
Put the incoming call on hold. This
function may not work on some cell
phone models. This function is the
same as pressing the on hook switch
on the steering wheel for a short
period of time.
&
3
Open the call screen. This function is
the same as pressing the off hook
switch on the steering wheel.
&
4
Reject the incoming call. This function
is the same as pressing and holding
the on hook switch on the steering
wheel.
NOTE
. During international phone calls, the
other party’s name or number may not
be displayed correctly depending on
the type of cell phone you have.
. The ringtone that has been set in the
phone setting screen sounds when
there is an incoming call. Depending
on the type of Bluetooth phone, both
the system and Bluetooth phone may
sound simultaneously when there is an
incoming call. Refer to “Phone volume
settings” F5-80.
! By off/on hook switch
When you receive a call, you can also
answer it by pressing the off hook switch
on the steering wheel. To end a call, press
the on hook switch.
& Talking on the phone
The call screen opens when you perform
the following operations.
. When you accept a call on the incom-
ing call screen (by selecting the
key),
the call screen opens.
. When you are on the outgoing call
screen, the screen changes to the call
screen when the other party answers the
call.
While talking on the phone, this screen is
displayed. The operations outlined below
can be performed on this screen.
. When the incoming call screen is
displayed and you accept the call, the
screen changes to the call screen. The
screen stays on the incoming call screen if
you reject the call.
. The
and keys are disabled on
the incoming call screen.
5-78
Black plate (353,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Call screen
Call (Dialpad) screen (DTMF)
No. Function
&
1
Open the “Options” screen. Refer to
“Phone volume settings” F5-80.
&
2
Mute your voice to the other party.
Touch this key again to deactivate the
Mute mode. This key is disabled in the
private mode.
&
3
Change the mode to private mode.
The other party’s voice emits from the
cell phone. Touch this key again to
deactivate the private mode.
&
4
End the call. This will return you to the
phone (menu) screen when ending
outgoing calls and the previous
screen when ending incoming calls.
This function is the same as pressing
the on hook switch on the steering
wheel.
&
5
Open the call (dialpad) screen. For
details about how to use the function,
refer to “By Dialpad” F5-77.
&
6
Switch the screen to the phone
(menu) screen.
&
7
Allow you to make DTMF (Dual Tone
Multi Frequency) calls. The numbers
you enter are sent as tone signals.
NOTE
. When cell phone call is changed to
hands-free call, the hands-free screen
is displayed and its functions can be
operated on the screen.
. Changing between cell phone call
and hands-free call can be performed
by operating the cell phone directly.
. Transferring methods and opera-
tions will be different depending on
the type of cell phone you have.
. For the operation of the cell phone,
see the manual that comes with it.
. The sound quality of the voice heard
from the other party’s speaker may be
negatively impacted.
& Phone settings
You can transfer the phonebook informa-
tion and adjust the volume of your phone
using the Bluetooth phone system.
NOTE
. The ringer volume for outgoing and
incoming calls, as well as the volume
while on hold or during a call are
controlled independently from the vo-
lume of the audio source. The volume
setting in the phone setting is applied.
. When making a call, receiving a call
or while talking on the phone, you can
adjust the volume by using the power/
Volume knob on the audio panel or the
volume control switch on the steering
wheel.
Audio/Hands–free phone system
– CONTINUED –
5-79
5
Black plate (354,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Hands–free phone system
! Phone volume settings
The call and ringtone volume can be
adjusted. A ringtone can be selected.
1. Display the “PHONE” screen. Refer to
“How to change the hands-free phone
system” F5-74.
2. Touch the
key.
3. Select the desired item to be set.
. On the “PHONE” screen, the screen
changes to the “Options” screen when you
select the
key.
Options (volume settings) screen
No. Function
&
1
Adjust the ringtone volume. The “−”
key lowers the volume, and the “+”
key increases the volume. (Default
volume: 4 out of a total of 16 volume
levels)
&
2
Adjust the receive volume. The “ −”
key lowers the volume, and the “+”
key increases the volume. (Default
volume: 4 out of a total of 16 volume
levels)
&
3
Adjust the transmit volume. The “−”
key lowers the volume, and the “+”
key increases the volume. (Default
volume: 3 out of a total of 5 volume
levels)
NOTE
. Depending on the type of phone,
certain functions may not be available.
. Contact data is managed indepen-
dently for every registered phone.
When one phone is connected, another
phone’s regis tered data cannot be
read.
! Update contacts from phone
Operation methods differ between PBAP
(Phone Book Access Profile) compatible
and PBAP incompatible but OPP (Object
Push Profile) compatible Bluetooth
phones.
1. Display the “PHONE” screen. Refer to
“How to change the hands-free phone
system” F5-74.
2. Touch the “Contacts” key, and then
select the “Download Contacts” key.
Contacts screen (Download selection)
No. Function
&
1
Open the download confirmation
screen. Confirm whether or not to
download. If the downloaded contact
(s) already
exist(s), confirm whether or not to
overwrite the existing data.
&
2
Download one set of contact data. To
download the data, you need to
operate from the connected device.
&
3
Cancel the download. The screen
returns to the “Contacts” screen.
5-80
Black plate (355,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
NOTE
. If your cell phone is neither PBAP
nor OPP compatible, the contacts can-
not be transferred.
. When you are transferring the con-
tacts data, you may have to operate the
cell phone, depending on the type of
cell phone.
. Depending on the type of cell phone,
some functions may not be supported.
! For PBAP compatible Bluetooth
phones
1. Select the “Download Contacts” or
“Download 1 Entry” key. Contacts are
transferred automatically.
2. Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the operation is complete.
. This operation may be unnecessary
depending on the type of cell phone.
. If another Bluetooth device is con-
nected when transferring contact data,
depending on the phone, the con-
nected Bluetooth device may need to
be disconnected.
! For PBAP incompatible but OPP
compatible Bluetooth phones
1. Select the “Download 1 Entry” key.
2. Transfer the contact data to the sys-
tem using a Bluetooth phone.
. This operation may be unnecessary
depending on the type of cell phone.
. To cancel this function, select the
“Cancel” key.
3. Check that a confirmation screen is
displayed when the operation is complete.
NOTE
To download all items, you may need to
change the settings in your cell phone
beforehand.
! Deleting the contact data
You can delete the phonebook data stored
in the audio set.
1. Display the “PHONE” screen. Refer to
“How to change the hands-free phone
system” F5-74.
2. Touch the “Contacts” key, and then
select the “Delete All” key.
3. Select the “OK” key when the con-
firmation screen appears.
NOTE
. Manual transfer operation cannot be
performed while driving.
. If your cell phone is neither PBAP
nor OPP compatible, the contacts can-
not be transferred.
. Depending on the type of Bluetooth
phone:
– It may be necessary to perform
additional steps on the phone when
transferring contact data.
Audio/Hands–free phone system
5-81
5
Black plate (356,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Voice command system
Voice command system
The voice command system enables the
audio, hands-free phone system, etc. to
be operated using voice commands.
Refer to the “Command list” F5-85 for
samples of voice commands.
Voice commands can be used even when
you set the system to another language.
For details about setting language, refer to
“General settings” F5-20.
& Using the voice command
system
! Steering switch
Except Crosstrek models
Crosstrek models
1) Talk switch
Action Function
Press
Start the voice com-
mand system.
Press and hold
Cancel voice recogni-
tion.
! Microphone
Type A
Type B
It is unnecessary to speak directly into the
microphone when giving a command.
5-82
Black plate (357,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
NOTE
. Wait for the confirmation beep be-
fore speaking a command.
. Voice commands may not be recog-
nized if:
– Spoken too quickly.
– Spoken at a low or high volume.
– The moonroof or windows are
open.
– Passengers are talking while
voice commands are spoken.
– The air conditioning speed is set
high.
– The air conditioning vents are
turned towards the microphone.
. In the following conditions, the sys-
tem may not recognize the command
properly and using voice commands
may not be possible:
– The command is incorrect or
unclear. Note that certain words,
accents or speech patterns may be
difficult for the system to recognize.
– There is excessive background
noise, such as wind noise.
& Voice command system op-
eration
1. Press the talk switch on the steering
wheel.
After the voice command top screen has
been displayed , spe ech gu idan ce will
commence.
NOTE
When the voice command mode is
audio mode, voice guidance for the
voice command system can be skipped
by pressing the talk switch on the
steering wheel.
2. Say the command.
Example (Say “PHONE”)
NOTE
. Commands related with each func-
tion are displayed on the screen of the
each function tab. Some commonly
used commands are displayed on the
screen of the main tab. Even if any tab
is selected, all commands can be
operated.
. Saying
“Help”
prompts guidance to
offer examples of commands and op-
eration methods.
. To cancel voice recognition, select
“6”, or press and hold the talk switch
on the steering wheel.
. If the system does not respond or
the confirmation screen does not dis-
appear, press the talk switch on the
Audio/Voice command system
– CONTINUED –
5-83
5
Black plate (358,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Voice command system
steering wheel and try again.
. The notations used in the com-
mands are as follows.
– < >: Numbers, titles or names to
be spoken
! Voice command example: Call
name
1. Press the talk switch on the steering
wheel.
2. Say
“Call <contacts>”
.
. A confirmation screen will be dis-
played showing the recognition re-
sults. If multiple matching items are
found, a selection screen wi ll be
displayed. Say
“<number>”
or select
the number.
NOTE
. In the same manner as it is dis-
played on the screen, “Call <con-
tacts>”, after saying
“Call a contact”
say the name of a contact. For exam-
ple:
“Call a contact”
,
“John Smith”
or
“Call a contact”
,
“Mary Davis”
. Short or abbreviated names in the
contacts list may not be recognized.
Change names in the contacts list to
full names.
. Sometimes a voice recognition re-
sult confirmation screen will be dis-
played. After confirming the result, say
“Yes”
or
“No”
.
. When the system recognizes multi-
ple names from the contacts list, a
name candidate list will be displayed
on the screen. If the desired name is
not displayed on the top of the screen,
say or select the number of the name
from the candidate list (number 1,
number 2, etc.) to select a name from
the candidate list.
. When a contact has multiple phone
numbers registered in the contacts list,
a candidate list will be displayed. If the
desired phone number is not displayed
on the top of the screen, say or select
the number of the desired phone
number from the candidate list (num-
ber 1, number 2, etc.) to select a phone
number from the candidate list.
! Voice command example: Dial
number
1. Press the talk switch on the steering
wheel.
2. Say
“Dial number”
.
3. Say
“Dial <number>”
.
For example, if the phone number is
2345678:
Say
“two three four five six seven
eight”
Do not say
“twenty three forty five sixty
seven eight”
4. Say
“Dial”
or press the off hook switch
on the steering wheel.
NOTE
. When the system recognizes multi-
ple phone numbers, a phone number
candidate list will be displayed on the
screen. Pressing the off hook switch on
the steering wheel makes a call to the
top entry on the list. If the desired
phone number is not displayed on the
top of the screen, say the number of
the desired phone number from the
candidate list to select a phone number
from the candidate list.
. Calling to the following phone num-
bers
– 3 digit numbers (911, 411, 611)
– 7 digit numbers (Local phone
numbers)
– 10 digit numbers (Area code +
Local phone number)
– 11 digit phone numbers (1 + Area
code + Local phone number)
. As the system cannot recognize
additional numbers, say the complete
number without stopping.
5-84
Black plate (359,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Casual speech recognization
Due to natural language speech recogni-
tion technology, this system enables re-
cognition of a command when spoken
natur ally. However, the system cannot
recognize every variation of each com-
mand. In some situations, it is possible to
omit the command for the procedure and
directly state the desired operation. Not all
voice commands are di splayed in the
function menu.
NOTE
If the command cannot be recognized
completely, the command input screen
will be displayed. (Search results will
be shown based on the part of the
command that was recognized.)
! Expression examples for each
function
Command Expression examples
“Dial <phone num-
ber>”
Phone <phone num-
ber>.
& Command list
Recognizable voice commands and their
actions are shown below.
NOTE
. Some voice commands may not be
available depending on the market,
vehicle specifications or the device
connection status.
. Frequently used commands are
listed in the following tables.
. For devices that are not installed in
the vehicle, the related commands will
not be displayed on the screen. Also,
according to conditions, other com-
mands may not be displayed on the
screen.
. The functions available may vary
according to the system installed.
. Voice recognition language can be
changed. Refer to “Unit settings” F5-
19.
. The no tations used in the com-
mands are as follows.
– <
>: Numbers, titles or
names to be spoken
– (
): There is no need to
speak the command, the voice
command system will re cognize
the content.
! Basic command
Voice command Function
Back
Go back one hierar-
chy or cancel the
voice recognition
(voice command top
screen)
Help
Ask for help with the
current task
Cancel, Close
Cancel the current
task
Yes
No
Display OFF Turns the display off
Audio ON
Turns the audio sys-
tem on
Audio OFF
Turns the audio sys-
tem off
STARLINK
Switch to APPS mode
Audio/Voice command system
– CONTINUED –
5-85
5
Black plate (360,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Voice command system
! Commands for changing the audio
mode
Voice command Function
Change to AM Switch to AM mode
Change to AM1
Switch to AM mode
band 1
Change to AM2
Switch to AM mode
band 2
Change to FM Switch to FM mode
Change to FM1
Switch to FM mode
band 1
Change to FM2
Switch to FM mode
band 2
Change to FM3
Switch to FM mode
band 3
Change to SiriusXM Switch to XM mode
Change to BT Audio
Switch to Bluetooth
Audio mode
Change to CD Switch to CD mode
Change to USB Switch to USB mode
Change to iPod Switch to iPod mode
Change to aha
Switch to aha radio
mode
Change to Pandora
Switch to Pandora
mode
Change to AUX
Switch to AUX mode
! Commands for hands-free phone
Voice command Function
Dial Number ? <0-9,
+, *, #> ? Change
number, Dial
Places a call to the
said phone number
Dial <0-9, +, *, #> ?
Change number, Dial
Contacts, Phonebook
? <Name> ? <1-5>
? Dial
Make a call by using
the phonebook
Call <Name> ?
<1-5> ? Dial
Call History ? In-
coming call, Outgoing
call ? Next (page),
Previous (page) ?
<1-5> ? Dial
Make a call by using
the call history
Incoming Calls
Display the call his-
tory screen
Outgoing Calls
Display the call his-
tory screen
Redial
Places a call to the
phone number of the
latest outgoing call
Callback
Places a call to the
phone number of the
latest incoming call
Select Phone ?
<1-5>
Display the phone
select screen
Phone Menu
Display the hands
free top screen
! Commands for Pandora
Voice command Function
Like Mark “Like” flag
Dislike Mark “Dislike” flag
Skip, Next
Skip to the next song
! Commands for aha
Voice command Function
Thumbs Up, Heart,
Like
Mark “Like” flag
Thumbs Down, Ban,
Dislike
Mark “Dislike” flag
Refresh, update
Refresh the selected
station to get the lat-
est information
Content Up
Playback next Con-
tent
Content Down
Playback previous
Content
5-86
Black plate (361,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Commands for AM/FM control
Voice command Function
Seek Up
Tunes in the higher
frequency direction
Seek Down
Tunes in the lower
frequency direction
Scan
Switch to the scan
mode
Tune to <Frequency>
Designate the fre-
quency to switch to a
specific radio station
Preset <preset num-
ber>
Designate the preset
channel to switch to
specific radio station
Tag
iTunes Tagging for
HD Radio
! Commands for SiriusXM radio con-
trol
Voice command Function
Preset <preset num-
ber>
Designate the preset
channel to switch to
specific radio station
Scan
Switch to the scan
mode
Channel <Channel
number>
Designate the chan-
nel to switch to spe-
cific radio station
Voice command Function
Category ? Next
(page), Previous
(page), <1-5> ? Next
(page), Previous
(page), <1-5>
Displays the category
list screen
! Commands for CD control
Voice command Function
Track Up Select the next track
Track Down
Select the current
track
Scan
Switch to the scan
mode
Repeat ? 1 Track
Repeat, Repeat All
Select a repeat mode
1 Track Repeat Repeat single track
Repeat All Repeat all tracks
Shuffle
Plays randomly
! Commands for MP3/WMA/AAC,
USB control
Voice command Function
Track Up Select the next track
Track Down
Select the current
track
Voice command Function
Folder Up
Plays from the start of
the next folder
Folder Down
Plays from the start of
the previous folder
Scan
Switch to the scan
mode
Repeat ? 1 Track
Repeat, Repeat
Folder, Repeat All
Select a repeat mode
1 Track Repeat Repeat single track
Repeat Folder Repeat of the folder
Repeat All Repeat all tracks
Shuffle ? Shuffle
Folder, Shuffle All
Select a random play
mode
Shuffle Folder
Plays randomly of the
folder
Shuffle All
Plays randomly
! Commands for iPod Control
Voice command Function
Track Up Select the next track
Track Down
Select the current
track
Repeat ? Repeat
One, Repeat All
Select a repeat mode
Repeat One Repeat single track
Audio/Voice command system
– CONTINUED –
5-87
5
Black plate (362,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Voice command system
Voice command Function
Repeat All Repeat all tracks
Shuffle ? Shuffle
Track, Shuffle Album,
Shuffle OFF
Select a random play
mode
Shuffle Track Shuffle all tracks
Shuffle Album Shuffle all tracks
Shuffle OFF
Turn off shuffle
! Commands for Bluetooth audio
control
Voice command Function
Pause Pause play
Track Up Select the next track
Track Down
Select the current
track
Repeat ? 1 track
Repeat, Repeat All,
Group Repeat
Select a repeat mode
1 Track Repeat Repeat single track
Repeat All Repeat all tracks
Group Repeat
Repeat tracks on
group
Shuffle ? Shuffle All,
Group Shuffle, Shuf-
fle OFF
Select a random play
mode
Shuffle All Shuffle all tracks
Group Shuffle
Shuffle tracks on
group
Shuffle OFF
Turn off shuffle
5-88
Black plate (363,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
What to do if...
& Troubleshooting
If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth device, first check the table below.
When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth device
Symptom Likely cause Solution
Page
Cell
phone
This
system
The hands-free system or Bluetooth
device does not work.
The connected device may not be a
compatible Bluetooth cell phone.
For USA customers, please visit
www.subaru.com for details. Outside of the
USA customers, contact your local dealer to
arrange a demonstration in order to confirm
whether or not the device can be paired with
the vehicle.
* —
The Bluetooth version of the connected
cell phone may be older than the
specified version.
Use a cell phone with Bluetooth version 1.1 or
higher (recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR or
higher).
*
5-68
*: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cell phone.
Audio/What to do if...
– CONTINUED –
5-89
5
Black plate (364,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/What to do if...
When registering/connecting a cell phone
Symptom Likely cause Solution
Page
Cell
phone
This
system
A cell phone cannot be registered.
An incorrect passcode was entered
on the cell phone.
Enter the correct passcode on the cell phone. * —
The registration operation has not
been completed on the cell phone
side.
Complete the registration operation on the cell
phone (approve registration on the phone).
* —
Old registration information remains
on either this system or the cell
phone.
Delete the existing registration information from
both this system and the cell phone, then register
the cell phone you wish to connect to this system.
*5-69
A Bluetooth connection cannot be
made.
Another Bluetooth device is already
connected.
Manually connect the cell phone you wish to use to
this system.
— 5-69
Bluetooth function is not enabled on
the cell phone.
Enable the Bluetooth function on the cell phone. * —
Automatic Bluetooth connection on
this system is set to off.
Set automatic Bluetooth connection on this system
to on when the ignition switch is turned to the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
—
5-69
*: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cell phone.
5-90
Black plate (365,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
When using the phonebook
Symptom Likely cause Solution
Page
Cell
phone
This
system
Phonebook data cannot be trans-
ferred manually.
The profile version of the connected cell
phone may not be compatible with
transferring phonebook data.
For USA customers, please visit
www.subaru.com for details. Outside of the
USA customers, contact your local dealer to
arrange a demonstration in order to confirm
whether or not the device can be paired with
the vehicle.
* —
Transfer operation on the cell phone has
not completed.
Complete transfer operation on the cell phone
(approve transfer operation on the phone).
* —
Phonebook data cannot be edited.
Editing function is not available on this
system.
——
5-79
*: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cell phone.
Audio/What to do if...
– CONTINUED –
5-91
5
Black plate (366,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/What to do if...
In other situations
Symptom Likely cause Solution
Page
Cell
phone
This
system
Even though all conceivable mea-
sures have been taken, the symptom
status does not change.
The cell phone is not close enough to
this system.
Bring the cell phone closer to this system. ——
The cell phone is the most likely cause
of the symptom.
Turn the cell phone off, remove and reinstall
the battery pack, and then restart the cell
phone.
* —
Enable the cell phone’s Bluetooth connection. * —
Stop the cell phone’s security software and
close all applications.
* —
Before using an application installed on the
cell phone, carefully check its source and how
its operation might affect this system.
*
—
*: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cell phone.
5-92
Black plate (367,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Appendix
& Certification
. Bluetooth
The Bluetooth word mark and logo are
registered trademarks of Bluetooth SIG,
Inc. and any use of such marks by Clarion
Co., Ltd. is under license.
. SiriusXM Satellite Radio (if
equipped)
SiriusXM
TM
and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio
Inc. All rights reserved.
. Pandora (if equipped)
Pandora, the Pandora logo, and other
Pandora marks are trademarks or regis-
tered trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc.,
or its subsidiaries worldwide.
If you have any issues with the Pandora
application on your mobile phone, please
direct them to
. iPod
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone”
mean that an electronic accessory has
been designed to connect specifically to
iPod or iPhone respectively, and has been
certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards. Apple is not
responsible for the operation of this device
or its compliance with safety and regula-
tory standards. Please note that the use of
this accessory with iPod or iPhone may
affect wireless performance.
iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano,
iPod touch, and iTunes are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
. How to get the source code using
the open source
This system implements software using
the open source. For customers who
would like to get the source code of the
software, it is available by downloading it
from the web site of Clarion Co., Ltd.
For details, refer to the following web site.
http://www.clarion.com/us/en/support/in-
dex.html
& Certification for the Hands-
free system
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC
Rules and Industry Canada licence-ex-
empt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
Le présent appareil est conforme à la
partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR
d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appa-
reils radio exempts de licence. L’exploita-
tion est autorisée aux deux conditions
suivantes : (1) l’apparei l ne d oit pas
produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur
de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage
radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage
est susceptible d’en compromet tre l e
fonctionnement.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets the
FCC radio frequency (RF) Ex posure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65
and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency
Audio/Appendix
– CONTINUED –
5-93
5
Black plate (368,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Audio/Appendix
(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has
very low levels of RF energy that it
deemed to comply without maxi mum
permissive exposure evaluation (MPE).
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites
d’exposition aux rayonnements énoncées
pour un environnement non contrôlé et
respecte les lignes directrices d’exposition
aux fréquences radioél ectriques de la
FCC dans le Supplément C à OET65 et
d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectri-
ques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipe-
ment émet une énergie RF très faible qui
est considérée conforme sans évaluation
de l’exposition maximale autorisée.
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly
approve d by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or
operated in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
& Certification for Mexico mod-
els
. IFETEL RCPCLPF14-250
Clarion PF-3547
. IFETEL RCPCLPF14-253
Clarion PF-3688
5-94
Black plate (13,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Interior lights ....................................................... 6-2
Dome light .......................................................... 6-2
Cargo area light (5-door models) ......................... 6-2
Map lights........................................................... 6-3
OFF delay timer .................................................. 6-3
Sun visors ........................................................... 6-4
Sun visor extension plate (models with the
EyeSight system) .............................................. 6-4
Vanity mirror ....................................................... 6-5
Storage compartment ......................................... 6-5
Glove box ........................................................... 6-6
Center console.................................................... 6-6
Cup holders ......................................................... 6-7
Bottle holders...................................................... 6-7
Accessory power outlets .................................... 6-8
Use with a cigarette lighter (dealer option) ........... 6-9
Ashtray (dealer option) ...................................... 6-10
Floor mat (if equipped)...................................... 6-11
Coat hook........................................................... 6-11
Shopping bag hook (5-door)............................. 6-12
Cargo area cover (5-door – if equipped).......... 6-12
Using the cover ................................................. 6-12
To remove the cover housing............................. 6-13
Stowage of the cargo area cover ........................ 6-13
To install the cover housing ............................... 6-14
Cargo tie-down hooks (5-door – if
equipped) ........................................................ 6-14
Under-floor storage compartment (if
equipped) ........................................................ 6-15
Rear view camera .............................................. 6-15
How to use the rear view camera ....................... 6-17
Viewing range on the screen.............................. 6-17
Help line............................................................ 6-18
Interior equipment
6
Black plate (372,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Interior equipment/Interior lights
Interior lights
CAUTION
When leaving your vehicle, make
sure the light s are turned off to
avoid battery discharge.
& Dome light
1) ON
2) DOOR
3) OFF
The dome light switch has the following
positions.
ON: The light remains on continuously.
OFF: The light remains off.
DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto-
matically in the following cases.
. Any of the doors or the rear gate (5-
door) is opened.
. The doors or the rear gate (5-door) are
unlocked using the keyless access func-
tion (if equipped). Refer to “Locking and
unlocking with “keyless access” entry
function” F2-13.
. The doors or the rear gate (5-door) are
unlocked using the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-
tion.
& Cargo area light (5-door
models)
1) DOOR
2) OFF
DOOR: The light illuminates when the rear
gate is opened. The light remains illumi-
nated for several seconds and gradually
turns off after the rear gate is closed.
OFF: The light remains off.
6-2
Black plate (373,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Map lights
Type A
Type B
To turn on the map light, push the switch.
To turn it off, push the switch again.
NOTE
For the type A map lights, although the
light switches are in the ON position,
the lights are automatically turned off
after approximately 30 seconds of
illumination to prevent the vehicle
battery from discharging. For details,
refer to “Battery drainage prevention
function” F2-7.
! Automatic illumination (models
with moonroof)
The map lights illuminate automatically in
the following cases.
. Any of the doors other than the rear
gate is opened. (The map lights do not
illuminate when only the rear gate is
opened.)
. The doors are unlocked using the
keyless access function (if equipped).
Refer to “Locking and unlocking with
“keyless access” entry function” F2-13.
. The doors are unlocked using the
remote keyless entry system. Refer to
“Remote keyless entry system” F2-23.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-
tion.
& OFF delay timer
The following lights have an automatic
illumination function.
. dome light
. map light (type A)
. cargo area light (5-door)
After being illuminated automatically,
these lights remain on for several seconds
and then gradually turn off under the
following conditions.
. after all doors and the rear gate (5-
door) are closed (dome light)
. after all doors are closed (type A map
light)
. after the rear gate is closed (cargo area
light)
While the lights are illuminated, if any of
the following operations are performed,
the lights turn off immediately.
. The ignition switch is turned from the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position to the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
. All doors and the rear gate (5-door) are
locked using the keyless access function
(if equipped).
. All doors and the rear gate (5-door) are
locked using the remote keyless entry
system.
The setting for the period of time in which
Interior equipment/Interior lights
– CONTINUED –
6-3
6
Black plate (374,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Interior equipment/Sun visors
the lights remain on (OFF delay timer) can
be changed by a SUBARU dealer. Con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for details. For
models with multi function display, the
setting can be changed by operating the
multi function display. For details, refer to
“Interior light off delay timer setting” F3-
82.
Sun visors
To block out glare, swing down the visors.
To use the sun visor at a side window,
swing it down and move it sideways.
& Sun visor extension plate
(models with the EyeSight
system)
With the sun visor positioned over the side
window, you ca n use the su n vis or
extension plate to prevent glare through
the gap between the sun visor and center
pillar. To use the extension plate, pull it
toward the rear of the vehicle. When you
have finished using it, stow it by pushing it
toward the front of the vehicle.
6-4
Black plate (375,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
CAUTION
Do not pull out the extension plate
with the sun visor positioned over
the windshield. The extension plate
woul d obstruct your view of the
rearview mirror.
& Vanity mirror
CAUTION
Keep the vanity mirror cover closed
while the car is being driven to avoid
being temporarily blinded by the
glare of bright light.
To use the vanity mirror, swing down the
sun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.
Storage compartment
CAUTION
. Always keep the storage com-
partment closed while driving to
reduce the risk of injury in the
event of a sudden stop or an
accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compart-
ment.
Interior equipment/Storage compartment
– CONTINUED –
6-5
6
Black plate (376,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Interior equipment/Storage compartment
& Glove box
1) Lock
2) Unlock
To open the glove box, pull the handle. To
close it, push the lid firmly upward.
To lock the glove box, insert the key and
turn it clockwise. To unlock the glove box,
insert the key and turn it counterclockwise.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”, use the me-
chanical key to lock or unlock the glove
box.
NOTE
The mechanical key is directional. If the
key cannot be inserted, change the
direction that the grooved side is
facing and insert it again.
& Center console
The center console box provides a sto-
rage space.
1) Paper holder
2) Pen holder
3) Card holder
The top of the console can be used as an
armrest.
For some models, the armrest is adjus-
table. Slide the armrest to the desired
position.
6-6
Black plate (377,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Cup holders
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a cup from the cup
holder or put a cup in the holder
while you are driving, as this may
distract you and lead to an
accident.
. Take care to avoid spills. Bev-
erages, if hot, might scald you
and/or your passengers. Spilled
beverages may also damage up-
holstery or carpets.
. When a cup in the rear passen-
ger’s cup holder contains a bev-
erage, do not fold down the rear
seatback. Otherwise, the bever-
age could spill and, if the bev-
erage is hot, it could scald you
and/or your passengers.
Front passenger’s cup holder
A dual cup holder is built into the center
console.
Rear passenger’s cup holder (if equipped)
A dual cup holder is built into the armrest.
Bottle holders
CAUTION
. Do not pick up a bottle from the
bottle holder or put a bottle in the
holder while you are driving, as
this may distract you and lead to
an accident.
. When placing a beverage in a
bottle holder, make sure it is
capped. Otherwise, the beverage
could spill when opening/closing
the door or while driving and, if
the beverage is hot, it could scald
you and/or your passengers.
The bottle holder equipped on each door
Interior equipment/Cup holders
– CONTINUED –
6-7
6
Black plate (378,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets
trim can be used to hold beverage bottles
and other items.
Accessory power outlets
Power outlet below the climate control
dials
Power outlet in the center console
Accessory power outlets are provided
below the climate control dials and in the
center console. Electrical power (12V DC)
from the battery is available at any of the
outlets when the ignition switch is in either
the “ACC” or “ON” position.
You can use an in-vehicle electrical
appliance by connecting it to an outlet.
The maximum power rating of an appli-
ance that can be connected is 120W.Do
not use an appliance which exceeds the
indicated wattage for each outlet.
When using appliances connected to two
outlets simultaneously, the total power
consumed by them must not exce ed
120W.
CAUTION
. Do not attempt to use a cigarette
lighter in the accessory power
outlets.
. Do not place any foreign objects,
especially metal ones such as
coins or aluminum foil, into the
accessory power outlet. That
could cause a short circuit. Al-
ways put the cap on the acces-
sory power outlet when it is not
in use.
. Use only electrical appliances
which are designed for 12V DC.
The maximum power rating of an
6-8
Black plate (379,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
appliance that can be connected
is 120W. Do not use an appliance
which exceeds the indicated wat-
tage for each outlet.
When using appliance s con -
nected to two outlets simulta-
neously, the total power con-
sumed by them must not exceed
120W. Overloading the accessory
power outlet can cause a short
circuit. Do not use double adap-
ters or more than one electrical
appliance.
. If the plug on your electric appli-
ance is either too loose or too
tight for the accessory power
outlet, this can result in a poor
contact or cause the plug to get
stuck. Only use plugs that fit
properly.
. Use of an electric appliance in the
accessory power outlet for a long
period of time while the engine is
not running can cause battery
discharge.
. Before driving your vehicle, make
sure that the plug and the cord
on your electrical appliance will
not interfere with your shifting
gears and operating the accel-
erator and brake pedals. If they
do, do not use the electrical
appliance while driving.
NOTE
When the lid of the center console is
closed, an opening remains between
the center console and the lid to allow
the power outlet in the center console
to be used. Pass the cord of the
electrical appliance through this open-
ing.
& Use with a cigarette lighter
(dealer option)
To use the accessory power outlet as a
cigarette lighter socket, pu rchase the
cigarette lighter plug, which is an optional
accessory. A cigarette lighter plug is
available from your SUBARU dealer.
The cigarette lighter operates only when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”
position.
To use the cigarette lighter, push in the
knob and wait a few moments. It will
automatically spring up when ready for
use.
WARNING
To avoid being burned, never grasp
the lighter by the end with the
heating element. Doing so could
result in injury and could also
damage the heating element.
CAUTION
. Do not hold the lighter pushed in,
because it will overheat.
. The electrical power socket is
originally designed to use a gen-
uine SUBARU cigarette lighter
plug. Do not use a non-genuine
cigarette lighter plug in the sock-
et. Doing so may cause a short-
circuit and overheating, resulting
in a fire.
. If the socket is ever used for a
plug-in accessory such as a cell
Interior equipment/Accessory power outlets
– CONTINUED –
6-9
6
Black plate (380,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Interior equipment/Ashtray (dealer option)
phone, that may damage the
portion of the socket ’s internal
mechanism that causes a cigar-
ette lighter plug to “pop out”
after its lighter element is heated.
Therefore, do not place a cigar-
ette lighter plug in a socket that
has been used, even once, to
power a plug-in accessory. Doing
so may cause the plug to stick
and overheat, creating a potential
fire hazard.
Ashtray (dealer option)
CAUTION
. Do not use ashtrays as waste
receptacles or leave a lighted
cigarette in an ashtray. This
could cause a fire.
. Always extinguish matches and
cigarettes before putting them
into the ashtray, and then close
the ashtray securely. If you keep
the ashtray open, the fire of the
cigarette may spread to another
cigarette butt and start a fire.
. Do not put flammable material in
the ashtray.
. Do not leave a lot of cigarette
butts in the ashtray.
NOTE
Particles of ash and tobacco will accu-
mulate around the hinges of the ash-
tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using a
toothbrush or a similar narrow-ended
implement.
The portable ashtray can be installed in
each cup holder or bottle holder. For the
locations of the cup holders, refer to “Cup
holders” F 6-7. For the locations of the
bottle holders, refer to “Bottle holders” F6-
7.
When using the ashtray, open the lid of the
ashtray. Fully close the lid after using the
ashtray to help reduce residual smoke.
6-10
Black plate (381,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Floor mat (if equipped)
CAUTION
If the floor mat slips forward and
interferes with the movement of the
pedals during driving, it could cause
an accident. Observe the following
precautions to prevent the floor mat
from slipping forward.
. Be sure to use a genuine
SUBARU floor mat or an equiva-
lent designed with grommets in
the correct locations.
. Make sure that the driver’s floor
mat is placed in its proper loca-
tion and is correctly secured on
its retaining pins.
. Do not use more than one floor
mat.
Retaining pins are located on the driver’s
side floor.
The floor mat should be properly secured
using the built-in grommets, by placing the
grommets over the pins and pushing them
downward.
Coat hook
A coat hook is attached to the rear
passenger’s hand grip.
Interior equipment/Floor mat
– CONTINUED –
6-11
6
Black plate (382,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Interior equipment/Shopping bag hook (5–door)
WARNING
Hang clothing directly on the coat
hooks without using hangers. Do
not hang coat hangers or other hard
or pointed objects on the coat
hooks. If such items are hanging
on the coat hooks, when the SRS
curtain airbags deploy, they could
cause serious injuries by coming off
the coat hooks and being thrown
through the cabin or by preventing
correct airbag deployment. Before
hanging clothing on the coat hooks,
make sure there are no pointed
objects in the pockets.
CAUTION
Never hang anything on the coat
hook that might obstruct the driver’s
view or that could cause injury in
sudden stops or in a collision.
Shopping bag hook (5-door)
CAUTION
Do not hang items on the shopping
bag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) or
more.
A shopping bag hook is attached to each
side of the cargo area.
Cargo area cover (5-door – if
equipped)
The cargo area cover is provided for
covering the cargo area and to protect its
contents from direct sunlight. This cover is
detachable to make room for additional
cargo.
& Using the cover
To extend the cover, pull the end of the
cover out of the housing, then insert its
hooks into the catches as shown. To
rewind it, unhook it from the catches and
it will rewind automatically. You should
hold on to the cover and guide it back into
the cover housing while it is rewinding.
6-12
Black plate (383,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
WARNING
Do not place anything on the ex-
tended cover. Putting excessive
weight on the extended cover can
break it and an object on the cover
could tumble forward in the event of
a sudden stop or colli sion. This
could cause serious injury.
CAUTION
Be careful not to scratch the rear
gate stays while extending and
rewinding the cover.
Scratches on the stays could cause
leakage of gas from the stays, which
may result in their inability to hold
the rear gate open.
& To remove the cover housing
1. Rewind the cover.
2. Push the cover housing to the right
side and shorten it.
3. Take it off the retainer.
& Stowage of the cargo area
cover
The cargo area cover can be stowed in
under the cargo floor.
1. Raise and fold the rear end of the
cargo floor board.
Interior equipment/Cargo area cover (5–door – if equipped)
– CONTINUED –
6-13
6
Black plate (384,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Interior equipment/Cargo tie–down hooks (5–door – if equipped)
2. Stow the cover housing in the cargo
area end.
3. Put the cargo floor board back while
hanging two retaining straps on the hooks
that are located on the rear wall of cargo
area.
& To install the cover housing
1. Shorten the cover housing.
2. Insert both ends of the cover housing
into the recesses of the retainers.
Cargo tie-down hooks
(5-door – if equipped)
The cargo area is equipped with four tie-
down hooks so that cargo can be secured
with a cargo net or ropes.
When using the front tie-down hooks, turn
them down out of the storing recesses.
CAUTION
The cargo tie-down hooks are de-
signed only for securing light cargo.
Never try to secure cargo that
exceeds the capacity of the hooks.
The maximum load capacity is 22
lbs (10 kg) per hook.
6-14
Black plate (385,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Under-floor storage compart-
ment (if equipped)
4-door models
For 4-door models, the storage compart-
ments are located under the floor of the
trunk. They can be used to store small
items.
NOTE
. The shape of the storage compart-
ment may be different depending on
the model.
. When stori ng a flat tire, put the
storage tray in the trunk.
CAUTION
. Always keep the lids closed while
driving to red uce the ri sk of
injury in the event of a sudden
stop or an accident.
. Do not store spray cans, contain-
ers with flammable or corrosive
liquids or any other dangerous
items in the storage compart-
ment.
Rear view camera
A rear view camera is attached to the
trunk lid or rear gate. When the ignition
switch is “ON” and the shift lever (MT
models) or select lever (CVT models) is
set to “R”, the rear view camera auto-
matically displays the rear view image
behind the vehicle on one of the following
displays.
. Navigation display (if equipped)
. Audio display (if equipped)
WARNING
. Since the rear view camera uses
a wide-angle lens, the image on
the monitor is different from the
actual view in terms of distance.
Interior equipment/Under–floor storage compartment
– CONTINUED –
6-15
6
Black plate (386,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Interior equipment/Rear view camera
. Since the range of the image on
the monitor is limited, you should
always check the rear view and
the surrounding area with your
eyes and mirrors, and move
backward at a slow speed. Mov-
ing backward only by checking
the rear view image from the
camera could cause an accident.
. Do not disassemble or modify the
camera, switch or wiring. If
smoke comes out or you smell
a strange odor, stop using the
rear view camera immediately.
Contact your S UBARU deale r
for an inspection. Continued use
may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
CAUTION
. If your vehicle is washed with a
high-pressure washer, do not
allow water to contact the camera
directly. Entry of water in the
camera lens may result in con-
densation, malfunction, fire o r
electric shock.
. Since the camera is a precision
device, do not subject it to strong
impacts. Otherwise, malfunction,
fire or electric shock may occur.
. If mud or snow sticks to or is
frozen on the camera, you must
be very careful when removing it.
Otherwise, damage to the camera
may cause a f ire or electric
shock. Pour water or lukewarm
water over the camera to remove
mud and ice, and wipe it with a
soft, dry cloth.
. Do not put a flame close to the
camera or wiring. Otherwise, da-
mage or fire may occur.
. When replacing the fuse, be sure
to use a fuse with the specified
rating. Use of a fuse with a
different rating may result in a
malfunction.
. If the rear view camera is used for
a long time while the engine is
not operated, the battery may
become completely discharged.
NOTE
. Do not wipe the camera with alcohol,
benzine or paint thinner. Otherwise,
discoloration may occur. To remove
contamination, wipe the camera with a
cloth moistened with a diluted neutral
detergent and then wipe it with a soft,
dry cloth.
. When waxing the vehicle, be careful
not to apply the wax to the camera. If it
comes in contact with the camera,
moisten a clean cloth with a diluted
neutral detergent to remove the wax.
. The camera lens has a hard coating
to help prevent scratches. However,
when washing the vehicle or cleaning
the camera lens , be careful not to
scratch the camera lens. Do not use a
washing brush directly on the camera
lens. The image quality of the rear view
camera may deteriorate.
. Strong light shined on the camera
lens may develop vertical lines around
the light source. This is not a malfunc-
tion.
. Under fluorescent light, the display
may flicker. However, this is not a
malfunction.
. The image of the rear view camera
may be s lightly different from the
actual color of the objects.
6-16
Black plate (387,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& How to use the rear view
camera
When the shift lever/select lever is set to
“R”, the rear view camera automatically
displays the rear view image from the
vehicle. When the lever is set to other
positions, the image before setting to “R”
is displayed.
1. Set the ignition switch to “ON”.
2. Set the shift lever/select lever to “R”.
NOTE
. For models with the genuine
SUBARU navigation system, while the
navigation system is activated, the
image of the rear view camera will not
be displayed. However, the image of
the rear view camera has priority over
other screen displays.
. The image of the rear view camera is
horizontally reversed as is the case
with the vehicle rearview mirror or the
side view mirror.
. It may be difficult to see the image of
the rear view camera in the following
cases. This is not a malfunction of the
camera.
– The vehicle is in a dark place (at
night, in a tunnel, etc.).
– The vehicle is in an extremely hot
or cold place.
– An object (such as raindrops,
snow, dirt, etc.) that disturbs the
view of the rear view camera sticks
to the lens of the camera.
– Strong light shined directly on
the camera lens (occasionally, there
are vertical lines on the screen).
& Viewing range on the screen
CAUTION
The range that can be viewed with
the rear view camera i s limited.
Always be sure to check with your
eyes when moving backward and
proceed slowly.
Range of view
Range of view
Image from camera
The area from the rear end of the bumper
can be viewed. Areas at both ends of the
bumper and areas just under the bumper
cannot be viewed.
Interior equipment/Rear view camera
– CONTINUED –
6-17
6
Black plate (388,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Interior equipment/Rear view camera
Also, the image from the rear view camera
looks shorter than the actual distance.
Range of view
Image from camera
The area above the camera cannot be
viewed. If there is an object that has a
wide projection on its upper part such as a
sign pole behind the vehicle, the projec-
tion cannot be seen on the screen.
& Help line
The help line (distance marker and vehicle
width line) is a guide to help you realize
the actual distance from the screen image.
1) Vehicle width line (oblique vertical line)
2) Approx. 10 feet (3 m) from the bumper
(green horizontal line)
3) Approx. 3 feet (1 m) from the bumper
(yellow horizontal line)
4) Approx. 1.5 feet (0.5 m) from the bumper
(red horizontal line)
5) Vehicle centerline
When the shift lever/select lever is set to
position “R”, the monitor screen displays
the help lines together with the rear view
image.
CAUTION
. When moving backward, always
check the back with your eyes
without relying on the help lines.
. The actual position may be dif-
ferent from the indication of the
help lines.
. Differences may o ccur due to
number of passengers or loaded
cargo.
. When the vehicle is on a slope or
when the vehicle is inclined
against the road, the indication
is different from the actual posi-
tion.
. Be sure to observe the displayed
warning message “Check Sur-
roundings Before Backing Up”.
NOTE
If you shift to the “R” range shortly
after turning on the ignition switch, the
warning message “Check Sur round-
ings Before Backing Up” may not be
displayed. Wait for several seconds or
more after turning on the ignition
switch before shifting to the “R” range.
Then the warning message w ill be
6-18
Black plate (389,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
displayed.
! Difference between screen image
and actual road
The distance markers show the distance
for a level road when the vehicle is not
loaded. It may be different from the actual
distance depending on the loading condi-
tions or road conditions.
! When there is an upward slope at
the back
1) 3 feet (1 m)
The distance on the screen looks farther
than the actual distance.
! When there is a downward slope
at the back
1) 3 feet (1 m)
The distance on the screen looks nearer
than the actual distance.
NOTE
When cargo is loaded, the rear view
distance on the screen looks farther
thantheactualdistanceasinan
upward slope.
Interior equipment/Rear view camera
– CONTINUED –
6-19
6
Black plate (390,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Interior equipment/Rear view camera
! Feature of distance marker
1) 3 feet (1 m) line
2) 10 feet (3 m) line
The distance marker shows the distance
on the road. If there is a car or other object
close behind, distance cannot be correctly
displayed.
6-20
Black plate (15,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Fuel ...................................................................... 7-3
Fuel requirements ............................................... 7-3
Fuel filler lid and cap........................................... 7-4
State emission tes ting (U.S. only)...................... 7-7
Preparing to drive ............................................... 7-8
Starting and stopping the engine (models
without push-button start system).................. 7-9
Starting engine.................................................... 7-9
Stopping the engine ........................................... 7-11
Starting and stopping engine (models with
push-button start system) .............................. 7-12
Safety precautions ............................................. 7-12
Operating range for push-button start
system............................................................. 7-12
Starting engine................................................... 7-12
Stopping engine................................................. 7-13
When access key does not operate properly ....... 7-14
Remote engine start system (dealer
option).............................................................. 7-14
Models with “keyless access with push-button
start system” ................................................... 7-15
Models without “keyless access with push-button
start system” ................................................... 7-16
Entering the vehicle while it is running via remote
start................................................................. 7-19
Entering the vehicle following remote engine start
shutdown......................................................... 7-19
Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior of the
vehicle ............................................................. 7-19
Service mode (models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”)........................ 7-19
Remote transmitter program (models without
“keyless access with push-button start
system”).......................................................... 7-19
System maintenance.......................................... 7-20
Manual transmission ......................................... 7-22
Shifting speeds.................................................. 7-22
Driving tips........................................................ 7-23
Continuously variable transmission................. 7-23
Continuously variable transmission features ...... 7-24
Select lever ....................................................... 7-24
Selection of manual mode (if equipped).............. 7-26
Selection of “L” (if equipped) ............................. 7-28
Shift lock function ............................................. 7-28
Driving tips........................................................ 7-29
Power steering................................................... 7-30
Power steering warning light.............................. 7-30
Power steering system features ......................... 7-30
Braking ............................................................... 7-31
Braking tips....................................................... 7-31
Brake system .................................................... 7-31
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 7-32
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System).......................... 7-32
ABS self-check .................................................. 7-32
ABS warning light.............................................. 7-33
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
system ............................................................. 7-33
Steps to take if EBD system malfunctions .......... 7-33
Vehicle Dynamics Control system.................... 7-34
Safety precautions............................................. 7-34
System features................................................. 7-35
Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor.......... 7-36
Starting and operating
7
Black plate (16,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch................. 7-36
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(U.S.-spec. models) ......................................... 7-38
Parking your vehicle .......................................... 7-40
Parking brake..................................................... 7-40
Parking tips ....................................................... 7-40
Hill start assist system ...................................... 7-41
To activate/deactivate the Hill start assist
system............................................................. 7-43
Hill start assist warning light/Hill start assist OFF
indicator light................................................... 7-44
Cruise control (if equipped)............................... 7-45
To set cruise control .......................................... 7-45
To temporarily cancel the cruise control ............. 7-46
To turn off the cruise control.............................. 7-47
To change the cruising speed ............................ 7-48
Cruise control indicator light .............................. 7-50
Cruise control set indicator light ........................ 7-50
BSD/RCTA (5-door models — if equipped)...... 7-50
System features................................................. 7-51
System operation............................................... 7-52
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warning
buzzer ............................................................. 7-54
BSD/RCTA warning indicator.............................. 7-55
BSD/RCTA OFF switch ....................................... 7-56
Certification for the BSD/RCTA........................... 7-57
Handling of radar sensors.................................. 7-57
Black plate (395,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Fuel
CAUTION
Use of a fuel which is low in quality
or use of an inapp ropriate fuel
additive may cause damage to the
engine and/or fuel system.
& Fuel requirements
The engine is designed to operate using
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
of 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.
! Fuel octane rating
Using a gasoline with a lower octane
rating can cause persistent and heavy
knocking, which can damage the engine.
Do not be concerned if your vehicle
sometimes knocks lightly when you drive
up a hill or when you accelerate. Contact
your SUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with
the specified octane rating and y our
vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.
! RON
This octane rating is the Research Octane
Number.
! AKI
This octane rating is the average of the
Research Octane and Motor Octane
numbers and is commonly referred to as
the Anti Knock Index (AKI).
! Unleaded gasoline
The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designed
to accept only an unleaded gasoline filler
nozzle. Under no circumstances should
leaded gasoline be used because it will
damage the emission control system and
may impair driveability and fuel economy.
! Gasoline for California-certified
LEV
If your vehicle was certified to California’s
low emission vehicle (LEV) standards as
indicated on the underhood tune-up label,
it is designed to optimize engine and
emission performance with gasoline that
meets the clean burning low-sulfur Cali-
fornia gasoline specifications. If you live in
any other state than California, your
vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting
Federal specifications. Gasoline sold out-
side California is permitted to have higher
sulfur levels, which may affect the perfor-
mance of your vehicle’s catalytic converter
and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or
smell. SUBARU recommends that you try
a different brand of unleaded gasoline
having lower sulfur to determine if the
problem is fuel related before returning
your vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service.
! MMT
Some gasoline contains an octane-en-
hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-
clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If
you use such fuels, your emission control
system performance may deteriorate and
the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-
function indicator light may turn on. If this
happens, return to your authorized
SUBARU Dealer for service. If it is
determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not
be covered by your warranty.
! Gasoline for cleaner air
Your use of ga soline with detergent
additives will help prevent deposits from
forming in your engine and fuel system.
This helps keep your engine in tune and
your emission control system working
properly, and is a way of doing your part
for cleaner air. If you continuously use a
high quality fuel with the proper detergent
and other additives, you should never
need to add any fuel system cleaning
agents to your fuel tank.
Many gasolines are now blended with
materials called oxygenates. Use of these
fuels can also help keep the air cleaner.
Starting and operating/Fuel
– CONTINUED –
7-3
7
Black plate (396,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/Fuel
Oxygenated blend fuels, such as MTBE
(Methyl Tertiary Butyl ether) or ethanol
(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in
your vehicle, but should contain no more
than 15% MTBE or 10% ethanol for the
proper operation of your SUBARU.
Do not use any gasoline that contains
more than 10% ethanol, including from
any pump labeled E15, E30, E50 or E85
(which are only some examples of fuel
containing more than 10% ethanol).
In addition, some gasoline suppliers are
now producing reformulated gaso lines,
which ar e designed to reduce vehicle
emissions. SUBARU approves the use of
reformulated gasoline.
If you are not sure what the fuel contains,
you should ask your service station
operators if their gasolines contain deter-
gents and oxygenates and if they have
been reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-
sions.
As additional guidance, only use fuels
suited for your vehicle as explained in the
following description.
. Fuel should be unleaded and have an
octane rating no lower than that specified
in this manual.
. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) is
sometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.
Methanol can be used in your vehicle
ONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuel
mixture AND if it is accompanied by
sufficient quantities of the proper cosol-
vents and corrosion inhibitors required to
prevent damage to the fuel system. Do not
use fuel containing methanol EXCEPT
under these conditions.
. If undesirable driveability problems are
experienced and you suspect they may be
fuel related, try a different brand of gaso-
line b efore seeking service at your
SUBARU dealer.
. Fuel system damage or driveabilit y
problems which result from the use of
improper fuel are not covered under the
SUBARU Limited Warranty.
CAUTION
Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because
fuel may damage the paint, be sure
to wipe off any spilled fuel quickly.
Paint damage caused by spilled fuel
is not covered under the SUBARU
Limited Warranty.
& Fuel filler lid and cap
! Locations of the fuel filler lid and
the lid release lever
Fuel filler lid
1) 4-door models
2) 5-door models
7-4
Black plate (397,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Fuel filler lid release lever
1) 4-door models
2) 5-door models
! Refueling
Only one person should be involved in
refueling. Do not allow others to approach
the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler
pipe while refueling is in progress.
Be sure to observe any other precautions
that are posted at the service station.
1. Stop the vehicle and turn the ignition
switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and
turn off all the other electrical components.
2. To open the fuel filler lid, pull the lid
release lever up. The lever is on the floor
at the left of the driver’s seat.
WARNING
Before opening the fuel filler cap,
first touch the vehicle body or a
metal portion of the fuel pump or
similar object to disch arge any
static electricity that may be present
on your body. If your body is carry-
ing an electrostatic charge, there is
a possibility that an electric spark
could ignite the fuel, which could
burn you. To avoid acquiring a new
static electric charge, do not get
back into the vehicle while refueling
is in progress.
1) Open
2) Close
3. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it
slowly counterclockwise.
WARNING
. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-
mable. Before refueling, always
turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position first and
then close all vehicle doors and
windows. Make sure that there
are no lighted cigarettes, open
flames or electrical sparks in the
adjacent area. Only handle fuel
outdoors. Quickly wipe up any
spilled fuel.
. When opening the cap, grasp it
firmly and turn it slowly to the
left. Do not remove the cap
quickly. Fuel may be under pres-
sure and spray out of the fuel
filler neck, especially in hot
weather. If you hear a hissing
sound while you are removing
the cap, wait for the sound to
stop and then slowly open the
cap to prevent fuel from spraying
out and creating a fire hazard.
Starting and operating/Fuel
– CONTINUED –
7-5
7
Black plate (398,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/Fuel
4. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holder
inside the fuel filler lid.
WARNING
. When refueling, insert the fuel
nozzle securely into the fuel filler
pipe. If the nozzle is lifted or not
fully inserted, its automatic stop-
ping mechanism may not func-
tion, causing fuel to overflow the
tank and creating a fire hazard.
. Stop refueling when the auto-
matic stop mechanism on th e
fuel nozzle activates. If you con-
tinue to add fuel, temperature
changes or other conditions
may cause fuel to overflow from
the tank and create a fire hazard.
5. Stop filling the tank after the fuel filler
pump automatically stops. Do not add any
more fuel.
6. Put the cap back on, turn it clockwise
until you hear a clicking noise. Be certain
not to catch the tether under the cap while
tightening.
CAUTION
Make sure that the cap is tightened
until it clicks to prevent fuel spillage
in the event of an accident.
7. Close the fuel filler lid completely.
CAUTION
If you spill any fuel on the painted
surface, rinse it off imme diately.
Otherwise, the painted surface
could be damaged.
NOTE
. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuel
gauge. This indicates that the fuel filler
door (lid) is located on the right side of
the vehicle.
. If the fuel filler cap is not tightened
until it clicks or if the tether is caught
under the cap, the CHECK ENGINE
warning light/malfunction in dicator
light may illuminate. Refer to “CHECK
ENGINE warning light/Malfunction in-
dicator light” F3-16.
CAUTION
. Never add any cleaning agents to
the fuel tank. The addition of a
cleaning agent may cause da-
mage to the fuel system.
. After refueling, turn the cap to the
right until it clicks to ensure that
it is fully tightened. If the cap is
not securely tightened, fuel may
leak out while the vehicle is being
driven or fuel spillage could
occur in the event of an accident,
creating a fire hazard.
. Do not let fuel spill on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Because
fuel may damage the paint, be
sure to wipe off any spilled fuel
quickly. Paint damage caused by
7-6
Black plate (399,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
spilled fuel is not covered under
the SUBARU Limited Warranty.
. Always use a genuine SUBARU
fuel filler cap. If you use the
wrong cap, it may not fit or have
proper venting and your fuel tank
and emission control system
may be damaged. It could also
lead to fuel spillage and a fire.
. Immediately put fuel in the tank
whenever the low fuel warning
light illuminates. Engine misfires
as a result of an empty tan k
could cause damage to the en-
gine. Continuing to operate your
vehicle at an extremely low fuel
level may result in a reduction of
engine performance.
State emission testing
(U.S. only)
WARNING
Testing of an All-Wheel Drive model
must NEVER be performed on a
single two-wheel dynamometer. At-
tempting to do so will result in
uncontrolled vehicle movement and
may cause an accident or injuries to
persons nearby.
CAUTION
. At state inspection time, remem-
ber to tell your inspection or
service station in advance not to
place your SUBARU AWD vehicle
on a two-wheel dynamometer.
Otherwise, serious transmission
damage will result.
. Resultant vehicle damage due to
improper testing is not covered
under the SUBARU Limited War-
ranty and is the responsibility of
the state inspection program or
its contractors or licensees.
California and a number of federal states
have Inspection/Maintenance programs to
inspect your vehicle’s emission control
system. If your vehicle does not pass this
test, some states may deny renewal of
your vehicle’s registration.
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer
that monitors the performance of the
engine’s emission control system. Certi-
fied emission inspectors will inspect the
On-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system as
part of the state emission inspection
process. The OBDII system is designed
to detect engine and transmission pro-
blems that might cause the vehicle emis-
sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDII
inspections apply to all 1996 model year
and newer passenger cars and trucks.
Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-
bia have implemented emission inspec-
tion of the OBDII system.
. The inspection of the OBDII system
consists of a visual operational check of
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal-
function indicator light (MIL) and an
examination of the OBDII system with an
electronic scan tool.
. A vehicle
passes the OBDII system
inspection if proper operation of the
“CHECK ENGINE” warning light is ob-
served, there are no stored diagnostic
trouble codes, and the OBDII readiness
monitors are all complete.
Starting and operating/State emission testing (U.S. only)
– CONTINUED –
7-7
7
Black plate (400,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/Preparing to drive
. A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection if
the “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is not
properly operating (light is illuminated or is
not working due to a burned out bulb) or
there is one or more diagnostic trouble
codes stored in the vehicle’s computer.
. A state emission inspection may reject
(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number of
OBDII system readiness monitors “NOT
READY” is grea ter th an one. If the
vehicle’s battery has been recently re-
placed or disconnected, the OBDII system
inspection may indicate that the vehicle is
not ready for the emission test. Under this
condition, the vehicle driver should be
instructed to drive his/her vehicle for a few
days to reset the readiness monitors and
return for an emission re-inspection.
. Owners of rejected or failing vehicles
should contact their SUBARU Dealer for
service.
Some states still use dynamometers in
their emission inspection program. A
dynamometer is a treadmill or roller-like
testing device that allows your vehicle’s
wheels to turn while the vehicle remains in
one place. Prior to your vehicle being put
on a dynamometer, tell your emission
inspector
not to place your SUBARU
AWD v ehicle on a t wo-wheel dynam-
ometer. Otherwise, serious tran smis-
sion damage will result.
The U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA) and states using two-wheel
dynamometers in their emission testing
program have EXEMPTED SUBARU
AWD vehicles from the portion of the
testing program that involves a two-wheel
dynamometer. There are some states that
use four-wheel dynamometers in their
testing program. When properly used, this
equipment should not damage a SUBARU
AWD vehicle.
Under no circumstances should the rear
wheels be jacked off the ground, nor
should the driveshaft be disconnected for
state emission testing.
Preparing to drive
You should perform the following checks
and adjustments every day before you
start driving.
1. Check that all windows, mirrors, and
lights are clean and unobstructed.
2. Check the appearance and condition
of the tires. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
3. Look under the vehicle for any sign of
leaks.
4. Check that the hood, trunk (4-door)
and rear gate (5-door) are fully closed.
5. Check the adjustment of the seat.
6. Check the adjustment of the inside
and outside mirrors.
7. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that your
passengers have fastened their seatbelts.
8. Check the operation of the warning
and indicator lights when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
9. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-
ing lights after starting the engine.
10. Check that no small animals enter the
engine compartment.
7-8
Black plate (401,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
CAUTION
Trapping small animals in the cool-
ing fan and belts of the engine may
result in a malfunction. Check that
no small animal enters the engine
compartment and under the vehicle
before starting the engine.
NOTE
Engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid,
washer fluid and other f luid levels
should be checked daily, weekly or at
fuel stops.
Starting and stopping the
engine (models without
push-button start system)
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter motor
continuously for more than 10 sec-
onds. If the engine fails to start after
operating the st arter for 5 to 10
seconds, wait for 10 seconds or
more before trying again.
NOTE
It may be difficult to start the engine
when the battery has been discon-
nected and reconnected (for mainte-
nance or other purposes). This diffi-
culty is caused by the electronically
controlled throttle’s self-diagnosi s
function. To overcome it, k eep the
ignition switch in the “ON” position
for approximately 10 seconds before
starting the engine.
& Starting engine
! General precautions when starting
engine
WARNING
. Never start the engine from out-
side the vehicle (except when
using the remote engine start
system). It may result in an
accident.
. Do not leave the engine running
in locations with poor ventilation,
such as a garage and indoors.
The exhaust gas may enter the
vehicle or indoors, and it may
result in carbon monoxide poi-
soning.
. Do not start the engine near dry
foliage, paper, or other flam-
mable substances. The exhaust
pipe and exhaust emissions can
create a fire hazard at h igh
temperatures.
CAUTION
. If the engine is stopped during
driving, the catalyst may over-
heat and burn.
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push–button start system)
– CONTINUED –
7-9
7
Black plate (402,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push–button start system)
. When starting the engine, be sure
to sit in the driver’s seat (except
when using the remote engine
start system).
NOTE
. Avoid rapid racing and rapid accel-
eration immediately after the engine
has started.
. For a short time after the engine has
started, the engine speed is kept high.
When the warm-up is completed, the
engine speed lowers automatically.
. On rare occasions, it may be difficult
to start the engine depending on the
fuel and the usage condition (repeated
driving of a distance in which the
engine has not warmed up sufficiently).
In such a case, it is recommended that
you change to a different brand of fuel.
. On rare occasions, transient knock-
ing may be heard from the engine when
the accelerator is operated rapidly
such as a rapid start-up and a rapid
acceleration. This is not a malfunction.
. The engine starts more easily when
the headlights, air conditioner and rear
window defogger are turned off.
. After the engine starts, the engine
speed will be kept high until the engine
has warmed up sufficiently.
! MT models
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-
cessories.
3. Depress the clutch pedal to the floor
and shift the shift lever into neutral. Hold
the clutch pedal to the floor while starting
the engine.
The starter motor will only operate when
the clutch pedal is depressed fully to the
floor.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and check the operation of the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to
“Warning and indicator lights” F3-13.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position without depressing the accelera-
tor pedal. Release the key immediately
after the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, try the
following procedure.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position and wait for at
least 10 seconds. After checking that
the parking brake is firmly set, turn the
ignition switch to the “START” position
while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
full stroke). Release the accelerator
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position and wait for at least 10
seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
erator pe dal and turn the ign ition
switch to the “START” position. If the
engine starts, quickly release the
accelerator pedal.
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch again to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position. After waiting
for 10 seconds or longer, turn the
ignition switch to the “START” position
without depressing the accelerator
pedal.
(4) If the engine still does not start,
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
lights have turned off after the engine has
started. The fuel injection system auto-
matically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up.
! CVT models
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and ac-
cessories.
3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N”
position (preferably the “P” position).
The starter motor will only operate when
the select lever is at the “P” or “N” position.
7-10
Black plate (403,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position and check the operation of the
warning and indicator lights. Refer to
“Warning and indicator lights” F3-13.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position without depressing the accelera-
tor pedal. Release the key immediately
after the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, try the
following procedure.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position and wait for at
least 10 seconds. After checking that
the parking brake is firmly set, turn the
ignition switch to the “START” position
while depressing the accelerator pedal
slightly (approximately a quarter of the
full stroke). Release the accelerator
pedal as soon as the engine starts.
(2) If this fails to start the engine, turn
the ignition switch back to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position and wait for at least 10
seconds. Then fully depress the accel-
erator peda l and turn the ignition
switch to the “START” position. If the
engine s tarts, qu ickly r elease the
accelerator pedal.
(3) If this fails to start the engine, turn
theignitionswitchagaintothe
“LOCK”/“OFF” position. After waiting
for 10 seconds or longer, turn the
ignition switch to the “START” position
without depressing the accelerator
pedal.
(4) If the engine still refuses to start,
contact your nearest SUBARU dealer
for assistance.
6. Confirm that all warning and indicator
lights have turned off after the engine has
started. The fuel injection system auto-
matically lowers the idle speed as the
engine warms up.
While the engine is warming up, make
sure that the select lever is at the “P” or
“N” position and that the parking brake is
applied.
CAUTION
If you restart the engine while the
vehicle is moving, shift the select
lever into the “N” position. Do not
attempt to place the select lever of a
moving vehicle into the “P” posi-
tion.
& Stopping the engine
The ignition switch should be turned off
only when the vehicle is stopped and the
engine is idling.
WARNING
Do not stop the engine when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause
loss of power to the power steering
and the brake booster, making steer-
ing and braking more difficult. It
could also result in accidental acti-
vation of the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-
tion on the ignition switch, causing
the steering wheel to lock.
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping the engine (models without push–button start system)
7-11
7
Black plate (404,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push–button start system)
Starting and stopping engine
(models with push-button
start system)
& Safety precautions
Refer to “Safety precautions” F2-10.
& Operating range for push-
button start system
Refer to “Operating range for push-button
start system” F3-6.
& Starting engine
WARNING
. There are some general precau-
tions when starting the engine.
Carefully read the precautions
described in “Starting engine”
F7-9.
. If the indicator on the push-
button ignition switch flashes in
green after the engine has
started, never drive the vehicle.
The steering is still locked, and it
may result in an accident.
CAUTION
. When the operation indicator on
the push-button ignition switch is
flashing in orange, there may be
a malfunction with the vehicle.
Contact a SUBARU dealer imme-
diately.
. If the indicator on the push-
button ignition switch is flashing
in green after the engine has
started, it means that the steering
is still locked. Depress the brake
pedal while moving the steering
wheel to the right and left, and
press the push-button ignition
switch.
. Do not continue pushing the
push-button ignition switch for
more than 10 seconds. Doing so
could cause a malfunction. If the
engine does not start, stop push-
ing the push-button ignition
switch. Instead, press the push-
button ignition switch without
depressing the brake pedal to
switch the power status to
“OFF”. Wait 10 seconds, and
then push the push-button igni-
tion switch to start the engine.
NOTE
. When the pus h-button i gnition
switch is pressed while depressing
the brake pedal, the engine starter
operates for a maximum of 10 seconds
and after starting the engine, the starter
stops automatically.
. When the pus h-button i gnition
switch is pressed while depressing
the brake pedal, the engine can be
started regardless of the status of the
push-button ignition switch.
. If the security indicator light illumi-
nates when you attempt to start the
engine but the engine does not start,
press the push-button ignition switch
to switch the power to “OFF” and then
try to start the engine again.
. If the engine does not start, press
the push-button ignition switch without
depressing the brake pedal to switch
the power to “OFF”. Then, while de-
pressing the brake pedal more force-
fully, press the pus h-button ignition
switch.
. The engine start procedures may
not function depending on the radio
wave conditions around the vehicle. In
such a case, refer to “Starting engine”
F9-19.
. If the vehicle battery is discharged,
the steering cannot be unlocked.
7-12
Black plate (405,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Charge the battery.
1) Operation indicator
2) Push-button ignition switch
When the push-button ignition switch is
pressed while depressing the brake pedal,
the engine will start. The starting proce-
dure for the engine is as follows.
1. Carry the access key, and sit in the
driver’s seat.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position. The engine can also start when
the select lever is in the “N” position,
however, for safety reasons, start in the
“P” position.
4. Depre ss the brake pedal until the
operation indicator on the push-b utton
ignition switch turns green. When starting
with the select lever in the “N” position, the
indicator does not turn green.
5. While depressing the brake pedal,
press the push-button ignition switch.
NOTE
. While pressing the select lever but-
ton in, the indicator on the push-button
ignition switch will not turn green even
when the select lever is in the “P”
position.
. In case the engine does not start by
the normal engine start p rocedure,
move the select lever to the “P” posi-
tion, and switch the power to “ACC”.
Depress the brake pedal, and press the
push-button ignition switch for at least
15 seconds. The engine may start. Only
use this engine start procedure in case
of emergency.
. When the engine is not started, the
brake pedal may feel stiff. In such a
case, depress the brake pedal more
forcefully than usual. Check that the
operation indicator on the push-button
ignition switch turns green, and press
the push-button ignition switch to start
the engine.
& Stopping engine
1. Stop the vehicle completely.
2. Move the select lever to the “P”
position.
3. Press the push-button ignition switch.
The engine will stop, and the power will be
switched off.
WARNING
. Do not touch the push-button
ignition switch during driving.
When the push-button ignition
switch is operated as follows,
the engine will stop.
– The switch is pressed and held
for 3 seconds or longer.
– The switch is pressed briefly 3
times or more in succession.
When the engine stops, the brake
booster will not function. A great-
er foot pressure will be required
on the brake pedal.
The power steering system will
not operate either. A greater
force will be required to steer,
and it may result in an accident.
. If the engine stops during driving,
do not operate the push-button
ignition switch or open any of the
Starting and operating/Starting and stopping engine (models with push–button start system)
– CONTINUED –
7-13
7
Black plate (406,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)
doors until the vehicle is stopped
in a safe location. It is dangerous
because the steering lock may be
activated. Stop the vehicle in a
safe place, and contact a
SUBARU dealer immediately.
CAUTION
. Do not stop the engine while the
select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position.
. If the engine is stopped while the
select lever is in a position other
than the “P” position, the power
will be in “ACC ”. If the vehicle is
left in this condition, the battery
may be discharged.
NOTE
Although you can stop the engine by
operating the push-button ignition
switch, do not stop the engine during
driving except in an emergency.
& When access key does not
operate properly
Refer to “Access key – if access key does
not operate properly” F9-18.
Remote engine start system
(dealer option)
WARNING
. There are some general precau-
tions when starting the engine.
Carefully read the precauti ons
described in “General precau-
tions when starting engine” F7-
9.
. Do not remote start a vehicle in
an enclosed environment (e.g.
closed garage). Prolonged opera-
tion of a motor vehicle in an
enclosed environment can cause
a harmful buil d-up of Carbon
Monoxide. Carbon Monoxide is
harmful to your health. Exposure
to high levels of Carbon Monox-
ide can cause headaches, dizzi-
ness or in extreme cases uncon-
sciousness and/or death.
. Before performing any servicing
of the vehicle, temporarily place
the remote engine start system in
service mode to prevent the
system from unexpectedly start-
ing the engine.
The remote engine start system allows
you to start the engine from outside the
vehicle. In addition, the remote engine
start system can activate the heater or air
conditioner, providing you with a comfor-
table cabin upon entry.
NOTE
The length of time for which it i s
acceptable to allow the engine to
remain idling may be bound by local
laws and regulations. Check the local
rules when using the remote engine
start system.
7-14
Black plate (407,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Models with “keyless access
with push-button start sys-
tem”
NOTE
For more details, refer to the Owner’s
Manual supplement for the remote
engine start system.
Access key
1) Lock button
An access key can be used as the remote
engine start transmitter. Operate the lock
button to start or stop the engine as
follows.
! Before starting the engine
Before using the remote engine start
system to start the engine, confirm the
following conditions.
. The select lever is in the “P” position.
. All doors including the rear gate are
closed.
. The engine hood is closed.
. The push-button ignition switch is in the
“OFF” position.
! When starting the engine
To start the engine with remote engine
start system, briefly press the lock button
twice within 2 seconds, then press and
hold the lock button for 3 seconds.
1. Press the lock button briefly. The
hazard warning flashers then flash once
and the keyless buzzer chirps once.
2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock
button briefly again. The hazard warning
flashers then flash once again, and the
keyless buzzer chirps once again.
3. After step 2, immediately press and
hold the lock button. The hazard warning
flashers then flash three times, and the
horn will honk once.
4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3,
release the lock button. The engine will
then start successfully.
! When stopping the engine
Press and hold the lock button to stop the
engine with remote engine start system.
! Automatic engine shutdown
The remote engine start system will
automatically shut down or will not start
the engine under the following conditions.
. The total run-time has exceeded 20
minutes.
. Any door or the rear gate is opened.
. The select lever is moved to any
position other than “P”.
. The engine hood is opened.
. Thepush-buttonignitionswitchis
pressed.
. The brake pedal is depressed.
. The engine speed is 3,000 rpm or
more.
The time until the engine automatically
stops differs according to the setting.
To change the time until the e ngine
automatically stops, contact your
SUBARU dealer. However, local laws
and regulations may prohibit changing
this time.
Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)
– CONTINUED –
7-15
7
Black plate (408,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)
& Models without “keyless ac-
cess with push-button start
system”
Remote engine starter transceiver (fob)
1) Fob button
! Starting the engine
NOTE
All vehicle doors (including rear gate/
trunk lid) and the engine hood must be
closed prior to activating the remote
engine start system. Any open entry
point will prevent starting or cause the
engine to stop.
The remote engine start system is acti-
vated by pressing the fob button on your
remote engine starter transceiver (fob)
twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is within
operating range of the system and the
start request is received, the following
phenomena will occur.
. The fob flashes and beeps once.
. The horn sounds once.
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and
parking lights flash once.
If the fob is not within range (the user is
too far away from the vehicle), the fob will
indicate two long flashes without beeping.
The system will check certain safety
preconditions before starting, and if all
conditions are met, the engine will start
within 5 seconds. After the engine starts,
the following phenomena will occur.
. The fob flashes and beeps twice.
. The horn sounds once.
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and
parking lights flash once.
While the engine is idling via the remote
engine start system, the following phe-
nomena will occur.
. The side marker lights, tail lights, and
parking lights remain illuminated.
. The fob button flashes once every 3
seconds.
. The power windows are disabled.
If the engine turns over but does not start
(or starts and stalls) the remote engine
start system will power off and then
attempt to start the engine 3 additional
times. The system will not attempt to
restart the engine if it determines a vehicle
malfunction is preventing starting. If the
engine does not start after 3 additional
attempts, the remote engine start request
will be aborted.
! Stopping the engine
Press and hold the fob button for at least 2
seconds to stop the engine. The fob will
flash and beep three times, indicating the
engine has stopped. If the stop request is
not received (for example, if the user is too
far away from the vehicle), the fob will
continue to flash once every 3 seconds.
The system will automatically stop the
engine after 15 minutes.
! Remote start safety features
For safety and security reasons, the
remote engine start system will prevent
starting (or stop the engine if running) and
sound the horn twice if any of the following
conditions is detected. In addition, the fob
will flash and beep 3 times.
. The brake pedal is depressed
. A key is in the ignition switch
. The engine hood is open
. The remote start system “Service
mode” is engaged
. The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500
7-16
Black plate (409,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
RPM
. The security alarm is triggered
. The select le ver is n ot in the “P”
position (CVT models)
If the system detects any door (including
the rear gate/trunk lid) open during opera-
tion, it will prevent starting or stop the
engine, and sound the horn and flash side
marker lights, tail lights, and parking lights
6 times.
In addition to the items above, if the
vehicle’s engine management system
determines there is a safety risk due to a
vehicle-related problem, the vehicle will
power down and the horn will sound 3
times.
NOTE
. If the alarm system is armed at the
time of remote engine starter activation
(the security indicator light on the
combination meter is flashing), the
alarm system will remain armed
throughout the remote start run cycle.
. If the alarm system is disarmed at
the time of remote engine starter
activation (the security indicator light
on the combination meter is not flash-
ing), the alarm system will remain
disarmed throughout the remote start
run cycle.
! Remote start operation - fob con-
firmation
Your remote engine starter fob is a
bidirectional transceiver that can confirm
system operation with several different
visual and audible indications. The fob’s
LED-backlit button and internal piezo
buzzer will indicate status of the system
using the following flash and beep se-
quences, provided the fob is within opera-
tional range of the system.
Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)
– CONTINUED –
7-17
7
Black plate (410,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)
Precondition
Fob Indication
Meaning
Flash Beep
Fob start button is being pressed
Continuous while button is
held down
— The fob is transmitting an RF signal
User attempts to start engine by pressing fob
button twice within 3 sec
1 flash 1 beep Engine start request received
2 flashes 2 beeps Engine started successfully
1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
3 flashes 3 beeps Vehicle is in range but engine not started
2 long flashes — Vehicle not in range (engine not started)
Engine idling by remote engine start operation
1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling
3 flashes 3 beeps
Engine stopped by system timeout or for safety
reasons (see sections above)
User attempts to stop engine by pressing and
holding fob button for at least 2 sec.
3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by user request
1 flash every 3 sec —
Stop request not received. Engine still idling.
7-18
Black plate (411,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Entering the vehicle while it
is running via remote start
1. Unlock the vehicle doors using the
keyless access function (if equipped) or
remote keyless entry system. If the vehi-
cle’s doors are unlocked manually using
the key, the vehicle’s alarm system will
trigger (if the alarm system is armed prior
to activating the remote engine start
system) and the engine will turn off.
Perform either of the following procedures
to disarm the alarm system. Refer to
“Alarm system” F2-27.
. Insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn it to the “ON” position (models
without “keyless access with push-
button start system”)
. Turn the push-button ignition switch
to the “ACC” or “ON” position (models
with “keyless access with push-button
start system”)
. Press any button on the access key/
remote keyless entry transmitter.
2. Enter the vehicle.
3. The engine will shut down when any
door or trunk/rear gate is opened.
4. Insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn to the “START” position to restart
the engine.
& Entering the vehicle follow-
ing remote engine start shut-
down
An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle is
opened by the remote keyless entry
transmitter within a few seconds immedi-
ately following remote engine start shut-
down.
& Pre-heating or pre-cooling
the interior of the vehicle
Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem-
perature controls to the desired setting
and operation. After the system starts the
engine, the heater or air conditioning will
activate and heat or cool the interior to
your setting.
& Service mode (models with-
out “keyless access with
push-button start system”)
In service mode, the remote engine start
function is temporarily disabled to prevent
the system from unexpectedly starting the
engine while being serviced.
To engage or disengage service mode:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all vehicle
doors and the trunk/rear gate.
2. Verify that the select lever is in the “P”
position (CVT models)
3. Depress and hold the brake pedal
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position
5. Press and release the remote engine
start transmitter “
” button three times.
The system will honk the vehicle ’s horn
each time the button is pressed.
6. The system will pause for 1 second
then honk the vehicle’s horn three times to
indicate that the service mode has been
engaged or honk one time to indicate that
the service mode has been disengaged.
NOTE
When taking your vehicle in for service,
it is recommended that you inform the
service personnel that your vehicle is
equipped with a remote engine start
system.
& Remote transmitter program
(models without “keyless ac-
cess with push-button start
system”)
New transmitters can be programmed to
the remote engine start system in the
event that a transmitter is lost, stolen,
damaged or additional transmitters are
desired (the system will accept up to eight
transmitters). New remote engine start
transmitters can be programmed accord-
Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)
– CONTINUED –
7-19
7
Black plate (412,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)
ing to the following procedure.
1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’s
door must remain opened throughout the
entire process).
2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then
“LOCK”/“OFF”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”/
“OFF”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”/“OFF”,
then back to “ON” again and leave the
ignition “ON” throughout the programming
process.
4. The system will flash the side marker
lights, tail lights and parking lights and
honk the horn three times, indicating that
the system has entered the transmitter
learn mode.
5. Press and release the “
” button on
the transmitter that you want to program.
6. The system will flash the side marker
lights, tail lights and parking lights and
honk the horn one time, indicating that the
system has learned the transmitter. Upon
successful programming, the remote start
confirmation transmitter button will flash
one time.
7. Repeat step 5 for any additional
transmitters (the system will accept up to
eight transmitters).
8. The system will exit the transmitter
learn mode if the key is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the door is closed
or after 2 minutes.
& System maintenance
NOTE
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
In the event that the vehicle’s battery is
replaced, discharged or disconnected,
it will be necessary to start the vehicle
a minimum of one time using the key
prior to activating the remote engine
start system. This is required to allow
the vehicle electronic systems to re-
synchronize.
! Changing the batteries
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the remote engine start
transmitter when replacing the
battery.
. Be careful not to d amage the
printed circuit board in the re-
mote engine start transmitter
when replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; children could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of explosion if
an incorrect replacement battery
is used. Replace only with the
same or equivalent type of bat-
tery.
. Batteries should not be exposed
to excessive heat such as sun-
shine, fire or the like.
For models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
Perform the procedure described in “Re-
placing battery of access key” F11-44.
For models without “keyless access
with push-button start system”:
The two 3-volt lithium batteries (model
CR-2032) supplied in your remote engine
start transmitter should last approximately
one year, depending on usage. When the
batteries begin to weaken, you will notice
a decrease in range (distance from the
vehicle that your remote control operates).
Follow the instructions below to change
the remote engine start transmitter bat-
teries.
7-20
Black plate (413,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
1. Remove the small phillips screw lo-
cated on the back side lower left corner of
the transmitter.
2. Carefully pry the remote engine start
transmitter halves apart using a small flat-
head screwdriver.
3. Remove the circuit board from the
bottom half of the case and remove the
batteries and replace with new ones. Be
sure to observe the (+) sign on the old
batteries before removing them to ensure
that the new batteries are inserted prop-
erly (battery “+” should be pointed away
from the transmitter circuit board on both
batteries).
4. Carefully snap the case halves back
together, reinstall the phillips screw and
test the remote engine start system.
NOTE
. This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment and void warranty.
. To comply with the FCC RF expo-
sure compliance requirements, no
change to the antenna or the device is
permitted. Any change to the antenna
or the device could result in the device
exceeding the RF exposure require-
ments and voi d user’s authority to
operate the device.
Starting and operating/Remote engine start system (dealer option)
7-21
7
Black plate (414,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/Manual transmission
Manual transmission
The manual transmission is a fully syn-
chromeshed, 5-forward-speed and 1-re-
verse-speed transmission.
The shift pattern is shown on the shift
lever knob. When shifting from 5th gear to
reverse gear, first return the shift lever to
the neutral position then shift into reverse
gear.
To change gears, fully depress the clutch
pedal, move the shift lever, and gradually
let up on the clutch pedal.
If it is difficult to shift into gear, put the
transmission in neutral, release the clutch
pedal momentarily, and then try again.
WARNING
. Do not drive the vehicle with the
clutch disengaged (i.e., when the
clutch pedal is depressed) or
with the shift lever in the neutral
position. Engine braking has no
effect in either of these condi-
tions and the risk of an accident
is consequently increased.
. Do not engage the clutch (i.e.,
relea se the clutch pedal) sud-
denly when starting the vehicle.
By doing so the vehicle might
unexpectedly accelerate or the
transmission could malfunction.
CAUTION
Shift into reverse ONLY when the
vehicle has completely stopped. It
may cause damage to the transmis-
sion to try shifting into reverse when
the vehicle is moving.
& Shifting speeds
! Recommended shifting speeds
The best compromise between fuel econ-
omy and vehicle perfo rmance dur ing
normal driving is ensured by shifting up
at the speeds listed in the following table.
Shift up mph (km/h)
1st to 2nd 15 (24)
2nd to 3rd 25 (40)
3rd to 4th 40 (64)
4th to 5th
45 (72)
! Maximum allowable speeds
The following table shows the maximum
speeds that are possible with each differ-
ent gear. The tachometer’s needle will
enter the red area if these speeds are
exceeded.
With the exception of cases where sudden
acceleration is required, the vehicl e
should not be driven with the tachometer’s
needle inside the red area. Failure to
observe this precaution can lead to
excessive engine wear and poor fuel
economy.
7-22
Black plate (415,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
mph (km/h)
Gear
Except
Crosstrek models
Crosstrek models
1st 30 (48) 28 (46)
2nd 55 (89) 53 (86)
3rd 80 (130) 78 (126)
4th
Legal speed limit
(Posted limit speed)
5th
WARNING
When shifting down a gear, ensure
that the vehicle is not travelling at a
speed exceeding the Maximum Al-
lowable Speed for the gear which is
about to be selected. Failure to
observe this precaution can lead to
engine over-revving and this in turn
can result in engine damage.
In addition, sudden application of
engine brakes when the vehicle is
travelling on a slippery surface can
lead to wheel locking; as a conse-
quence, control of the vehicle may
be lost and the risk of an accident
increased.
NOTE
Never exceed the posted speed limit.
& Driving tips
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal and do not use the clutch to
hold your vehicle at a standstill on an
upgrade. Either of those actions may
cause clutch damage.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the
shift lever. This may cause wear on the
transmission components.
When it is necessary to reduce vehicle
speed due to slow traffic, turning corners,
or driving up steep hills, downshift to a
lower gear before the engine starts to
labor.
On steep d owngrades, downshift the
transmission to 4th, 3rd or 2nd gear as
necessary; this helps to maintain a safe
speed and to extend brake pad life.
In this way, the engine provides a braking
effect. Remember, if you “ride” (over use)
the brakes while descending a hill, they
may overheat and not work properly.
The engine may, on rare occasions, knock
when the vehicle rapidly accelerates or
rapidly pulls away from a standstill. This
phenomenon is not an indication of a
problem in your vehicle.
Continuously variable trans-
mission
WARNING
Do not shift from the “P” or “N”
position into the “D” or “R” position
while depressing the accelerator
pedal. This may cause the vehicle
to jump forward or backward.
CAUTION
. Shift into the “P” or “R” position
only after the vehicle is comple-
tely stopped. Shifting while the
vehicle is moving may cause
damage to the transmission.
. Do not race the engine for more
than 5 seconds in any position
except the “N” or “P” position
when the b rake is applied or
when chocks are used in the
wheels. This may cause the
transmission fluid to overheat.
. Never move the vehicle rearward
by inertia with the select lever set
in a forward driving position or
move the vehicle forward by
inertia with the select lever set
Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
– CONTINUED –
7-23
7
Black plate (416,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
in the “R” position. Doing so may
result in an unexpected accident
or malfunction.
. Do not shift from the “D” position
into the “ R” position or vice
versa until the vehicle has com-
pletely stopped. Such shifting
may cause damage to the trans-
mission.
. When parking the vehicle, first
securely apply the parking brake
and then place the select lever in
the “P” position. Do not park for
a long time with the select lever
in any other position as doing so
could result in a dead battery.
& Continuously variable trans-
mission features
The continuously variable transmission is
electronically controlled and provides an
infinite number of forward speeds and 1
reverse speed. For some models, it also
has a manual mode or an “L” position.
NOTE
. When the engine coolant tempera-
ture is still low, the transmission will
upshift or downshift at higher engine
speeds than when the coolant tempera-
ture is sufficiently high in order to
shorten the warm-up time and improve
driveability. The gearshift timing will
automatically shift to the normal timing
after the engine has warmed up.
. Immediately after transmission fluid
is replaced, you may feel that the
transmission operation is somewhat
unusual. This results from invalidation
of data which the on-board computer
has collected and stored in memory to
allow the transmission to shift at the
most appropriate times for the current
condition of your vehicle. Optimized
shifting will be restored as the vehicle
continues to be driven for a while.
. When driving a CVT model under
continuous heavy load conditions such
as when towing a camper or climbing a
long, steep hill, the engine speed or the
vehicle speed may automatically be
reduced. This is not a malfunction. This
phenomenon results from the engine
control function maintaining the cool-
ing performance of the vehicle. The
engine and vehicle speed will return to
a normal speed when the engine is able
to maintain the optimum cooling per-
formance after the heavy load de-
creases. Driving under a heavy load
must be performed with extreme care.
Do not try to pass a vehicle in front
when driving on an uphill slope while
towing.
. The continuously variable transmis-
sion is a chain type system that
provides superior transmission effi-
ciency for maximum fuel economy. At
times, depending on varying driving
conditions, a chain operating sound
may be heard that is characteristic of
this type of system.
& Select lever
! Select lever positions
1) Select lever button
7-24
Black plate (417,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
1) Models with “L” position
2) Models with manual mode
: With the brake pedal depressed, shift
while pressing the select lever button
in.
: Shift while pressing the select lever
button in.
: Shift without pressing the select lever
button.
The select lever has four positions, “P”,
“R”, “N”, “D” and it also has an “L” or “M”
gate.
NOTE
For some models, to protect the engine
while the select lever is in the “P” or
“N” position, the engine is controlled
so that the engine speed may not
become too high even if the accelerator
pedal is depressed hard.
! P (Park)
This position is for parking the vehicle and
starting the engine. In this position, the
transmission is mechanically locked to
prevent the vehicle from rolling freely.
When you park the vehicle, first apply the
parking brake firmly, then shift into the “P”
position. Do not hold the vehicle with only
the mechanical friction of the transmis-
sion.
To shift the select le ver from the “P”
position to any other position, you should
depress the brake pedal fully then move
the select lever. This prevents the vehicle
from lurching when it is started.
! R (Reverse)
This position is for backing the vehicle. To
shift from the “N” to “R” position, stop the
vehicle completely then move the lever to
the “R” position while pressing the select
lever button in.
When the ignition switch has been turned
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, movement
of the select lever from the “N” to “R”
position is possible for a l imited time
period by depressing the brake pedal,
and then it becomes impossible. For
details, refer to “Shift lock function” F7-28.
! N (Neutral)
This position is for restarting a stalled
engine. In this position, the transmission is
neutral, meaning that the wheels and
transmission are not locked. Therefore,
the vehicle will roll freely, even on the
slightest incline unless the parking brake
or foot brake is applied.
Avoid coasting with the transmission in
neutral. Engine braking has no effect in
this condition.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the
select lever in the “N” (neutral)
position. Engine braking has no
effect in this condition and the risk
of an accident is consequently in-
creased.
Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
– CONTINUED –
7-25
7
Black plate (418,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
NOTE
If the select lever is in the “N” position
when you stop the engine for parking,
you may not subsequently be able to
move it to the “R” and “P” positions. If
this happens, turn the ignition switch to
the “ON” position. You will then be able
to move the select lever to the “P”
position.
! D (Drive)
This position is for normal driving. The
transmission shifts automatically and con-
tinuously into a suitable gear according to
the vehicle speed and the acceleration
you require. Also, while driving up and
down a hill, the transmission assists and
controls the driving performance and
engine braking while corresponding to
the road grade.
When more acceleration is required in “D”
position, depress the accelerator pedal
fully to the floor and hold that position. The
transmission will automatically downshift.
In this case, the transmission will operate
like a conventional automatic transmis-
sion. When you release the pedal, the
transmission will return to the original gear
position.
For models with manual mode, if one of
the shift paddles behind the steering
wheel is operated while driving in the “D”
position, the transmission will temporarily
switch to the manual mode. In this mode,
you can shift into any gear position using
the shift paddles. For details about the
manual mode, refer to “ Selection of
manual mode” F7-26. Once the vehicle
speed stabilizes, the transmission will
switch from the manual mode back to
the “D” position for normal driving.
& Selection of manual mode (if
equipped)
With the vehicle either moving or station-
ary, move the select lever from the “D”
position to the “M” position to select the
manual mode.
Type A
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
3) Gear position indicator
7-26
Black plate (419,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Type B
1) Upshift indicator
2) Downshift indicator
3) Gear position indicator
When the manual mode is selected, the
gear position indicator and upshift indica-
tor and/or downshift indicator on the
combination meter illuminate.
The gear position indicator shows the
currently selected gear in the 1st-to-6th-
gear range. The upshift and downshift
indicators show when a gear shift is
possible. When the upshift indicator “
”
illuminates, upshifting is possible. When
the downshift indicator “
” illuminates,
downshifting is possible. When both in-
dicators illuminate, upshifting and down-
shifting are both possible. When the
vehicle sto ps (for example, a t traffic
signals), the downshift indicator turns off.
Gearshifts can be performed using the
shift paddle behind the steering wheel.
Except Crosstrek models
Crosstrek models
To upshift to the next higher gear position,
pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicated
on it. To downshift to the next lower gear
position, pull the shift paddle that has “–”
indicated on it.
To deselect the manual mode, return the
select lever to the “D” position from the “M”
position.
CAUTION
Do not place or hang anything on
the shift paddles. Doing so may
result in accidental gear shifting.
NOTE
Please read the following points care-
fully and bear them in mind when using
the manual mode.
. If you attempt to shift down when
the engine speed is too high, i.e., when
a downshift would push the tachometer
needle beyond the red zone, beeps will
be emitted to warn you that the down-
shift is not possible.
. If you attempt to shift up when the
vehicle speed is too low, the transmis-
sion will not respond.
. You can perform a skip-shift (for
example, from 4th to 2nd) by operating
the shift paddle twice in rapid succes-
Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
– CONTINUED –
7-27
7
Black plate (420,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
sion.
. The transmission automatically se-
lects 1st gear when the vehicle stops
moving.
. If the temperature of the transmis-
sion fluid becomes too high, the “AT
OIL TEMP” warning light on the combi-
nation meter will illuminate. Immedi-
ately stop the vehicle in a safe location
and let the engine idle until the warning
light turns off.
& Selection of “L” (if equipped)
“L” is for using engine braking when going
down a hill, etc. To select this mode, move
the select lever from the “D ” position to the
“L” position.
When selected, the indicator “L” will
illuminate on the combination meter.
To deselect “L”, move the select lever to
the “D” position.
& Shift lock function
The shift lock function helps prevent the
improper operation of the select lever.
. The select lever cannot be operated
unless the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
. The select lever cannot be moved from
the “P” position to any other position
before the brake p edal is depressed.
Depress the brake pedal first, and then
operate the select lever.
. Only the “P” position allows you to turn
the ignition switch from the “ACC” position
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and remove
the key from the ignition switch.
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position while the select
lever is in the “N” position, the select lever
may not be moved to the “P” position after
a period of time. Therefore, move the
select lever to the “P” position with the
brake pedal depressed soon after the
ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
! Shift lock release
If the select lever cannot be operated, turn
the ignition switch back to the “ON”
position then move the select lever to the
“P” position with the select lever button
pressed and brake pedal depressed.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, perform
the following steps.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “P” to “N”:
Refer to “Shift lock release using the shift
lock release button” F7-29.
. When the select lever cannot be
shifted from “N” to “R”, “P”:
Within 60 seconds after placing the igni-
tion switch in the “ACC” position, move the
select lever to the “P” position with the
7-28
Black plate (421,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
select lever button pressed and brake
pedal depressed.
If you must perform the above procedure,
the shift lock system (or the vehicle control
system) may be malfunctioning. Contact a
SUBARU dealer for an inspection as soon
as possible.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, refer to
“Shift lock release using the shift lock
release button” F7-29.
! Shift lock release using the shift
lock release button
Perform the following procedure to release
the shift lock.
1. Apply the parking brake and turn the
ignition switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-
tion.
2. Wrap the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
with vinyl tape or a cloth and use it to
remove the shift lock cover. The shift lock
release button is located under the shift
lock cover.
3. While depressing the brake pedal,
insert a screwdriver into the hole, press
the shift lock release button using a
screwdriver, and then move the select
lever.
If the select lever does not move after
performing the above procedure, the shift
lock system may be malfunctioning. Con-
tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection
as soon as possible.
& Driving tips
. Always apply the foot or parking brake
when the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or
“R” position.
. Always apply the parking brake when
parking your vehicle. Do not hold the
vehicle with only the mechanical friction
of the transmission.
. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationary
position on an uphill grade by using the
“D” position. Use the brake instead.
. The engine may, on rare occasions,
knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-
ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.
This phenomenon does not indicate a
malfunction.
Starting and operating/Continuously variable transmission
7-29
7
Black plate (422,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/Power steering
Power steering
& Power steering warning light
Type A
Type B
& Power steering system fea-
tures
The vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering system. When the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position, the
power steering warning light on the
combination meter illuminates to inform
the driver that the warning system is
functioning properly. Then, if the engine
started, the warning light turns off to inform
the driver that the steering power assist is
operational.
CAUTION
When the power steering warning
light is illuminated, there may be
more resistance when the steering
wheel is operated. Drive carefully to
the nearest SUBARU dealer and
have the vehicle inspected immedi-
ately.
NOTE
If the steering wheel is operated in the
following ways, the power steering
control system may temporarily limit
the power assist in order to prevent the
system components, such as the con-
trol computer and drive motor, from
overheating.
. The steering wheel is operated fre-
quently and turned sharply while the
vehicle is maneuvered at extremely low
speeds, such as while frequently turn-
ing the steering wheel during parallel
parking.
. The steering wheel remains in the
fully turned position for a long period
of time.
At this time, there will be more resis-
tance when steering. However this is
not a malfunction. Normal steering
force will be restored after the steering
wheel is not operated for a while and
the power steering control system has
an opportunity to cool down. However,
if the power steering is operated in a
non-standard way which causes power
assist limitation to occur too fre-
quently, this may result in a malfunc-
tion of the power steering control
system.
7-30
Black plate (423,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Braking
& Braking tips
WARNING
Never rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. This can cause
dangerous overheating of the
brakes and needless wear on the
brake pads and linings.
! When the brakes get wet
When driving in rain or after washing the
vehicle, the brakes may get wet. As a
result, brake stopping distance will be
longer. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle
at a safe speed while lightly depressing
the brake pedal to heat up the brakes.
! Use of engine braking
Remember to make use of engine braking
in addition to foot braking. When descend-
ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,
the brakes may start working improperly
because of brake fluid overheating,
caused by overheated brake pads. To
help prevent this, shift into a lower gear to
get stronger engine braking.
! Braking when a tire is punctured
Do not depress the brake pedal suddenly
when a tire is punctured. This could cause
a loss of control of the vehicle. Keep
driving s traight ahead while gradually
reducing speed. Then slowly pull off the
road to a safe location.
& Brake system
! Two separate circuits
Your vehicle has two separate circuit
brake systems. Each circuit works diag-
onally across the vehicle. If one circuit of
the brake system should fail, the other half
of the system still works. If one circuit fails,
the brake pedal will go down much closer
to the floor than usual and you will need to
press it down much harder. And a much
longer distance will be needed to stop the
vehicle.
! Brake booster
The brake booster uses engine manifold
vacuum to assist braking force. Do not
turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position while driving because that
will turn off the brake booster, resulting in
poor braking power.
The brakes will continue to work even
when the brake booster completely stops
functioning. If this happens, however, you
will have to depress the pedal much
harder than normal and the braking dis-
tance will increase.
! Brake assist system
WARNING
Do not be overconfident about the
brake assist. It is not a system that
brings more braking ability to the
vehicle beyond its braking capabil-
ity. Always use the utmost care
when driving regarding vehicle
speed and safe distance.
CAUTION
When you need to brake suddenly,
continue depressing the brake pedal
strongly to bring the effect of the
brake assist.
Brake assist is a driver assistance system.
It assists the brake power when the driver
cannot depress the brake pedal strongly
and the brake power is insufficient.
Brake assist generates the brake power
according to the speed at which the driver
depresses the brake pedal.
NOTE
When you depress the brake p edal
strongly or suddenly, the following
phenomena occur. However, even
though these occur, they do not indi-
Starting and operating/Braking
– CONTINUED –
7-31
7
Black plate (424,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/ABS (Anti–lock Brake System)
cate any malfunctions, and the brake
assist system is operating properly.
. You might feel that the brake pedal
is applied by lighter force and gener-
ates a greater braking force.
. You might hear an ABS operating
noise from the engine compartment.
& Disc brake pad wear warning
indicators
The disc brake pad wear warning indica-
tors on the disc brakes give a warning
noise when the brake pads are worn.
If a squeaking or scraping noise is heard
from the disc brakes while braking, im-
mediately have your vehicle checked by
your SUBARU dealer.
ABS (Anti-lock Brake Sys-
tem)
The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheels
which may occur during sudden braking or
braking on slippery road surfaces. This
helps prevent the loss of steering control
and directional stability caused by wheel
lock-up.
When the ABS is operating, you may hear
a chattering noise or feel a slight vibration
in the brake pedal. This is normal when
the ABS operates.
The ABS will not operate when the vehicle
speed is below approximately 6 mph (10
km/h).
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence because
you are driving a vehicle with the
ABS could easily lead to a serious
accident.
CAUTION
. The ABS does not always de-
crease stoppi ng distance. You
should always maintain a safe
following distance from other
vehicles.
. When driving on badly surfaced
roads, gravel roads, icy roads, or
over deep newly fallen snow,
stopping distances may be long-
er for a vehicle with the ABS than
one without. When driving under
these conditions, therefore, re-
duce your speed and leave ample
distance from other vehicles.
. When tire chains are installed,
stopping distances may be long-
er for a vehicle with the ABS than
one without. Be sure to reduce
your speed and maintain a safe
distance from the vehicle in front.
. When you feel the ABS operating,
you should maintain constant
brake pedal pressure. Do not
pump the brake pedal since
doing so may defeat the opera-
tion of the ABS.
& ABS self-check
Just after the vehicle is started, you may
feel on the brake pedal a vibration similar
to when the ABS operates, and you may
also hear the sound of the ABS working
from the engine compartment. This is
7-32
Black plate (425,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
caused by an automatic functional test of
the ABS being carried out and does not
indicate a malfunction.
& ABS warning light
Refer to “ABS warning light” F3-21.
Electronic Brake Force Dis-
tribution (EBD) system
The EBD system maximizes the effective-
ness of the brakes by allowing the rear
brakes to supply a greater proportion of
the braking force. It functions by adjusting
the distribution of braking force to the rear
wheels in accordance with the vehicle’s
loading condition and speed.
The EBD system is an integral part of the
ABS and uses some of the ABS compo-
nents to perform its function of optimizing
the distribution of braking force. If any of
the ABS components used by the EBD
system malfunction, the EBD system also
stops working.
When the EBD system is operating, you
may hear a chattering noise or feel a slight
vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal
and does not indicate a malfunction.
& Steps to take if EBD system
malfunctions
Type A
Type B
If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,
the system stops working and the brake
Starting and operating/Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system
– CONTINUED –
7-33
7
Black plate (426,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
system warning light and ABS warning
light illuminate simultaneously.
The EBD system may be malfunctioning if
the brake system warning light and ABS
warning light illuminate simultaneously
during driving.
Even if the EBD system malfunctions, the
conventional braking system will still func-
tion. However, the rear wheels will be
more prone to locking when the brakes
are applied harder than usual and the
vehicle’s motion may therefore become
somewhat harder to control.
If the brake system warning light and ABS
warni ng light illuminate simultaneously,
take the following steps.
1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe,
flat location.
2. Apply the parking brake and turn off
the engine.
3. Restart the engine.
4. Release the parking brake.
Even if both warning lights turn off:
The EBD system may be malfunctioning.
Drive carefully to the nearest SUBARU
dealer and have the system inspected.
If both warning lights illuminate again
and remain illuminated after restarting
the engine:
1. Turn off the engine again.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Check the brake fluid level. For details
about checking the brake fluid level, refer
to “Checking the fluid level” F11-16.
. If the brake fluid level is not below the
“MIN” mark, the EBD system may be
malfunctioning. Drive carefully to the
nearest SUBARU dealer and have the
system inspected.
. If the brake fluid level is below the
“MIN” mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle.
Instead, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for repair.
WARNING
. Driving with the brak e system
warning light illuminated is dan-
gerous. This indicates your brake
system may not be working
properly. If the light remai ns
illuminated, have the brakes in-
spected by a SUBARU dealer
immediately.
. If at all in doubt about whether
the brakes are operating prop-
erly, do not drive the ve hicle.
Have your vehicle towed to the
nearest SUBARU dealer for re-
pair.
Vehicle Dynamics Control
system
& Safety precautions
WARNING
Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence because
you are driving a vehicle with the
Vehicle Dynamics Control system
could easily lead to a serious acci-
dent.
CAUTION
. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with Vehicle Dynamics Control
system, winter tires should be
used when driving on snow-cov-
ered or icy roads; in addition,
vehicle speed should be reduced
considerably. Simply having a
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem does not guarantee that the
vehicle will be able to avoid
accidents in any situation.
. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control system is an
indication that the road being
travelled on has a slippery sur-
7-34
Black plate (427,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
face; since having Vehicle Dy-
namics Control is no guarantee
that full vehicle control will be
maintained at all times and under
all conditions, its activation
should be seen as a sign that
the speed of the vehicle should
be reduced considerably.
. Whenever suspension compo-
nents, steering components, or
an axle are removed from a
vehicle, have an inspection of
that system performed by an
authorized SUBARU dealer.
. The following precautions should
be observed in order to ensure
that the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system is operating properly:
– All four wheels should be
fitted with tires of the same
size, type, and brand. Further-
more, the amount of wear
should be the same for all
four tires.
– Keep the tire pressure at the
proper level as shown on the
vehicle placard attached to
the driver’s side door pillar.
– Use only the specified tem-
porary spare tire to replace a
flat tire. With a temporary
spare tire, the effectiveness of
the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system is reduced and this
should be taken into account
when driving the vehicle in
such a condition.
. If non-matching tires are used,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system may not operate cor-
rectly.
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control
system helps prevent unstable
vehicle motion such as skidding
using control of the brakes and
engine power. Do not turn off the
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem unless it is absolutely ne-
cessary. If you must turn off the
Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem, drive very carefully accord-
ing to the road surface condi-
tions.
& System features
In the event of wheelspin and/or skidding
on a slippery road surface and/or during
cornering and/or an evasive maneuver,
the Vehicle Dynamics Control s ystem
adjusts the engine’s output and the
wheels’ respective braking forces to help
maintain traction and directional control.
. Traction Control Function
The traction control function is designed to
prevent spinning of the driving wheels on
slippery road surfaces, thereby helping to
maintain traction and directional control.
Activation of this function is shown by
flas hing the Vehicle Dyna mics Control
operation indicator light.
. Skid Suppression Function
The skid suppression function is designed
to help maintain directional stability by
suppressing the wheels’ tendency to slide
sideways during steering operations. Acti-
vation of this function is shown by flashing
the Vehicle Dynamics Control operation
indicator light.
NOTE
. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-
tem may be considered normal when
the following conditions occur.
– Slight twitching of the brake
pedal is felt.
– The vehi cle or steering wheel
shakes to a small degree.
– An operatin g sound from the
engine compartment is heard
briefly when s tarting the engine
and when driving off after starting
the engine.
Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
– CONTINUED –
7-35
7
Black plate (428,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
– The brake pedal seems to jolt
when driving off after starting the
engine.
. In the circumstances shown in the
following list, the vehicle may be less
stable than it feels to the driver. The
Vehicle Dynamics Control System may
therefore operate. Such operation does
not indicate a system malfunction.
– on gravel-covered or rutted
roads
– on unfinished roads
– when the vehicle is towing a
trailer (trailer towing permitted with
Crosstrek models only)
– when the vehicle is fitted with
snow tires or winter tires
. Activation of the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system will cause operation of
the steering wheel to feel slightly
different compared to that for normal
conditions.
. It is always important to reduce
speed when approaching a corner,
even if your vehicle is equipped with
the Vehicle Dynamics Control system.
. Always turn off the engine before
replacing a tire. Failure to do so may
render the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system unable to operate correctly.
& Vehicle Dynamics Control
system monitor
Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-
ing light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-
tion indicator light” F3-24 and “Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light” F3-
25.
& Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF switch
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
Press the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
switch to deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system. It may be useful to briefly
deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system under the following situations.
. a standing start on a steeply sloping
road with a snowy, gravel-covered, or
otherwise slippery surface
. extrication of the vehi cle when its
wheels are stuck in mud or deep snow
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator
light (type A)
7-36
Black plate (429,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator
light (type B)
When the switch is pressed during engine
operation, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light “
” on the combination
meter illuminates. The Vehicle Dynamics
Control system will be deactivated and the
vehicle will behave like a model not
equipped with the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system. When the switch is pressed
again to reactivate the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF indicator light turns off.
With the Vehicle Dynamics Control system
deactivated, traction and stability en-
hancement offered by Vehicle Dynamics
Control system is unavailable. Therefore
you should not deactivate the Vehicle
Dynamics Control system except under
above-mentioned situations.
NOTE
. When the switch has been pressed
to deactivate the Ve hicle Dy namics
Control system, the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system automatically reacti-
vates itself the next time the ignition
switch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”
position and the engine is restarted.
. If the switch is held down for 30
seconds or longer, the indicator light
turns off, the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system is activated, and the system
ignores any fur ther pressing of the
switch. To make the switch usable
again, turn the ignition switch to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position and restart the
engine.
. When the switch is pressed to
deactivate the Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol system, the vehicle’s running per-
formance is comparable with that of a
vehicle that does not have a Vehicle
Dynamics Control system. Do not de-
activate the Vehicle Dynamics Control
system except when absolutely neces-
sary.
. Even when the Vehicle Dynamics
Control system is deactivated, compo-
nents of the brake control system may
still activate. When the brake control
system is activated, the Vehicle Dy-
namics Control operation indicator
light flashes.
Starting and operating/Vehicle Dynamics Control system
7-37
7
Black plate (430,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.–spec. models)
Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.
models)
Low tire pressure warning light (type A)
Low tire pressure warning light (type B)
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message
when tire pressure is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven at
speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also,
this system may not react immediately to a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example,
a blow-out caused by running over a
sharp object).
WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead,
perform the following procedure.
Otherwise, an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and ser-
ious personal injury could occur.
(1) Keep driving straight ahead
while gradually reducing
speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a
safe location.
(3) Check the pressure for all four
tires and adjust the pressure
to the COLD tire pressure
shown on the tire placard.
The tire placard is located on
the door pillar on the driver’s
side.
Even when the vehicle is driven a
very short distance, the tires get
warm and their pressures in-
crease accordingly. Be sure to
let the tires cool thoroughly be-
fore adjusting their pressures to
the standard values shown on
the tire placard. Refer to “Tires
and wheels” F11-21. The tire
pressure monitoring system
does not function when the ve-
hicle is stationary. After adjusting
the tire pressures, increase the
vehicle speed to at least 20 mph
(32 km/h) to start the TPMS
rechecking of the tire inflation
pressures. If the tire pressures
are now above the severe low
7-38
Black plate (431,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
pressure threshold, the low tire
pressure warning light should
turn off a few minutes later.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after ad justing the tire
pressure, a tire may have signifi-
cant damage and a fast leak that
causes the tire to lose air rapidly.
If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the low
tire pressure warning light will
illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute.
This indicates the TPMS is un-
able to monitor all four road
wheels. Contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible for
tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting.
. When a tire is repaired with liquid
sealant, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not
operate properly. If a liquid sea-
lant is used, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer or other qualified
service shop as soon as possi-
ble. Make sure to replace the tire
pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the
tire. You may reuse the wheel if
there is no damage to it and if the
sealant residue is properly
cleaned off. Do not inject any tire
liquid or aerosol tire sealant into
the tires, as this may cause a
malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors. If the light illuminates
steadily after blink ing for a p-
proximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU
dealer to have the system in-
spected.
CAUTION
Do not place metal film or any metal
parts in the trunk. This may cause
poor reception of the signals from
the tire pressure sensors, and the
tire pressure monitoring system will
not function properly.
FCC ID: CWTWD1U781
NOTE
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This de-
vice may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, includi ng
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
FCC CAUTION
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equip-
ment.
Starting and operating/Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.–spec. models)
7-39
7
Black plate (432,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/Parking your vehicle
Parking your vehicle
& Parking brake
To set the parking brake, depress the
brake pedal firmly and hold it down until
the parking brake lever is fully pulled up.
To release the parking brake, pull the lever
up slightly, press the release button, then
lower the lever while keeping the button
pressed.
When the parking brake is set while the
engine is running, the parking brake
warni ng light illuminates. After starting
the vehicle, be sure that the warning light
has turned off before the vehicle is driven.
Refer to “Brake system warning light (red)”
F3-21.
CAUTION
Never drive while the parking brake
is set because this will cause un-
necessary wear on the brake lin-
ings. Before starting to drive, always
make sure that the parking brake
has been fully released.
& Parking tips
When parking your vehicle, always per-
form the following items.
. Apply the parking brake firmly.
. For MT models, put the shift lever in the
“1” (1st) for upgrade or “R” (Reverse) for a
downgrade.
. For CVT models, put the select lever in
the “P” (Park) position.
Never rely on the mechanical friction of
the transmission alone to hold the vehicle.
When parking on a hill, always turn the
steering wheel. When the vehicle is
headed up the hill, the front wheels should
be turned away from the curb.
When facing downhill, the front wheels
should be turned into the curb.
7-40
Black plate (433,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
WARNING
. Never leave unattended children
or pets in the vehicle. They could
accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent op-
eration of the vehicle. Also, on
hot or sunny days, the tempera-
ture in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to
cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to people.
. Do no t p ark the veh icle over
flammable materials such as dry
grass, waste paper or rags, as
they may burn easily if they come
near hot engine or exhaust sys-
tem parts.
. Be sure to stop the engine if you
take a nap in the vehicle. If
engine exhaust gas enters the
passenger compartment, occu-
pants in the vehicle could die
from carbon monoxide (CO) con-
tained in the exhaust gas.
CAUTION
If your vehicle has a front under-
spoiler and rear underspoiler (both
optional), pay attention to blocks
and other obstructions on the
ground when parking. The under-
spoilers could be damaged by con-
tact with them.
Hill start assist system
WARNING
. The Hill start assist system is a
device only for helping the driver
to START the vehicle on an uphill
grade. To prevent accidents
when the vehicle is parked on a
slope, be sure to firmly set the
parking brake. When setting the
parking brake, make sure that the
vehicle remains stationary when
the clutch pedal (MT models) and
brake pedal (both MT and CVT
models) are released.
. Do not turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while
the Hill start assist system is
operating. The Hill start assist
system will be deactivated and
may lead to an accident.
The Hill start assist system is a device to
make the f ollowing vehicle operati ons
easier.
Starting and operating/Hill start assist system
– CONTINUED –
7-41
7
Black plate (434,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/Hill start assist system
1) Starting forward facing uphill
2) Starting backward facing downhill
A) Brake pedal (both MT models and CVT
models)
B) Clutch pedal (MT models only)
In both these cases, the Hill start assist
system operates under the following con-
ditions.
. when the clutch pedal is depressed
while the brake pedal is also depressed
(MT models)
. when the vehicle has stopped with the
brake pedal depressed (CVT models)
Braking power is maintained temporarily
(for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hill
start assist system after the brake pedal is
released. The driver is therefore able to
start the vehicle in the same way as on a
level grade, just using the clutch pedal
(MT models only) and accelerator pedal
(all models).
If the braking power of the Hill start assist
system is insufficient after the brake pedal
is released, apply more braking power by
depressing the brake pedal again.
The Hill start assist system m ay not
operate on slight grades. Also, the Hill
start assist system does not operate in the
following cases.
. when starting backward facing uphill
. when starting forward facing downhill
. while the parking brake is applied
. while the ignition switch is in the “ACC”
or “LOCK”/“OFF” position
. while the Hill start assist warning light/
7-42
Black plate (435,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Hill start assist OFF indicator light is
illuminated
When using the Hill start assist system, a
braking effect may be felt even after the
brake pedal has been released. However,
for MT models, this braking effect should
disappear once the clutch pedal is re-
leased.
NOTE
A slight jolt may be felt when the
vehicle begins to move forward after
being reversed.
& To activate/deactivate the Hill
start assist system
CAUTION
While the Hill start assist system is
deactivated, when starting on an
uphill grade, braking power is not
maintained if the brake pedal is
released. Start on an uphill grade
by using the parking brake.
You can activate/deactivate the Hill start
assist system according to the following
procedure.
NOTE
If you make an error when performing
any steps in the following procedure,
place the ignition switch in the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position once and then
start over again.
! To deactivate
1. Park your vehicle in a flat and safe
location and apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position.
3. Restart the engine.
Type A
Type B
4. Confirm the following items.
(1) The brake system warning light
illuminates.
(2) The Vehicle Dynamics Control
warning light turns off.
(3) The Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light turns off.
(4) The ABS warning light turns off.
Starting and operating/Hill start assist system
– CONTINUED –
7-43
7
Black plate (436,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/Hill start assist system
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch
5. Press the Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF switch and hold it until the Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light “
”
on the combination meter illuminates for
30 seconds and then turns off.
6. Within 5 seconds after the Vehicle
Dynamics Control OFF indicator light
turns off, release the Vehicle Dynamics
Control OFF switch.
Hill start assist OFF indicator light (type A)
Hill start assist OFF indicator light (type B)
7. Within 2 seconds after releasing the
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch,
press the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF
switch once again. Then the Hill start
assist OFF indicator light blinks.
8. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position. The hill start assist system
has now been deactivated.
NOTE
While the Hill start assist system is
deactivated, the Hill start assist OFF
indicator light blinks.
! To activate
When the procedure to deactivate the Hill
start assist system is performed again, the
system is activated. When the Hill start
assist system is activated, the Hill start
assist OFF indicator light turns off.
& Hill start assist warning light/
Hill start assist OFF indicator
light
Refer to “Hill start assist warning light/Hill
start assist OFF indicator light” F3-22.
7-44
Black plate (437,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Cruise control (if equipped)
NOTE
For models with EyeSight system:
Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-
ment for the EyeSight system.
Cruise control enables you to maintain a
constant vehicle speed without holding
your foot on the accelerator pedal and it is
operative when the vehicle speed is 25
mph (40 km/h) or more.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under
any of the following conditions.
These may cause loss of vehicle
control.
. driving up or down a steep grade
. driving on slippery or winding
roads
. driving in heavy traffic
. towing a trailer
NOTE
Make sure the cruise control system is
turned off when the cruise control is
not in use to avoid unintentionally
setting of the cruise control.
& To set cruise control
Cruise control main button (except Cross-
trek models)
Cruise control main button (Crosstr ek
models)
1. Press the cruise control main button.
Cruise control indicator light (type A)
Cruise control indicator light (type B)
The cruise control indicator light on the
combination meter will illuminate.
2. Depress the accelerator pedal until the
vehicle reaches the desired speed.
Starting and operating/Cruise control
– CONTINUED –
7-45
7
Black plate (438,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/Cruise control
Except Crosstrek models
Crosstrek models
3. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the
“SET” side and release it. Then release
the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control set indicator light (type A)
Cruise control set indicator light (type B)
At this time, the cruise control set indicator
light is illuminated in the combination
meter.
The vehicle will maintain the desi red
speed.
Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-
creased while driving with the cruise
control activated. Simply depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi-
cle. When the accelerator pedal is re-
leased, the vehicle will return to and
maintain the previous cruising speed.
& To temporarily cancel the
cruise control
The cruise control can be temporarily
canceled in the following ways.
Except Crosstrek models
7-46
Black plate (439,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Crosstrek models
. Press the “CANCEL” button.
. Depress the brake pedal.
. Depress the clutch pedal (MT models
only).
WARNING
For CVT models, you can cancel the
cruise control by shifting the select
lever into the “N” position. However,
do not shift the lever into the “N”
position while driving except in case
of emergency. If the select lever is
shifted into the “N” position, the
engine brake will no longer work.
This could result in an accident.
The cruise control set indicator light in the
combination meter turns off when the
cruise control is canceled.
Except Crosstrek models
Crosstrek models
To resume the cruise control after it has
been temporarily canceled and with vehi-
cle speed of approximately 20 mph (30
km/h) or more, press the “RES/SET”
switch to the “RES” side to return to the
original cruising speed automatically.
The cruise control set indicator light in the
combination meter will automatically illu-
minate at this time.
& To turn off the cruise control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise
control:
. Press the cruise control main button
again.
. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or
“LOCK”/“OFF” position (but only when the
vehicle is completely stopped).
Starting and operating/Cruise control
– CONTINUED –
7-47
7
Black plate (440,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/Cruise control
& To change the cruising speed
! To increase the speed (by the “RES/
SET” switch)
Except Crosstrek models
Crosstrek models
Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES”
side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
the desired speed. Then, release the
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment
will be memorized and treated as the new
set speed.
U.S.-spec. models
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
be increased 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time
by pressing the “RES/SET” switch to the
“RES” side quickly.
Except U.S.-spec. models
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4.4 km/h, the set speed can be
increased 1 km/h each time by pressing
the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES” side
quickly.
! To increase the speed (by accel-
erator pedal)
1. Depress the accelerato r pedal to
accelerate the vehicle to the desired
speed.
Except Crosstrek models
Crosstrek models
2. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the
“SET” side once. Now the desired speed
is set and the vehicle will keep running at
that speed without depressing the accel-
7-48
Black plate (441,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
erator pedal.
NOTE
. U.S.-spec. models
If the difference between the actual
vehicle spee d when the switch is
pressed and the speed last time you
set is less than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the
vehicle speed will be lowered by 1 mph
(1.6 km/h). This occurs because the
cruise control system regards this
operation as that intended to decrease
the vehicle speed.
. Except U.S.-spec. models
If the difference between the actual
vehicle spee d when the switch is
pressed and the speed last time you
set is less than 4.4 km/h, the vehicle
speed will be lowered by 1 km/h. This
occurs because the cruise control
system regards this operation as that
intended to decrease the vehicle
speed.
! To decrease the speed (by the
“RES/SET” switch)
Except Crosstrek models
Crosstrek models
Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “SET”
side and hold it until the vehicle reaches
the desired speed. Then, release the
switch. The vehicle speed at that moment
will be memorized and treated as the new
set speed.
U.S.-spec. models
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4 mph (6.8 km/h), the set speed can
be lowered 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time by
pressin g the “RES/SET” switch to the
“SET” side quickly.
Except U.S.-spec. models
When the difference between the actual
vehicle speed and the set speed is less
than 4.4 km/h, the set speed can be
lowered 1 km/h each time by pressing the
“RE S/SET” switch to the “SET” side
quickly.
Starting and operating/Cruise control
– CONTINUED –
7-49
7
Black plate (442,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA (5–door models — if equipped)
! To decrease the speed (by brake
pedal)
1. Depress the brake pedal to release
cruise control temporarily.
Except Crosstrek models
Crosstrek models
2. When the speed decreases to the
desired speed , press the “RES/SET”
switch to the “SET” side once. Now the
desired speed is set and the vehicle will
keep running at that speed without de-
pressing the accelerator pedal.
& Cruise control indicator light
Refer to “Cruise control indicator light”
F3-31.
& Cruise control set indicator
light
Refer to “Cruise control set indicator light”
F3-31.
BSD/RCTA (5-door models —
if equipped)
The BSD/RCTA consists of rear radar with
Blind Spot Detection and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert.
These functions enable the system to
detect objects or vehicles to the rear,
drawing attention to the driver when
changing a lane or when driving in
reverse.
WARNING
The driver is responsible for driving
safely. Always be sure to check the
surroundings with your eyes when
changing lanes or reversing the
vehicle.
The system is designed to assist the
driver by monitoring the rear and
side areas of the vehicle during a
lane change or reversing. However,
you cannot rely on this system
alone in assuring the safety during
a lane change or reversing. Over-
confidence in this system could
result in an accident and lead to
serious injury or death. Since the
system operation has various limita-
tions, the flashing or illumination of
7-50
Black plate (443,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
the BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light may be delayed or it may not
operate at all even when a vehicle is
present in a neighboring lane or
approaching from either side.
The driver is responsible for paying
attention to the rear and side areas
of the vehicle.
& System features
BSD/RCTA consists of the following func-
tions.
. To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on an
adjacent lane or a vehicle approaching at
high speed while driving the vehicle (Blind
Spot Detection)
. To detect a vehicle approaching from
the right or left while reversing the vehicle
(Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
The system uses radar sensors for the
above functions.
NOTE
The BSD/RCTA radar sensor has been
certified by the radio wave related laws
of the U.S. When driving in other
countries, certification of the country
where the vehicle is driven must be
obtained. For certification in the U.S.,
refer to “Certification for the BSD/
RCTA” F7-57.
! Blind Spot Detection (BSD)
1) Operating range
The system notifies the driver of vehicles
existing in the blind area. If the system
detects a vehicle existing in the blind area,
it warns the driver of dangers by illuminat-
ing the BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light(s) on the outside mirror(s). If the
driver operates the turn signal lever in the
direction where the BSD/RCTA approach
indicator light is illuminating, the system
warns the driver of dangers by flashing the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light.
! Lane Change Assist (LCA)
1) Operating range
The system notifies the driver of vehicles
approaching at a high speed in the
neighboring lanes. If the system detects
a vehicle approaching at a high speed in
the neighboring lanes, it warns the driver
of dangers by illuminating the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light(s) on the outside
mirror(s). If the driver operates the turn
signal lever in the direction where the
BSD/RCTA approach indi cator light is
illuminating, the system warns the driver
of dangers by flashing the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light.
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA (5–door models — if equipped)
– CONTINUED –
7-51
7
Black plate (444,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA (5–door models — if equipped)
! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
1) Operating range
The system notifies the driver of another
vehicle approaching from either side when
driving in reverse. This feature helps the
driver check the rear and side areas of the
vehicle when moving backward.
If the system detects a vehicle approach-
ing from either side while moving back-
ward, it warns the driver of dangers in the
following way.
. The BS D/RCTA approach indicator
light(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.
. A warning buzzer sounds.
1) The detection area of the radar sensors
A) Vehicle that may be detected
B) Vehicle that may not be detected
WARNING
In a parking area in which the
parking lines are drawn diagonally
to driving lanes as indicated in the
illustration above, the system may
detect a vehicle (A) that is coming
across the front of your vehicle.
Also, the system may not detect a
vehicle (B) that is coming across
behind your vehicle. Always be sure
to check the surroundings with your
eyes when reversing the vehicle,
because the detectability of RCTA
is limited.
& System operation
! Operating conditions
The BSD/RCTA will operate when all of
the following conditions are met.
. The ignition switch is in the “ON ”
position.
. The BSD/RCTA warning indicator and
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator are turned off.
. The vehicle is driven at speeds above
6 mph (10 km/h) (except when reversing).
. The shift lever/select lever is in the “R”
position (RCTA only).
The BSD/RCTA will not operate in the
following situations.
. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator is on.
. The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10
km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFF
indicator remains off (except when rever-
sing).
NOTE
. In the following case, the BSD/RCTA
will stop operating and the BSD/RCTA
warning indicator will appear. If the
BSD/RCTA warning indicator appears,
have your vehicle inspected at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.
– When a malfunction occurs in the
system, including the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light
7-52
Black plate (445,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
. In the following cases, the BSD/
RCTA will temporarily stop operating
(or may stop operating) and the BSD/
RCTA warning indicator will appear.
– When the radar sensor becomes
significantly misaligned (If the or-
ientation of the radar sensor is
shifted for any reason, readjust-
ment is required. Have the sensor
adjusted at a SUBARU dealer.)
– When a large amount of snow or
ice sticks to the rear bumper sur-
face around the radar sensors
– When the vehicle is driven on a
snow-covered road or in an envir-
onment in whi ch there are no
objects around (such as in a desert)
for a long time
– When the temperature around
the radar sensors increased exces-
sively due to long driving on uphill
grades in summer, etc.
– When the temperature around
the radar sensors becomes extre-
mely low
– When the vehicle battery voltage
lowers
– When the vehicle battery be-
comes overvoltage
When the above conditions are cor-
rected, the BSD/RCTA will resume
operation and the BSD/RCTA warning
indicator will disappear. However, if the
BSD/RCTA warning indicator has ap-
peared for a prolonged time, have the
system inspected at a SUBARU dealer
as soon as possible.
. The detectability of the radar sen-
sors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA de-
tection may be impaired and the sys-
tem may not operate properly under the
following conditions.
– When the rear bumper around
the radar sensors is distorted
– When ice, snow or mud adheres
to the rear bumper surface around
the radar sensors
– When stickers, etc. are affixed on
the areas of the radar sensors on
the rear bumper
– During adverse weather condi-
tions such as rain, snow or fog
– When driving on wet roads such
as snow-covered roads and
through puddles
. The radar sensors may not detect or
may have difficulty detecting the fol-
lowing.
– Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe-
destrians, stationary objects on the
road or road side, etc.
– Vehicles with body shapes that
the radar may not reflect (vehicles
with a low body height such as
sports cars or a trailer with no
cargo)
– Vehicles that are not approach-
ing your vehicle even though they
are in the detection area (either on a
neighboring lane to the rear or
beside your vehicle when rever-
sing) (The system determines the
presence of approaching vehicles
based on data detected by the radar
sensors.)
– Vehicles traveling at significantly
different speeds
– Vehicles driving in parallel at
almost the same speed as your
vehicle for a prolonged time
– Oncoming vehicles
– Vehicles in a lane beyond the
neighboring lane
– Vehicles travelling at a signifi-
cantly lower speed that you are
trying to overtake
. On a road with extremely narrow
lanes, the system may detect vehicles
driving in a lane next to the neighbor-
ing lane.
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA (5–door models — if equipped)
– CONTINUED –
7-53
7
Black plate (446,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA (5–door models — if equipped)
& BSD/RCTA approach indica-
tor light/warning buzzer
While the BSD/RCTA is active, the follow-
ing item(s) will operate to alert the driver:
. The BS D/RCTA approach indicator
light (when there are vehicles in the
neighboring lanes).
. The BS D/RCTA approach indicator
light and warning buzzer (when a vehicle
is approaching from the left or right side
while your vehicle is reversing)
! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light
It is mounted in each side of the outside
mirrors and will illuminate when a vehicle
approaching from behind is detected. If an
indicator light is illuminated and the turn
signal lever is operated toward the side in
which this light turned on, the indicator
light flashes to warn the driver of dangers.
When reversing the vehicle, the indicator
light flashes when the system detects a
vehicle approaching from either side.
! BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light dimming function
When the headlights are turned on, the
brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach
indicator light will be reduced.
NOTE
. When affected by direct sunlight,
you may have difficulty recognizing
the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light.
. W hen affected by the headlight
beams from the vehicles behind, you
may have difficulty recognizing the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light.
. While the illumination brightness
control dial is in t he fully upward
position, even if the headlights are
turned on, the brightness of the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light will not
be reduced. For details about the
illumination brightness control dial,
refer to “Illumination brightness con-
trol” F3-93.
! BSD/RCTA approach warning buz-
zer (only when reversing)
A warning buzzer sound s along wi th
flashing of the BSD/RCTA approach in-
dicator light to warn the driver of dangers.
The setting of the warning buzzer volume
can be changed by operating the multi
information display of the combinat ion
meter. For details, refer to “BSD/RCTA”
F3-42.
! Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA
approach indicator light/warning
buzzer
. In the following cases, operation of the
BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and
the warning buzzer may be delayed or the
system may fail to issue these warnings.
– When a vehicle moves to the
neighboring lane from a lane next to
the neighboring lane
– When driving on a steep incline or
on repeated sharp uphill and downhill
grades
– When going beyond a pass
– When both your vehicle and a
vehicle driving on a neighboring lane
are driving on the far side of each lane.
– When several narrowly-spaced ve-
hicles are approaching in a row
– In low radius bends (tight bends or
7-54
Black plate (447,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
when making turns at an intersection)
– When there is a difference in height
between your lane and the neighbor-
ing lane
– Immediately after the BSD/RCTA is
activated by pressing the BSD/RCTA
OFF switch
– Immediately aft er the shift lever/
select lever is shifted to the “R”
position
– When extremely heavy cargo is
loaded in the trunk or cargo area
. During reversing, operation of the BSD/
RCTA approach indicator light and the
warning buzzer may be delayed or the
system may fail to issue these warnings
under the following conditions.
– When backing out of an angled
parking space
– When a large-sized vehicle is
parked next to your vehicle (That
vehicle prevents the propagation of
radar waves.)
– When reversing on sloped roads
– When reversing at a high speed
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light may illuminate when driving close to
solid objects on the road or road side
(such as guardrails, tunnels and side-
walls).
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light may flash when turning at an inter-
section in urban areas or a multilane
intersection.
. The BSD/RCTA approach indicator
light may flash and the warning buzzer
may sound if a building or a wall exists in
the reversing direction.
. In the following cases, the system may
detect a vehicle driving two lanes away
from your vehicle.
– When you are driving on the near
side of its lane from the corresponding
vehicle
– When the vehicle driving two lanes
away is driving on the near side of its
lane from your vehicle
& BSD/RCTA warning indicator
! System temporary stop indicator
System temporary stop indicator
This indicator appears when the system is
used under the following conditions.
. Extremely high or low temperatures
. When abnormal voltage exists for the
vehicle battery
. When the radar sensor is significantly
misaligned
Once the above conditions are corrected,
the system will recover from the temporary
stop conditio n and the indicator will
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA (5–door models — if equipped)
– CONTINUED –
7-55
7
Black plate (448,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA (5–door models — if equipped)
disappear. If the indicator remains dis-
played for a prolonged time, have the
system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
! System temporary stop indicator
due to reduced radar sensitivity
System temporary stop indicator due to
reduced radar sensitivity
This indicator appears when the detect-
ability of the radar sensors is reduced.
Once the condition is corrected, the
system will recover from the temporary
stop conditi on and the indi cator will
disappear. If the indicator remains dis-
played for a prolonged time, have the
system inspected at a SUBARU dealer.
! System malfunction indicator
System malfunction indicator
1) At first, this message will appear
2) Then this message will appear
This indicator appears when a malfunction
occurs in the system. Contact a SUBARU
dealer and have the system inspected.
& BSD/RCTA OFF switch
BSD/RCTA OFF switch
BSD/RCTA OFF indicator
If the BSD/RCTA OFF switch is pressed,
the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator appears on
the multi information display of the combi-
7-56
Black plate (449,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
nation meter, and the BSD/RCTA is
deactivated.
Press the switch again to activate the
BSD/RCTA. The BSD/RCTA OFF indica-
tor will disappear.
NOTE
. In the following cases, the system
may not operate pr operly due to
blocked radar waves. Press the BSD/
RCTA OFF switch to deactivate the
system.
– When towing a trailer
– When a bicycle carrier or other
item is fitted to the rear of th e
vehicle
– When using a chassis dynam-
ometer or free roller device, etc.
– When running the engine and
makingthewheelsrotatewhile
lifting up the vehicle
. If the ignition switch is turned to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the last known
status of the system is maintained. For
example, if the ignition switch is turned
to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with the
BSD/RCTA deactivated, the BSD/RCTA
will remain deactivated the next time
the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position.
. If the vehicle battery is disconnected
due to situations such as battery
terminal or fuse replacement, after the
battery is reconnected, the BSD/RCTA
will be activated.
& Certification for the BSD/
RCTA
FCC ID: OAYSRR2A
CAUTION
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
& Handling of radar sensors
Radar sensors
The radar sensors, one on each side of
the vehicle, are mounted inside the rear
bumper.
To ensure correct operation of the BSD/
RCTA, observe the following precautions.
. Always keep the bumper surface near
the radar sensors clean.
. Do not affix any stickers or other items
on the bumper surface near the radar
sensors.
. Do not modify the bumper near the
radar sensors.
. Do not paint the bumper near the radar
sensors.
. Do not expose the bumper near the
rad ar sensors to strong impacts. If a
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA (5–door models — if equipped)
– CONTINUED –
7-57
7
Black plate (450,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Starting and operating/BSD/RCTA (5–door models — if equipped)
sensor becomes misaligned, a system
malfunction may occur, including the
inability to detect vehicles entering the
detection areas. If any strong shock is
applied to the bumper, be sure to contact
your SUBARU dealer for inspection.
. Do not disassemble the radar sensors.
NOTE
If the radar sensors require repair or
replacement, or the bumper area
around the radar sensors requires
repair, paintwork or replacement, con-
tact your SUBARU dealer for assis-
tance.
7-58
Black plate (17,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
New vehicle break-in driving – the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km) ..................................... 8-2
Fuel economy hints ............................................ 8-2
Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............ 8-2
Catalytic converter .............................................. 8-3
Periodic inspections ........................................... 8-4
Driving in foreign countries ............................... 8-4
Driving tips for AWD models.............................. 8-4
Off road driving ................................................... 8-6
Except Crosstrek models..................................... 8-6
Crosstrek models................................................ 8-6
Winter driving...................................................... 8-8
Operation during cold weather............................. 8-8
Driving on snowy and icy roads .......................... 8-9
Corrosion protection .......................................... 8-10
Snow tires ......................................................... 8-10
Tire chains......................................................... 8-11
Rocking the vehicle............................................ 8-11
Loading your vehicle......................................... 8-12
Vehicle capacity weight...................................... 8-13
GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
and Gross Axle Weight Rating) ........................ 8-13
Roof rail (if equipped) ........................................ 8-14
Roof molding and crossbar (5-door models — if
equipped) ........................................................ 8-15
Trailer hitch (Crosstrek models — dealer
option) ............................................................. 8-16
Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-17
If not towing a trailer.......................................... 8-18
Trailer towing (Crosstrek models) .................... 8-18
Warranties and maintenance .............................. 8-19
Maximum load limits.......................................... 8-19
Trailer Hitches ................................................... 8-22
Connecting a trailer ........................................... 8-23
Trailer towing tips .............................................. 8-24
Driving tips
8
Black plate (454,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Driving tips/New vehicle break–in driving – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)
New vehicle break-in driving
– the first 1,000 miles (1,600
km)
The performance and long life of your
vehicle are dependent on how you handle
and care for your vehicle while it is new.
Follow these instructions during the first
1,000 miles (1,600 km):
. Do not race the engine. And do not
allow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpm
except in an emergency.
. Do not drive at one constant engine or
vehicle speed for a long time, either fast or
slow.
. Avoi d star ting suddenly a nd ra pid
acceleration, except in an emergency.
. Avoid hard braki ng, except in an
emergency.
The same break-in procedures should be
applied to an overhauled engine, newly
mounted engine or when brake pads or
brake linings are replaced with new ones.
Fuel economy hints
The following suggestions will help to save
fuel.
. Select the proper gear position for the
speed and road conditions.
. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-
tion. Always accelerate gently until you
reach the desired speed. Then try to
maintain that speed for a s long as
possible.
. Do not pump the accelerator and avoid
racing the engine.
. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
. Keep the engine properly tuned.
. Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure shown on the tire placard, which
is located under the door latch on the
driver’s side. Low pressure will increase
tire wear and fuel consumption.
. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
. Keep the f ront and rear wheels in
proper alignment.
. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage or
cargo.
Engine exhaust gas (carbon
monoxide)
WARNING
. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.
Engine exhaust gas contains
carbon monoxi de, a c olorless
and odorless gas which is dan-
gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
. Always properly maintain the en-
gine exhaust system to prevent
engine exhaust gas from enter-
ing the vehicle.
. Never run the engine in a closed
space, such as a garage, except
for the brief time needed to drive
the vehicle in or out of it.
. Avoi d remaining in a parked
vehicle for a lengthy time while
the engine is running. If that is
unavoidable, then use the venti-
lation fan to force fresh air into
the vehicle.
. Always keep the front ventilator
inlet grille free from snow, leaves
or other obstructions to ensure
that the ventilation system al-
ways works properly.
. If at any time you suspect that
8-2
Black plate (455,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
exhaust fumes are entering the
vehicle, have the problem
checked and corrected as soon
as possible. If you must drive
under these conditions, drive
only with all windows fully open.
. Keep the trunk lid (4-door) or rear
gate (5-door) closed while driving
to prevent exhaust gas from
entering the vehicle.
NOTE
Due to the expansion and contraction
of the metals used in the manufacture
of the exhaust system, you may hear a
crackling sound coming from the ex-
haust system for a short time after the
engine has been shut off. This sound is
normal.
Catalytic converter
The catalytic converter is installed in the
exhaust system. It serves as a catalyst to
reduce HC, CO and NOx in exhaust
gases, thus providing cleaner exhaust.
To avoid damage to the catalytic conver-
ter:
. Use only unleaded fuel. Even a small
amount of leaded fuel will damage the
catalytic converter.
. Never start the engine by pushing or
pulling the vehicle.
. Avoid racing the engine.
. Never turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position while the vehicle is moving.
. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feel
the engine running rough (misfiring, back-
firing or in complete combustion), have
your vehicle checked and repaired by an
authorized SUBARU dealer.
. Do not apply undercoating or rust
prevention treatment to the heat shield of
catalytic converter and the exhaust sys-
tem.
. Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level.
WARNING
. Avoid fire hazards. Do not drive
or park the vehicle anywhere
near flammable materials (e.g.,
grass, paper, rags or leaves),
because the catalytic converter
operates at very high tempera-
tures.
. Keep everyone and flammable
materials away from the exhaust
pipe while the engine is running.
The exhaust gas is very hot.
Driving tips/Catalytic converter
8-3
8
Black plate (456,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Driving tips/Periodic inspections
Periodic inspections
To keep your vehicle in the best condition
at all times, always have the recom-
mended maintenance services listed in
the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Boo klet” per-
formed at the specified time or mileage
intervals.
Driving in foreign countries
When planning to use your vehicle in
another country:
. Confirm the availability of the correct
fuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements” F7-3.
. Comply with all regulations and re-
quirements of each country.
Driving tips for AWD models
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive vehicle could easily
lead to a serious accident.
. When replacing or installing tire
(s), all four tires must be the
same for following items.
(a) Size
(b) Circumference
(c) Speed symbol
(d) Load index
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For the items (a) to (d), you must
obey the specification that is
8-4
Black plate (457,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
printed on the tire placard. The
tire placard i s located on the
driver’s door pillar.
If all of four tires are not the same
for items (a) to (h), serious me-
chanical damage could occur to
the drive train of your car, and
affect the following.
— Ride
— Handling
— Braking
— Speedometer/Odometer
calibration
— Clearance between the body
and tires
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control,
and it can lead to an accident.
CAUTION
If you use a temporary spare tire to
replace a flat tire, be sure to use the
original temporary spare tire stored
in the vehicle. Using other sizes may
result in severe mechanical damage
to the drive train of your vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive distributes the engine
power to all four wheels. AWD models
provide better traction when driving on
slippery, wet or snow-covered roads and
when moving out of mud, dirt and sand.
By shifting power between the front and
rear wheels, SUBARU AWD can also
provide added traction during acceleration
and added engine braking force during
deceleration.
Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehicle
may handle differently than an ordinary
two wheel drive vehicle and it contains
some features unique to AWD. For safety
purposes as well as to avoid damaging
the AWD system, you should keep the
following tips in mind.
. An AWD model is better able to climb
steeper roads under snowy or slippery
conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.
There is little difference in handli ng,
however, during extremely sharp turns or
sudden braking. Therefore, when driving
down a slope or turning corners, be sure
to reduce your speed and maintain an
ample distance from other vehicles.
. Always check the cold tire pressure
before starting to drive. The recom-
mended tire pressure is provided on the
tire placard, which is located under the
door latch on the driver’s side.
. There are some precautions that you
must observe when towing your vehicle.
For detailed information, refer to “Towing”
F9-14.
Driving tips/Driving tips for AWD models
8-5
8
Black plate (458,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Driving tips/Off road driving
Off road driving
WARNING
. Always maintain a safe driving
speed according to the road and
weather conditions in order to
avoid having an accident on a
sharp turn, during sudden brak-
ing or under other similar condi-
tions.
. Always use the utmost care in
driving – overconfidence be-
cause you are driving an All-
Wheel Drive model could easily
lead to a serious accident.
& Except Crosstrek models
Your AWD vehicle is neither a conven-
tional off-road vehicle nor an all terrain
vehicle. It is a passenger car designed
primarily for on-road use. The AWD
feature gives it some limited off-road
capabilities in situations in which the
driving surface is relatively level, obstruc-
tion-free and otherwise similar to on-road
driving conditions. Operating it under other
than those conditions could subject the
vehicle to excessive stress which might
result in damage not eligible for repair
under warranty.
If you do take your SUBARU off road, you
should review the common sense precau-
tions in the next section (applicable to the
Crosstrek models) for general guidance.
But please keep in mind that your vehi-
cle’s off-road capabilities are more limited
than those of the Crosstrek models.
Never attempt to drive through pools and
puddles, or roads flooded with water.
Water entering the engine air intake or
the exhaust pipe or water splashing onto
electrical parts may damage your vehicle
and may cause it to stall.
& Crosstrek models
CAUTION
Frequent driving of an AWD model
under hard-driving conditions such
as rough roads or off roads will
necessitate more frequent replace-
ment of the following items than that
specified in the maintenance sche-
dule described in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
. Engine oil
. Brake fluid
. Manual transmission oil (MT
models)
. Continuously variable transmis-
sion fluid (CVT models)
. Front differential gear oil (CVT
models)
Remember that damage done to
your SUBARU while operating it
off-road and not using common
sense precautions such as those
listed here is not eligible for war-
ranty coverage.
Because of the AWD feature and higher
ground clearance, you can drive your
SUBARU on ordinary roads or off-road.
But please keep in mind that an AWD
SUBARU is a passeng er car and is
neither a conventional off-road ve hicle
nor an all-terrain vehicle. If you do take
your SUBARU off-road, certain common
sense precautions such as those in the
following list should be taken.
! Before driving
. Make certain that you and all of your
passengers are wearing seatbelts.
. Carry some emergency equipment,
such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,
wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone or
citizens band radio.
. Secure all cargo carried inside the
vehicle and make certain that it is not
piled higher than the seatbacks. During
8-6
Black plate (459,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
sudden stops or jolts, unsecured cargo
could be thrown around in the vehicle and
cause injury. Do not pile heavy loads on
the roof. Those loads raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity and make it more prone
to tip over.
. Never equip your vehicle with tires
larger than those specified in this manual.
! During driving
General precautions:
. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-
sary risks by driving in dangerous areas or
over rough terrain.
. Slow down and employ extra caution at
all times. When driving off-road, you will
not have the benefit of marked traffic
lanes, banked curves, traffic signs and
the like.
. Do not drive across steep slopes.
Instead, drive either straight up or straight
down the slopes. A vehicle can much
more easily tip over sideways than it can
end over end. Avoid driving straight up or
down slopes that are too steep.
. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-
cially at higher speeds.
. Do not grip the inside or spokes of the
steering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the
wheel and injure your hands. Instead,
drive with your fingers and thumbs on
the outside of the rim.
. Do not drive or park over or near
flammable materials such as dry grass or
fallen leaves, as they may burn easily. The
exhaust system is very hot while the
engine is running and right after the
engine stops. This could create a fire
hazard.
Precautions when driving under espe-
cially dangerous situations:
. If driving through water, such as when
crossing shallow streams, first check the
depth of the water and the bottom of the
stream bed for firmness and ensure that
the bed of the stream is flat. Drive slowly
and cross the stream without stopping.
The water should be shallow enough that
it does not reach the vehicle’s under-
carriage. Water entering the engine air
intake or the exhaust pipe or water
splashing onto electrical parts may da-
mage your vehicle and may cause it to
stall. Never attempt to drive through
rushing water; regardless of its depth, it
can wash away the ground from under
your tires, resulting in possible loss of
traction and even vehicle rollover.
. If you must rock the vehicle to free it
from sand or mud, depress the accelerator
pedal slightly and move the shift lever/
select lever back and forth between “1”/
“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the
engine. For the best possible traction,
avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
free the vehicle.
. When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission
in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and CVT). For
CVT models, refer to “Selection of manual
mode” F7-26.
! After driving
. Always check your brakes for effec-
tiveness immediately after driving in sand,
mud or water. Do this by driving slowly
and stepping on the brake pedal. Repeat
that process several times to dry out the
brake discs and brake pads.
. After driving through tall grass, mud,
rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there
is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stones,
sand, etc. adhering to or trapped on the
underbody. Clear off any such matter from
the underbody. If the vehicle is used with
these materials trapped or adhering to the
underbody, a mechanical breakdown or
fire could occur.
. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-
road driving. Suspension components are
particularly prone to dirt buildup, so they
need to be washed thoroughly.
Driving tips/Off road driving
8-7
8
Black plate (460,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Driving tips/Winter driving
Winter driving
& Operation during cold
weather
! Maintenance
Carry some emergency equipment, such
as a window scraper, a bag of sand,
flares, a small shovel and jumper cables.
Check the battery and cabl es. Cold
temperatures reduce battery capacity.
The battery must be in good condition to
provide enough power for cold winter
starts.
It normally takes longer to start the engine
in very cold weather conditions. Use an
engine oil of a proper grade and viscosity
for cold weather. Using heavy summer oil
will make it harder to start the engine.
Keep the door locks from freezing by
squirting them with deicer or glycerin.
Forcing a frozen door open may damage
or sep arate the rubber weather strips
around the door. If the door is frozen,
use hot water to melt the ice, and after-
wards thoroughly wipe the water away.
Use a windshield washer fluid that con-
tains an antifreeze solution. Do not use
engine antifreeze or other substitutes
because they may damage the paint of
the vehicle.
SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid con-
tains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-
perature varies according to how much it
is diluted, as indicated in the following
table.
Washer Fluid Con-
centration
Freezing Temperature
30% 10.48F(−128C)
50% −48F(−208C)
100%
−498F(−458C)
In order to prevent freezing of washer
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
the table above when adjusting the fluid
concentration to the outside temperature.
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and
washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
the piping is to o low for the outside
temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
tration appropriately for the out-
side temperature. If the concen-
tration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the reservoir tank.
. State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti-
freeze additive . Washer fluids
containing non-methanol anti-
freeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
or washer system.
! Before driving your vehicle
Before entering the vehicle, remove any
snow or ice from your shoes because that
could make the pedals slippery and
driving dangerous.
While warming up the vehicle before
driving, check that the accelerator pedal,
brake pedal, and all other controls operate
smoothly.
8-8
Black plate (461,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Clear away ice and snow that has
accumulated under the fenders to avoid
making steering difficult. During severe
winter driving, stop when and where it is
safe to do so and check under the fenders
periodically.
! Parking in cold weather
WARNING
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep
snow clear of the exhaust pipe and
from around your vehicle if you park
the vehicle in snow with the engine
running.
CAUTION
. Do not use the parking brake
when parking for long periods in
cold weather since it could freeze
in that position.
. When the vehicle is parked in
snow or when it snows, raise the
wiper blades off the glass to
prevent damage to them.
. When the vehicle has been left
parked after use on roads heavily
covered with snow, or has been
left parked during a snowstorm,
icing may develop on the brake
system, which could cause poor
braking action. Check for snow
or ice buildup on the suspension,
disc brakes and brake hoses
underneath the vehicle. If there
is caked snow or ice, remove it,
being careful not to damage the
disc brakes and brake hoses and
ABS harness.
When parking for long periods in cold
weather, you should observe the following
tips.
1. For MT models, place the shift lever in
the “1” or “R” position. For CVT models,
place the select lever in the “P” position.
2. Use tire stops under the tires to
prevent the vehicle from moving.
! Refueling in cold weather
To help prevent moisture from forming in
the fuel system and the risk of its freezing,
use of an antifreeze additive in the fuel
tank is recommended during cold weather.
Use only additives that are specifically
designed for this pur pose. Whe n an
antifreeze additive is used, its effect lasts
longer if the tank is refilled whenever the
fuel level reaches half empty.
If your SUBARU is not going to be used
for an extended period, it is best to have
the fuel tank filled to capacity.
& Driving on snowy and icy
roads
To prevent skidding and slipping, avoid
sudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-
speed driving, and sharp turning when
driving on snowy or icy roads.
Always maintain ample distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you
to avoid the need for sudden braking.
To supplement the foot brake, use the
engine brake effectively to control the
vehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gear
when necessary.)
Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-
vior can cause the wheels to lock, possibly
leading to loss of vehicle control.
An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-
hances your vehicle’s braki ng per for-
manceonsnowyandicyroads.For
information on braking on slippery sur-
faces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock Brake
System)” F7-32 and “Vehicle Dynamics
Control system” F7-34.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control on
slippery roads such as snowy or icy
roads. This may cause loss of
Driving tips/Winter driving
– CONTINUED –
8-9
8
Black plate (462,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Driving tips/Winter driving
vehicle control.
CAUTION
Avoid prolonged continuous driving
in snowstorms. Snow will enter the
engine’s intake s yst em and may
hinder the airflow, which could re-
sult in engine shutdown or even
breakdown.
! Wiper operation when snowing
Before driving in cold weather, make sure
the wiper blades are not frozen to the
windshield or rear window.
If the wiper blades are frozen to the
windshield or rear window, perform the
following procedure.
. To thaw the windshield wiper blades,
use the defroster with the airflow selection
in “
” and the temperature set for
maximum warmth until the wiper blades
are completely thawed. Refer to “Climate
control” F4-1.
. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiper
deicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw the
windshield wiper blades. Refer to “Defog-
ger and deicer” F3-108.
. To thaw the rear wiper blade, use the
rear window defogger. Refer to “Defogger
and deicer” F3-108.
When driving in snow, if frozen snow starts
to stick on the surface of the windshield
despite wiper operation, use the defroster
with the airflow selection in “
” and the
temperature set for ma ximum warmth.
After the windshield gets warmed enough
to melt the frozen snow on it, wash it away
using the windshield washer. Refer to
“Windshield washer” F3-98.
Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents the
wiper from working effectively. If snow is
stuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road to
a safe place, then remove it. If you stop
the vehicle at road side, use the hazard
warning flasher to alert other drivers.
Refer to “Hazard warning flasher” F3-8.
We recommend use of non-freezing type
wiper blades (winter blades) during the
seasons you could have snow and freez-
ing temperatures. Blades of this type give
superior wiping performance in snowy
conditions. Be sure to use blades that
are suitable for your vehicle.
CAUTION
During high -speed driving , non-
freezing type wiper blades may not
perform as well as standard wiper
blades. If this happens, reduce the
vehicle speed.
NOTE
When the season requiring non-freez-
ing type wiper blades is over, replace
them with standard wiper blades.
& Corrosion protection
Refer to “Corrosion protection” F10-4.
& Snow tires
WARNING
. When replacing or installing win-
ter tire(s), all four tires must be
the same for following items.
(a) Size
(b) Circumference
(c) Speed symbol
(d) Load index
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For the items (a) to (d), you must
obey the specification that is
printed on the tire placard. The
8-10
Black plate (463,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
tire placard i s located on the
driver’s door pillar.
If all of four winter tires are not
the same for items (a) to (h),
serious mechanical damage
could occur to the drive train of
your car, and affect the following.
— Ride
— Handling
— Braking
— Speedometer/Odometer
calibration
— Clearance between the body
and tires
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control,
and it can lead to an accident.
. Do not use a combination of
radial, belted bias or bias tires
since it may cause dangerous
handling characteristics and lead
to an accident.
Your vehicle is equipped with “all season
tires” as original equipment, which are
designed to provide an adequate measure
of traction, handling and braking perfor-
mance in year-round driving. In winter, it
may be possible to enhance performance
through use of tires designed specifically
for winter driving conditions.
When you choose to install winter tires on
your vehicle, be sure to use the correct tire
size and type. You must install four winter
tires that are of the same size, construc-
tion, brand and load range and you should
never mix radial, belted bias or bias tires
since this may result in dangerous hand-
ling characteristics. When you choose a
tire, make sure that there is enough
clearance between the tire and vehicle
body.
Remember to drive with care at all times
regardless of the type of tires on your
vehicle.
& Tire chains
CAUTION
Tire chains cannot be used on your
vehicle because of the lack of
clearance between the tires and
vehicle body.
NOTE
When tire chains cannot be used, use
of another type of traction device (such
as spring chains) may be acceptable if
use on your vehicle is recommended
by the device manufacturer, taking into
account tire size and road conditions.
Follow the device manufacturer’s in-
structions, especially regarding max-
imum vehicle speed.
To help avoid damage to your vehicle,
drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle,
and do not spin your wheels. Damage
caused to your vehicle by use of a
traction device is not covered under
warranty.
Make certain that any traction device
you use is an SAE class S device, and
use it on the front wheels only. Always
use the utmost care when driving with
a traction device. Overconfidence be-
cause you are using a traction device
could easily lead to a serious accident.
& Rocking the vehicle
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-
erator pedal slightly and move the shift
lever/select lever back and forth between
“1”/“D” and “R” repeatedly. Do not race the
engine. For the best possible traction,
avoid spinning the wheels when trying to
free the vehicle.
When the road surface is extremely
slippery, you can obtain better traction by
starting the vehicle with the transmission
Driving tips/Winter driving
– CONTINUED –
8-11
8
Black plate (464,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Driving tips/Loading your vehicle
in 2nd than 1st (both for MT and CVT
models).
If your ve hicle is a CVT model , for
information about holding the transmission
in the 2nd position, refer to “Selection of
manual mode” F7-26.
Loading your vehicle
WARNING
. Never allow passengers to ride
on a folded rear seatback, in the
trunk or in the cargo area. Doing
so may result in serious injury.
. Never stack luggage or other
cargo higher than the top of the
seatback because it could tumble
forward and injure passengers in
the event of a sudden stop or
accident. Keep luggage or cargo
low, as close t o the fl oor a s
possible.
WARNING
. When you carry something inside
the vehicle, secure it whenever
you can to prevent it from being
thrown around inside the vehicle
during sudden stops, sharp turns
or in an accident.
. Do not pile heavy loads on the
roof. These loads raise the vehi-
cle’s center of gravity and make it
more prone to tip over.
. Secure lengthy items properly to
prevent them from shooting for-
ward and causing serious injury
during a sudden stop.
. Never exceed the maximum load
limit. If you do, some parts on
your vehicle can break, or it can
change the w ay your vehicle
handles. This could result in loss
of control and cause personal
injury. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
. Do not place anything on the rear
shelf behind the rear seatback
(for 4-door) or the extended car-
go area cover (for 5-door). Such
items could tumble forward in the
event of a sudden stop or a
collision. This could cause ser-
8-12
Black plate (465,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
ious injury.
CAUTION
Do not carry spray cans, containers
with flammable or corrosive liquids
or any other dangerous items inside
the vehicle.
NOTE
For better fuel economy, do not carry
unneeded cargo.
& Vehicle capacity weight
Vehicle placard
The load capacit y of y our vehicle is
determined by weight, not by available
cargo space. The maximum load you can
carry in your vehicle is shown on the
vehicle placard attached to the driver’s
side door pillar. It includes the total weight
of the driver and all passengers and their
belongings, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,
etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.
& GVWR and GAWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating and
Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Certification label
The certification label attached to the
bottom of driver’s side door pillar shows
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) and
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).
The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) must
never exceed the GVWR. GVW is the
combined total of weight of the vehicle,
fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, any
optional equipment and trailer tongue
load. Therefore, the GVW changes de-
pending on the situation. The GVWR
equals Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle – including standard equipment,
fluids, emergency tools and spare tire
Driving tips/Loading your vehicle
– CONTINUED –
8-13
8
Black plate (466,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Driving tips/Loading your vehicle
assembly) plus the vehicle capacity
weight.
In addition, the total weight applied to
each axle (GAW) must never exceed the
GAWR. The front and rear GAWs can be
adjusted by relocating luggage inside the
vehicle.
Even if the total weight of your luggage is
lower than the vehicle capacity weight,
either front or rear GAW may exceed the
GAWR, depending on the distribution of
the luggage.
When possible, the load should be evenly
distributed throughout the vehicle.
If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, you
should confirm that GVW and front and
rear GAWs are within the GVWR and
GAWR by putting your ve hicle on a
vehicle sc ale , fou nd at a commercia l
weighing station.
Do not use replacement tires with a lower
load range than the originals because they
may lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-
tions. Replacement tires with a higher load
range than the originals do not increase
the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
& Roof rail (if equipped)
1) Roof rail
2) Crossbar
Cargo can be carried on the roof after
securing the crossbars to the roof rails and
installing an appropriate carrying attach-
ment. When installing crossbars and a
carrying attachment, follow the manufac-
turer’s instructions. The roof rail system is
designed to carry loads (cargo, crossbars
and carrying attachment) of no more than
150 lbs (68 kg). Be sure not to exceed
your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR.
CAUTION
. When using a carrying attach-
ment, make sure that the total
carrying load of the cargo, cross-
bars and carrying attachment
does not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg).
Overloading may cause damage
to the vehicle.
. For cargo carrying purposes, the
roof rails must be used together
with the crossbars and any ap-
propriate carrying attachment
that may be needed. The roof
rails must never be used alone to
carry cargo. Otherwise, damage
to the roof or paint, or a danger-
ous road hazard due to loss of
cargo could result.
NOTE
Remember that the vehicle’s center of
gravity is altered with the weight of the
load on the roof, thus affecting driving
characteristics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind
effects will be increased.
8-14
Black plate (467,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Roof molding and crossbar
(5-door models — if
equipped)
CAUTION
. For cargo carrying purposes, the
roof molding must be used to-
gether with a roof crossbar kit
and the appropriate carrying at-
tachment. Otherwise, damage to
the roof or paint or a dangerous
road hazard due to loss of cargo
could result.
. When using the roof crossbar kit,
make sure that the total weight of
the crossbars, carrying attach-
ment and cargo does not exceed
the maximum load limit. Over-
loading may cause damage to
the vehicle and create a safety
hazard.
Cargo can be carried after securing the
roof crossbar kit to the roof molding and
installing the appropriate carrying attach-
ment. When installing the roof crossbar
kit, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
When you carry cargo on the roof using
the roof crossbar kit and a carrying
attachment, never exceed the maximum
load limit as explained below. You should
also be careful that your vehicle does not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) and front and rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). For information
about loading cargo into or onto your
vehicle, refer to “Loading your vehicle”
F8-12. The maximum load limit of the
cargo, crossbars and carrying attachment
must not exceed 176 lbs (80 kg). Place
the heaviest load at the bottom, nearest
the roof, and evenly distribute the cargo.
Always properly secure all cargo.
! Installing carrying attachments on
the crossbars
When installing any carrying attachment
such as a bike carrier, ski carrier, kayak
carrier, cargo basket, etc. on the cross-
bars, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
tions and make sure that the attachment is
securely fixed to the crossbars. Use only
attachments designed specifically for the
crossbars. A set of the crossbars is
designed to carry loads (cargo and attach-
ment) of not more than 165 lbs (75 kg).
Before operating the vehicle, make sure
that the cargo is properly secured on the
attachment.
NOTE
Remember that the vehicle’s center of
gravity is altered with the weight of the
load on the roof, thus affecting the
driving characteristics.
Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hard
cornering and abrupt stops. Crosswind
effects will be increased.
Driving tips/Loading your vehicle
– CONTINUED –
8-15
8
Black plate (468,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Driving tips/Trailer hitch (Crosstrek models — dealer option)
! Removal and installation of the
crossbars
Each of the two roof moldings has two
mounting points for crossbars. Each
mounting point is fitted with a cover. Use
a screwdriver to remove the covers. When
installing the crossbars on the roof mold-
ing, follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
Trailer hitch (Crosstrek mod-
els — dealer option)
WARNING
. Never exceed the maximum
weight specified for the trailer
hitch. Exceeding the maximum
weight could cause an accident
resulting in serious personal in-
juries. Permissible trailer weight
changes depending on the situa-
tion. For possible recommenda-
tions and limitations, refer to
“Trailer towing (Crosstrek mod-
els)” F8-18.
. Trailer brakes are required when
the towing load exceeds 1,000
lbs (453 kg). Be sure your trailer
has safety chains and that each
chain will hold the trailer’s max-
imum gross weight. Towing trai-
lers without safety chains could
create a traffic safety hazard if
the trailer separates from the
hitch due to coupling damage or
hitch ball damage.
. Be sure to check the hitch pin
and safety pin for positive lock-
ing placement before towing a
trailer. If the ball mount comes off
the hitch receiver, the trailer
could get loose and create a
traffic safety hazard.
. Although towing regulations for
trailer or caravan vehicles vary
by state/region, all regulations
agree that specifications such
as the maximum gross trailer
weight must not exceed the les-
ser of the following:
– Maximum gross trailer weight
– Maximum gross tongue
weight
– GVWR
– GAWR
. Failure to comply with the proce-
dures set forth will not only
compromise your safety, but will
also negate your insurance cov-
erageand/ormayviolatethe
state road and traffic acts and
regulations.
. Use only the ball mount supplied
with this hitch. Use the hitch only
as a weight carrying hitch. Do not
use with any type of weight
distributing hitch.
. The standard bumper beam must
be installed after you remove the
trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARU
8-16
Black plate (469,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
dealer for purchase of a standard
bumper beam if you do not have
the original.
. Safety performance is decreased
and there is increased risk of
injury to passengers in the case
of an accident if the trailer hitch
or a standard bumper beam is
not installed. One of them must
always be installed on the vehi-
cle.
. If a trailer hitch is installed, it is
not possible to install the rear
towing hook.
The maximum gross trailer weight and
maximum gross tongue weight are indi-
cated in the following table.
Maximum
gross trailer
weight
Maximum
gross ton-
gue weight
Crosstrek models
1,500 lbs
(680 kg)
200 lbs
(90 kg)
When towing a trailer, refer to “Trailer
towing (Crosstrek models)” F8-18.
& Connecting a trailer
1) Ball mount
2) Hitch pin
3) Safety pin
A) Hitch receiver tube
1. Insert the ball mount into the hitch
receiver tube.
2. Insert the hitch pi n into t he hole
located on the hitch receiver tube so that
the pin passes through the ball mount.
3. Insert the safety pin through the hole
located on the hitch pin securely.
4. Check the ball mount assembly by
pulling on it to make sure it does not come
off the hitch receiver.
1) Hitch ball installation point
2) Hooks for safety chains
5. Attach a hitch ball. Use only a hitch
ball that is appropriate for the ball mount
and your trailer. The hitch ball must be
securely installed on the ball mount.
6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.
7. Connect the trailer and the hitch with
safety chains that will hold the trailer’s
Driving tips/Trailer hitch (Crosstrek models — dealer option)
– CONTINUED –
8-17
8
Black plate (470,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Driving tips/Trailer towing (Crosstrek models)
maximum gross we ight. The chains
should cross under the trailer tongue to
prevent the tongue from dropping onto the
ground in case it should disconnect from
the hitch ball. Allow sufficient slack in the
chains taking tight turn situations into
account; however, be careful not to let
them drag on the ground.
WARNING
Do not connect safety chains to any
part of the vehicle other than the
safety chain hooks.
Hitch harness connector
8. Connect the hitch wire harness’s black
four-pin wire connector to the towing
trailer’s wire harness.
9. Confirm proper function of the hitch
wire harness by individually activating the
brake, stop and turn signal lights on the
trailer.
NOTE
Always disconnect the trailer wire har-
ness before launching or retrieving a
watercraft.
& If not towing a trailer
. Remove the ball mount from the hitch
receiver tube and insert the receiver cover
onto the hitch receiver tube.
. Place the dust cap over the four-pin
connector of the hitch wire harness to
protect against possible damage.
. Occasionally lubricate terminals of the
four-pin connector using terminal grease.
Trailer towing (Crosstrek
models)
CAUTION
This “Trailer towing” section is
applicable for Crosstrek models.
Other vehicle models are neither
designed nor intended to be used
for trailer towing. Therefore, never
tow a trailer with other vehicle
models.
Your vehicle is designed and intended to
be used primarily as a passenger-carrying
vehicle. Towing a trailer puts additional
loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,
brakes, tires and suspension and has an
adverse effect on fuel economy.
If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safety
and satisfaction depend upon proper use
of correct equipment and cautious opera-
tion of your vehicle. Seek the advice of
your SUBARU dealer to assist you in
purchasing a hitch and other necessary
towing equipment appropriate for your
vehicle. Do not use towing equipment
other than genuine SUBARU towing
equipment. In addition, be sure to follow
the instructions for proper installation and
use provided by the trailer or caravan’s
8-18
Black plate (471,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
manufacturer.
SUBARU assumes no responsibility for
injuries or vehicle damage that result from
trailer towing equipme nt, or from any
errors or omissions in the instructions
accompanying such equipment or for your
failure to follow the proper instructions.
Regularly check that the hitch mounting
bolts and nuts are tightened securely.
& Warranties and maintenance
SUBARU warranties do not apply to
vehicle damage or malfunction caused
by trailer towing. If you use your vehicle to
tow a trailer, more frequent maintenance
will be required due to the additional load.
(Refer to “Maintenance schedule under
severe driving conditions” in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet”.)
Under no circumstances should a trailer
be towed with a new vehicle or a vehicle
with any new powertrain component (en-
gine, transmission, differential, wheel
bearings, etc.) for the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) of driving.
& Maximum load limits
WARNING
Never excee d the maximum load
limits explained in the following.
Exceeding the maximum load limits
could cause personal injury and/or
vehicle damage.
CAUTION
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight.
. Before towing a trailer, check the
trailer total weight, GVW, GAWs
and tongue load. Make sure the
load and its distribution in your
vehicle and trailer are accepta-
ble.
! Total trailer weight
Total trailer weight
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus
its cargo load) must never exceed the
maximum total trailer weight in the follow-
ing table.
Driving tips/Trailer towing (Crosstrek models)
– CONTINUED –
8-19
8
Black plate (472,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Driving tips/Trailer towing (Crosstrek models)
Crosstrek models
Conditions Maximum total trailer weight
When towing a trailer without brakes. 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
When towing a trailer with brakes. 1,500 lbs (680 kg)
When towing a trailer on a long uphill grade
continuously for over 5 miles (8 km) with an
outside temperature of 1048F (408C) or above.
750 lbs (340 kg)
! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) and
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR)
Gross Vehicle Weight
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the
combined total of the weight of the vehicle,
driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,
trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment installed on your vehi cle.
Therefore, the GVW changes depending
on the situation. Determine the GVW each
time before going on a trip by putting your
vehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.
8-20
Black plate (473,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Certification label
GVWR of your vehicle that is given by
SUBARU is shown on the certification
label located at the bottom of driver’s side
door pillar of your vehicle.
! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) and
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Gross Axle Weight
The total weight applied to each axle
(GAW) must never exceed the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). The front and rear
GAWs can be adjusted by relocating
passengers and luggage inside the vehi-
cle. The front and rear GAWR of your
vehicle that is given by SUBARU are also
shown on the certification label located at
the bottom of driver’s side door pillar.
To check both GVWR and GAWR and to
confirm that the total weight and weight
distribution are within safe driving limits,
you should have your vehicle and trailer
weighed at a commercial weighing station.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
! Tongue load
Tongue load
Ensure that the trailer tongue load is from
8 to 11 percent of the total trailer weight
and does not exceed the maximum value
of 200 lbs (90 kg).
NOTE
For vehicles with trailer brakes, the
trailer tongue load exceeds 200 lbs (90
kg) when calculated at 8% of the
maximum total trailer weight.
Even in this case, the maximum value
is 200 lbs (90 kg).
Driving tips/Trailer towing (Crosstrek models)
– CONTINUED –
8-21
8
Black plate (474,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Driving tips/Trailer towing (Crosstrek models)
1) Jack
2) Bathroom scale
The tongue load can be weighed with a
bathroom scale as shown in the illustration
above. When weighing the tongue load,
be sure to position the towing coupler at
the height at which it would be during
actual towing, using a jack as shown.
F: Front
The tongue load can be adjusted by
proper distribution of the load in the trailer.
Never load the trailer with more weight in
the back than in the front; approximately
60 percent of the trailer load should be in
the front and approximately 40 percent in
the rear. Also, distribute the load as evenly
as possible on both the left and right
sides.
Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to
prevent a change in weight distribution
while driving.
WARNING
If the trailer is loaded with more
weight in the back of trailer’s axle
than in the front, the load is taken off
the rear axle of the towing vehicle.
This may cause the rear wheels to
skid, especially during braking or
when vehicle speed is reduced dur-
ing corne ring, r esultin g in over-
steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.
& Trailer Hitches
WARNING
Never drill the frame or under-body
of your vehicle to install a commer-
cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-
ous exhaust gas, water or mud may
enter the passenger compartment
through the drilled hole. Exhaust
gas contains carbon monoxide, a
colorless and odorless gas which is
dangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.
Also, drilling the frame or under-
body of your vehicle could cause
deterioration of strength of your
vehicle and cause corrosion around
the drilled hole.
CAUTION
. Do not modify the vehicle ex-
haust system, brake system, or
other systems when installing a
8-22
Black plate (475,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
hitch or other trailer towing
equipment.
. Do not use axle-mounted hitches
as they can cause damage to the
axle housing, wheel bearings,
wheels or tires.
Do not use a trailer hitch other than
genuine SUBARU trailer hitch. A genuine
SUBARU hitch is available from your
SUBARU dealer.
& Connecting a trailer
! Trailer brakes
WARNING
. Adequate size trailer brakes are
required when the trailer and its
cargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
total weight.
. Do not directly connect your
trailer’s hydraulic brake system
to the hydraulic brake system in
your vehicle. Direct connection
would cause the vehicle’s brake
performance to deteriorate and
could lead to an accident.
If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weight
plus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs
(453 kg), the trailer is required to be
equipped with its own brake system.
Electric brakes or surg e brak es are
recommended, and must be installed
properly. Check that your trailer’s brakes
conform with Federal, state/province and/
or other applicable regulations. Your
SUBARU’s brake system is not designed
to be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulic
brake system. Please ask your SUBARU
dealer and professional trailer supplier for
more information about the trailer’s brake
system.
! Trailer safety chains
WARNING
Always use safety chains between
your vehicle and the trailer. Towing
trailer without safety chains could
create a traffic safety hazard if the
trailer separates from the hitch due
to coupling damage or hitch ball
damage.
In case the trailer hitch connector or hitch
ball should break or become discon-
nected, the trailer could get loose and
create a traffic safety hazard.
For safety, always connect the towing
vehicle and trailer with trailer safety
chains. Two chains should be used in
total, one to the right side and the other to
the left side trailer tongue. Pass the chains
crossing each other under the trail er
tongue to prevent the trailer from dropping
onto the ground in case the trailer tongue
shoul d disconnect from the hitch ball.
Allow sufficient slack in the chains taking
tight turn situations into account; however,
be careful not to let them drag on the
ground.
! Side mirrors
After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,
check that the standard side mirrors
provide a good rearward field of view
without significant blind spots. If significant
blind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan-
dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors that
conform with Federal, state/province and/
or other applicable regulations.
Driving tips/Trailer towing (Crosstrek models)
– CONTINUED –
8-23
8
Black plate (476,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Driving tips/Trailer towing (Crosstrek models)
! Trailer lights
CAUTION
Direct spli cing or other improper
connection of trailer lights may
damage your vehi cle’s electrical
system and cause a malfunction of
your vehicle’s lighting system.
Connection of trailer lights to your vehi-
cle’s electrical system requires modifica-
tions to the vehicle’s lighting circuit to
increase its capacity and accommodate
wiring changes. To ensure the trailer lights
are connected properly, please consult
your SUBARU dealer. Check for proper
operation of the turn signals and the brake
lights each time you connect a trailer to
your vehicle.
! Tires
WARNING
Never tow a trailer when the tem-
porary spare tire is used. The tem-
porary spare tire is not designed to
sustain the towing load. Use of the
temporary spare tire when towing
can result in failure of the spare tire
and/or less stability of the vehicle.
Make sure that all the tires on your vehicle
are properly inflated. Refer to “Tires” F12-
8.
Trailer tire condition, size, load rating and
proper inflation pressure should be in
accordance with the trailer manufacturer’s
specifications. Also check federal, state,
province and/or other applicable regula-
tions.
In the event your vehicle gets a flat tire
when towing a trailer, ask a commercial
road service representative or profes-
sional to repair the flat tire.
If you carry a regular size spare tire in your
vehicle or trailer as a precaution against
getting a flat tire, be sure that the spare
tire is firmly secured.
& Trailer towing tips
CAUTION
. For models equipped with the
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) and
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
driving support systems, when
towing a trailer, press the BSD/
RCTA OFF switch to deactivate
the system. The system may not
operate properly due to the
blocked radar waves. For details
about the BSD/RCTA OFF switch,
refer to “BSD/RCTA OFF switch”
F7-56.
. Never exceed 45 mph (72 km/h)
when towing a trailer i n hilly
country on hot days.
. When towing a trailer, steering,
stability, stopping distance and
braking performance will be dif-
ferent when compared to normal
operation. For safety’s sake, you
should employ extra caution
when towing a trailer and you
should never drive at excessive
speeds. You should also keep the
following tips in mind:
! Before starting out on a trip
. Check the towing regulations for trailer
or caravan vehicles that vary by state/
region. Failure to comply with the proce-
dures set forth will not only compromise
your safety, but wil l also negate your
insurance coverage and/or may violate
the state road and traffic acts and regula-
tions.
. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-
hitch mounting are in good condition. If
any problems are apparent, do not tow the
trailer.
. Check that the vehicle rests horizon-
tally with the trailer attached. If the vehicle
8-24
Black plate (477,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
is tipped sharply up at the front and down
at the rear, check the total trailer weight,
GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, then
confirm that the load and its distribution
are acceptable.
. Check that the tire rating and pressures
are correct.
. Check that the vehicle and trailer are
connected properly. Confirm that:
– the trailer tongue is connected
properly to the hitch ball.
– the trailer lights connector is con-
nected properly and trailer ’s brake
lights illuminate when the vehicle’s
brake pedal is pressed, and that the
trailer’s turn signal lights flash when
the vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper-
ated.
– the safety chains are connected
properly.
– all cargo in the trailer is secured
safely in position.
– the side mirrors provide a good
rearward field of view without a sig-
nificant blind spot.
. Sufficient time should be taken to learn
the “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combination
before starting out on a trip. In an area free
of traffic, practice turning, stopping and
backing up.
! Driving with a trailer
. You should allow for considerably more
stopping distance when towing a trailer.
Avoid sudden braking because it may
result in skidding or jackknifing and loss of
control.
. Avoid abrupt starts and sudden accel-
erations. If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, always start out in first gear
and release the clutch at moderate engine
revolution.
. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns and
rapid lane changes.
. Slow down before turning. Make a
longer than normal turning radius because
the trailer wheels will be closer than the
vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In
a tight turn, the trailer could hit your
vehicle.
. Crosswinds will adversely affect the
handling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-
ing sway. Crosswinds can be due to
weather conditions or the passing of large
trucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmly
grip the steering wheel and promptly begin
decelerating your vehicle at a gradual
pace.
. When passing other vehicles, consid-
erable distance is required because of the
added w eight and le ngth caused by
attaching the trailer to your vehicle.
1) Left turn
2) Right turn
. Backing up with a trailer is difficult and
takes practice. When backing up with a
trailer, never accelerate or steer rapidly.
When turning back, grip the bottom of the
steering wheel with one hand and turn it to
the left for a left turn, and turn it to the right
for a right turn.
. If the ABS warning light illuminates
while the vehicle is in motion, stop towing
the trailer and have repairs performed
immediately by your nearest SUBARU
dealer.
Driving tips/Trailer towing (Crosstrek models)
– CONTINUED –
8-25
8
Black plate (478,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Driving tips/Trailer towing (Crosstrek models)
! Driving on grades
. Before going down a steep hill, slow
down and shift into lower gear (if neces-
sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize the
engine braking effect and prevent over-
heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do not
make sudden downshifts.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, the
air conditioner may turn off automatically
to protect the engine from overheating.
. When driving uphill in hot weather, pay
attention to the following indicators be-
cause the engine and transmission are
relatively prone to overheating.
: Coolant temperature high warning light
: AT OIL TEMP warning light
(CVT models)
If the coolant temperature high warning
light and/or the AT OIL TEMP warning light
illuminates, immediately turn off the air
conditioner and stop the vehicle in the
nearest safe location. For further instruc-
tions and additional information, refer to
the following sections.
–“If you park your vehicle in case of
an emergency” F9-2
–“Engine overheating” F9-13
–“Coolant temperature low indicator
light/Coolant temperature high warn-
ing light” F3-17
–“AT OIL TEMP warning light (CVT
models)” F3-19
. For CVT models, avoid using the
accelerator pedal to stay stationary on
an uphill slope instead of using the
parking brake or foot brake. That may
cause the transmission fluid to overheat.
! Parking on a grade
Always block the wheels under both
vehicle and trailer when parking. Apply
the parking brake firmly. You should not
park on a hill or slope. If parking on a hill or
slope cannot be avoided, you should take
the following steps:
1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedal
down.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks
under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release the regular brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the regular brakes and then
apply the parking brake; slowly release
the regular brakes.
5. Shift into 1st or reverse gear (MT
models) or “P” position (C VT models)
and shut off the engine.
8-26
Black plate (19,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
If you park your vehicle in case of an
emergency ........................................................ 9-2
Temporary spare tire........................................... 9-2
Maintenance tools ............................................... 9-3
Tool locations ..................................................... 9-4
Using the jack..................................................... 9-5
Flat tires............................................................... 9-6
Changing a flat tire.............................................. 9-6
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
(U.S.-spec. models) ........................................... 9-9
Jump starting ..................................................... 9-10
How to jump start............................................... 9-11
Engine overheating ............................................ 9-13
If steam is coming from the engine
compartment.................................................... 9-13
If no steam is coming from the engine
compartment ................................................... 9-13
Towing ................................................................ 9-14
Towing hooks and tie-down hooks/holes ............ 9-14
Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 9-16
Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 9-17
Access key – if access key does not
operate properly ............................................. 9-18
Locking and unlocking....................................... 9-18
Switching power status...................................... 9-18
Starting engine .................................................. 9-19
Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be
opened............................................................. 9-19
If your vehicle is involved in an accident ........ 9-20
In case of emergency
9
Black plate (482,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
In case of emergency/If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency
If you park your vehicle in
case of an emergency
1) Models with multi function display
2) Models without multi function display
The hazard warning flasher should be
used in day or night to warn other drivers
when you have to park your vehicle under
emergency conditions.
Avoid stopping on the road. It is best to
safely pull off the road if a problem occurs.
The hazard warning flasher can be acti-
vated regardless of the ignition switch
position.
Turn on the hazard warning by pushing
the hazard warning flasher switch. Turn it
off by pushing the switch again.
NOTE
When the hazard warning flasher is on,
the turn signals do not work.
Temporary spare tire
WARNING
. Never tow a trailer when the
temporary spare tire is used.
The temporary spare tire is not
designed to sustain the towing
load. Use of the temporary spare
tire when towing can result in
failure of the spare tire and/or
less stability of the vehicle and
may lead to an accident.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the low
tire pressure warning light will
illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute.
This indicates the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) is un-
able to monitor all four road
wheels. Contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible for
tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting.
9-2
Black plate (483,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
CAUTION
Never use any temporary spare tire
other than the original. Using other
sizes may result in severe mechan-
ical damage to the drive train of your
vehicle.
The temporary spare tire is smaller and
lighter than a conventional tire and is
designed for emergency use only. Re-
move the temporary spare tire and re-
install the conventional tire as soon as
possible because the spare tire is de-
signed only for temporary use.
Check the inflation pressure of the tem-
porary spare tire periodically to keep the
tire ready for use. The correct pressure is
60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kg/cm
2
).
When using the temporary spare tire, note
the following.
. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
. Do not put a tire chain on the temporary
spare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,
a tire chain will not fit properly.
. Do not use two or more temporary
spare tires at the same time.
. Do not drive over obstacles. This tire
has a smaller diameter, so road clearance
is reduced.
1) Tread wear indicator bar
2) Indicator location mark
. When the wear indicator appears on
the tread, replace the tire.
. The temporary spare tire must be used
only on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tire
gets punctured, replace the wheel with a
rear wheel and install the temporary spare
tire in place of the removed rear wheel.
Maintenance tools
Your vehicle is equipped with the following
maintenance tools.
. Jack
. Jack handle
. Screwdriver
. Towing hook (eye bolt)
. Wheel nut wrench
In case of emergency/Maintenance tools
– CONTINUED –
9-3
9
Black plate (484,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
In case of emergency/Maintenance tools
& Tool locations
1) Jack handle
A) 4-door models
B) 5-door models
1) Under-floor storage compartment (if
equipped) (Refer to “Under-floor storage
compartment” F6-15.)
2) Tool bucket
3) Spare tire
A) 4-door models
B) 5-door models
1) Wheel nut wrench
2) Screwdriver
3) Jack
4) Towing hook (eye bolt)
A jack handle is stored under the floor of
the trunk (4-door) or the cargo area (5-
door). A jack and a towing hook are stored
in the tool bucket that is located in the
recess of the spare tire wheel.
Also, a tool bag that contains a wheel nut
wrench and a screwdriver is equipped with
the vehicle. Open the tool bag and store
the tools in the tool bucket as illustrated in
order that all tools are ready for use at any
time.
9-4
Black plate (485,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Using the jack
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-
ever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Apply the parking brake securely and
shift the shift lever in reverse (MT models)
or the select lever to the “P” (Park)
position (CVT models).
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher
and have everyone get out of the vehicle.
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire diagonally opposite the tire that
you are going to replace.
5. Take out the jack and jack handle.
Jack-up points
6. Place the jack under the side sill at the
front or rear jack-up point closest to the
tire that you are going to replace.
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack
head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
7. Insert the jack handle into the jack-
screw, and turn the handle until the tire
clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle
higher than necessary.
In case of emergency/Maintenance tools
9-5
9
Black plate (486,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
In case of emergency/Flat tires
Flat tires
If you have a flat tire while driving, never
brake suddenly; keep driving straight
ahead while gradually reducing speed.
Then slowly pull off the road to a safe
place.
& Changing a flat tire
WARNING
. Do not jack up the vehicle on an
incline or a loose road surface.
The jack can come out of the
jacking point or sink into the
ground and this can result in a
severe accident.
. Use only the jack provided with
your vehicle. The jack supplied
with the vehicle is designed only
for changing a tire. Never get
under the vehicle while support-
ing the vehicle with this jack.
. Always turn off the engine before
raising the flat tire off the ground
using the jack. Never swing or
push the vehicle supported with
the jack. The jack can come out
of the jacking point due to a jolt
and this can result in a severe
accident.
1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-
ever possible, then stop the engine.
2. Apply the parking brake securely and
shift the shift lever in reverse (MT models)
or the select lever to the “P” (Park)
position (CVT models).
3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher
and have everyone get out of the vehicle.
4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rear
of the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.
5. Take out the jack, jack handle and
wheel nut wrench.
The tools and the spare tire are stored
under the floor of the trunk (4-door) or the
cargo area (5-door). Refer to “ Mainte-
nance tools” F9-3.
NOTE
Make sure that the jack is well lubri-
cated before using it.
6. Take out the tool bucket and turn the
attaching bolt counterclockwise, then take
the spare tire out.
NOTE
If the spare tire provided in your vehicle
is a temporary spare tire, carefully read
“Temporary spare tire” F9-2 and
strictly follow the instructions.
9-6
Black plate (487,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
1) Notch
2) Valve hole
7. If your vehicle has wheel covers, insert
a flat-head screwdriver into the notch on
the opposite side of the valve hole and pry
the wheel cover to remove it.
8. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheel
nut wrench but do not remove the nuts.
Jack-up points
9. Place the jack under the side sill at the
front or rear jack-up point closest to the flat
tire.
Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jack
head engages firmly into the jack-up point.
10. Insert the jack handle into the jack-
screw, and turn the handle until the tire
clears the ground. Do not raise the vehicle
higher than necessary.
11. Remove the wheel nuts and the flat
tire.
In case of emergency/Flat tires
– CONTINUED –
9-7
9
Black plate (488,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
In case of emergency/Flat tires
12. Before putting the spare tire on, clean
the mounting surface of the wheel and hub
with a cloth.
13. Put on the spare tire. Replace the
wheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.
WARNING
Do not use oil or grease on the
wheel studs or nuts when the spare
tire is installed. This could cause the
nuts to become loose and lead to an
accident.
14. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise
to lower the vehicle.
15. Use the wheel nut wrench to securely
tighten the wheel nuts to the specified
torque, following the tightening order in the
illustration.
For the wheel nut tightening torque, refer
to “Tires” F12-8. Never use your foot on
the wheel nut wrench or a pipe extension
on the wrench because you may exceed
the specified torque. Have the wheel nut
torque checked at the nearest automotive
service facility.
1) Support holder
16. Store the flat tire in the spare tire
compartment. I nstall with the support
holder facing upward and secure the flat
tire by firmly tightening the attaching bolt.
NOTE
If you cannot fix the flat tire firmly, try
turning the support holder upside
down.
17. Store the jack, jack handle and wheel
nut wrench in their storage locations.
9-8
Black plate (489,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
WARNING
Never place a tire or tire changing
tools in the passenger compartment
after changing wheels. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike occupants and cause
injury. Store the tire and all tools in
the proper place.
& Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.
models)
Low tire pressure warning light (type A)
Low tire pressure warning light (type B)
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with the warning message
indicated by sending a signal from a
sensor that is installed in each wheel
when tire pressure is severely low.
The tire pressure monitoring system will
activate only when the vehicle is driven.
Also, this system may not react immedi-
ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example, a blow-out caused running over
a sharp object).
WARNING
. If the low tire pressure warning
light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly. Instead,
perform the following procedure.
(1) Keep driving straight ahead
while gradually reducing
speed.
(2) Slowly pull off the road to a
safe place. Otherwise an acci-
dent involving serious vehicle
damage and serious personal
injury could occur.
(3) Check the pressure for all four
tires and adjust the pressure
to the COLD tire pressure
shown on the vehicle placard
on the door pillar o n the
driver’s side.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire
pressure, a tire may have signifi-
cant damage and a fast leak that
causes the tire to lose air rapidly.
If you have a flat tire, replace it
with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
. When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/trans-
mitter being transferred, the low
tire pressure warning light will
illuminate steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute.
This indicates the TPMS is un-
able to monitor all four road
In case of emergency/Flat tires
– CONTINUED –
9-9
9
Black plate (490,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
In case of emergency/Jump starting
wheels. Contact your SUBARU
dealer as soon as possible for
tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting.
. When a tire is repaired with liquid
sealant, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not
operate properly. If a liquid sea-
lant is used, contact your nearest
SUBARU dealer or other qualified
service shop as soon as possi-
ble. Make sure to replace the tire
pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the
tire. You may reuse the wheel if
there is no damage to it and if the
sealant residue is properly
cleaned off.
If the light illuminates steadily
after blinking for approximately
one minute, promptly contact a
SUBARU dealer to have the sys-
tem inspected.
Jump starting
WARNING
. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.
Do not let it come in contact with
the eyes, skin, clothing or the
vehicle.
If battery fluid gets on you,
thoroughly fl ush the exposed
area with water immediately. Get
medical help if the fluid has
entered your eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and obtain immediate medical
help.
Keep everyone including chil-
dren away from the battery.
. The gas generated by a battery
explodes if a flame or spark is
brought near it. Do not smoke or
light a match while jump starting.
. Never attempt jump starting if the
discharged battery is frozen. It
could cause the battery to burst
or explode.
. Whenever working on or around
a battery, always wear suitable
eye protectors, and remove metal
objects such as rings, bands or
other metal jewelry.
. Be sure the jumper cables and
clamps on them do not have
loose or missing insulation.
Do not jump start unless cables
in suitable condition are avail-
able.
. A running engine can be danger-
ous. Keep your fingers, hands,
clothing, hair and tools away
from the cooling fan, belts and
any other moving engine parts.
Removing rings, watches and
ties is advisable.
. Jump starting is dangerous if it
done incorrectly. If you are un-
sure about the proper procedure
for jump starting, consult a com-
petent mechanic.
When your vehicle does not start due to a
run down (discharged) battery, the vehicle
may be jump started by connecting your
battery to another battery (called the
booster battery) with jumper cables.
9-10
Black plate (491,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& How to jump start
1. Make sure the booster battery is 12
volts and the negative terminal is
grounded.
2. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.
3. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
accessories.
4. Connect the jumper cables exactly in
the sequence illustrated.
In case of emergency/Jump starting
– CONTINUED –
9-11
9
Black plate (492,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
In case of emergency/Jump starting
A) Booster battery
B) Strut mounting nut
(1) Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal on the discharged
battery.
(2) Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the positive (+) term-
inal of the booster battery.
(3) Connect one end of the other
cable to the negative (−) terminal of
the booster battery.
(4) Connect the other end of the cable
to the strut mounting nut of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
Make sure that the cables are not near
any moving parts and that the cable
clamps are not in contact with any other
metal.
5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the
booster battery and run it at moderate
speed. Then start the engine of the vehicle
that has the discharged battery.
6. When finished, carefully disconnect
the cables in exactly the reverse order.
9-12
Black plate (493,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Engine overheating
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radia-
tor cap until the engine has been
shut off and has fully cooled down.
When the engine is hot, the coolant
is under pressure. Removing the
cap while the engine is still hot
could release a spray of boiling hot
coolant, which could burn you very
seriously.
If the engine overheats, safely pull off the
road and stop the vehicle in a safe
location.
& If steam is coming from the
engine compartment
. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down.
. Contact an authorized SUBARU deal-
er.
& If no steam is coming from
the engine compartment
1. Keep the engine running at idling
speed.
2. Open the engine hood to ventilate the
engine compartment. Refer to “Engine
hood” F11-5.
Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If
the fan is not turning, immediately turn off
the engine and contact an authorized
SUBARU dealer for repair.
3. After the coolant temperature high
warning light that has blinked or illumi-
nated in RED turns off, turn off the engine.
For details about the warning light, refer to
“Coolant temperature low indicator light/
Coolant temperature high warning light”
F3-17.
4. After the engine has fully cooled down,
check the coolant level in the reserve
tank. If the coolant level is below the
“LOW” mark, add coolant up to the “FULL”
mark.
NOTE
For details about how to check the
coolant level or how to add coolant,
refer to “Engine coolant” F11-11.
5. If there is no coolant in the reserve
tank, add coolant to the reserve tank.
Then remove the radiator cap and fill the
radiator with coolant.
If you remove the radiator cap from a hot
radiator, first wrap a thick cloth around the
radiator cap, then turn the cap counter-
clockwise slowly without pressing down
until it stops. Release the pressure from
the radiator. After the pressure has been
fully released, remove the cap by pressing
down and turning it.
In case of emergency/Engine overheating
9-13
9
Black plate (494,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
In case of emergency/Towing
Towing
If towing is necessary, it is best done by
your SUBARU dealer or a commercial
towing service. Observe the following
procedures for safety.
WARNING
Never tow AWD models with the
front wheels raised off the ground
while the rear wheels are on the
ground, or with the rear wheels
raised off the ground while the front
wheels are on the ground. This will
cause the vehicle to spin away due
to the operation or deterioration of
the center differential.
& Towing hooks and tie-down
hooks/holes
The towing hooks should be used only in
an emergency (e.g., to free a stuck vehicle
from mud, sand or snow).
CAUTION
. Use only the spec ified towing
hooks and tie-down hooks/holes.
Never use suspension parts or
other parts of the body for towing
or tie-down purposes.
. To prevent deformation to the
front bumper and the towing
hook, do not apply exc essive
lateral load to the towing hooks.
! Front towing hook
1. Take the towing hook and screwdriver
out of the tool bu cket. Take the jack
handle out of the trunk (4-door) or cargo
area (5-door).
2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriver
with vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not
scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-head
screwdriver into the cutout of the cover
and pry open the cover.
3. Screw the towing hook into the thread
9-14
Black plate (495,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
hole until its thread can no longer be seen.
4. Tigh ten t he towing hook se curely
using the jack handle.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the SRS airbag
system in a frontal collision.
! Rear towing hook
1. Take the towing hook and screwdriver
out of the tool bu cket. Take the jack
handle out of the trunk (4-door) or cargo
area (5-door).
2. Pry off the cover on the rear bumper
using a screwdriver, and you will find a
threaded hole for attaching the towing
hook.
3. Screw the towing hook into the thread
hole until its thread can no longer be seen.
4. Tighten the towing hook securely
using the jack handle.
After towing, remove the towing hook from
In case of emergency/Towing
– CONTINUED –
9-15
9
Black plate (496,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
In case of emergency/Towing
the vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.
Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.
WARNING
. Do not use the towing hook
except when towing your vehicle.
. Be sure to remove the towing
hook after towing. Leaving the
towing hook mounted on the
vehicle could interfere with prop-
er operation of the fuel pump
shut off function when the vehi-
cle is struck from behind.
! Front tie-down hooks
The front tie-down hooks are located
between each of the front tires and the
front bumper.
! Rear tie-down holes
1) Rear tie-down hole
The rear tie-down holes are located near
each of the jack-up reinforcements.
WARNING
Use the rear tie-down holes only for
downward anchoring. If they are
used to anchor the vehicle in any
other direction, cables may slip out
of the holes, possibly causing a
dangerous situation.
& Using a flat-bed truck
This is the best way to transport your
vehicle. Use the following procedures to
ensure safe transportation.
1. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position for CVT models. Shift the shift
lever into the “1st” position for MT models.
2. Pull up the parking brake lever firmly.
3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrier
9-16
Black plate (497,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
properly with safety chains. Each safety
chain should be equally tightened and
care must be taken not to pull the chains
so tightly that the suspension bottoms out.
CAUTION
If your vehicle has a front under-
spoiler and rear underspoiler (both
optional), be careful not to scrape
them when placing the vehicle on
the carrier and when removing the
vehicle from the carrier.
& Towing with all wheels on the
ground
1. Release the parking brake and put the
transmission in the “N” position.
2. The ignition switch should be in the
“ON” position while the vehicle is being
towed.
3. Take up slack in the towline slowly to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
WARNING
. Never turn the ignition switch to
the “LOCK”/“OFF” position while
the vehicle is being towed be-
cause the steering wheel and the
direction of the wheels will be
locked.
. Remember that the brake booster
and power steering do not func-
tion when the engine is not
running. Because the engine is
turned off, it will take greater
effort to operate the brake pedal
and steering wheel.
CAUTION
. If transmission failure occurs,
transport your vehicle on a flat-
bed truck.
. For CVT models, the traveling
speed must be limited to less
than 20 mph (30 km/h) and the
traveling distance to less than 31
miles (50 km). For greater speeds
and distances, transport your
vehicle on a flat-bed truck.
In case of emergency/Towing
9-17
9
Black plate (498,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
In case of emergency/Access key – if access key does not operate properly
Access key – if access key
does not operate properly
CAUTION
Keep metallic objects, magnetic
sources and signal transmitters
away from the area between the
access key and t he push-button
ignition switch. They may interfere
with the communication between
the access key and the push-button
ignition switch.
If the locking/unlocking procedures, power
switch procedures or engine start proce-
dures cannot be operated because of
strong radio signals in the surrounding
area or a low battery condition of the
access key, perform the following proce-
dure. When the battery of the access key
is discharged, replace it with a new one.
Refer to “Replacing battery of access key”
F11-44.
& Locking and unlocking
1) Release button
2) Mechanical key
While pressing the release button of the
access key, take out the mechanical key.
Lock or unlock the driver’s door with the
mechanical key in the procedure de-
scribed in “Locking and unlocking from
the outside” F2-5.
NOTE
After locking or unlocking, be sure to
attach the mechanical key back to the
access key.
& Switching power status
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Hold the access key with the buttons
facing you, and touch the push-button
ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the
access key and the vehicle is completed,
a chime (ding) will sound. At the same
time, the status of the push-button ignition
switch changes to either of the following.
. When the keyless access with push-
button start system is deactivated:
“ACC”
. Under other conditions: “ON”
5. When the keyless access with push-
9-18
Black plate (499,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
button start system is deactivated, press
the push-button ignition switch with the
brake pedal released. The status of the
push-button ignition switch then changes
to “ON”.
NOTE
If the power does not switch even
though the above procedure was fol-
lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
& Starting engine
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the select lever into the “P”
position.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Hold the access key with the buttons
facing you, and touch the push-button
ignition switch with it.
When the communication between the
access key and the vehicle is completed,
a chime (ding) will sound. At the same
time, the push-button ignition switch turns
to the “ACC” or “ON” position.
5. After the push-button ignition switch
turns to the “ACC” or “ON” position, while
depressing the brake pedal, press the
push-button ignition switch.
NOTE
If the engine does n ot start even
though the above procedure was fol-
lowed precisely, contact your SUBARU
dealer.
Rear gate – if the rear gate
cannot be opened
In the event that you cannot open the rear
gate by operating the rear gate opener
button, you can open it from inside the
cargo area.
1. Remove the access cover at the
bottom-center of the rear gate trim using
a flat-head screwdriver wrapped with vinyl
tape or a cloth.
2. Locate the rear gate open lever behind
the rear gate trim panel.
In case of emergency/Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be opened
– CONTINUED –
9-19
9
Black plate (500,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
In case of emergency/If your vehicle is involved in an accident
CAUTION
Never operate the rear gate open
lever with fingers because doing so
may cause an injury. Always use a
flat-head screwdriver or a similar
tool.
3. To open the rear gate, turn the lever to
the right position using a flat-head screw-
driver or a similar tool.
If your vehicle is involved in
an accident
CAUTION
If your vehicle is involved in an
accident, be sure to inspect the
ground under the vehicle before
restarting the engine. If you find that
fuel has leaked on the ground, do
not try to restart the engine. The fuel
system has been damaged and is in
need of repair. Immediately contact
the nearest automotive service facil-
ity. We recommend that you consult
your SUBARU dealer.
Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut off
system. When the vehicle sustains an
impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump
shut off system stops supplying the fuel in
order to minimize fuel leakage.
Perform the following procedures to re-
start t he en gine after the system is
activated.
Models without “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
or “ACC” position.
2. Restart the engine.
Models with “keyless access with
push-button start system”:
1. Turn the push-button ignition switch to
the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
2. Restart the engine.
9-20
Black plate (21,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Exterior care ....................................................... 10-2
Washing............................................................. 10-2
Waxing and polishing......................................... 10-3
Cleaning aluminum wheels ................................. 10-3
Corrosion protection.......................................... 10-4
Most common causes of corrosion ..................... 10-4
To help prevent corrosion................................... 10-4
Cleaning the interi or.......................................... 10-5
Seat fabric......................................................... 10-5
Leather seat materials........................................ 10-5
Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 10-5
Climate control panel, audio panel, instrument
panel, console panel, and switches .................. 10-5
Monitor (if equipped).......................................... 10-6
Appearance care
10
Black plate (504,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Appearance care/Exterior care
Exterior care
& Washing
CAUTION
. When washing the vehicle, the
brakes may get wet. As a result,
the brake stopping distance will
be longer. To dry the brakes,
drive the vehicle at a safe speed
while lightly depressing the
brake pedal to heat up the
brakes.
. Do not wash the engine compart-
ment and area adjacent to it. If
water enters the engine air intake
or electrical parts, it will cause
engine trouble or a malfunction
of electrical equipment.
. Do not use any organic solvents
when washing the surface of the
bulb assembly cover. However, if
a detergent with organic solvents
is used to wash the cover sur-
face, completely rinse off the
detergent with water. Otherwise,
the cover surface may be da-
maged.
. For 5-door models, since your
vehicle is equipped with a rear
wiper, automatic car-wash
brushes could become tangled
around it, damaging the wiper
arm and other components. Ask
the automatic car-wash operator
not to let the brushes touch the
wiper arm or to fix the wiper arm
on the rear window glass with
adhesive tape before operating
the machine.
NOTE
When having your vehicle washed in
an automatic car wash, make sure
beforehand that the car wash is of
suitable type.
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s
beauty is frequent washing. Wash the
vehicle at least once a month to avoid
contamination by road grime.
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty
of lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash
the vehicle with hot water and in direct
sunlight.
Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree
sap, and bird droppings should be washed
off by using a light detergent, as required.
If you use a light detergent, make certain
that it is a neutral detergent. Do not use
strong soap or chemical detergents. All
cleaning agents should be promptly
flushed from the surface and not allowed
to dry there. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly
with plenty of lukewarm water. Wipe the
remaining water off with a chamois or soft
cloth.
! Washing the underbody
Chemicals, salts and gravel used for
deicing road surfaces are extremely cor-
rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-
derbody components, such as the exhaust
system, fuel and brake lines, brake
cables, floor pan and fenders, and sus-
pension.
Thoroughly flush the underbody and in-
side of the fenders with lukewarm or cold
water at frequent intervals to reduce the
harmful effects of such agents.
Mud and sand adhering to the underbody
components may accelerate their corro-
sion.
After driving off-road or on muddy or
sandy roads, wash the mud and sand off
the underbody. Carefully flush the suspen-
sion and axle parts, as they are particu-
larly prone to mud and sand buildup. Do
not use a sharp-edged tool to remove
caked mud.
10-2
Black plate (505,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
CAUTION
. Be careful not to damage brake
hoses, sensor harnesses, and
other parts when washing sus-
pension components.
. Be careful not to flush the engine
bottom for a long time. It may
cause damage of some electrical
parts.
! Using a warm water washer
. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)
or more between the washer nozzle and
the vehicle.
. Do not wash the same area continu-
ously.
. If a stain will not come out easily, wash
by hand. Some warm water washers are
of the high temperature, high pressure
type, and they can damage or deform the
resin parts such as moldings, or cause
water to leak into the vehicle.
& Waxing and polishing
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing and polishing.
Use a good quality polish and wax and
apply them according to the manufac-
turer’s instructions. Wax or polish when
the painted surface is cool.
Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,
as well as the painted surfaces. Loss of
wax on a painted surface leads to loss of
the original luster and also quickens the
deterioration of the surface. It is recom-
mended that a coat of wax be applied at
least once a month, or whenever the
surface no longer repels water.
If the appearance of the paint has dimin-
ished to the point where the luster or tone
cannot be restored, lightly polish the
surface with a fine-grained compound.
Never polish just the affected area, but
include the surrounding area as well.
Always polish in only one direction. A
No. 2000 grain compound is recom-
mended. Never use a coarse-grained
compound. Coa rse-grained compounds
have a smaller grain-size number and
could damage the paint. After polishing
with a compound, coat with wax to restore
the original luster. Frequent polishing with
acompoundoranincorrectpolishing
technique will result in removing the paint
layer and exposing the undercoat. When
in doubt, it is always best to contact your
SUBARU dealer or an auto paint specia-
list.
CAUTION
Do not use any agents with organic
solvents on the surface of the bulb
assembly cover. However, if a polish
or wax with organic solvents is
applied to the cover surface, com-
pletely wipe off the polish or wax.
Otherwise, the cover surface may be
damaged.
NOTE
Be careful not to block the windshield
washer nozzles with wax when waxing
the vehicle.
& Cleaning aluminum wheels
. Promptly wipe the aluminum wheels
clean of any kind of grime or agent. If dirt
is left on too long, it may be difficult to
clean off.
. Do not use soap containing grit to
clean the wheels. Be sure to use a neutral
cleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughly
with water. Do not clean the wheels with a
stiff brush or expose them to a high-speed
washing device.
. Clean the vehicle (including the alumi-
num whe els) with water a s soon as
possible when it has been splashed with
sea water, exposed to sea breezes, or
driven on roads treated with salt or other
agents.
Appearance care/Exterior care
10-3
10
Black plate (506,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Appearance care/Corrosion protection
Corrosion protection
Your SUBARU has been designed and
built to resist corrosion. Special materials
and protective finishes have been used on
most parts of the vehicle to help maintain
fine appearance, strength, and reliable
operation.
& Most common causes of
corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion
are:
. The accumulation of moisture retaining
dirt and debris in body panel sections,
cavities, and other areas.
. Damage to paint and other protective
coatings caused by gravel and stone
chips or minor accidents.
Corrosion is accelerated on the vehicle
when:
. It is exposed to road salt or dust control
chemicals, or used in coastal areas where
there is more salt in the air, or in areas
where there is considerable industrial
pollution.
. It is driven in areas of high humidity,
especially when temperatures range just
above freezing.
. Dampness in certain parts of the
vehicle remains for a long time, even
though other parts of the vehicle may be
dry.
. High temperatures will cause corrosion
to parts of the vehicle which cannot dry
quickly due to lack of proper ventilation.
& To help prevent corrosion
Wash the vehicle regularly to prevent
corrosion of the body and suspension
components. Also, wash t he vehi cle
promptly after driving on any of the
following surfaces.
. roads that have been salted to prevent
them from freezing in winter
. mud, sand, or gravel
. coastal roads
After the winter has ended, it is recom-
mended that the underbody be given a
very thorough washing.
Before the beginning of winter, check the
condition of underbody components, such
as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
lines, brake cables, suspension, steering
system, floor pan, and fenders. If any of
them are found to be rusted, they should
be given an appropriate rust prevention
treatment or should be replaced. Contact
your SUBARU dealer to perform this kind
of maintenance and treatment if you need
assistance.
Repair chips and scratches in the paint as
soon as you find them.
Check the interior of the vehicle for water
and dirt accumulation under the floor mats
because that could cause c orrosion.
Occasionally check under the mats to
make sure the area is dry.
Keep your garage dry. Do not park your
vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated
garage. In such a garage, corrosion can
be caused by dampness. If you wash the
vehicle in the garage or put the vehicle
into the garage when wet or covered with
snow, that can cause dampness.
If your vehicle is operated in cold weather
and/or in areas where road salts and other
corrosive materials are used, the door
hinges and locks, trunk lid lock, and hood
latch should be inspected and lubricated
periodically.
10-4
Black plate (507,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Cleaning the interior
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instru-
ment panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches. (Do not use
organic solvents.)
& Seat fabric
Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with a
vacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on the
fabric or hard to remove with a vacuum
cleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.
Wipe the fabric su rface with a tightly
wrung cloth and dry the seat fabric
thoroughly. If the fabric is still dirty, wipe
using a solution of mild soap and luke-
warm water then dry thoroughly.
If the stain does not come out, try a
commercially-available fabric cleaner. Use
the cleaner on a hidden place and make
sure it does not affect the fabric adversely.
Use the cleaner according to its instruc-
tions.
CAUTION
When cleaning the seat, do not use
benzine, paint thinner, or any similar
materials. Doing so could damage
the surface and cause the color to
deteriorate.
& Leather seat materials
The leather used by SUBARU is a high
quality natural product which will retain its
distinctive appearance and feel for many
years with proper care.
Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on the
surface can cause the material to become
brittle and to wear prematurely. Regular
cleaning with a soft, moist, natural fiber
cloth should be performed monthly, taking
care not to soak the leather or allow water
to penetrate the stitched seams.
A mild detergent suitable for cleaning
woolen fabrics may be used to remove
difficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, dry
cloth afterwards to restore the luster. If
your SUBARU is to be parked for a long
time in bright sunlight, it is recommended
that the seats and head restraints be
covered, or the windows sh aded, to
prevent fading or shrinkage.
Minor surface blemishes or bald patches
may be treated with a commercial leather
spray lacquer. You will discover that each
leather seat section will develop soft folds
or wrinkles, which is characteristic of
genuine leather.
& Synthetic leather upholstery
The synthetic leather material used on the
SUBARU may be cleaned using mild soap
or detergent and water, after first vacuum-
ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow the
soap to soak in for a few minutes and wipe
off with a clean, damp cloth. Commercial
foam-type cleaners suitable for synthetic
leather materials may be used when
necessary.
CAUTION
Strong cleaning agents such as
solvents, paint thinners, window
cleaner or fuel must never be used
on leather or synthetic interior ma-
terials. Doing so could damage the
surface and cause the color to
deteriorate.
& Climate control panel, audio
panel, instrument panel,
console panel, and switches
Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climate
control panel, audio equipment, instru-
ment panel, center console, combination
meter panel, and switches.
Appearance care/Cleaning the interior
– CONTINUED –
10-5
10
Black plate (508,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Appearance care/Cleaning the interior
CAUTION
. Do not use organic solvents such
as paint thinners or fuel, or
strong cleaning agents that con-
tain those s olvents. Doing so
could damage the surface and
cause the color to deteriorate.
. Do not use chemical solvents
that contain silicone on the vehi-
cle audio system, electrical com-
ponents of the air-conditioner or
any switches. If silicone adheres
to these p arts, it may cause
damage to electrical compo-
nents.
& Monitor (if equipped)
To clean the audio/navigation/multi func-
tion display monitor, wipe it with a silicone
cloth or with a soft cloth. If the monitor is
extremely dirty, clean it with a soft cloth
moistened with neutral detergent then
carefully wipe off any remaining detergent.
CAUTION
. Do not spray neutral detergent
directly onto the monitor. Doing
so could damage the monitor’s
components.
. Do not wipe the monitor with a
hard cloth. Doing so could
scratch the monitor.
. Do not use cleaning fluid that
contains thinner, fuel, o r any
other volatile substance. Su ch
cleaning fluid could erase the
lettering on the switches at the
bottom of the monitor.
10-6
Black plate (23,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance schedule ....................................... 11-3
Maintenance precautions................................... 11-3
Before checking or servicing in the engine
compartment.................................................... 11-4
When checking or servicing in the engine
compartment.................................................... 11-4
When checking or servicing in the engine
compartment while the engine is running.......... 11-5
Engine hood ....................................................... 11-5
Engine compartment overview.......................... 11-7
Engine oil............................................................ 11-8
Engine oil consumption...................................... 11-8
Locations of the oil level gauge, oil filler cap and
oil filter ............................................................ 11-8
Checking the oil level ......................................... 11-8
Changing the oil and oil filter.............................. 11-9
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-10
Synthetic oil..................................................... 11-10
Cooling system ................................................ 11-10
Safety precautions ........................................... 11-10
Cooling fan, hose and connections ................... 11-11
Engine coolant ................................................. 11-11
Air cleaner elemen t .......................................... 11-12
Replacing the air cleaner element ..................... 11-13
Spark plugs ...................................................... 11-14
Recommended spark plugs .............................. 11-14
Drive belts ........................................................ 11-14
Manual transmission oil .................................. 11-14
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-14
Continuously variable transmission fluid....... 11-15
Front differential gear oil (CVT models)......... 11-15
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-15
Rear differential gear oil.................................. 11-15
Recommended grade and viscosity .................. 11-15
Brake fluid........................................................ 11-16
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-16
Recommended brake fluid ............................... 11-16
Clutch fluid (MT models)................................. 11-17
Checking the fluid level.................................... 11-17
Recommended clutch fluid............................... 11-17
Brake booster .................................................. 11-18
Brake pedal ...................................................... 11-18
Checking the brake pedal free play .................. 11-18
Checking the brake pedal reserve distance....... 11-18
Clutch pedal (MT models) ............................... 11-19
Checking the clutch function............................ 11-19
Checking the clutch pedal free play.................. 11-19
Hill start assist system.................................... 11-19
Replacement of bra ke pad and lining ............ 11-20
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ....... 11-20
Parking brake stroke ....................................... 11-21
Tires and wheels.............................................. 11-21
Types of tires................................................... 11-21
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (if
equipped) ...................................................... 11-21
Tire inspection................................................. 11-23
Tire pressures and wear .................................. 11-23
Wheel balance ................................................. 11-25
Wear indicators ............................................... 11-25
Tire rotation direction mark .............................. 11-26
Maintenance and service
11
Black plate (24,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance and service
Tire rotation ..................................................... 11-26
Tire replacement .............................................. 11-27
Wheel replacement........................................... 11-28
Aluminum wheels............................................. 11-28
Windshield washer fluid .................................. 11-28
Adding the windshield washer fluid .................. 11-29
Windshield washer fluid ................................... 11-29
Replacement of wiper blades.......................... 11-30
Windshield wiper blade assembly ..................... 11-30
Windshield wiper blade rubber ......................... 11-31
Rear window wiper blade assembly .................. 11-32
Rear window wiper blade rubber....................... 11-32
Battery. .............................................................. 11-34
Fuses ................................................................ 11-35
Installation of accessories............................... 11-36
Replacing bulbs............................................... 11-36
Headlights (models with HID headlights)........... 11-36
Headlights (models without HID headlights)...... 11-37
Front turn signal light ...................................... 11-38
Parking light .................................................... 11-38
Front fog light (if equipped).............................. 11-38
Rear combination lights ................................... 11-38
License plate light ........................................... 11-41
Map light ......................................................... 11-42
Dome light and cargo area light ....................... 11-42
Trunk light....................................................... 11-43
Other bulbs ..................................................... 11-43
Replacing key battery...................................... 11-43
Safety precautions........................................... 11-43
Replacing battery of access key....................... 11-44
Replacing transmitter battery ........................... 11-45
Black plate (513,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance schedule
U.S. models
The scheduled maintenance items re-
quired to be serviced at regular intervals
are shown in the “Warranty and Main-
tenance Booklet”. For details, read the
separate “Warranty and Maintenance
Booklet”.
Canada models
The scheduled maintenance items re-
quired to be serviced at regular intervals
are shown in the “Warranty and Service
Booklet”. For details, read the separate
“Warranty and Service Booklet” .
Except for U.S. and Canada models
Some items of your vehicle are required to
be serviced at scheduled intervals. For
details about your maintenance schedule,
read the separate “Warranty and Main-
tenance Booklet”.
NOTE
For models with a multi function dis-
play, you can set a reminder to be
displayed when a scheduled mainte-
nance item is almost due. For details,
refer to “Maintenance settings” F3-74.
Maintenance precautions
When maintenance and service are re-
quired, it is recommended that all work be
done by an authorized SUBARU dealer.
If you perform maintenance and service
by yourself, you should familiarize yourself
with the information provided in this
section on general maintenance and
service for your SUBARU.
Incorrect or incomplete service could
cause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-
tion. Any problems caused by improper
maintenance and service performed by
you are not eligible for warranty coverage.
WARNING
. Always select a safe area when
performing maintenance on your
vehicle.
. Always be very careful to avoid
injury when working on the vehi-
cle. Remember that some of the
materials in the vehicle may be
hazardous if improperly used or
handled, for example, battery
acid.
. Your vehicle should only be ser-
viced by persons fully competent
to do so. Serious personal injury
may result to persons not experi-
enced in servicing vehicles.
. Always use the proper tools and
make certain that they are well
maintained.
. Never get under the vehicle sup-
ported only by a jack. Always use
safety stands to support the
vehicle.
. Never keep the engine running in
a poorly ventilated area, such as
a garage or other closed areas.
. Do not smoke or allow open
flames around the fuel or battery.
This will cause a fire.
. Because the fuel system is under
pressure, replacement of the fuel
filter should be performed only
by your SUBARU dealer.
. Wear adequate eye protection to
guard against getting oil or fluids
in your eyes. If something does
get in your eyes, thoroughly
wash them out with clean water.
. Do not tamper with the wiring of
the SRS airbag system or seat-
belt pretensioner system, or at-
tempt to take its connectors
apart, as that may activate the
system or it can render it inop-
Maintenance and service/Maintenance schedule
– CONTINUED –
11-3
11
Black plate (514,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance and service/Maintenance precautions
erative. NEVER use a circuit
tester for this wiring. If your
SRS airbag or seatbelt preten-
sioner needs service, consult
your nearest SUBARU dealer.
NOTE
SUBARU does not endorse the use of
non-SUBARU approved flushing sys-
tems and strongly advises against
performing these services on a
SUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU ap-
proved flushing systems use chemi-
cals and/or solvents which have not
been tested or approved by SUBARU.
SUBARU warranties do not cover any
part of the vehicle which is damaged by
adding or applying chemicals and/or
solvents other than those approved or
recommended by SUBARU.
& Before checking or servicing
in the engine compartment
WARNING
. Always stop the engine and apply
the parking brake firmly to pre-
vent the vehicle from moving.
. Always let the engine cool down.
Engine parts become very hot
when the engine is running and
remain hot for some time after
the engine has stopped.
. Do not spill engine oil, engine
coolant, brake fluid or any other
fluid on hot engine components.
This may cause a fire.
. When the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position, the cooling fan
may operate suddenly even
when the engine is stopped. If
your body or clothes come into
contact with a rotating fan, that
could result in serious injury. To
avoid risk of injury, perform the
following precautions.
– Models with push-button start
system:
Always turn the push-button
ignition switch to the “OFF”
position and confirm that the
operation indicator on the
switch is turned off. Then take
the access key out from the
vehicle.
– Models without push-button
start system:
Always remove the key from
the ignition switch.
. Before performing any servicing
on a v ehicle equipped with a
remote engine start system (a
dealer option), temporarily place
the remote engine start system in
service mode to prevent it from
unexpectedly starting the engine.
& When checking or servicing
in the engine compartment
CAUTION
. Do not contact the drive belt
cover while checking the compo-
nents in the engine compart-
ment. Doing so may cause your
hand to slip off the cover and
result in an unexpected injury.
. Do not touch the oil filter until the
11-4
Black plate (515,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
engine has cooled down comple-
tely. Doing so may result in a
burn or other injury. Note that the
oil filter becomes very hot when
the engine is running and re-
mains hot for some time after
the engine has stopped.
& When checking or servicing
in the engine compartment
while the engine is running
WARNING
A running engine can be dangerous.
Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,
hair and tools away from the cooling
fan, drive belt and any other moving
engine parts. Removing rings,
watches and ties is advisable.
Engine hood
CAUTION
. When you open the engine hood,
do not stand the wiper blades up.
Furthermore, while the hood is
open, do not operate the wind-
shield wipers. Doing so could
result in damage to the engine
hood and wiper blades.
. Be extremely careful not to catch
fingers or other objects when
closing the engine hood.
. Do not push the hood forcibly to
close it. It could deform the
metal.
. Be extremely careful opening the
engine hood when the wind is
strong. The engine hood could
close suddenly, possibly causing
injuries from slamming.
. Do not install accessories other
than genuine SUBARU parts to
the engine hood. If the engine
hood becomes too heavy, the
stay may not be able to support
holding it open.
To open the hood:
1. If the wiper blades are lifted off the
windshield, return them to their original
position.
2. Pull the hood release knob under the
instrument panel.
Maintenance and service/Engine hood
– CONTINUED –
11-5
11
Black plate (516,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance and service/Engine hood
3. Release the secondary hood release
by moving the lever between the front
grille and the hood toward the left.
4. Lift up the hood, release the hood prop
from its retainer and put the end of the
hood prop into the slot in the hood.
To close the hood:
1. Lift the hood slightly and remove the
hood prop from the slot in the hood and
return the prop to its retainer.
2. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-
mately 5.9 in (15 cm) above its closed
position and then let it drop.
3. After closing the hood, be sure the
hood is securely locked.
If this does not close the hood, release it
from a slightly higher position.
WARNING
Always ch eck that the hood is
properly locked before you start
driving. If it is not, it might fly open
while the vehicle is moving and
block your view, which may cause
an accident and serious bodily in-
jury.
11-6
Black plate (517,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Engine compartment overview 1) Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid reservoir
(MT) (page 11-16)
2) Fuse box (page 11-35)
3) Battery (page 11-34)
4) Windshield washer tank (page 11-28)
5) Engine oil filler cap (page 11-8)
6) Engine coolant reservoir (page 11-11)
7) Radiator cap (page 11-11)
8) Engine oil filter (page 11-9)
9) Engine oil level gauge (page 11-8)
10) Air cleaner case (page 11-12)
Maintenance and service/Engine compartment overview
11-7
11
Black plate (518,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance and service/Engine oil
Engine oil
CAUTION
. If the level gauge cannot be
pulled out easily, twist the level
gauge right and left, then gently
pull it out. Otherwise, you may be
injured accidentally straining
yourself.
. Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and vis-
cosity.
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/or a fir e. If
engine oil gets on the exhaust
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
& Engine oil consumption
Some engine oil will be consumed while
driving. The rate of consumption can be
affected by such factors as transmission
type, driving style, terrain and tempera-
ture. Under the following conditions, oil
consumption can be increased and thus
require refilling between maintenance
intervals:
. When the engine is new and within the
break-in period
. When the engine oil is of lower quality
. When the incorrect oil viscosity is used
. When engine braking is employed
(repeatedly)
. When the engine is operated at high
engine speeds (for extended periods of
time)
. When the engine is operated under
heavy loads (for extended periods of time)
. When towing a trailer (Crosstrek mod-
els)
. When the engine idles for extended
periods of time
. When the vehicle is operated in stop
and go and/or heavy traffic situations
. When the vehicle is used under severe
thermal conditions
. When the vehicle accelerates an d
decelerates frequently
Under these or similar conditions, you
should check your oil at least every 2nd
fuel fill-up and change your engine oil
more frequently. Different drivers in the
same car may experience different results.
If your oil consumption rate is greater than
expected, contact your authorized
SUBARU retailer who may perform a test
under controlled conditions.
& Locations of the oil level
gauge, oil filler cap and oil
filter
1) Oil level gauge
2) Oil filler cap
3) Oil filter
& Checking the oil level
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position. If you check the oil level
just after turning the ignition switch to the
“LOCK”/“OFF” position, wait a few minutes
for the oil to drain back into the oil pan
before checking the level.
2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,
and insert it again.
3. Be sure the level gauge is correctly
11-8
Black plate (519,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
inserted until it stops.
1) Full level
2) Low level
3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9
Imp qt) from low level to full level
4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.
5. Check the oil levels on both sides of
the level gauge. The engine oil level must
be judged by the lowest of the two levels.
If the oil level is below the low level mark,
add oil so that the full level is reached.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to touch the en-
gine oil filter when removing the
oil filler cap. Doing so may result
in a burn, a pinched finger, or
may cause some other injury.
. Use only engine oil with the
recommended grade and vis-
cosity.
. Be careful not to spill engine oil
when adding it. If oil touches the
exhaust pipe, it may cause a bad
smell, smoke, and/o r a fire. If
engine oil gets on the exhaust
pipe, be sure to wipe it off.
. If the level gauge cannot be
pulled out easily, twist the level
gauge right and left, then gently
pull it out. Otherwise, you may be
injured accidentally straining
yourself.
To add engine oil, remove the engine oil
filler cap and slowly pour engine oil
through the filler neck. After pouring oil
into the engine, you must use the level
gauge to confirm that the oil level is
correct.
NOTE
To prevent overfilling the engine oil, do
not add any additional oil above the
upper level when the engine is cold.
& Changing the oil and oil filter
Change the oil and oil filter according to
the maintenance schedule in the “War-
ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
The engine oil and oil filter must be
changed more frequently than listed in
the maintenance schedule when driving
on dusty roads, when short trips are
frequently made, or when driving in
extremely cold weather.
NOTE
. Changing the engine oil and oil filter
should be performed by a well-trained
expert. Contact your SUBARU dealer
for changing the engine oil and oil filter.
Fully trained mechanics are on standby
at a SUBARU dealer to utilize the
special tools, spare parts and recom-
mended oil for this work, and also,
used oils are properly disposed of.
. If performing oil replacement your-
self, observe the local regulations and
dispose of waste oil properly.
Maintenance and service/Engine oil
– CONTINUED –
11-9
11
Black plate (520,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance and service/Cooling system
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
CAUTION
Use only engine oil with the recom-
mended grade and viscosity.
Refer to “Engine oil” F12-4.
NOTE
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) affects
fuel economy. Oils of lower viscosity
provide better fuel economy. However,
in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity is
required to properly lubricate the en-
gine.
& Synthetic oil
You should use synthetic engine oil that
meets the same requirements given for
conventional engine oil. When using
synthetic oil, you must use oil of the same
classification, viscosity and grade shown
in this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engine
oil” F12-4. Also, you must follow the oil
and filter changing intervals shown in the
Warranty and Maintenance booklet.
NOTE
Synthetic oil of the grade and viscosity
noted in chapter 12 is the recom-
mended engine oil for optimum engine
performance. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
Cooling system
& Safety precautions
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radia-
tor cap until the engine has been
shut off and has cooled down
completely. Since the coolant is
under pressure, you may suffer
serious burns from a spray of boil-
ing hot coolant when the cap is
removed.
CAUTION
. Vehicles are filled at the factory
with SUBARU Super Coolant that
does not require the first change
for 11 years/137,500 miles (11
years/220,000 km). This coolant
should not be mixed with any
other brand or type of coolant
during this period. Mixing with a
different coolant will reduce the
life of the coolant. Should it be
necessary to top up the coolant
for any reason, use only
SUBARU Super Coolant.
If the SUBARU Super Coolant is
11-10
Black plate (521,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
diluted with another brand or
type, the maintenance interval is
shortened to that of the mixing
coolant.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
& Cooling fan, hose and con-
nections
Your vehicle employs an electric cooling
fan which is thermostatically controlled to
operate when the engine coolant reaches
a specific temperature.
If the radiator cooling fan does not operate
even when the coolant temperature high
warning light blinks or illuminates in RED,
the cooling fan circuit may be defective.
Refer to “Coolant temperature low indica-
tor light/Coolant temperature high warning
light” F3-17.
Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.
Refer to “Fuses” F11-35 and “Fuse panel
located in the engine compartment” F12-
12.
If the fuse is not blown, have the cooling
system checked by your SUBARU dealer.
If frequent addition of coolant is neces-
sary, there may be a leak in the engine
cooling system. It is recommended that
the cooling system and connections be
checked for leaks, damage, or looseness.
& Engine coolant
! Checking the coolant level
WARNING
Never attempt to remove the radia-
tor cap until the engine has been
shut off and has cooled down
completely. Since the coolant is
under pressure, you may suffer
serious burns from a spray of boil-
ing hot coolant when the cap is
removed.
1) “FULL” level mark
2) “LOW” level mark
Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.
1. Check the coolant level on the outside
of the reservoir while the engine is cool.
2. If the level is close to or lower than the
“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the
“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank is
empty, remove the radiator cap and refill
coolant up to just below the filler neck as
shown in the following illustration.
Maintenance and service/Cooling system
– CONTINUED –
11-11
11
Black plate (522,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element
1) Fill up to this level
3. After refilling the reserve tank and the
radiator, reinstall the cap and check that
the rubber gaskets inside the radiator cap
are in the proper position.
CAUTION
. Be careful not to spill engine
coolant when adding it. If coolant
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If engine coolant gets on
the exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe
it off.
. Do not splash the engine coolant
over painted parts. The alcohol
contained in the engine coolant
may damage the paint surface.
! Changing the coolant
It may be difficult to change the coolant.
Have the coolant change d by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
The coolant should be changed according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Air cleaner element
WARNING
Do not operate the engine with the
air cleaner element removed. The air
cleaner element not only filters
intake air but also stops flames if
the engine backfires. If the air
cleaner element is not installed
when the engine backfires, you
could be burned.
CAUTION
When replacing the air cleaner ele-
ment, use a genuine SUBARU air
cleaner element. If it is not used,
there is the possibility of causing a
negative effect to the engine.
The air cleaner element functions as a
filter screen. When the element is perfo-
rated or removed, engine wear will be
excessive and engine life shortened.
It is not necessary to clean or wash the air
cleaner element.
11-12
Black plate (523,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Replacing the air cleaner
element
Replace the air cleaner element according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Un-
der extremely dusty conditions, replace it
more frequently. It is recommended that
you always use genuine SUBARU parts.
1) Connector
2) Clip
3) Clamp
4) Air intake boot
5) Clip
1. Unplug the connector that is attached
to the top of the air cleaner case.
2. Detach the connector cable from the
clip on the right side of the air cleaner
case.
3. Loosen the screw on the clamp and
pull the air intake boot out of the air
cleaner case.
4. Unsnap the two clips holding the air
cleaner case (rear).
5. Open the air cleaner case and remove
the air cleaner element.
6. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case
(both front and rear) with a damp cloth and
install a new air cleaner element.
7. To install the air cleaner case (rear),
insert the three projections on the air
cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the
air cleaner case (front).
8. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Maintenance and service/Air cleaner element
11-13
11
Black plate (524,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance and service/Spark plugs
Spark plugs
It may be difficult to replace the spark
plugs. It is recommended that you have
the spark plugs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer.
The spark plugs should be replaced
according to the maintenance schedule
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
let”.
CAUTION
Make sure the cables are replaced in
the correct order.
& Recommended spark plugs
For the recommended spark plugs, refer
to “Electrical system” F12-7.
Drive belts
It is unnecessary to check the deflection of
the drive belt periodically because your
engine is equipped with an automatic belt
tension adjuster. However, replacement of
the belt should be done according to the
maintenance schedule in the “Warranty
and Maintenance Booklet”. Consult your
SUBARU dealer for replacement.
If the drive belt is loose, cracked or worn,
contact your SUBARU dealer.
Manual transmission oil
It is not necessary to check the transmis-
sion oil level. Check that there are no
cracks, damage or leakage. However, the
oil inspection should be performed ac-
cording to the maintenance schedule in
the “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to
“Manual transmission, front differential
and rear differential gear oil” F12-6.
11-14
Black plate (525,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Continuously variable trans-
mission fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmis-
sion fluid level. Check that there are no
cracks, damage or leakage. However, the
fluid inspection should be performed
according to the maintenance schedule
in the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-
let”. Consult your SUB ARU dealer for
details.
Front differential gear oil
(CVT models)
It is not necessary to check the gear oil
level. Check that there are no cracks,
damage or leakage. However, the oil
inspection should be performed according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to
“Manual tra nsmis sion, fro nt differenti al
and rear differential gear oil” F12-6.
CAUTION
Using a differential gear oil other
than the specified oil may cause a
decline in vehicle performance.
Rear differential gear oil
It is not necessary to check the gear oil
level. Check that there are no cracks,
damage or leakage. However, the oil
inspection should be performed according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintena nce Book let”.
Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.
& Recommended grade and
viscosity
Each oil manufacturer has its own base
oils and additives. Never use different
brands together. For details, refer to
“Manual transmission, front differential
and rear differential gear oil” F12-6.
CAUTION
Using a differential gear oil other
than the specified oil may cause a
decline in vehicle performance.
Maintenance and service/Continuously variable transmission fluid
11-15
11
Black plate (526,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance and service/Brake fluid
Brake fluid
& Checking the fluid level
WARNING
. Never let brake fluid contact your
eyes because brake fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If brake
fluid gets in your eyes, immedi-
ately flush them thoroughly with
clean water. For safety, when
performing this work, wearing
eye protection is advisable.
. Brake fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause a dangerous loss
of braking performance.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
CAUTION
. When adding brake fluid, be care-
ful not to allow any dirt into the
reservoir.
. Never splash the brake fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Alcohol contained in the brake
fluid may damage them.
. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
when adding it. If brake fluid
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If brake fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
1) “MAX” level line
2) “MIN” level line
A) The brake fluid level must be checked in
this area.
Check the fluid level monthly.
Check the fluid level on the outside of the
reservoir. Be sure to check the fluid level
for the brake system at the front part of
the reservoir (shaded area in the illustra-
tion). For MT models, this reservoir is
used for both the brake and clutch
systems and has chambers for each
system.
If the fluid level is below “MIN”, add the
recommended brake fluid to “MAX”. Use
only brake fluid from a sealed container.
& Recommended brake fluid
Refer to “Fluids” F12-7.
CAUTION
Never use different brands of brake
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
they are the same brand.
11-16
Black plate (527,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Clutch fluid (MT models)
& Checking the fluid level
WARNING
Never let clutch fluid contact your
eyes because clutch fluid can be
harmful to your eyes. If clutch fluid
gets in your eyes, immediately flush
them thoroughly with clean water.
For safety, when performing t his
work, wearing eye protection is
advisable.
CAUTION
. Clutch fluid absorbs moisture
from the air. Any absorbed moist-
ure can cause improper clutch
operation.
. If the vehicle requires frequent
refilling, there may be a leak. If
you suspect a problem, have the
vehicle checked at your SUBARU
dealer.
. When clutch fluid is added, be
careful not to allow any dirt into
the tank.
. Never splash the clutch fluid over
painted surfaces or rubber parts.
Alcohol contained in the clutch
fluid may damage them.
. Be careful not to spill clutch fluid
when adding it. If clutch flui d
touches the exhaust pipe, it may
cause a bad smell, smoke, and/or
a fire. If clutch fluid gets on the
exhaust pipe, be sure to wipe it
off.
. The fluid level for the clutch
system must be checked at the
inboard side of the reservoir. It
cannot be checked at the out-
board side of the reservoir.
1) “MAX” level line
2) “MIN” level line
A) The clutch fluid level must be checked in
this area.
Check the fluid level monthly.
Check the fluid level on the outside of the
reservoir. Because this reservoir is used
for both the brake and clutch systems and
has chambers for each system, be sure to
check the fluid level for the clutch system
at the inboard side of the reservoir
(shaded area in the illustration). If the fluid
level is below “MIN”,addtherecom-
mended clutch fluid to “MAX”.
Use only clutch fluid from a sealed
container.
& Recommended clutch fluid
Refer to “Fluids” F12-7.
CAUTION
Never use different brands of clutch
fluid together. Also, avoid mixing
DOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even if
they are the same brand.
Maintenance and service/Clutch fluid (MT models)
11-17
11
Black plate (528,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance and service/Brake booster
Brake booster
If the brake booster does not operate as
described in the following, have it checked
by your SUBARU dealer.
1. With the ignition switch in the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position, depress the brake pedal
several times, applying the same pedal
force each time. The distance the pedal
travels should not vary.
2. With the brake pedal depressed, start
the engine. The pedal should move
slightly down to the floor.
3. With the brake pedal depressed, stop
the engine and keep the pedal depressed
for 30 seconds. The pedal height should
not change.
4. Start the engine again and run for
approximately one minute then turn it off.
Depress the brake pedal several times to
check the brake booster. The brake
booster operates properly if the pedal
stroke decreases with each depression.
Brake pedal
Check the brake pedal free play an d
reserve distance according to the main-
tenance schedule in the “Warranty and
Maintenance Booklet”.
& Checking the brake pedal
free play
1) 0.02 – 0.11 in (0.5 – 2.7 mm)
Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position and firmly depress the
brake pedal several times. Lightly pull
the brake pedal up with one finger to
check the free play with a force of less
than 2 lbf (10 N, 1 kgf).
If the fre e play is not withi n proper
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
er.
& Checking the brake pedal
reserve distance
1) More than 2.56 in (65 mm)
Depress the pedal with a force of approxi-
mately 66 lbf (294 N, 30 kgf) and measure
the distance between the upper surface of
the pedal pad and the floor.
When the measurement is smaller than
the specification, or when the pedal does
not operate smoothly, contact with your
SUBARU dealer.
11-18
Black plate (529,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Clutch pedal (MT models)
Check the clutch pedal free play according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet ” .
& Checking the clutch function
Check the clutch engagement and disen-
gagement.
1. With the engine idling, check that there
are no abnormal noises when the clutch
pedal is depressed, and that shifting into
1st or reverse feels smooth.
2. Start the vehicle by releasing the pedal
slowly to check that the engin e and
transmission smoothly couple without
any sign of slippage.
& Checking the clutch pedal
free play
1) 0.16 – 0.43 in (4.0 – 11.0 mm)
Lightly depress the clutch pedal down with
your finger until you feel resistance, and
check the free play.
If the fre e play is not withi n proper
specification, contact your SUBARU deal-
er.
Hill start assist system
Ensure that the Hill start assist system
operates properly under the following
circumstances.
1. Stop the vehicle on an uphill grade by
depressing the brake pedal (all models)
and clutch pedal (MT models only), with
the engine running.
2. Make sure that the vehicle does not
move backward for several seconds after
the brake pedal is released.
3. Then make sure the vehicl e starts
climbing the grade by following the normal
starting procedures.
If the Hill start assist system does not
operate as described above, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
Maintenance and service/Clutch pedal (MT models)
11-19
11
Black plate (530,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance and service/Replacement of brake pad and lining
Replacement of brake pad
and lining
The disc brakes have audible wear
indicators on the brake pads. If the brake
pads wear close to their service limit, the
wear indicator makes a very audible
scraping noise when the brake pedal is
applied.
If you hear this scraping noise each time
you apply the brake pedal, have the brake
pads serviced by your SUBARU dealer as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
If you continue to drive despite the
scraping noise from the audible
brake pad wear indicator, it will
result in the need for costly brake
rotor repair or replacement.
& Breaking-in of new brake
pads and linings
When replacing the brake pad or lining,
use only genuine SUBARU parts. After
replacement, the new parts must be
broken in as follows.
! Brake pad and lining
While maintaining a speed of 30 to 40
mph (50 to 65 km/h), step on the brake
pedal lightly. Repeat this five or more
times.
! Parking brake lining
1. Drive the vehicle at a speed of
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h).
2. With the parking brake release button
pushed in, pull the parking brake lever
SLOWLY and GENTLY (pulling with a
force of approximately 33.7 lbf [150 N,
15.3 kgf]).
3. Drive the vehicle for approximately
220 yards (200 meters) in this condition.
4. Wait 5 to 10 minutes for the parking
brake to cool down. Repeat this proce-
dure.
5. Check the parking brake stroke. If the
parking brake stroke is out of the specified
range, adjust it by turning the adjusting nut
located on the parking brake lever.
Parking brake stroke:
7 – 8 notches / 45 lbf (200 N, 20.4 kgf)
WARNING
A safe location and situation should
be selected for break-in driving.
CAUTION
Pulling the parking brake lever too
forcefully may cause the rear
wheels to lock. To avoid this, be
certain to pull the lever up slowly
and gently.
11-20
Black plate (531,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Parking brake stroke
Check the parking brake stroke according
to the maintenance schedule in the
“Warranty and Mainten ance B ooklet”.
When the parking brake is properly
adjusted, braking power is fully applied
by pulling the lever up 7 to 8 notches
gently but firmly (approximately 45 lbf [200
N, 20.4 kgf]). If the parking brake lever
stroke is not within the specified range,
have the brake system checked and
adjusted at your SUBARU dealer.
Tires and wheels
& Types of tires
You should be familiar with type of tires
present on your vehicle.
! All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide
an adequate measure of traction, handling
and braking performance in year-round
driving including snowy and icy r oad
conditions. However all season tires do
not offer as much traction performance as
winter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snow
or on icy roads.
All season tires are identified by “ALL
SEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) on
the tire sidewall.
! Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed capability
tires best suited for highway driving under
dry conditions.
Summer tires are inadequate for driving
on slippery roads such as on snow-
covered or icy roads.
If you drive your vehicle on snow-covered
or icy roads, we strongly recommend the
use of winter (snow) tires.
When installing winter tires, be sure to
replace all four tires.
! Winter (snow) tires
Winter tires are best suited for driving on
snow-covered and icy roads. However
winter tires do not perform as well as
summer tires and all season tires on roads
other than snow-covered and icy roads.
& Tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) (if equipped)
The tire pressure monitoring system pro-
vides the driver with a warning message
by sending a signal from a sensor that is
installed in each wheel when tire pressure
is severely low. The tire pressure monitor-
ing system will activate only when the
vehicle is driven. Also, this system may
not react immediately to a sudden drop in
tire pressure (f or example, a blow-out
caused by running over a sharp object).
If you adjust the tire pressures in a warm
garage and will then drive the vehicle in
cold outside air, the resulting drop in tire
pressures may cause the low tire pressure
warning light to illuminate. To avoid this
problem when adjusting the tire pressures
in a warm garage, inflate the tires to
pressures higher than those shown on the
tire placard. Specifically, inflate them by an
extra 1 psi (6.9 kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm
2
) for
every difference of 108F (5.68C) between
the temperature in the garage and the
Maintenance and service/Parking brake stroke
– CONTINUED –
11-21
11
Black plate (532,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
temperature outside. By way of example,
the following table shows the required tire
pressures that correspond to various out-
side temperatures when the temperature
in the garage is 608F (15.68C).
Example:
Tire size: P205/55R16 89V and
P205/50R17 88V
Standard tire pressures:
Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)
Outside
temperature
Adjusted pressure
[psi (kPa, kgf/cm
2
)]
Front Rear
308F(−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)
108F(−128C)
38
(265, 2.65)
37
(255, 2.55)
−108F(−238C) 40 (280, 2.8)
39 (270, 2.7)
If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates when you drive the vehicle in
cold outside air after adjusting the tire
pressures in a warm garage, re-adjust the
tire pressures using the method described
above. Then, increase the vehicle speed
to at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check to
see that the low tire pressure warning light
turns off a few minutes later. If the low tire
pressure warning light does not turn off,
the tire pressure monitoring system may
not be functioning normally. In this event,
go to a SUBARU dealer to have the
system inspected as soon as possible.
While the vehicle is driven, friction be-
tween tires and the road surface causes
the tires to warm up. After illumination of
the low tire pressure warning light, any
increase in the tire pressures caused by
an increase in the outside air temperature
or by an increase in the temperature in the
tires can cause the low tire p ressure
warning light to turn off.
System resetting is necessary when the
wheels are changed (for example, a
switch to snow tires) and new TPMS
valves are installed on the newly fitted
wheels. Have this work performed by a
SUBARU dealer following wheel replace-
ment.
It may not be possible to install TPMS
valves on certain wheels that are on the
market. Therefore, if you change the
wheels (for example, a switch to snow
tires), use wheels that have the same part
number as the standard-equipment
wheels. Without four operational TPMS
valve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMS
will not fully function and the warning light
on the combination meter will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approximately
one minute.
When a tire is replaced, adjustments are
necessary to ensure continued normal
operation of the tire pressure monitoring
system. As with wheel replacement, there-
fore, you should have the work performed
by a SUBARU dealer.
WARNING
If the low tire pressure warning light
does not illuminate briefly after the
ignition switch is turned ON or the
light illuminates steadily after blink-
ing for approximately one minute,
you should have your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System checked at a
SUBARU dealer as soon as possi-
ble.
If this light illuminates while driving,
never brake suddenly and keep
driving straight ahead while gradu-
ally reducing speed. Then slo wly
pull off the road to a safe place.
Otherwise an accident involving
serious vehicle damage and serious
personal injury could occur.
If this light still illuminates while
driving after adjusting the tire pres-
sure, a tire may have significant
damage and a fast leak that causes
the tire to lose air rapidly. If you have
11-22
Black plate (533,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire
as soon as possible.
When a spare tire is mounted or a
wheel rim is replaced without the
original pressure sensor/transmitter
being transferred, the low tire pres-
sure warning light will illuminate
steadily after blinking for approxi-
mately one minute. This indicates
the TPMS is unable to monitor all
four road wheels. Contact your
SUBARU dealer as soon as possible
for tire and sensor replacement and/
or system resetting. If the light
illuminates steadily after blinking
for approximately one minute,
promptly contact a SUBARU dealer
to have the system inspected.
& Tire inspection
Check on a daily basis that the tires are
free from serious damage, nails, and
stones. At the same time, check the tires
for abnormal wear.
Contact your SUBARU dealer immedi-
ately if you find any problem.
NOTE
. When the wheels and tires strike
curbs or are subjected to harsh treat-
ment as when the vehicle is driven on a
rough surface, they can suffer damage
that cannot be seen with the naked eye.
This type of damage does not become
evident until time has passed. Try not
to drive over curbs, potholes or on
other rough surfaces. If doing so is
unavoidable, keep the vehicle’s speed
down to a walking pace or less, and
approach the cu rbs as squarely as
possible. Also, make sure the tires are
not pressed against the curb when you
park the vehicle.
. If you feel unusual vibration while
driving or find it difficult to steer the
vehicle in a straight line, one of the
tires and/or wheels may be damaged.
Drive slowly to the nearest authorized
SUBARU dealer and have the vehicle
inspected.
& Tire pressures and wear
Maintaining the correct tire pressures
helps to maximize the tires’ service lives
and is essential for good running perfor-
mance. Check and, if necessary, adjust
the pressure of each tire (including the
spare - if equipped) at least once a month
(for example, during a fuel stop) and
before any long journey.
Tire placard
Check the tire pressures when the tires
are cold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust
the tire pressures to the values shown on
the tire placard. The tire placard is located
on the door pillar on the driver’s side.
Driving even a short distance warms up
the tires and increases the tire pressures.
Also, the tire pressures are affected by the
outside temperature. It is best to check tire
pressure outdoors before driving the
vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air inside
it expands, causing the tire pressure to
increase. Be careful not to mistakenly
release air from a warm tire to reduce its
pressure.
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
– CONTINUED –
11-23
11
Black plate (534,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
NOTE
. The air pressure in a tire increases
by approximately 4.3 psi (30 kPa, 0.3
kgf/cm
2
) when the tire becomes warm.
. The tires are considered cold when
the vehicle has been parked for at least
three hours or has been driven less
than one mile (1.6 km).
WARNING
Do not let air out of warm tires to
adjust pressure. Doing so will result
in low tire pressure.
Incorrect tire pressures detract from con-
trollability and ride comfort, and they
cause the tires to wear abnormally.
. Correct tire pressure (tread worn
evenly)
Roadholding is good, and steering is
responsive. Rolling resistance is low, so
fuel consumption is also lower.
. Abnormally low tire pressure (tread
worn at shoulders)
Rolling resistance is high, so fuel con-
sumption is also higher.
11-24
Black plate (535,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
. Abnormally high tire pressure (tread
worn in center)
Ride comfort is poor. Also, the ti re
magnifies the effects of road-surface
bumps and dips, possibly resulting in
vehicle damage.
If the tire placard shows tire pressures for
the vehicle when fully loaded, adjust the
tire pressures to the values that match
current loading conditions.
WARNING
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to deform severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and destruction of
the tires. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
& Wheel balance
Each wheel was correctly balanced when
your vehicle was new, but the wheels will
become unbalanced as the tires become
worn during use. Wheel imbalance causes
the steering wheel to vibrate slightly at
certain vehicle speeds and detracts from
the vehicle’s straight-line stability. It can
also cause steering and suspension sys-
tem problems and abnormal tire wear. If
you suspect that the wheels are not
correctly balanced, have them checked
and adjusted by your SUBARU dealer.
Also have them adjusted after tire repairs
and after tire rotation.
CAUTION
Loss of correct wheel alignment
causes the tires to wear on one side
and reduces the vehicle’s running
stability. Contact your SUBARU
dealer if you notice abnormal tire
wear.
NOTE
The suspension system is designed to
hold each wheel at a certain alignment
(relative to the other wheels and to the
road) for optimum straight-line stability
and cornering performance.
& Wear indicators
1) New tread
2) Worn tread
3) Tread wear indicator
Each tir e incorpora tes a tread wear
indicator, which becomes visible when
the depth of the tread grooves decreases
to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). A tire must be
replaced when the tread wear indicator
appears as a solid band across the tread.
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
– CONTINUED –
11-25
11
Black plate (536,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
WARNING
When a tire’s tread wear indicator
becomes visible, the tire is worn
beyond the acceptable limit and
must be replaced immediately. With
a tire in this condition, driving at
high speeds in wet weather can
cause the vehicle to hydroplane.
The resulting loss of vehicle control
can lead to an accident.
NOTE
For safety, inspect tire tread regularly
and replace the tires before their tread
wear indicators become visible.
& Tire rotation direction mark
Example of tire rotation direction mark
1) Front
If the tire has the rotation directi on
specification, the tire rotation direction
mark is placed on its sidewall.
When you install a tire that has the tire
rotation direction mark, install the tire with
the direction mark facing forward.
& Tire rotation
Ve hicles equipped with 4 non-unidirec-
tional tires
1) Front
Vehicles equipped with unidirectional tires
1) Front
11-26
Black plate (537,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Tire wear varies from wheel to wheel.
Move the tires to the positions shown in
the illustration each time they are rotated.
For the tire rotation schedule, refer to the
“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet ” .
Replace any damaged or unevenly worn
tires at the time of rotation. After tire
rotation, adjust the tires pressures and
make sure the wheel nuts are correctly
tightened.
After driving approximately 600 miles
(1,000 km), check the wheel nuts again
and retighten any nut that has become
loose.
& Tire replacement
The wheels and tires are important and
integral parts of your vehicle’s design;
they cannot be changed arbitrarily. The
tires fitted as standard equipment are
optimally matched to the characteristics
of the vehicle and were selected to give
the best possible combination of running
performance, ride comfort, and service
life. It is essential for every tire to have a
size and construction matching those
shown on the tire placard and to have a
speed symbol and load index matching
those shown on the tire placard.
Using tires of a non-specified size detracts
from controllability, ride comfort, braking
performance, speedometer accuracy and
odometer accuracy. It also creates incor-
rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-
priately changes the vehicle’s ground
clearance.
All four tires must be the same in terms of
manufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-
struction, and size. You are advised to
replace the tires with new ones that are
identical to those fitted as standard equip-
ment.
For safe vehi cle operation, SUBARU
recommends replacing all four tires at
the same time.
WARNING
. When replacing or installing tire
(s), all four tires must be the
same for following items.
(a) Size
(b) Circumference
(c) Speed symbol
(d) Load index
(e) Construction
(f) Manufacturer
(g) Brand (tread pattern)
(h) Degrees of wear
For the items (a) to (d), you must
obey the specification that is
printed on the tire placard. The
tire placard is located on the
driver’s door pillar.
If all of four tires are not the same
for items (a) to (h), serious me-
chanical damage could occur to
the drive train of your car, and
affect the following.
— Ride
— Handling
— Braking
— Speedometer/Odometer
calibration
— Clearance between the body
and tires
It also may be dangerous and
lead to loss of vehicle control,
and it can lead to an accident.
. Use only radial tires. Do not use
radial tires together with belted
bias tires and/or bias-ply tires.
Doing so can dangerously re-
duce controllability, resulting in
an accident.
Maintenance and service/Tires and wheels
– CONTINUED –
11-27
11
Black plate (538,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance and service/Aluminum wheels
& Wheel replacement
When replacing wheels due, for example,
to damage, make sure the replacement
wheels match the specifications of the
wheels that are fitted as standard equip-
ment. Replacement wheels are available
from SUBARU dealers.
WARNING
Use only those w heels that a re
specified for your vehicle. Wheels
not meeting specifications could
interfere with brake caliper opera-
tion and may cause the tires to rub
against the wheel well housing dur-
ing turns. The resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
NOTE
When any of the wheels are removed
and replaced for tire rotation or for any
other reason, always check the tight-
ness of the wheel nuts after driving
approximately 600 miles (1,000 km). If
any nut is loose, tighten it to the
specified torque.
Aluminum wheels
Aluminum wheels can be scratched and
damaged easily. Handle them carefully to
maintain their appearance, performance,
and safety.
. When any of the wheels are removed
and replaced for tire rotation or to change
a flat tire, always check the tightness of
the wheel nuts after driving approximately
600 miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,
tighten it to the specified torque.
. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,
wheel nuts, or tapered surface of the
wheel.
. Never let the wheel rub against sharp
protrusions or curbs.
. When wheel nuts, balance weights, or
the center cap is replaced, be sure to
replace them with genuine SUBARU parts
designed for aluminum wheels.
Windshield washer fluid
Windshield washer fluid warning light
(type A)
Windshield washer fluid warning light
(type B)
11-28
Black plate (539,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
When there is only a small amount of
washer flu id remaining, the windshield
washer fluid warning light will illuminate.
When this occurs, refill the washer fluid.
& Adding the windshield
washer fluid
CAUTION
Never use engine coolant as washer
fluid because it could cause paint
damage.
Remove the washer tank filler cap, then
add windshield washer fluid until it
reaches the “FULL” mark on the tank.
& Windshield washer fluid
Use windshield washer fluid. If windshield
washer fluid is unavailable use clean
water.
In areas where water freezes in winter,
use an anti-freeze type windshield washer
fluid. SUBARU Windshield Washer Fluid
contains 58.5% methyl alcohol and 41.5%
surfactant, by volume. Its freezing tem-
perature varies according to how much it
is diluted, as indicated in the following
table.
Washer Fluid
Concentration
Freezing
Temperature
30%
10.48F(−128C)
50% −48F(−208C)
100% −498F(−458C)
In order to prevent freezing of washer
fluid, check the freezing temperatures in
the table above when adjusting the fluid
concentration to the outside temperature.
If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid with
a different concentration from the one
used previously, purge the old fluid from
the piping between the reservoir tank and
washer nozzles by operating the washer
for a certain period of time. Otherwise, if
the concentration of the fluid remaining in
the piping is to o low for the outside
temperature, it may freeze and block the
nozzles.
CAUTION
. Adjust the washer fluid concen-
tration appropriately for the out-
side temperature. If the concen-
tration is inappropriate, sprayed
washer fluid may freeze on the
windshield and obstruct your
view, and the fluid may freeze in
the reservoir tank.
. State or local regulations on
volatile organic compounds may
restrict the use of methanol, a
common windshield washer anti-
freeze additive . Washer fluids
containing non-methanol anti-
freeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging
your vehicle’s paint, wiper blades
or washer system.
Maintenance and service/Windshield washer fluid
11-29
11
Black plate (540,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades
Replacement of wiper blades
Grease, wax, insects, or other material on
the windshield or the wiper blade results in
jerky wiper operation and streaking on the
glass. If you cannot remove the streaks
after operating the windshield washer or if
the wiper operation is jerky, clean the
outer surface of the windshield (or rear
window) and the wiper blades using a
sponge or soft cloth with a neutral
detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After
cleaning, rinse the windshield and wiper
blades with clean water. The windshield is
clean if beads do not form when you rinse
the windshield with water.
CAUTION
. Do not clean the wiper blades
with gasoline or a solvent, such
as paint thinner or benzine. This
will cause d eterioration of th e
wiper blades.
. While removing the wiper blades
from the wiper arms, do not
return the wiper arms to the
original posi tions. Otherwise,
the windshield surface may be
scratched.
. When returning the raised wiper
arms to the original positions,
carefully return the wiper arms
on the windshield by hand. You
should not return the wiper arms
to the windshield only by the
return spring. Otherwise, the wi-
per arms may be deformed and/
or the windshield surface may be
scratched.
If you cannot eliminate the streaking even
after following this method, replace the
wiper blades using the following proce-
dures.
& Windshield wiper blade as-
sembly
1. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.
1) Stopper
2. Remove the wiper blade assembly by
holding its pivot area and pushing it in the
direction shown by the arrow while de-
pressing the wiper blade stopper.
3. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
11-30
Black plate (541,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Windshield wiper blade rub-
ber
1) Metal support
1. Grasp the locked end of the blade
rubber assembly and pull it firmly until the
stoppers on the rubber are free of the
metal support.
1) Metal spines
2. If the new blade rubber is not provided
with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and
install them in the new blade rubber.
3. Align the claws of the metal support
with the grooves in the rubber and slide
the blade rubber assembly into the metal
support until it locks.
1) Stopper
4. Be sure to position the claws at the
end of the metal support between the
stoppers on the rubber as shown. If the
rubber is not retained properly, the wiper
blade may scratch the windshield.
Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades
– CONTINUED –
11-31
11
Black plate (542,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades
& Rear window wiper blade
assembly
1. Raise the wiper arm off the rear
window.
2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-
terclockwise.
3. Pull the wiper blade assembly toward
you to remove it from the wiper arm.
4. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
5. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
& Rear window wiper blade
rubber
1. Pull out the end of the blade rubber
assembly to unlock it from the plastic
support.
11-32
Black plate (543,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out of
the plastic support.
1) Metal spines
3. If the new blade rubber is not provided
with two metal spines, remove the metal
spines from the old blade rubber and
install them in the new blade rubber.
4. Align the claws of the plastic support
with the grooves in the blade rubber
assembly, then slide the blade rubber
assembly into place.
Securely retain both ends of the rubber
with the stoppers on the plastic support
ends. If the rubber is not retained properly,
the wiper may scratch the rear window
glass.
5. Install the wiper blade assembly to the
wiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.
6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowly
lower it in position.
Maintenance and service/Replacement of wiper blades
11-33
11
Black plate (544,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance and service/Battery
Battery
WARNING
. Before beginning work on or near
any battery, be sure to extinguish
all cigarettes, matches, and light-
ers. Never expose a battery to an
open flame or electric sparks.
Batteries give off a gas which is
highly flammable and explosive.
. For safety, in case an explosion
does occur, wear eye protection
or shield your eyes when work-
ing near any battery. Never lean
over a battery.
. Do not let battery fluid contact
eyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-
cause battery fluid is a corrosive
acid. If battery fluid gets on your
skin or in your eyes, immediately
flush the area with water thor-
oughly. Seek medical help imme-
diately if acid has entered the
eyes.
If battery fluid is accidentally
swallowed, immediately drink a
large amount of milk or water,
and seek medical attention im-
mediately.
. To lessen the risk of spark s,
remove rings, metal watchbands,
and other metal jewelry. Never
allow metal tools to contact the
positive battery terminal and any-
thing connected to it WHILE you
are at the same time in contact
with any other metallic portion of
the vehicle because a short cir-
cuit will result.
. Keep everyone including children
away from the battery.
. Charge the battery in a well-
ventilated area.
. Battery posts, terminals and re-
lated accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the
State of California to cause can-
cer.
Wash hands after handling
.
1) Cap
2) Upper level
3) Lower level
It is unnecessary to periodically check the
battery fluid level or periodically refill with
distilled water.
However, if the battery fluid level is below
the lower level, remove the cap. Fill to the
upper level with distilled water.
CAUTION
Never use more than 10 amperes
when charging the battery because
it will shorten battery life.
11-34
Black plate (545,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Fuses
CAUTION
Never replace a fuse with one hav-
ing a higher rating or with material
other than a fuse because serious
damage or a fire could result.
The fuses are designed to melt during an
overload to prevent damage to the wiring
harness and electrical equipment. The
fuses are located in two fuse boxes.
One is located under the instrument panel
behind the fuse box cover on the driver ’s
seat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.
1) Spare fuses
The other one (main fuse box) is housed
in the engine compartment. Also, the
spare fuses are stored in the fuse box
cover.
The fuse puller is stored in the main fuse
box in the engine compartment.
1) Good
2) Blown
If any lights, accessories or other electrical
controls do not operate, inspect the
corresponding fuse. If a fuse has blown,
replace it.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/
“OFF” position and turn off all electrical
accessories.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Determine which fuse may be blown.
Look at the back side of each fuse box
cover and refer to “Fuses and circuits”
F12-10.
Maintenance and service/Fuses
– CONTINUED –
11-35
11
Black plate (546,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance and service/Installation of accessories
4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.
5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,
replace it with a spare fuse of the same
rating.
6. If the same fuse blows again, this
indicates that its system has a problem.
Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.
Installation of accessories
Always consult your SUBARU dealer
before installing fog lights or any other
electrical equipment in your vehicle. Such
accessories may cause the electronic
system to malfunction if they are incor-
rectly installed or if they are not suited for
the vehicle.
Replacing bulbs
WARNING
Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing bulbs,
turn off the lights and wait until the
bulbs cool down. Otherwise, there is
a risk of sustaining a burn injury.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire. For the specified
wattage of each bulb, refer to “Bulb
chart” F12-14.
& Headlights (models with HID
headlights)
WARNING
High-intensity-discharge (HID) bulbs
are used for the low beams of the
headlights. These HID bulbs use an
extremely high voltage. To avoid the
risk of an electric shock that could
result in serious injury, observe the
11-36
Black plate (547,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
following precautions.
. Do not replace any h eadlight
bulbs (both low beam and high
beam) by yourself.
. Do not remove/restore the head-
light assemblies by yourself.
. Do not remove any headlight-
assembly components by your-
self.
For replacement, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
& Headlights (models without
HID headlights)
CAUTION
Halogen hea dlig ht bu lb s bec ome
very hot while in use. If you touch
the bulb surface with bare hands or
greasy gloves, fingerprints or
grease on the bulb surface will
develop into hot spots, causing the
bulb to break. If there are finger
prints or grease on the bulb surface,
wipe them away with a soft cloth
moistened with alcohol.
NOTE
. If headlight aiming is required, con-
sult your SUBARU dealer for proper
adjustment of the headlight aim.
. It may be difficult to replace the
bulbs. Have the bulbs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
Perform the following steps to replace the
bulbs.
Right-hand side
1. Use a screwdriver to undo the clips on
the air intake duct, then remove the air
intake duct (right-hand side).
Left-hand side
2. Use a screwdriver to remove the
secured clip of the washer tank. To make
it easy to access the bulb, turn the neck of
the washer fluid filler pipe as illustrated
(left-hand side).
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
– CONTINUED –
11-37
11
Black plate (548,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
1) Low beam bulb
2) High beam bulb
3. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb and remove the bulb from
the headlight assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Replace the bulb with new one. At this
time , use care not to touch the bulb
surface.
5. To install the bulb to the headlight
assembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Install the air intake duct with clips
(right-hand side).
8. Set the washer fluid filler pipe to the
original place and secure it by clip (left-
hand side).
& Front turn signal light
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer if necessary.
& Parking light
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer if necessary.
& Front fog light (if equipped)
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARU
dealer if necessary.
& Rear combination lights
! 4-door models
1. Remove the clips from the trunk trim
with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Open the rear portion of the trunk trim
11-38
Black plate (549,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
panel as illustrated.
NOTE
Make sure that the “*” part of the trunk
trim in the illustration does not contact
the trunk lid stay. If the “
*” part is bent,
the trunk trim may be torn.
1) Stop light/Tail and rear side marker light
2) Rear turn signal light
3) Backup light
3. Remove the bulb socket from the rear
combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
5. Set the bulb socket into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
6. Secure the rear trunk trim panel with
the clips.
! 5-door models
1. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove
the upper and lower screws that secure
the rear combination light assembly.
2. Slide the rear combination light as-
sembly rearward and remove it from the
vehicle.
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
– CONTINUED –
11-39
11
Black plate (550,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
1) Rear side marker light
2) Rear turn signal light
3) Backup light
4) Stop light/Tail light
3. Remove the bulb socket from the rear
combination light assembly by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket and
replace it with a new one.
5. Set the bulb socket into the rear
combination light assembly and turn it
clockwise until it locks.
1) Guide pins
2) Catch
3) Clip
6. Put the rear combination light assem-
bly into place while aligning the 2 guide
pins and a catch with the guide holes and
a clip on the vehicle.
7. Tighten the upper and lower screws.
11-40
Black plate (551,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& License plate light
! 4-door models
1. Open the trunk and remove the clips
from the trunk lid trim with a flat-head
screwdriver.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and pull out the socket.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the bulb socket and the trunk
lid trim.
! 5-door models
1. License plate light must be pushed
inwards, then pulled out to be removed.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and pull out the socket.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the bulb socket and the
license plate light cover.
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
– CONTINUED –
11-41
11
Black plate (552,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance and service/Replacing bulbs
& Map light
! Type A
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Turn the bulb until the flat surfaces at
its ends are aligned vertically. Pull the bulb
straight downward to remove it.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
! Type B
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
& Dome light and cargo area
light
Dome light
Cargo area light
1. Remove the lens by prying the edge of
11-42
Black plate (553,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
the lens with a flat-head screwdriver.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the lens.
& Trunk light
1. Remove the cover by squeezing its
sides and pulling it.
2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
3. Install a new bulb.
4. Reinstall the cover.
& Other bulbs
It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.
Have the b ulbs replaced by your
SUBARU dealer if necessary.
Replacing key battery
The access key / transmitter battery may
be discharged under the following condi-
tions.
. The operation of the keyless access
function is unstable
. The operating distance of the remote
keyless entry system is unstable
. The transmitter does not operate prop-
erly when used within the standard dis-
tance
Replace the battery with a new one.
& Safety precautions
CAUTION
. Do not let dust, oil or water get on
or in the access key/transmitter
when replacing battery.
. Be careful not to touch or da-
mage the printed circuit board in
the access key/transmitter when
replacing the battery.
. Be careful not to allow children to
touch the battery and any re-
moved parts; children could
swallow them.
. There is a danger of an explosion
if the battery is incorrectly re-
placed. Replace onl y with the
same or equivalent type of the
battery.
. Batteries should not be exposed
to excessive heat such as bright
sunlight, fire or the like.
NOTE
. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type of battery recom-
mended by the manufacturer.
. Dispose of used batteries according
to local laws.
. Mount the battery in the correct
orientation to prevent fluid leakage.
Be careful not to bend the terminals. It
may result in a malfunction.
. It is recommended that the battery
be replaced by a SUBARU dealer.
. Use a new battery.
. After replacing the battery, confirm
that the transmitter functions properly.
Maintenance and service/Replacing key battery
– CONTINUED –
11-43
11
Black plate (554,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Maintenance and service/Replacing key battery
& Replacing battery of access
key
CAUTION
When removing or reinstalling the
access key cover, make sure that
the plastic part does not come off or
become misaligned.
Battery: Button battery CR2032
1) Release button
2) Mechanical key
1. Take out the mechanical key.
2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyl
tape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap to
remove the cover.
3. Take out the battery using a flat-head
screwdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.
4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)
side facing upward as shown in the figure.
5. Attach the cover to the access key by
fitting the projections and recesses to-
gether.
11-44
Black plate (555,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Replacing transmitter battery
1. Open the key head using a flat-head
screwdriver.
2. Remove the transmitter case from the
key head.
3. Open the transmitter case by releasing
the hooks.
1) Negative (−) side facing up
4. Replace the old battery with a new
battery (type CR1620 or equivalent) mak-
ing sure to install the new battery with the
negative (−) side facing up.
5. Put together the transmitter case by
fitting the hooks on the case.
6. Reinstall the transmitter case in the
key head.
7. Refit the removed half of the key head.
After the battery is replaced, the trans-
mitter must be synchronized with the
remote keyless entry system’s control
unit. Press either the “
” or “ ” button
six times to synchronize the unit.
Maintenance and service/Replacing key battery
11-45
11
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (25,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Specifications ..................................................... 12-2
Dimensions........................................................ 12-2
Engine ............................................................... 12-3
Fuel ................................................................... 12-3
Engine oil .......................................................... 12-4
Manual transmission, front differential and rear
differential gear oil ........................................... 12-6
Fluids ................................................................ 12-7
Engine coolant ................................................... 12-7
Electrical system................................................ 12-7
Tires .................................................................. 12-8
Brake disc ......................................................... 12-9
Fuses and circuits ........................................... 12-10
Fuse panel located in the passenger
compartment ................................................. 12-10
Fuse panel located in the engine
compartment ................................................. 12-12
Bulb chart......................................................... 12-14
Safety precautions........................................... 12-14
Bulb chart ....................................................... 12-15
Vehicle identification ....................................... 12-17
Specifications
12
Black plate (560,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Specifications/Specifications
Specifications
These specifications are subject to change without notice.
& Dimensions
in (mm)
Item
5-door models
4-door models
Crosstrek models SPORT models Other models
Overall length 175.2 (4,450) 174.0 (4,420) 180.5 (4,585)
Overall width 70.1 (1,780) 68.5 (1,740)
Overall height 63.6 (1,615) 59.4 (1,510) 57.7 (1,465)
Wheel base 103.7 (2,635) 104.1 (2,645)
Tread
Front 60.0 (1,525) 59.4 (1,510)
Rear 60.0 (1,525) 59.6 (1,515)
Ground clearance* 8.7 (220)
5.7 (145)
*: Measured with vehicle empty
12-2
Black plate (561,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Engine
Engine model
FB20
(2.0 L, DOHC, non-turbo)
Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke gasoline engine
Displacement cu-in (cc) 121.7 (1,995)
Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.31 6 3.54 (84.0 6 90.0)
Compression ratio 10.5 : 1
Firing order
1 – 3 – 2 – 4
& Fuel
Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity
Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher
Except Crosstrek models 14.5 US gal (55 liters, 12.1 Imp gal)
Crosstrek models
15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)
For more details, refer to “Fuel” F7-3.
Specifications/Specifications
– CONTINUED –
12-3
12
Black plate (562,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Specifications/Specifications
& Engine oil
For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine oil” F11-8.
NOTE
The procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommended
that you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.
! Approved engine oil
Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.
If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.
12-4
Black plate (563,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Alternative engine oil
If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.
NOTE
Each quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the
temperature and other factors.
Oil grade
SAE viscosity No. and
applicable temperature
Engine oil capacity
API (American Petroleum Insti-
tute) classification SN with the
words “RESOURCE CONSER-
VING”
or
ILSAC (International Lubricant
Specification Advisory Commit-
tee) GF-5, which can be identi-
fied with the ILSAC certification
mark (Starburst mark)
0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oil
for optimum engine performance and
protection. Conventional oil may be
used if synthetic oil is unavailable.
*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available,
5W-30 or 5W-40 conventional oil may
be used if replenishment is needed but
should be changed to 0W-20 synthetic
oil at the next oil change.
– Adding the oil from low level to
full level:
1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)
– Changing the oil and oil filter:
5.1 US qt (4.8 liters, 4.2 Imp qt)
Specifications/Specifications
– CONTINUED –
12-5
12
Black plate (564,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Specifications/Specifications
& Manual transmission, front differential and rear differential gear oil
Oil Manual transmission oil
Front differential gear oil (CVT
models)
Rear differential gear oil
Oil grade
. SUBARU Extra MT*
3
. API classification GL-5
(75W-90)*
4
. SUBARU Extra MT*
3
. API classification GL-5
(75W-90)
API classification GL-5
SAE viscosity No.
and applicable tem-
perature
—
. 75W-90*
. 90
*: Recommended
Oil capacity*
1
3.7 US qt (3.5 liters, 3.1 Imp qt) 1.3 US qt (1.2 liters, 1.1 Imp qt) 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)
Remarks*
2
“Manual transmission oil” F11-
14
“Front differential gear oil (CVT
models)” F11-15
“Rear differential gear oil” F11-15
*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.
*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this type of oil.
*4: You may use this type of manual transmission oil. However, using this type of oil will detract from driveability and fuel efficiency.
12-6
Black plate (565,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Fluids
Fluid
Fluid type*
1
Fluid capacity*
2
Remarks*
3
Continuously variable transmission
fluid (CVT models)
Consult your SUBARU dealer. 12.6 US qt (11.9 liters, 10.5 Imp qt)
“Continuously variable trans-
mission fluid” F11-15
Brake fluid
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4
brake fluid
–“Brake fluid” F11-16
Clutch fluid (MT models)
FMVSS No. 116, fresh DOT 3 or DOT 4
brake fluid
–
“Clutch fluid (MT models)” F11-
17
*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.
*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors.
*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.
& Engine coolant
Vehicle model Coolant capacity Coolant type
MT models 8.5 US qt (8.0 liters, 7.0 Imp qt)
SUBARU Super Coolant
CVT models
8.9 US qt (8.4 liters, 7.4 Imp qt)
The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other
factors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Cooling system” F11-10.
& Electrical system
Battery type 55D23L
Alternator 12V-130A
Spark plugs
SILZKAR7B11 (NGK)
Specifications/Specifications
– CONTINUED –
12-7
12
Black plate (566,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Specifications/Specifications
& Tires
! U.S.-spec. models and Canada-spec. models
Tire size P195/65R15 89H P205/55R16 89V P205/50R17 88V P225/55R17 95H
Wheel size
15 6 6J 166 6
1
/
2
J
17 6 7 JJ*
1
17 6 7J*
2
17 6 7J
Pressure Front
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
CVT models 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
)
MT models 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
) 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm
2
)
CVT models 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
MT models 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm
2
)
Temporary
spare tire
Size T135/80 D16 T145/90 D16
Pressure 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Wheel nut tightening
torque
89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*
3
*1: “SPORT” and “SPORT-Ltd” models
*2: Other vehicle models
*3: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel
nuts by yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening
procedure, refer to “Changing a flat tire” F 9-6.
12-8
Black plate (567,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Other models
Tire size P205/55R16 89V P205/50R17 88V 225/55R17 97V
Wheel size
16 6 6 1/2 J 17 6 7J 176 7J
Pressure Front
35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
)
Rear
33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm
2
) 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm
2
) 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm
2
)
Temporary spare
tire
Size P205/55R16 P205/50R17 185/65R17
Pressure 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm
2
) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
) 42 psi (290 kPa, 3.0 kgf/cm
2
)
Wheel nut tightening torque
73.8 lbf·ft (100 N·m, 10.2 kgf·m)
& Brake disc
If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and the method for measuring them, we recommend that you consult
your SUBARU dealer.
Specifications/Specifications
12-9
12
Black plate (568,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Specifications/Fuses and circuits
Fuses and circuits
& Fuse panel located in the passenger compartment
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
1 20A
. Trailer hitch connector
2 15A —
3 15A
. Door locking
4 10A
. Front wiper deicer relay
5 10A
. Combination meter
. Clock
6 7.5A
. Remote control rear
view mirrors
. Seat heater relay
7 15A
. Combination meter
. Integrated unit
8 10A
. Stop light
9 15A
. Front wiper deicer
10 7.5A
. Power supply (battery)
11 7.5A
. Turn signal unit
12 15A
. Transmission control
unit
. Engine control unit
. Integrated unit
13 20A
. Accessory power outlet
(center console)
. AC110V (If installed)
14 15A
. Parking light
. Tail light
. Rear combination light
12-10
Black plate (569,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
15 10A
. Luggage light
. Clock
16 7.5A
. Illumination
17 15A
. Seat heaters
18 10A
. Backup light
19 7.5A
. Power window relay
. Radiator main fan relay
20 10A
. Accessory power outlet
(instrument panel)
21 10A
. Starter relay
22 7.5A
. Air conditioner
. Rear window defogger
relay coil
23 Empty
24 10A
. Audio unit
. Clock
25 15A
. SRS airbag system
26 Empty
27 15A
. Blower fan
28 15A
. Blower fan
29 15A
. Fog light
30 Empty
31 7.5A
. Auto air conditioner unit
. Integrated unit
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
32 7.5A
. Clutch switch
. Steering lock control
unit
33 7.5A
. Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol unit
Specifications/Fuses and circuits
– CONTINUED –
12-11
12
Black plate (570,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Specifications/Fuses and circuits
& Fuse panel located in the engine compartment
A) Main fuse
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
1 30A
. ABS unit
. Vehicle Dynamics Con-
trol unit
2 25A
. Main fan (cooling fan)
3 25A
. Sub fan (cooling fan)
4
Empty
5
Empty
6
30A
. Headlight (low beam)
7
15A
. Headlight (high beam)
8 20A
. Back-up
9 15A
. Horn
10 25A
. Rear window defogger
. Mirror heater
11 15A
. Fuel pump
12 20A
. Continuously variable
transmission control unit
13 7.5A
. Engine control unit
14 15A
. Turn and hazard warn-
ing flasher
15 15A
. Tail and illumination re-
lay
16 7.5A
. Alternator
12-12
Black plate (571,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Fuse
panel
Fuse
rating
Circuit
17 Empty
18 10A
. Telematics
19 15A
. Headlight (low beam –
right hand)
20 15A
. Headlight (low beam –
left hand)
Specifications/Fuses and circuits
12-13
12
Black plate (572,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Specifications/Bulb chart
Bulb chart
& Safety precautions
WARNING
. Bulbs may become very hot while
illuminated. Before replacing
bulbs, turn off the lights and wait
until the bulbs cool down. Other-
wise, there is a risk of sustaining
a burn injury.
. For models with HID low beam
headlights, observe the following
precautions. Not doing so carries
the risk of an electric shock that
could result in serious injury
because the HID bulbs use an
extremely high voltage.
– Do not replace any headlight
bulbs (both low beam and
high beam) by yourself.
– Do not remove/restore the
headlight assemblies by your-
self.
– Do not remove any headlight-
assembly components by
yourself.
For replacement, contact your
SUBARU dealer.
CAUTION
Replace any bulb only with a new
bulb of the specified wattage. Using
a bulb of different wattage could
result in a fire.
12-14
Black plate (573,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
& Bulb chart
NOTE
Lights A, B and C are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.
Specifications/Bulb chart
– CONTINUED –
12-15
12
Black plate (574,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Specifications/Bulb chart
Wattage Bulb No.
1) High beam headlight 12V-60W HB3
2) Low beam headlight
Models with HID light 12V-35W D2R
Models with halogen light 12V-55W H11
3)
Map light 12V-8W –
4)
Dome light 12V-8W –
5)
Front side marker light 12V-5W W5W
6)
Parking light 12V-5W W5W
7)
Front turn signal light 12V-21W WY21W
8)
Front fog light
Models without steering responsive fog lights system 12V-24W PSX24W
Models with steering responsive fog lights system 12V-55W H11
9)
Trunk light (4-door) 12V-5W W5W
10) Stop light/Tail and rear side marker light (4-door) 12V-21/5W W21/5W
11)
Rear turn signal light 12V-21W WY21W
12)
Backup light 12V-16W W16W
13)
License plate light 12V-5W W5W
14)
Cargo area light (5-door) 12V-5W –
15)
Rear side marker light (5-door) 12V-5W W5W
16)
Stop light/Tail light (5-door) 12V-21/5W W21/5W
A)
Side turn signal light (if equipped) ––
B)
High-mounted stop light (4-door) ––
C)
High-mounted stop light (5-door) –
–
12-16
Black plate (575,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Vehicle identification 1) Vehicle identification number (under the
floor carpet of the right-hand front seat)
2) Emission control label
3) Tire inflation pressure label
4) Certification label
5) Vehicle identification number plate
6) Model number label
7) Fuel label
8) Air conditioner label
Specifications/Vehicle identification
12-17
12
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (27,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
For U.S.A. ........................................................... 13-2
Tire information.................................................. 13-2
Tire labeling ....................................................... 13-2
Recommended tire inflation pressure.................. 13-4
Glossary of tire terminology ............................... 13-5
Tire care – maintenance and safety
practices........................................................ 13-10
Vehicle load limit – how to determine................ 13-10
Determining compatibility of tire and vehicle
load capacities ............................................... 13-13
Adverse safety consequences of overloading
on handling and stopping and on tires ........... 13-14
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit......... 13-14
Uniform tire quality grading standards .......... 13-15
Treadwear ....................................................... 13-15
Traction AA, A, B, C......................................... 13-15
Temperature A, B, C......................................... 13-15
Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.) ................... 13-16
Supplement ...................................................... 13-17
Declaration of conformity with FCC rules ......... 13-17
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
13
Black plate (580,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/For U.S.A.
For U.S.A.
The following information has been
compiled according to Code of
Federal Regulations “Title 49, Part
575”.
Tire information
& Tire labeling
Many markings (e.g. Tire size, Tire
Identification Number or TIN) are
placed on the sidewall of a tire by
tire manufacturers. These markings
can provide you with useful infor-
mation on the tire.
! Tire size
Your vehicle comes equipped with
P-Metric tire size. It is important to
understand the sizing system in
selecting the proper tire for your
vehicles. Here is a brief review of
the tire sizing system with a break-
down of its individual elements.
! P Metric
With the P-Metric system, Section
Width is measured in millimeters.
To convert millimeters into inches,
divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio
(Section Height divided by Section
Width) helps provide more dimen-
sional information about the tire
size.
Example:
(1) P = Certain tire type used on
light duty vehicles such as passen-
ger cars
(2) Section Width in millimeters
(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height
7 section width).
(4) R = Radial Construction
(5) Rim diameter in inches
! Load and Speed Rating De-
scriptions
The load and speed rating descrip-
tions will appear following the size
designation.
They provide two important facts
about the tire. First, the number
designation is its load index. Sec-
ond, the letter designation indicates
the tire’s speed rating.
13-2
Black plate (581,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Example:
(6) Load Index: A numerical code
which specifies the maximum load
a tire can carry at the speed
indicated by its speed symbol, at
maximum inflation pressure.
For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs
(600 kg), “89” means 1,278 lbs (580
kg).
WARNING
Load indices apply only to the
tire, not to the vehicle. Putting
a load rated tire on any vehicle
does not mean the vehicle can
be loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
(7) Speed Rating: An alphabetical
system describing a tire’s capability
to travel at established and prede-
termined speeds.
For example, “V” means 149 mph
(240 km/h)
WARNING
. Speed ratings apply only to
the tire, not to the vehicle.
Putting a speed rated tire on
any vehicle does not mean
the vehicle can be operated
at the tire’s rated speed.
. The speed rating is void if
the tires are worn out, da-
maged, repaired, retreaded,
or othe rwise altered from
their original condition. If
tires are repaired, re-
treaded, or otherwise al-
tered, they may not be sui-
table for original equipment
tire designed loads and
speeds.
! Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire Identification Number (TIN) is
marked on the intended outboard
sidewall. The TIN is composed of
four groups. Here is a brief review
of the TIN with a breakdown of its
individual elements.
(1) M anufacturer ’s Identification
Mark
(2) Tire Size
(3) Tire Type Code
(4) Date of Manufacture
The first two figures identify the
week, starting with “ 01” to represent
the first full week of the calendar
year; the second two figures repre-
sent the year. For example, 0101
means the 1st week of 2001.
! Other markings
The following makings are also
placed on the sidewall.
! Maximum permissible infla-
tion pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which this tire may be
inf lated. F or example, “300 kPa
(44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
– CONTINUED –
13-3
13
Black plate (582,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
! Maximum load rating
The load rating at the maximum
permissible weight load for this tire.
For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg
(1279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI)
MAX. PRESS.”
WARNING
Maximum load rating applies
only to the tire, not to the
vehicle. Putting a load rated
tire on any vehicle does not
mean the vehicle can be
loaded up to the tire’s rated
load.
! Construction typ e
Applicable construction of this tire.
For example, “TUBELESS STEEL
BELTED RADIAL”
! Construction
The generic name of each cord
material used in t he plies (both
sidewall and tread area) of this tire.
For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2
STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDE-
WALL 2 POLYESTER”
! Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG)
For details, refer to “Uniform tire
quality grading standards” F13-15
.
& Recommended tire inflation
pressure
! Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressure
For recommended cold tire inflation
pressure for your vehicle’s tires,
refer to “Tires” F12-8
.
! Vehicle placard
The vehicle placard is attached to
the driver’s side door pillar.
Example:
The vehicle placard shows original
tire size, recommended cold tire
inflation pressure on each tire at
maximum loaded vehicle weight,
seating capacity and loading infor-
mation.
! Adverse safety consequences
of under-inflation
Driving at high speeds with exces-
sively low tire pressures can cause
the tires to flex severely and to
rapidly become hot. A sharp in-
13-4
Black plate (583,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
crease in temperature could cause
tread separation, and failure of the
tire(s). Possible resulting loss of
vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
! Measuring and adjusting air
pressure to achieve proper in-
flation
Check and, if necessary, adjust the
pressure of each tire (including the
spare) at least once a month and
before any long journey. Check the
tire pressures when the tires are
cold. Use a pressure gauge to
adjust the tire pressures to the
specific values. Driving even a
short distance warms up the tires
and increases the tire pressures.
Also, the tire pressures are affected
by the outside temperature. It is
best to check tire pressure out-
doors before driving the vehicle.
When a tire becomes warm, the air
inside it expands, causing the tire
pressure to increase. Be careful not
to mistakenly release air from a
warm tire to reduce its pressure.
& Glossary of tire terminology
. Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of
those standard items which may be
replaced) of automatic transmis-
sion, power steering, power brakes,
power windows, power seats, radio,
and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-in-
stalled equipment (whether in-
stalled or not).
. Bead
The part of the tire that is made of
steel wires, wrapped or reinforced
by ply cords and that is shaped to fit
the rim.
. Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between
components in the bead.
. Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at alternate angles substantially
less than 90 degrees to the center-
line of the tread.
. Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and
sidewall rubber which, when in-
flated, bears the load.
. Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the
tread or sidewall.
. Cold tire pressure
The pressure in a tire that has been
driven less than 1 mile or has been
standing for three hours or more.
. Cord
The strands forming the plies in the
tire.
. Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent
rubber compounds.
. Cracking
Any parting within the tread, side-
wall, or inner liner of the tire
extending to cord material.
. Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight
optional engine.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
– CONTINUED –
13-5
13
Black plate (584,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
. Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and higher inflation pressure
than the corres ponding standard
tire.
. Groove
The space between two adjacent
tread ribs.
. Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside sur-
face of a tubeless tire that contains
the inflating medium within the tire.
. Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from
cord material in the carcass.
. Intended outboard sidewall
(1) The sidewall that contains a
whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that
is higher or deeper than the
same molding on the other side-
wall of the tire, or
(2) The outward facing sidewall
of an asymmetrical tire that has
a particular side that must al-
ways face outward when mount-
ing on a vehicle.
. Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufac-
turer as primarily intended for use
on lightweight trucks or multipur-
pose passenger vehicles.
. Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is
rated to carry for a given inflation
pressure.
. Maximum inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which a tire may be inflated.
. Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
. Maximum loaded vehic le weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
. Maximum permissible inflati on
pressure
The maximum cold inflation pres-
sure to which a tire may be inflated.
. Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
physical dimension requirements.
. Normal occupant weight
150 lbs (68 kg) times the number of
occupants specified in the second
column of Table 1 that is appended
to the end of this section.
. Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehi-
cle as specified in the third column
of Table 1 that is appended to the
end of this section.
. Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread,
sidewall, or innerliner that extends
to cord material.
. Outer diameter
The overall diameter of an inflated
new tire.
. Overall width
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, including elevations
due to labeling , decora tions, or
protective bands or ribs.
13-6
Black plate (585,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
. Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passen-
ger cars, multipurpose passenger
vehicles, and trucks, that have a
gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)
of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.
. Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords.
. Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound
between adjacent plies.
. Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rub-
ber, chemicals, fabric and steel or
other materials, that, when
mounted on an automotive wheel,
provides the traction and contains
the gas or fluid that sustains the
load.
. Production options weight
The combined weight of those
installed regular production options
weighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) in
excess of those standard items
which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or acces-
sory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,
heavy duty battery, and special
trim.
. Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at substantially 90 degrees to
the centerline of the tread.
. Recommended inflation pres-
sure
The cold inflation pressure recom-
mended by a vehicle manufacturer.
. Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher
loads and at higher inflation pres-
sures than the corresponding stan-
dard tire.
. Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire
and tube assembly upon which the
tire beads are seated.
. Rim diameter
Nominal diameter of the bead seat.
. Rim size designation
Rim diameter and width.
. Rim type designation
The industry of manufacturer’s des-
ignation for a rim by style or code.
. Rim width
Nominal distance betwee n rim
flanges.
. Section width
The linear distance between the
exteriors of the sidewalls of an
inflated tire, excluding elevations
due to labeling, decoration, or
protective bands.
. Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the
tread and bead.
. Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber com-
pound from the cord material in
the sidewall.
. Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for
testing, and it may be any rim listed
as appropriate for use with that tire.
. Tread
That portion of a tire that comes
into contact with the road.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
– CONTINUED –
13-7
13
Black plate (586,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
. Tread rib
A tread section running circumfer-
entially around a tire.
. Tread separation
Pulling away of the tread from the
tire carcass.
. Treadwear indicators (TWI)
The projections within the principal
grooves designed to give a visual
indication of the degrees of wear of
the tread.
. Vehicle capacity weight
The rated cargo and luggage load
plus 150 lbs (68 kg) times the
vehicle’s designated seating capa-
city.
. Vehicle maxim um load on the
tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its shar e of the maximum
loaded vehicle weight and dividing
by two.
. Vehicle normal load on the tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal oc-
cupant weight (distributed in accor-
dance with Table 1 that is ap-
pended to the end of this section)
and dividing by 2.
. Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel
and tire assembly securely during
testing.
13-8
Black plate (587,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for
various designated seating capacities
Designated seating
capacity, number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
number of occupants
Occupant distribution in a
normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4 2 2 in front.
5 through 10 3
2 in front, 1 in second
seat.
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
16 through 22 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in
fourth seat.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
– CONTINUED –
13-9
13
Black plate (588,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
& Tire care – maintenance and
safety practices
. Check on a daily basis that the
tires are free from serious damage,
nails, and stones. At the same time,
check the tires for abnormal wear.
. Inspect the tire tread regularly
and replace the tires before their
tread wear indicators become visi-
ble. When a tire’streadwear
indicator becomes visible, the tire
is worn beyond the acceptable limit
and must be replaced immediately.
With a tire in this condition, driving
at even low speeds in wet weather
can cause the vehicle to hydro-
plane. Possible resulting loss of
vehiclecontrolcanleadtoan
accident.
. To maximize the life of each tire
and ensure that the tires wear
uniformly, it is best to rotate the
tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
For information about the tire rota-
tion order, refer to “Tire rotation”
F11-26
. Replace any damaged or
unevenly worn tires at the time of
rotation. After tire rotation, adjust
the tire pressures and make sure
the wheel nuts are correctly tigh-
tened. For information about the
tightening torque and ti ghtening
sequence for the wheel nuts, refer
to “Flat tires” F9-6
.
& Vehicle load limit – how to
determine
The load capacity of your vehicle is
determined by weight, not by avail-
able cargo space. The load limit of
your vehicle is shown on the
vehicle placard at tached to the
driver’s side door pillar. Locate the
statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your
vehicle’s placard.
Thevehicleplacardalsoshows
seating capacity of your vehicle.
The total load capacity includes the
total weight of driver and all pas-
sengers and their belongings, any
cargo, any optional equipment such
as a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike
carrier, etc., and the tongue load of
a trailer. Therefore cargo capacity
can be calculated by the following
method.
Cargo capacity = Load limit − (total
weight of occupants + total weight
of optional equipment + tongue
load of a trailer (if applicable))
For information about vehicle load-
ing, refer to “Loading your vehicle”
F8-12
.
For information about towing capa-
city and weight limits, refer to
“Trailer towing (Crosstrek models)”
F8-18
.
13-10
Black plate (589,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
! Calculating total and load ca-
pacities varying seating con-
figurations
Calculate the available load capa-
city as shown in the following
examples:
Example 1A
Vehicle capacity weight of the
vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which
is indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 900 lbs or
408 kg”.
For example, if the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)
plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300
kg).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity by su btracting the total
weight from the vehicle capacity
weight of 900 lbs (408 kg).
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo can
be carried.
Example 1B
For example, if a person weighing
176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the
same vehicle (bringing the number
of occupants to two), the calcula-
tions are as follows.
1. Calculate the total weight.
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
– CONTINUED –
13-11
13
Black plate (590,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 92 lbs (42
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more.
Example 2A
Vehicle capacity weight of the
vehicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which
is indicated on the vehicle placard
with the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed 408 kg or
900 lbs”.
For example, the vehicle has one
occupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)
plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170
kg). In addition, the vehicle is fitted
with a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs
(10 kg), to which is attached a
trailer weighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg).
10% of the trailer weight is applied
to the trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue
load = 176 lbs (80 kg)).
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The result of step 2 shows that a
further 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo can
be carried.
13-12
Black plate (591,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Example 2B
For example, if a person weighing
143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing
40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the same
vehicle (bringing the number of
occupants to three), and a child
restraint system weighing 11 lbs (5
kg) is installed in the vehicle for the
child to use, the calculations are as
follows.
1. Calculate the total weight.
2. Calculate the available load ca-
pacity.
3. The total weight now exceeds
the capacity weight by 32 lbs (15
kg), so the cargo weight must be
reduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or more.
& Determining compatibility of
tire and vehicle load capaci-
ties
The sum of four tires’ maximum
load ratings must exceed the max-
imum loaded vehicle weight
(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of the
maximum load ratings of two front
tires and of two rear tires must
exceed each axle’smaximum
loaded capacity (“GAWR”). Original
equipment tires are designed to
fulfill those conditions.
The maximum loaded vehicle
weight is referred to Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). And each
axle’s maximum loaded capacity is
referred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-
ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each
axle’s GAWR are shown on the
vehicle certification label located at
the bottom of driver’s side door
pillar.
The GVWR and fr ont and rear
GAWRs are determined by not only
the maximum load rating of tires but
also loaded capacities of the vehi-
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
– CONTINUED –
13-13
13
Black plate (592,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Tire information
cle’s suspension, axles and other
parts of the body.
Therefore, this means that the
vehicle cannot necessarily be
loaded up to the tire’s maximum
load rating on the tire sidewall.
& Adverse safety conse-
quences of overloading on
handling and stopping and
on tires
Overloading could affect vehicle
handling, stopping distance, and
vehicle and tire performance in the
following ways. This could lead to
an accident and possibly result in
severe personal injury.
. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.
. Heavy and/or high-mounted
loads could increase the risk of
rollover.
. Stopping distance will increase.
. Brakes could overheat and fail.
. Suspension, bearings, axles and
other body parts could break or
experience accelerated wear that
will shorten vehicle life.
. Tires could fail.
. Tread separation could occur.
. Tire could separate from its rim.
& Steps for Determining Cor-
rect Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupant s and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passenge rs fro m
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available a mount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For exam-
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five 150
lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 − 750 (5 6 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your ve-
hicle.
13-14
Black plate (593,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Uniform tire quality grading
standards
This information indicates the rela-
tive performance of passenger car
tires in the area of t readwear,
traction, and temp erature resis-
tance. This is to aid the consumer
in making an informed choice in the
purchase of tires.
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall be-
tween tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tem-
perature A
The quality grades apply to new
pneumatic tires for use on passen-
ger cars. However, they do not
apply to deep tread, winter type
snow tires, space-saver or tempor-
ary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 12 inches
or less, or to some limited produc-
tion tires.
All passenger car tires must con-
form to Federal Saf ety Require-
ments in addition to these grades.
& Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under con-
trolled conditions on a specified
government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1-
1/2) times as well on the govern-
ment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
& Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spe-
cified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accel-
eration, cornering, hydroplan-
ing, or peak traction charac-
teristics.
& Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified indoor labora-
tory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Uniform tire quality grading standards
– CONTINUED –
13-15
13
Black plate (594,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.)
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tire s must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dards No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of perfor-
mance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire
that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or ex-
cessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possi-
ble tire failure.
Reporting safety defects
(U.S.A.)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could caus e a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately in-
form the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Subaru of
America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investiga-
tion, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehi-
cles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Subaru of
America, Inc. To contact NHTSA,
you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200
New Jersey Avenue, SE, West
Building, Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other informa-
tion about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
13-16
Black plate (595,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Supplement
& Declaration of conformity with FCC rules
! Electrostatic sensor for occupant detection system
Consumer information and Reporting safety defects/Supplement
13-17
13
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (29,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Index
14
Black plate (2,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
14-2 Index
A
Abbreviation ................................................................... 3
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ..................................... 7-32
Warning light ......................................................... 3-21
Access key ................................................................. 2-9
Warning indicator ................................................... 3-25
Accessories.............................................................. 11-36
Accessory power outlet................................................. 6-8
Air cleaner element ................................................... 11-12
Air conditioner
Automatic climate control .......................................... 4-7
Manual climate control.............................................. 4-8
Air filtration system..................................................... 4-12
Air flow mode .............................................................. 4-8
Alarm system ............................................................ 2-27
All-Wheel Drive warning light....................................... 3-23
Aluminum wheel ....................................................... 11-28
Cleaning ............................................................... 10-3
Antenna...................................................................... 5-2
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................................... 7-32
Arming the system ..................................................... 2-29
Armrest....................................................................... 1-8
Ashtray..................................................................... 6-10
AT OIL TEMP warning light ......................................... 3-19
Audio
aha
TM
by HARMAN................................................ 5-44
AM/FM radio ......................................................... 5-28
AUX..................................................................... 5-61
Base display audio set.............................................. 5-4
Basic operation...................................................... 5-18
Bluetooth audio...................................................... 5-58
CD ....................................................................... 5-53
iPod...................................................................... 5-56
Pandora
®
.............................................................. 5-50
SiriusXM Satellite Radio .......................................... 5-37
STARLINK
TM
7.0 Multimedia Plus audio set................ 5-6
Steering switches for audio ...................................... 5-63
SUBARU STARLINK............................................... 5-26
Unit setting ............................................................ 5-19
USB memory ......................................................... 5-55
Auto on/off headlights ................................................. 3-89
Auto-dimming mirror/compass .......................... 3-100, 3-102
Automatic headlight beam leveler ................................. 3-94
Warning light.......................................................... 3-31
Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency Locking
Retractor (ALR/ELR) ................................................ 1-12
B
Battery
Drainage prevention function..................................... 2-7
Jump starting ......................................................... 9-10
Replacement (access key)..................................... 11-44
Replacement (remote engine start transmitter) ........... 7-20
Replacement (transmitter)...................................... 11-45
Vehicle battery ..................................................... 11-34
Bluetooth
®
Audio .................................................................... 5-58
Hands-free phone system........................................ 5-71
Settings................................................................. 5-66
Troubleshooting...................................................... 5-89
Bluetooth
®
settings ..................................................... 5-66
Booster seat .............................................................. 1-32
Black plate (3,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Bottle holder................................................................ 6-7
Brake
Assist ................................................................... 7-31
Booster........................................................ 7-31, 11-18
Disc ..................................................................... 12-9
Fluid............................................................ 11-16, 12-7
Pad and lining ...................................................... 11-20
Parking........................................................ 7-40, 11-21
Pedal .................................................................. 11-18
System ................................................................. 7-31
Brake system ............................................................ 7-31
Warning light ......................................................... 3-21
Braking..................................................................... 7-31
Tips...................................................................... 7-31
Breaking-in of new brake pads and linings ................... 11-20
BSD/RCTA ................................................................ 7-50
Approach indicator light/warning buzzer .................... 7-54
OFF indicator ................................................ 3-32, 7-56
OFF switch ........................................................... 7-56
Warning indicator ........................................... 3-32, 7-55
Warning volume..................................................... 3-42
Bulb
Chart.................................................................. 12-14
Replacement ........................................................ 11-36
C
Cargo area
Cover ................................................................... 6-12
Light............................................................. 6-2, 11-42
Tie-down hooks ..................................................... 6-14
Catalytic converter ....................................................... 8-3
Center console............................................................ 6-6
Changing
Coolant ............................................................... 11-12
Flat tire .................................................................. 9-6
Oil and oil filter ....................................................... 11-9
Charge warning light................................................... 3-18
CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator
light ....................................................................... 3-16
Checking
Brake pedal free play ............................................ 11-18
Brake pedal reserve distance ................................. 11-18
Clutch function ..................................................... 11-19
Clutch pedal free play ........................................... 11-19
Coolant level........................................................ 11-11
Fluid level (brake fluid) .......................................... 11-16
Fluid level (clutch fluid).......................................... 11-17
Fluid level (washer fluid)........................................ 11-28
Oil level (engine oil) ................................................ 11-8
Child restraint systems ................................................ 1-25
Installation of a booster seat .................................... 1-32
Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt ............................ 1-28
Lower and tether anchorages................................... 1-33
Top tether anchorages ............................................ 1-36
Child safety ................................................................... 4
Locks.................................................................... 2-35
Chime
Key........................................................................ 3-5
Light ..................................................................... 3-89
Seatbelt................................................................. 3-14
Cigarette lighter........................................................... 6-9
Index 14-3
Black plate (4,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
14-4 Index
Cleaning
Aluminum wheels................................................... 10-3
Interior.................................................................. 10-5
Ventilation grille ..................................................... 4-11
Climate control system ................................................. 4-3
Automatic................................................................ 4-7
Manual ................................................................... 4-8
Clock................................................................ 3-37, 3-52
Clutch
Fluid.................................................................... 11-17
Pedal .................................................................. 11-19
Coat hook ................................................................. 6-11
Compass ....................................................... 3-100, 3-102
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ..................... 7-23
Fluid............................................................ 11-15, 12-7
Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ............ 3-19
Coolant............................................................ 11-11, 12-7
Temperature high warning light ................................ 3-17
Temperature low indicator light................................. 3-17
Cooling system......................................................... 11-10
Corrosion protection ................................................... 10-4
Cruise control ............................................................ 7-45
Indicator light......................................................... 3-31
Set indicator light ................................................... 3-31
Cup holder .................................................................. 6-7
D
Daytime running light system....................................... 3-92
Defogger................................................................. 3-108
Defrosting ................................................................. 4-11
Deicer .................................................................... 3-108
Differential gear oil
Front........................................................... 11-15, 12-6
Rear ........................................................... 11-15, 12-6
Dimensions................................................................ 12-2
Disarming the alarm system......................................... 2-32
Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ........................ 7-32
Dome light......................................................... 6-2, 11-42
Door
Locks..................................................................... 2-5
Open warning light.................................................. 3-23
Drive belts ............................................................... 11-14
Driving
AWD vehicles ......................................................... 8-4
Car phone/cell phone.................................................. 7
Drinking..................................................................... 6
Drugs........................................................................ 6
Foreign countries..................................................... 8-4
Off road.................................................................. 8-6
Pets.......................................................................... 7
Snowy and icy roads ............................................... 8-9
Tips ................................................. 7-23, 7-29, 8-2, 8-4
Tired or sleepy ........................................................... 6
Winter .................................................................... 8-8
E
ECO gauge ....................................................... 3-12, 3-49
Electrical system ........................................................ 12-7
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system........... 7-33
Warning ................................................................ 3-22
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ............................. 1-12
Black plate (5,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Engine
Compartment overview ........................................... 11-7
Coolant........................................................ 11-11, 12-7
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)............................. 5, 8-2
Hood .................................................................... 11-5
Low oil level warning light ....................................... 3-18
Oil................................................................ 11-8, 12-4
Overheating .......................................................... 9-13
Starting & stopping........................................... 7-9, 7-12
Event data recorder......................................................... 8
Exterior care.............................................................. 10-2
F
Flat tires ..................................................................... 9-6
Floor mat .................................................................. 6-11
Fluid level
Brake .................................................................. 11-16
Clutch.................................................................. 11-17
Continuously variable transmission.......................... 11-15
Fog light
Bulb .......................................................... 11-38, 12-14
Indicator light......................................................... 3-31
Switch .................................................................. 3-94
Front
Differential gear oil ........................................ 11-15, 12-6
Seatbelt pretensioners ............................................ 1-20
Turn signal light .................................................... 11-38
Front seats.................................................................. 1-2
Forward and backward adjustment ............................. 1-3
Head restraint adjustment ......................................... 1-5
Reclining................................................................. 1-4
Seat height adjustment............................................. 1-4
Fuel ........................................................................... 7-3
Consumption indicator............................................. 3-33
Consumption screen ............................................... 3-48
Economy hints ........................................................ 8-2
Filler lid and cap...................................................... 7-4
Gauge................................................................... 3-12
Requirements ................................................. 7-3, 12-3
Fuses ..................................................................... 11-35
Fuses and circuits .................................................... 12-10
G
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)............................... 8-13
Glove box................................................................... 6-6
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)........................... 8-13
H
Hands-free phone system............................................ 5-71
Hazard warning flasher .......................................... 3-8, 9-2
Head restraint adjustment
Front seat............................................................... 1-5
Rear seat ............................................................... 1-8
Headlight
Beam leveler.......................................................... 3-94
Bulb replacing ...................................................... 11-36
Bulb wattage........................................................ 12-14
Control switch ........................................................ 3-89
Flasher.................................................................. 3-91
Indicator light ......................................................... 3-32
Welcome lighting function ........................................ 3-90
HID headlights ...................................................... 1, 11-36
Index 14-5
Black plate (6,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
14-6 Index
High beam indicator light ............................................ 3-31
High/low beam change (dimmer).................................. 3-91
Hill start assist .................................................. 7-41, 11-19
OFF indicator light.................................................. 3-23
Warning light ......................................................... 3-22
HomeLink
®
.............................................................. 3-102
Hook
Cargo tie-down ...................................................... 6-14
Coat ..................................................................... 6-11
Shopping bag ........................................................ 6-12
Towing and tie-down............................................... 9-14
Horn........................................................................ 3-111
Hose and connections ............................................... 11-11
I
Ignition switch.............................................................. 3-4
Light....................................................................... 3-6
Illumination brightness control...................................... 3-93
Immobilizer.................................................................. 2-3
Indicator light (security indicator light) ....................... 3-30
Indicator light
BSD/RCTA OFF..................................................... 3-32
BSD/RCTA warning................................................ 3-32
Coolant temperature low ......................................... 3-17
Cruise control ........................................................ 3-31
Cruise control set................................................... 3-31
Front fog light ........................................................ 3-31
Headlight .............................................................. 3-32
High beam ............................................................ 3-31
Hill start assist OFF................................................ 3-23
Immobilizer............................................................ 3-30
Security................................................................. 3-30
Select lever/Gear position........................................ 3-30
Steering responsive fog lights OFF ........................... 3-32
Turn signal ............................................................ 3-31
Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF................................. 3-25
Vehicle Dynamics Control operation.......................... 3-24
Information display...................................................... 3-32
Inside mirror .................................................. 3-100, 3-102
Interior lights ............................................................... 6-2
Internal trunk lid release handle.................................... 2-39
J
Jack-up point .............................................................. 9-6
Jump starting ............................................................. 9-10
K
Key............................................................................ 2-3
Number plate .......................................................... 2-3
Reminder chime ...................................................... 3-5
Replacement........................................................... 2-4
Keyless access entry function ...................................... 2-13
Keyless access with push-button start system................. 2-9
Disabling keyless access functions ........................... 2-18
Locking and unlocking doors.................................... 2-13
Opening rear gate .................................................. 2-16
Opening trunk ........................................................ 2-16
Warning chimes and warning indicator ...................... 3-25
When access key does not operate properly.............. 9-18
Keyless entry system .................................................. 2-23
Black plate (7,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
L
Lap belt pretensioner.................................................. 1-22
Leather seat materials ................................................ 10-5
License plate light ..................................................... 11-41
Light
Backup ................................................................ 11-38
Cargo area.................................................... 6-2, 11-42
Control switch........................................................ 3-89
Daytime running..................................................... 3-92
Dome ........................................................... 6-2, 11-42
Front fog...................................................... 3-94, 11-38
Front side marker......................................... 3-89, 12-14
Ignition switch.......................................................... 3-6
License plate........................................................ 11-41
Map ............................................................. 6-3, 11-42
Parking................................................................ 11-38
Rear combination.................................................. 11-38
Rear side marker light ........................................... 11-38
Stop .................................................................... 11-38
Tail ...................................................................... 11-38
Trunk................................................................... 11-43
Turn signal ................................................... 3-92, 11-38
Loading your vehicle .................................................. 8-12
Low fuel warning light ................................................. 3-22
Low tire pressure warning light .................................... 3-19
Lower and tether anchorage........................................ 1-33
M
Maintenance
Precautions ........................................................... 11-3
Schedule .............................................................. 11-3
Seatbelt................................................................. 1-20
Tools...................................................................... 9-3
Malfunction indicator light (check engine warning light).... 3-16
Manual
Mode (continuously variable transmission) ................. 7-26
Transmission ......................................................... 7-22
Transmission oil ................................................... 11-14
Map light ........................................................... 6-3, 11-42
Maximum load limits ................................................... 8-19
Meters and gauges...................................................... 3-9
Mirror defogger ........................................................ 3-108
Mirrors .................................................................... 3-100
Moonroof................................................................... 2-42
Multi function display................................................... 3-42
Multi information display .............................................. 3-38
N
New vehicle break-in driving ......................................... 8-2
O
Odometer .................................................................. 3-10
Off road driving ........................................................... 8-6
Oil filter ..................................................................... 11-9
Oil level
Engine .................................................................. 11-8
Warning light.......................................................... 3-18
Oil pressure warning light ............................................ 3-18
Outside
Mirror defogger .................................................... 3-108
Mirrors ................................................................ 3-108
Temperature indicator...................................... 3-33, 3-47
Index 14-7
Black plate (8,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
14-8 Index
Overheating engine .................................................... 9-13
P
Parking
Brake ................................................................... 7-40
Brake stroke......................................................... 11-21
Light.................................................................... 11-38
Tips...................................................................... 7-40
Periodic inspections ..................................................... 8-4
Petrol fuel ................................................................... 7-3
PIN Code Access ...................................................... 2-21
Power
Door locking switch .................................................. 2-8
Outlets.................................................................... 6-8
Outside mirrors .................................................... 3-108
Steering................................................................ 7-30
Steering warning light ............................................. 3-23
Windows............................................................... 2-35
Precautions against vehicle modification ............... 1-24, 1-70
Preparing to drive ........................................................ 7-8
Push-button
Ignition switch.......................................................... 3-6
Starting and stopping engine ................................... 7-12
R
Rear
Combination lights................................................. 11-38
Differential gear oil ........................................ 11-15, 12-6
Gate............................................................. 2-41, 9-19
Turn signal light .................................................... 11-38
Rear seat.................................................................... 1-7
Armrest .................................................................. 1-8
Folding down ......................................................... 1-10
Head restraint adjustment......................................... 1-8
Rear view camera ...................................................... 6-15
How to adjust the rear view image............................ 5-25
Rear window
Defogger ............................................................. 3-108
Wiper and washer switch......................................... 3-99
Wiper blades........................................................ 11-32
Recommended
Brake fluid ............................................................. 12-7
Continuously variable transmission fluid .................... 12-7
Engine oil .............................................................. 12-4
Front differential gear oil.......................................... 12-6
Rear differential gear oil .......................................... 12-6
Spark plugs ........................................................... 12-7
Refueling.................................................................... 7-5
Remote engine start system ........................................ 7-14
Remote keyless entry system ...................................... 2-23
Replacement
Access key battery ............................................... 11-44
Air cleaner element............................................... 11-13
Brake pad and lining ............................................. 11-20
Lost transmitters (remote keyless entry system) ......... 2-26
Remote engine start transmitter battery ..................... 7-20
Remote keyless entry transmitter battery ................. 11-45
Wiper blades........................................................ 11-30
Replacing bulbs ............................................. 11-36, 12-14
Backup light......................................................... 11-38
Cargo area light ................................................... 11-42
Dome light........................................................... 11-42
Black plate (9,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Front fog light ....................................................... 11-38
Front turn signal light............................................. 11-38
Headlight ................................................... 11-36, 11-37
License plate light ................................................. 11-41
Map light.............................................................. 11-42
Parking light ......................................................... 11-38
Rear combination light ........................................... 11-38
Rear side marker light ........................................... 11-38
Rear turn signal light ............................................. 11-38
Stop light ............................................................. 11-38
Tail light ............................................................... 11-38
Trunk light............................................................ 11-43
Rocking the vehicle.................................................... 8-11
Roof molding and crossbar ......................................... 8-15
Roof rails .................................................................. 8-14
S
Safety
Precautions when driving ............................................. 4
Symbol ...................................................................... 2
Warnings ................................................................... 2
Seat
Fabric................................................................... 10-5
Front ...................................................................... 1-2
Heater .................................................................... 1-6
Rear....................................................................... 1-7
Seatbelt ................................................................. 4, 1-11
Fastening.............................................................. 1-13
Maintenance.......................................................... 1-20
Pretensioners ........................................................ 1-20
Safety tips............................................................. 1-11
Warning light and chime .......................................... 3-14
Security
Alarm system......................................................... 2-27
Immobilizer ............................................................. 2-3
Indicator light ......................................................... 3-30
Shock sensors ....................................................... 2-34
Select lever
Position indicator .................................................... 3-30
Shift lock function ................................................... 7-28
Shock sensors ........................................................... 2-34
Shopping bag hook..................................................... 6-12
Shoulder pretensioners ............................................... 1-20
Snow tires ....................................................... 8-10, 11-21
Snowy and icy roads ................................................... 8-9
Sounding a panic alarm .............................................. 2-25
Spark plugs ..................................................... 11-14, 12-7
Specifications............................................................. 12-2
Speedometer ............................................................. 3-10
SRS
Curtain airbag ........................................................ 1-58
Frontal airbag......................................................... 1-48
Side airbag ............................................................ 1-58
SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)... 4, 1-39
SRS airbag system
Monitors ................................................................ 1-67
Servicing ............................................................... 1-69
Warning light.......................................................... 3-15
Starting & stopping engine.................................... 7-9, 7-12
State emission testing (U.S. only) .................................. 7-7
Steering responsive fog lights system ........................... 3-95
OFF indicator......................................................... 3-32
Index 14-9
Black plate (10,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
14-10 Index
Steering switches for audio ......................................... 5-63
Steering wheel
Power................................................................... 7-30
Tilt/telescopic........................................................ 3-110
Stop light ................................................................. 11-38
Storage compartment ................................................... 6-5
Sun shade ................................................................ 2-44
Sun visors................................................................... 6-4
Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ................ 1-39
Synthetic leather upholstery ........................................ 10-5
T
Tachometer ............................................................... 3-11
Temperature warning light
AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-19
Coolant................................................................. 3-17
Temporary spare tire .................................................... 9-2
Tether (child restraint system) .............................. 1-33, 1-36
Tie-down hooks/holes................................................. 9-14
Tire ................................................................. 11-21, 12-8
Chains.................................................................. 8-11
Inspection ............................................................ 11-23
Pressures and wear .............................................. 11-23
Replacement ........................................................ 11-27
Rotation............................................................... 11-26
Size and pressure.................................................. 12-8
Types .................................................................. 11-21
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)....... 7-38, 9-9, 11-21
Warning light ......................................................... 3-19
Tires and wheels....................................................... 11-21
Tools .......................................................................... 9-3
Top tether anchorages ........................................ 1-33, 1-36
Towing ...................................................................... 9-14
All wheels on the ground ......................................... 9-17
Flat-bed truck......................................................... 9-16
Hooks ................................................................... 9-14
Weight .................................................................. 8-19
Trailer
Connecting ............................................................ 8-17
Hitch............................................................. 8-16, 8-22
Towing .................................................................. 8-18
Towing tips ............................................................ 8-24
Trip meter.................................................................. 3-11
Trunk lid .................................................................... 2-38
Release handle ...................................................... 2-39
Trunk light ............................................................... 11-43
Turn signal
Indicator lights........................................................ 3-31
Lever .................................................................... 3-92
U
Under-floor storage compartment.................................. 6-15
V
Valet mode ................................................................ 2-32
Vanity mirror ............................................................... 6-5
Vehicle
Capacity weight...................................................... 8-13
Identification ........................................................ 12-17
Symbols .................................................................... 3
Black plate (11,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
Vehicle Dynamics Control
OFF indicator light.................................................. 3-25
OFF switch ........................................................... 7-36
Operation indicator light .......................................... 3-24
System ................................................................. 7-34
Warning light ......................................................... 3-24
Ventilator .................................................................... 4-2
Voice command operation........................................... 5-82
W
Warning and indicator lights ........................................ 3-13
Warning chimes
Keyless access with push-button start system ........... 3-25
Seatbelt ................................................................ 3-14
Warning light
ABS ..................................................................... 3-21
Access key ........................................................... 3-25
All-Wheel Drive...................................................... 3-23
AT OIL TEMP ........................................................ 3-19
Automatic headlight beam leveler............................. 3-31
Brake system ........................................................ 3-21
Charge ................................................................. 3-18
CHECK ENGINE ................................................... 3-16
Coolant temperature high........................................ 3-17
Door open............................................................. 3-23
Engine low oil level ................................................ 3-18
Hill start assist ....................................................... 3-22
Keyless access with push-button start system ........... 3-25
Low fuel................................................................ 3-22
Low tire pressure ................................................... 3-19
Oil pressure .......................................................... 3-18
Power steering ....................................................... 3-23
Seatbelt................................................................. 3-14
SRS airbag system................................................. 3-15
Vehicle Dynamics Control........................................ 3-24
Windshield washer fluid........................................... 3-19
Warranties ..................................................................... 1
Warranties and maintenance........................................ 8-19
Washing .................................................................... 10-2
Waxing and polishing.................................................. 10-3
Wear indicators ........................................................ 11-25
Welcome lighting function ............................................ 3-90
Wheel
Aluminum ............................................................ 11-28
Balance............................................................... 11-25
Nut tightening torque............................................... 12-8
Replacement........................................................ 11-28
Windows ................................................................... 2-35
Windshield
Washer fluid......................................................... 11-28
Wiper and washer switches ..................................... 3-97
Wiper blades........................................................ 11-30
Wiper deicer ........................................................ 3-108
Winter
Driving ................................................................... 8-8
Tires ........................................................... 8-10, 11-21
Wiper and washer ...................................................... 3-96
Wiper deicer ............................................................ 3-108
Index 14-11
Black plate (2,1)
Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2007/ 6/ 22
Left Page
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————————————
Black plate (2,1)
北米Model "A1250BE-B" EDITED: 2016/ 1/ 12
GAS STATION REFERENCE
&
Fuel:
Use only unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 AKI
(90 RON) or higher.
& Fuel octane rating:
! RON
This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.
! AKI
This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and
Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti
Knock Index (AKI).
& Fuel capacity:
Except Crosstrek models: 14.5 US gal (55 liters, 12.1 Imp gal)
Crosstrek models: 15.9 US gal (60 liters, 13.2 Imp gal)
& Engine oil:
Use only the following oils.
. API classification SN with the words “RESOURCE CON-
SERVING”
. or ILSAC GF-5, which can be identified with the ILSAC
certification mark (Starburst mark)
For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine oil”
F12-4.
& Engine oil capacity:
5.1 US qt (4.8 liters, 4.2 Imp qt)
The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimated
based on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil
filter. After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be
checked using the oil level gauge. For more details about
maintenance and service, refer to “Engine oil” F11-8.
& Cold tire pressure:
Refer to “Tires” F12-8.
